HomeMy WebLinkAboutUNPLATTED TOV PUBLIC WORKS EXPANSION & RENOVATION CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANUAL 1996Tourn oC v<L\
Comr"rcfi
€r,\or.c- t^*rks &-xlaant$n 'l \?*bu\to4
C.r\€ArG\cr.\ €ro5ert fnanra\
lqqt-
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
o
TOIVN
1309 VAIL VALLEY DRI'/f
VAIL, COLORADO 8165,'
303- 479- 2158 FAX 479-2166
DEPARTMENT OF I'UBLIC WORKS/TRANSPORTATION
PUBLIC WORKS BUS MAINTENANCE BUILDING
EXPANSION AllDr RENOVATION CONSTRUCTION
TOWN OF VAIL. COLORADO
PROJECT MANUAL
APRIL 26.1996
o
SET
Town of Vail
rrrr oFFlcE coF
lllrilllnxr, DBSTcN
OF VAIL
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
r TownofVail
1309 Vail Valley Drive
Vail, Colorado 81657
(97OY19-2158
Fu< - (970)479-2166
Sucie Eet ycrt - Design Coordinator...... ..................(970)479-2444
Todd Scholf - Fleet Manager ..........(910)479-2162
Andy Knudtren - P1anner........... -,(970Y19-2138
Grcgg Barry - Iandscape Architect .......................(910)479-2337
Vail Bullding Department
Grry Monn -.. .-..(970)479-2138
Archltects
RNL Design... .,-(303)295-1717
Kris Eedbery Project lvlanager Fax - (303)292{845
Muh f,eryer, Project Architect
Local Architects
Mortar Architects ..(970)476-5105
143 East Meadow Drive
Vail. Colorado 8165?
Jim Mortar
Clvll Engineering
(970)4164710
Carter Burges... .....(303)820-5240
216 Si\lcenth Sreet Mall Fax - (303)820-2402
Suite l70O
Denver, Colorado 80202
Lois Andreroo - P.E.
Steve Long
Structural Engineering
Monroe & Newell Engineers....... ................(970)949-7768 (Avon)
0048 East Beaver Crcek Blvd. Suite 301 Fax - (970)9494054
P.O. Box 1597 Avo4 Colorado E1620
Petcr Monroe - P.E.
ilechanlcel Engineering
RNL Design..... .-..(303)295-1717
Eill Gibbr-P.E.
Electrica! Engineering
B€adin Ganze Consulting Engineen, Inc.................... ...................(970)9496108
P.O. Box 39 Fax - (970)9496159
Vail, Colorado El65E
Dcnic lt[. Beaudin - P.E
Equlp,ment Comultant
lvlaintenanc€ D€sigr Group....... .....(303)820-5270
216 l6th Street, Suite 1600 Fax - (303)820-5272
Denver, Colorado 80202
Don l*idy
Contrector
Jl Vie1e............. .....(970X76-3082
1000 South Frontage Rd. Suite 202 Fax(970)476-3423
Vail, Colorado 81657
Craig.d Bnnts
Tony Feulhaber ...............Ce11u1ar (970)401{203
RNL Proj€ct # 7554.01
l-?554.01 Directorv - I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
VAIL PUBLIC WORI$ FACILITY
PHASE tr- BUS MAINTENANCE BUILDING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROJECT DIRECTORY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
COI{DITIONS
General Conditions @eference Statement)
Supplementary Conditions
DrvrsroN l - GENERALREQUIREMENTS
01010
01020
01030
01035
01040
01045
01050
01075
01090
0l100
0l120
01200
01300
01400
01500
01580
01600
01631
01700
01710
0r720
01730
02010
02060
02070
021l0
02200
o25t3
02520
02580
02700
02810
02830
02933
02953
02955
Summary of Work
Allowances
Alternates
Modifi cation Procedures
Coordination
Cutting and Patching
Field Engineering
Specification System
Reference Standards
Special Project Procedures
Alteration Project Procedures
Project Meetings
Submittals
Qualrty Control
Temporary Facilities and Controls
Project Identifi cation Sign
Material and Equipment
Product Substitutions
Contract Closeout
Final Cleaning
Project Record Documents
Operation & Maintenance Data
DIVISION2-SITEWORK
t
I
I
I
I
Subsurface Exploration
Building Demolition
Selective Demolition
Site Clearing
Earthwork
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
Portland Cement Concrete Paving
Pavement Marking
Sewerage and Drainage
Inication Svstems
Chiin Link Fencing
Seedine
Trees, Flants and Ground Covers
Tree Relocation
t-7554.01 TOC-1
DMSION 7 - THERMAL AI.ID MOISTURE PROTECTION
DIVISION 6 - WOOD A}.ID PLASTICS
06100
06200
07160
072t0
07270
07410
07510
0751 l
07600
07900
DIVISION 8 - DOORS A}{D WINDOWS
Rough Carpentry
Finish Carpentry
Bituminous Dampproofi ng
Building Insulation
Firestopping
Preformed Metal Siding
Built-Up Bituminous Roofi ng
Built-Up Bituminous Roofing/Cutting and Patching
Sheet Metal and Flashing
Joint Sealers
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300
03560
03600
DIVISION4 - MASONRY
04200
DTVISION 5 - METALS
05120
05200
05300
05400
05500
05530
Concrete Work
Cementitious Floor Patching
Grout
Unit Masonry
Structural Steel
Metal Joists
Metal Decking
Cold Formed Metal Framing
Metal Fabrications
Gratings
Metal Doors & Frames
Access Doors
Overhead Coiling Doors
Sectional Overhead Doors
Four Fold Doors
Wood Windows
Finish Hardware
Glazing
Gypsum Board
Ceramic Tile
Resilient Tile Flooring
Seamless Resilient Flooring
Resilient Wall Base and Accessories
Painting
I
I
I
I
I
l
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
08100
08305
08330
08360
08368
0861I
08710
08800
DIVISION 9 - FIMSHES
09250
09300
09650
09666
09678
09900
DIVISION IO - SPECIALTIES10100 Tackboards10500 Metal Lockers10522 Fire Extinguisher/Cabinets10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories
TOC-2
/\\1\h/^|>4/
Tor oF vrLt /l-7554.01
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 12 . FT]RMSHINGS
12680 Foot Grilles
DTVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NOTUSED
DIVISION 14. CONT/EYING SYSTEMS
DrvrsroN ll -EQLTPMENT
I1501
I1550
Paint Spray Booths
Vehicle Wash Equipment
Cranes
Vehicle Lifts
Electrical Materials and Methods
Motors
Lighting Fixtures
END OF TOC
14300
r4450
DIVISION 15 - MECHA}IICAL
15010
15060
15100
15250
15400
t5440
15800
15850
15990
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Basic Mechanical Requirements
Pipe and Pipe Fittings
Valves and Specialties
Mechanical Insulation
Plumbing
Plumbing Equipment
Air Distribution
Air Distribution Equipment
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Systems
16100
16485
16515
l-7554.01 TOC-3
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The Fourteenth Edition" dated 1987, of "The General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction", AIA Document A201, as published by the American Institute of Architects is
hereby made a part ofthese specifications.
Each Contractor shall be obligated to and shall specifically consent to the provisions of these
General Conditiong as modifiJ by the Supplementiry Conditions and Divisioi l, to the extent of
the work to be performed under the Contract.
l-7554.01 GC-r
I
I
I
I
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
The foltowing supplements modifi the uGeneral Conditions of the Contract for Construction""
AIA Docum&rt Aiol, Fourteenth EditiorL 1987. Where a portion of the General Conditions is
modified or deleted by these Supplementiry Conditions, th-e unaltered portions of the General
Conditions shall remain in effect.
ARTICLE l; GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.2 Execution, Correlation and Intent
Add the following subparagraph 1.2.3.1to 1.2.3:
1.2.3.1In the event of conflicls or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, interpretations
will be based on the following priorities.
l. The Agreement.
Z. Addenda" with those oflater date having precedence over those ofearlier date.
3. The Supplementary Conditions.
4. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
5. Drawings and Specifications.
In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either
Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or gleater quantity of work shall
be provided in accordanc6 with the Architect's interpretation.
ARTICLE3; CONTRACTOR
3.4 Labor and Materials
Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.3 and 3 .4.4 to 3 .4:
3.4.3 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal
request for the substitution of products in the General Requirements (Division I of the
Specifications).
3.4.4 By making requests for substitution based on Subparagraph 3.4.3 above, the Contractor:
.l Represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute
prdduct and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified;
.2 Represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution
that the Contractor would for that specified;
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
1
I 1-7554.01 sc-l
.3 Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs
under this Contract except the fuchitect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for
additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently became apparent;
and
.4 Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitution, making such changes
as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.
3.6 Taxes
Add the following Subparagraphs 3.6.1.1 through 3.6.1.3 to 3.6.1:
3.6.l.lAs a municipal government project the Project is o<empt from Sales Ta:c and the any
'USE TAX'.
3 .6.1.2 Town of Vail Ta:r Exempt No. is 98-02395.
3.6.1.3The Contractor and subcontractors shall apply to the Colorado Department of Rwenue
for a Certificate of Exemption indicating that their purchase of construction or building
materials is for a publiC project. Complete copies of Applications for Exemption
Certificates with the approval of the Colorado Department of Revenue noted thereon shall
be delivered to the Oiyner prior to issuance of tlie Notice to Proceed. Secure copies of
approved Application from each subcontractor and furnish one to the Owner. Bidder shall
nbi include ihe exempt Sales and Use Taxes in the Bid.
ARTICLE 5; SUBCONTRACTORS
5.2. Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of Work
Add the following Subparagraph 5.2.1.1 to 5.2.1
5.2.1.1Not later than 30 days after the date of commencement, the Contractor shall fumish in
writing to the Owneithrough the Architect,the names ofpersorrs o-r entities p-roposed as
manuficturers for each of t6e specified products proposed- for installation on
-thid project,
and, where applicable, the name of the installing Subcontractor.
ARTICLE 9; PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.3 ApplicationsforPayment
9.3.1 Add the following sentence to Subparagaph 9.3.1:
The form of application for Payment shall be a notarized AIA Documerft G702,
Application and Certification for Paymurt supported by AIA Document G703,
Continuation Sheet.
Add the following Clause 9.3.1.3 to 9.3.1:
9.3. I .3 Until the Work is 50 percent complete, the Owner shall pay 90 percent of the amount due
the Contractor on account of progress payments. At the time the Work is 50 percent
I
I
t
l
t
I
I
l
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
tsc-2 sr/torx o? v^tlDrl l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
complete and thereafter, the Architect will authorize remaining partial payments to be paid
at 95 percent ofthe amount due.
9.8 SubstantialCompletion
9.8.3 Add the following sentence:
The paymurt shatl be sufficient to increase the total payments to 95 percent of-the
Contiaci Sunr, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work
and unsettled claims.
ARTICLE l0: PROTECTION OF PERSONS A]{D PROPERTY
10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs
Add the following Subparagraphs 10.1.5 and 10.1.6 to Paragraph l0.l
10.1.5 Ifreasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable-bodily injury or death
to persons risulting from a material or subitance encountered on-lh€- site by_-the
Colitractor, the Conlractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work
in the affected area and report the bondition to thE Owner and Architect in writing. The
Owner, Contractor and .{rchitect shall then proceed in the same manner described in
Subparagraph 10.1.2.
10.1.6 The Owner shall be responsible for obtaining the services of a licensed laboratory to verify
the presence or absenci oflhe material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the
eveit such material or substance is found to be present, to veriS that it has been rendered
harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Coitract Documents, the Owner shall fumish
in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or
entities *ho are to Derform test verifoing the presence or absence of such material or
substance or who ari to perform the task 6f rembval or safe containment of such material
or substance. The Conlractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner.in
writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objections to the- persons or entities
proposed by t-he Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to.a person
br -entity
iroposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the
Contractorand Architect have no reasonable objection.
ARTICLE I I ; INSURAI.ICE AI.ID BONDS
I 1. I Contractor's Liability Insurance
1l.l.l.l Delete the semicolon atthe end ofClause ll.l.l.l and add:
, including private entities performing Work at the site- and exe-mpt from the
ioverage -on account of nuniber of employees or occupation,-.*ltich entities shall
maintai-n voluntary compensation coverige at the same limits specified for
mandatory coverage for the duration ofthe Project;
t
I l-7554.01 sc-3
I I . I . 1.2 Delete the semicolon at the end of Clause I l. l. 1.3 and add:
or persons or entities excluded by statute from the requirements of Clause I l. l. I . I
but required by the Contract Documents to provide the insurance required by that
Clause;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
t
I l.l.1.8 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a
comprehensive basis including:
l. Premises Operations (including X C and U coverages as applicable).
2. IndependentContractorsrProtective.
3. Products and Completed Operations.
4. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted.
5. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's obligation under
ParagraPh 3.18.
6. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles.
7. Broad Form Property Damage including Complete Operations.
I I . L 1.9 If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial General Liability
Policy on a claims-made basis, the poliry date or Retroactive Data shall predate
the Contract; the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting
period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages required to be
maintained after final payment, c€rtified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2.
Add the following Clause I l.l.2.l to I l. 1.2
I I . I .2. I The insurance required by Subparagraph I l.l. I shall be written for not less than
the following limits, or greater if required by law:
l. Workers'Compensation:
a. State:
b. Applicable Federal
Broad Form Properly Damage):
r. Bodily Injury:
$1,000,000
$1,000,000
Statutory
Statutory
Each Occurrence
Aggregate
sc-4 l-7554.01
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
b. Property Damage:
$1,000,000
$1,000,000
coverage.
3. ContractualLiability:
a. Bodily Injury:
$l,ooo,o00
$1,000,000
b. Property Damage:
a. Bodily Injury:
$500,000
$500,000
b. Property Damage:
$500,000
c. Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide X C and U
Each Occurrence
Aggregate
Each Occurrence
Aggregate
Each Occurrence
Aggregate
Each Person
Each Occurrence
$1,000,000
$l,oo0,ooo
4. Business Auto Liability (including owned, non-owned and hired vehicles):
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Each Occurrence
7. Umbrella Excess Liability:
$1,000,000 over primary insurance.
$1,000,000 retention for self-insured hazards each occurrence.
I l. 1.3 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph I l. 1.3 :
If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy forq the
Certificates shall be AIA Documenf G705, Certificate of Insurance. If the
insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form, ACORD form
25S will be acceptable.
ll.2 Ownefs Liability Insurance
I 1.2. I Delete the last two sentences of Subparagraph I 1.2.1 and substitute the following:
The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance coveqng the Owneds
contingent liability for ciaims which may arise from operations under the Contact'
l-7554.01 sc-s
I1.3 PropertyInsurance
11.3.1.1 Addthefollowingsentenceto Clause 11.3.1.1:
The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value.
Delete Clause I1.3.1.4 and substitute the following:
11.3.1.4 The Contractor shall provide insurance coverage for portions of the Work stored
off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the
approval, and also for portions of the Work in transit.
Add the following sentences:
The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value. If the Owner is
damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such insurance, then the
Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
I1.4 Performance Bond and Payment Bond
Delete Subparagraph I 1.4. I and substitute the following:
ll.4.l The Contractor shall furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and
payment of obligations arising therzunder. Bonds may be obtained through the
Contractor's usual source and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract Sum. The
amount ofeach bond shall be equal to 100 percent ofthe Contract Sum.
I 1.4. l. I The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three
days following the date the Agreement is entered into, or if the Work is to be
commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall,
prior to the commencement of the Work submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner
that such bonds will be furnished.
11.4.1.2 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds
on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of
attorney.
Add the following Paragraph 13.8 to Article 13:
13.8 Equal Opportunity
13.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows:
l3.l.l The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any
employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex or
national oriein. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that
applicants aie employed, and that employees are treated during employment
without regard to their racg religion, color, sex or national origin. Such action
shall include, but not be limited to, the following : employment, upgrading,
demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layof or termination;
rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
l
I
Isc-6 l-7554.01
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuoug Places, available
eiriployees anh applicants for emplo:yment, n6tices setting forth the policies of non-
discrimination.
13.8.1.2 The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or
advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf,, state that all
qualified applicants wiil riceivi consideiation for employment without regard to
race, religion, cnlor, sex or national origin.
ARTICLE 14; TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
Add the following Paragraph l4.4to Article 14:
14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience
14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and
without cause.
14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's
convenienc6. the Contractor shall:
.l Cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2 Take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection
and preservation of the Work; and
.3 Except for work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of
termihation stated in the notice,-terminate all existing Subcontracts and
purchase orders and enter into no firrther Subcontracts and purchase
orders.
14.4.3 l^ case of such termination for the Owne/s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled
to receive payment from the Owner on the same basis provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2.
ARTICLE 15; OTIIER COI{DITIONS AI\ID SERVICES
15.l Contractor Review
I 5. I . I Prior to the execution of a contact between the Owner and Contractor, Owner shall cause
the Contractor to make a thorough and detailed review of the Contract Doc-uments,
including but not limited to the conlstruction drawings, specifications and any addenda or
amendm-ents thereto. Following such review, the Contractor shall represqnt lnd warr3nt
h writing that the Projea may be constructed in accordance with such Construction
Documen-ts. If the Co-ntractoi finds any alleged elrors or deficiencies in the Contract
Documents durine its review the Contiactor-shall specifically list in writing all of the
alleged erors or Ieficiencies.- The Owner shdl promptly provide the Architect with the
Coritracto/s Listing ("Listing") before any construction work is commenced by the
Contractor.
Upon being presented with the Contracto/s Listing. the fuchitect shall at no
additional dodt or expense to the Owner, promptly revise Contract Documents or,
in its discretion, issue addenda, in or-der to remedy .any a!!9ged - elrors or
deficiencies which are found by the fuchitect to be meritorious. The sole and only
l-7554.01 ^t(l".h)s#/
mrr oF Y[!r/sc-7
right of the Owner against the Architect regarding the Contractor's L_i$ing shall be
the prompt correction of the alleged errors,or omissions,by the fuchitect. At the
time- of execution of a general construction contract between the Owner and
Contractor, the Owner shall cause the Contractor to represent and Wanant that
the Project is "buildable" within the established budget and time schedule set forth
within the general contract, using normal construction techniques.
15.4 The Owner shall also cause the Contractor to represent and warrant that:
.l The construction schedule and budget include reasonable contingencies and
reserves for design and plan revisioq modifications, coordination,
clarification or interpretation which may reasonably be anticipated on a
Project ofthis type.
.2 Construction plans and specifications are two dimensional instruments of
professional iervice and usually _require some degree of revisiory
intemretation, coordination, clarification or modification as actual
consiruction presents them in three dimensions during the construction
phase.
END OF SI-IPPLEMENTARY CONDITTONS
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Isc-8 l-7554.01
B.
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
PART I
1.01
A.
B,
t.02
A.
sEcTroN 01010
SIIMMARY OF WORK
. GENERAL
SIJMMARY
Section Includes:
l. Title ofWorh and type of Contract.
2. Work by Others.
3. Work Sequence.
4. Use of Premises.
5. OwnerOccupancy.
Owner-Furnished Items.
DESCRIPTION
The Project consists of a new maintenance and bus storag€ building for the Vail Public
Works, Town of Vail, Colorado.
l. ProjectLocation: VailPublicWorks
Vail, Colorado 81657
2. Owner: Town of Vail
1309 Vail Valley Drive
Vail, Colorado 81657
3. Contractor: J. L. Viele Construction, Inc.
1000 South Frontage Road
Vail, Colorado 81657
Design Requirements:
I . The intent of this Section is to generally summarize the nature and extent of work
to be performed without in any wry limiting the specific requirements of the
Contract Documents.
2. The Contractor shall provide all labor, plant, supplies, equipment, services,
facilities and appurtenances which are indlcated or reasonably.implied. !y ttt"
Drawings, or ai specified, or that are required for the work described in the
Contract Documents.
1-7554.01 01010 - l
I.O3 CONTRACT METHOD
A. Construct the work under a single lump-sum, fixed price contract.
I.O4 WORK BY OTIIERS
A. Work of the Project which will be executed subsequent to completion of work of this
Contract, and which is specifically excluded from this Contract o(cept as noted below:
l. Fumiture and fumishings.
2. Exterior and interior signage.
I.O5 OWNER-FURMSIIEDPRODUCTS
A. The Owner will fumish the kitchen appliances for installation by the Contractor. The
Work includes providing support systems to receive Owne/s equipment, and mechanical
and electrical connections.
l. The Owner will arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings, product data,
and samples to the Contractor.
2. The Owner will anange and pay for delivery of Owner-fi,rmished items according
to the Contractofs Construction Schedule.
3. Following delivery, the Owner will inspect items delivered for damage.
4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, ddective, or missing, the Owner will
arrange for replacement.
l.06 woRK SEQIJENCE
A. Project Development Schedule including the various phases of construction is available
for reviewing in the offices ofthe Owner, Architect and Contractor.
B. Schematic outline of project phasing is summarized as follows:
l. Phase l: Construction and renovation of the Administration Building.
2. Phase 2: Construction and renovation of Bus Maintenance Facility.
C. Construction Work in stages to provide for continuous public access. Do not close off
public usage of facilities until use of one stage of Work will provide altemate access
route.
I.O7 CONTRACTORUSEOFPREMISES
A. Contractor shall lirnit use of premises for Work, for storage, and for access, to allow:
1. Work bv other contractors.
I
t
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
010t0 - 2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
l
2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public.
B. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and
available to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times.
l. Do not use these areas for parking or storage ofmaterials.
2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
C. Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a weathertight condition
ttuoughout the construction period.
l. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
2. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the
construction period.
1.08 oWNEROCCUPAI.ICY
A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and a portion of the existing
building being renovated under this Contract during a the construction period.
l. Cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts
and facilitate Owner usage.
2. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations.
B. Contractor shall allow:
l. Access for Owner personnel.
2. Owner's use of parking facilities.
3. Uninterruption of Owner's utility services.
PART 2.PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 . DGCUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
l
I l-7554.01 01010 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
sEcrIoN 01020
ALLOWANCES
PART I . GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the contract documents.
2. Designate in the constnrction progress schedule the delivery dates for Products
specified under each allowance.
3. Desigrrate in the Schedule of Values the quantities of materials required under
each unit cost allowance.
I.O2 ALLOWAI{CESFORPRODUCTS
A. The amount of each allowance includes:
1. The cost ofthe Product to the Contractor, less any applicable trade discounts.
2. Delivery to the site.
3. Handling at the site; including unloading, uncrating and storage.
4. Protection from the elements and from damage.
5. Labor for installation and finishing.
6. Contractor's and Subcontractor's overhead and profit.
B. In addition to the amount of each allowancg include in the Contract Sum the
Contractor's costs for :
l. Other expenses required to complete the installation.
C. The amount of each allowance for work specified in the respective specification
sections.
1.03 SFT ECTION OF PRODUCTS UNDER ALLOWA}.ICES
A. Contractor'sDuties:
l. Assist Owner in determining qualified suppliers or installers.
2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers when requested by Architect.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I t-7554.01 01020 - 1
3. Make appropriate recommendations for consideration of the Architect.
I.O4 CONTRACTORRESPONSIBILITYFORPURCHASE, DELIVERY AND
INSTALLATION
A. On notification of selection, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier.
B. Arrange for the process Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, as required.
C. Make all arrangements for delivery.
D. Upon delivery, promptly inspect products for damage or defects.
E. Submit claims for transportation damage.
F. Install and finish products in compliance with requirements of referenced specification
sections.
I.O5 ADruSTMENT OF COSTS
A. Should the net cost be more or less than the specified amount of the allowance, the
Contract Sum will be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.
L The amount of the Change Order will recognize any changes in handling costs at
the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses caused by
the selection under the allowance.
2. For products specified under a unit cost allowance, the unit cost shall apply to the
quantities actually used with a nominal allowance for waste, as determined by
receipted invoices, or by field measurement.
B. Submit any claims for anticipated additional costs at the sitg or otler expenses caused
by the selection under the allowance, prior to orecution of work.
C. Failure to submit claims within the designated time will constitute a waiver of claims for
additional costs.
D. At contract close-out, reflect all approved changes in contract arnounts in the final
statenent of accounting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOTUSED
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.OI SCTIEDULE OF ALLOWA}.ICES
B. Section 096E0 - Cundinp: Allow the sum of 817.00 nq souue vard.
I
t
t
l
T
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I0r020-2
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN 01030
ALTERNATES
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI SI]MMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification and description of Alternate work.
B. Related Sections:
1. Bid Documents: Quotation of cost of each Alternate.
2. Owner-Contractor Agreernent: Alternates accepted by Owner for
incorporation into the Work.
3. Sections of Specifications identified in each Alternate.
I.O2 PROCEDURES
A. Bids on all altemates specified hereunder shall be submitted as indicated on the
Bid Form. The Owner reserves the right to acoept or reject any or all alternates.
The additive or deductive amount of each altemate shall represent the true value
of the part of the work covered by that alternate, including all general,
mechanical and electrical work unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Bid amount shall include any residual work to be done in lieu of the alternate as
defined for a complete initallation. Such residual work may involve other
general, structural, mechanical or electrical work.
C. State the amount to be added or deducted from the Base Bid for the difference in
cost between the work described under each Altemate and the corresponding
work specified under the Base Bid.
D. Alternate bids shall reflect the increase or decrease in cost of all work of every
nature which may be affected thereby, and no subsequent claims for ortras by
reason ofthe Contractods failure to observe this requirement will be considered.
E. Except as otherwise described or approved, materid and workmanship required
by th-e Alternate shall conform to ilie requirements specified under the various
Sections ofthe specifications for similar items of work.
F. The methods of construction, materials, finishes or details of installation required
by the Altemates differ from the requirements shown on drawings or specified for
corresponding items, the altemative materials and workmanship shall have the
approval of the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
l-7554.01 01030-l
o
PART 3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI SCHEDIJLE OF ALTERNATES
A. AddAlternateNo. l:
1. Base Bid:
2. Alte,rnate Bid:
Add Alternate No. 2:
1. Base Bid:
2. AlternrteBid:
Add AltcrnateNo. 3:
l. Base Bid:
2. Alternate Bid:
o
B.
c.
EI{D OF SECTION
01030-2 t-7554.01
I
t
I
I
SECTION 0103s
MODACATION PROCEDURES
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SI,JMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Procedures for:
a. Change Orders.b. Instructions.c. Field Orders.d. Directives.
B. Related Sections:
l. General Conditions ofthe Contract.
2. Section 01300 - Submittals.
1.02 PROCEDUREDESCRIPTIONS
A. Modifications shall be processed by written prooess only in conformance to the General
Conditions.
B. Change Orders:
l. ConstructionChangeAuthorization.
2. Contractor'sProposalRequests.
3. Instructions, Field Orders, Directives.
1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN TI{E WORK
A. The Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the
Work" not involving adjustnent to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, on AIA
Form G710, Architect's Supplernental Instructions.
I.O4 CHANGEORDERPROPOSALREQI.]ESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a detailed description of
proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or
Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised
Drawings and Specifi cations.
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
T
I
T
T
I
t l-7554.01 01035-1
c.
1.05
A.
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
B.
l. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not
consider them as an instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the
proposed change.
2. Within 20 days of receipt of a proposal request, zubmit an estimate of cost
necessary to execute the change to the Architect for the Owner's review.
3. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total
amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
4. Indicate applicable ta,xes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
5. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will
have on the Contract Time.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforseen conditions require
modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a
request for a change to the fuchitect.
L lnclude a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the
change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change.
Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract
Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total
amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, fumish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable ta,xes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
4. Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for a product or system
specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Change Order Proposal
Requests.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and the Contractor disagree on the
terms of a Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive
on AIA Form G714. The Construction Change Directive instructs the Contractor to
proceed with a change in tle Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
t-75s4.01 01035-2
I
I l. The Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of the changeI liliTJ,rl #:: t"iifl#"llf.method
to be ro'owed to determine change in
I B. Documentation: ldaintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work
required by the Construction Change Directive.
I l. After completion of the change, zubmit an itemized account and supporting data
neoessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
| 1.06 .HANGE.RDERPR..EDURE'
I A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change
I Order for signatures of the Owner and the Contractor on AIA Form G70l.
.I PART2-PRODUCTS
- Not Used
I PARr3-r>recurloN
Not Used
I ENDoFsEcrIoN
I
t
I
t
I
t
I
I
!
t l-75s4.01
K$rAw/
mrN o? vrnDrl
iE xfl|$'.Er.
01035-3
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
sEcTroN 01040
COORDINATION
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI STIMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Coordination of Work of Contract
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01010 - Summary ofWork.
2. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.
3. Section 01700 - Contract Close-out.
I.O2 DESCRIPTION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of Specifications to
assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with
provisions for accommodating items to be installed later.
B. Coordinate sequenoe of Work to accommodate Owner occupancy as specified.
I.O3 MEETINGS
A. Hold Coordination meetings and pre-installation conferences with personnel and
subcontractors to assure coordination of Work.
I.O4 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Section 01300.
B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing,
connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating
elementg and effect on work of other sections.
I.O5 COORDINATION OF SPACE
A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections in preparation for
Substantial Completion of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract
Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.
B. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by various sections for
correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents. to
minimize disruption of Owner's activities.
l-7554.01 01040-l
ot
C. Arsenrble and coordinate close-out $hnittals cpecified in Soction 01700.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
NotUsed
PART 3.EXECTJTION
NotUsed
EI{D OF SECTION
0r040-2 _sEn#fi#.-
1-7554.01,
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 0104s
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SI.JMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cutting, fitting, and patching of the work required to:
l. Make tlre sweral parts fit properly.
2. Uncover work to provide for installation, inspection, or both, of ill-timed work.
3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract
Documents.
4. Provide penetrations of non-structural components for installation of piping and
electricd conduit.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Work by Owner or separate Contractors.
2. Section 02070 - Selective Demolition.
I.O2 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting and Patching:
L Defined as referenced herein to include cutting and patching of previously existing
or recently completed work.
2. Also defined to exclude cutting and patching during the fabrication and
installation of manufactured units,
B. SelectiveDemolition:
L Defined as a related, but separate category of work, which may also require
cutting and patching.
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:
l. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Vizual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 01045-l
5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
B. Submittals shall comply with Section 01300.
1.04 QUALTTYASSLJRAIICE
A. Perform all cutting and patching in strict accordance with pertinent requirements of the
Specifications and, in the event no such requirements are determined, in conformance
with the written direction ofthe Architect.
l. Use skilled workmen to perform all cutting and patching work.
2. Use methods least likely to damage existing surFaces and materials to remaiq
while providing proper surfaces to receive installation ofrepair, patching, and/or
new work.
3. In addition to requirements specified, upon the Architect's request, uncover work
to provide inspection of covered work and remove samples of installed materials
for testing.
4. Do not cut or alter work performed under separate contract without the written
permission of the fuchitect:
B. Vizual Quality:
l. Do not cut and patch work exposed to public view, on the exterior and interior of
the building in a manner that will result in an unacceptable appearance as
determined by the fuchitect.
2. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that wil result in obvious appearance that
cutting and patching work was done.
3. When cutting existing structural concretg do not ortend saw cuts beyond the
corners ofthe required opening on either side ofthe opening
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Provide materials which:
l. Are equal or better than work being cut or patched.
2. Possess performance characteristics and vizual efu similar to original material.
PART 3 . E)GCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Before proceeding, inspect conditions,,includhg elements subject to movement or
damage during cutting, orcavating, bacldlling and patching.
B. After uncovering the work" inspect conditions atrecting installation of new work.
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t01045-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
C. If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated or if construction is not as indicated on
the Drawings, immediately notify the fuchitect for further instructions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Take all necessary action required to protect adjacent existing surfaces from damage
due to the work of this section.
B. Take atl precautions necessary to protecl surPaces and materials, new work, and the
work of this section from damage due to adverse weather conditions.
C. Provide temporary support of work to be cut and adjacent work to prevent failure or
damage due to the work of this Section.
D. Properly prepare substrate surfaces exposed during cutting as required to receive the
work of this or otler sections of these specifications in strict compliance with
manufacture/s recommendations and these specifications.
3.03 CUTTINGA}IDPATCHING
A. Perform all required cutting and patching as required or reasonably implied under
pertinent sections of these specifications.
B. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions
of the work and will provide proper finished installation complying with the specified
tolerances and finishes.
C. Comply with the requirements of applicable sections of Division 2 where cutting-and-
patching required excavating and backfilling. Execute orcavating and bacldlling by
methods which will prevent settlernent or damage or otler work.
D. Employ original Installer or Fabricator to perform cutting-and-patching except where
work is pre-existing.
E. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide
complaed Work in accord with requirements of Contract Documents.
F. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through
surfaces.
G. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified
tolerances ofthe work.
H. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas; and, where necessary extend finish
restoration onto retained work adjoining, in a manner which will eliminate evidence of
patching.
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01
/a\A\\}\sl/
TorN oP v^rlDrl
gi.Bdsii#.-
01045-3
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
SECTION 010s0
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART I -GENERAL
1.OI SUMMARY
A. General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field-
engineering services including, but not limited to, the following:
l. Land zurveywork.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
l. Division I Section 'Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field
engineering with other construction activities.
2. Division I Section "Submittals" for zubmitting Project record zurveys.
3. Division I Section "Project Closeout" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents and recording of Owner-accepted dwiations from
indicated lines and levels.
I.O2 STIBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Submit a certificate signed by the land surveyor or professional engineer
certifying the location and elevation of irnprovements.
B. Final Property Survey: Submit l0 copies ofthe final property surv€y.
C. Project Record Documenls: Submit a record of Work performed and record suney
data as required under provisions of"Submittals" and "Project Closeout" Sections.
l.o3 QUALTTYASSURAI.ICE
A. Surveyor Qualifications: Engage a land surveyor registered in the state where the
Project is located, to perform required land-surveying services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
l-7554.01 01050 - I
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verify layout information shown on the Dniwings, in relation to the property zurvey and
existing benchmarks, before proceeding to lay out the Work.
B. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other
utilities and construction indicated as oristing are not guaranteed. Before beginning
siteworlg investigate and veri$ the existence and location of underground utilities and
other construction.
l. Prior to constructioq verify the location and invert elevation at points of
connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping.
3.02 PEPSORMANCE
A. Work from lines and lwels established by the property surv€y. Establish benchmarks
and markers to set lines and lwels at each story of construction and elsewhere as
needed to locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required
dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to
determine dimensions.
L Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels
provided for their use.
2. As construction proceeds, check wery major elernent for line, level, and plumb.
B. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a zurveyot's log of control and other survey work. lvtake this
log available for reference.
l. Record deviations from required lines and lwels, and advise the Architect when
deviations that orceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On
Project Record Drawings, record deviations that arc accepted and not corrected.
2. On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing
dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes
for grading, fill urd topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Lwels: L,ocate and lay out batter boards for structures, buildhg
foundations, column grids and locations, floor lwels, and control lines and levels
required for mechanical and electrical work.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
01050 - 2 l-7554.01
E.
F.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing
structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by
construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiaion.
Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property zurvey showing sigrrificant features (real
property) for the Project. lnclude on the survey a certification, signed by the surveyor,
that principal metes, bounds, lines, and lwels of the Project are accurately positioned as
shown on the zurvey.
l. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded
by or with local governing authorities as the official "property survey."
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 01050 - 3
I
I
t
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
SECTION 01075
SPECIFICATION SYSTEM
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI WORKINCLUDED
A. Specification system format.
B. Languagedescription.
I.O2 RELATEDWORK
A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
I.O3 DESCRIPTION
A. These specifications have been derived from automatep. spqcrfication systems, .and
include ininor deviations from format and traditional writing forms. Such deviations
must be recognized as a normal result of this production technique, and no other
meaning will be implied or permitted.
B. Imperative language of the technical sections is directed to the Contractor. The term
"prbvide" used-refeatedly rn the text is defined to mean..."fumish and-install, c.gmplete,
iri place and ready for opLration and use unless specifically indicated otherwise."
C. Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined type and_ include incomplete
sentences. Omissions of words or phiases such as "the Contractor shall" "in conformity
thereWith," "Shall be," "aS noted Ori the DraWingS", uA", "The", are intentiOnal. SUpply
omitted words or ph'rases by inference in same manner as they are when "Note" occurs
on Drawings. Supply wordi "on the Ihawings" by inferance when "as indicated" is used
with sentences or phrases.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used
PART 3 . E)GCUTION
Not used
END OF SECTION
t-7554.01 01075-l
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
sEcTroN 01090
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
I.OI STJMMARY
A. Section Includes:
t.o2
A.
1.03
A.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect at the date of these contract
documents, orcept where a standard of a specific date or edition is indicated.
C. Codes and Governing Regulations;
l. General: Compliance with federal, state, county- city or local codes and
goveming regulationg as applicable to the work, is either required by law or
imposed hereby.
2. Uniform Building Code; by ICBO, (atest edition) as adopted by Municipal
Ordinance.
3. National Fire Codes;byNFPA (atest edition).
4. Regulations by utility companies supplying utilities to the project, both
temporarily and permanently.
5. William-steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970; Public Law 9l-596.
a. Part l9l0 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Chapter XVII of
Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations.
l. Applicability of Reference Standards.
2. Acronyms used in Contract Documents for Reference Standards. Source of
Reference Standards.
DESCRIPTION
This section specifies requirements for the compliance with goleming regulations. and
imposed codei and standirds, including the ottaining- of permits, licenses, insp_ections,
rel'eases and similar documentation, andincluding the furnishing of notices, certifications
associated with regUlations, codes and standards. "Regulations" is defined to include
those rules, conventions and agreements within the construction indrrstry which
effectively control the performance of the worlg regardless ofwhether laufitlly imposed
and enforced or obeyed.
QUALTTY ASSLJRAIICE
For products or workmanship specified by associatio4 trade, or Federal Standards,
comily with requiranents of thd standard, except when more rigid requirements are
specified or are required by applicable codes.
l-7554.01 01090-r
b. Part 1518 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Chapter Ktr
of Title 29 Code ofFederal Regulations.
State Energy Conservation Code.
State Planning and Design Criteria to Prevent Architectural Barriers for the Aged
and Physically Handicapped.
8. Uniform Mechanical Code (Latest edition); by ICBO, as adopted by Municipal
Ordinance.
National Electric Code (Latest edition) as adopted by Municipal Ordinance.
Uniform Plumbing Code patest edition) as adopted by Municipal Ordinance.
6.
7.
9.
10.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
t
I
I.O4 REFERENCES
A. Standards
L The industry standards applicable to the work are indicated in appropriate
individual sections of these specifications, either by their names and the names of
the trade associations, government agencies or other producers of standards, or
by well-recognized abbreviations thereof Refer questions on the meaning of
abbreviated designations to the Architect for clarification before proceeding with
work affected thereby.
Explanation of Application: It is a requirement that each entity or person
performing the work be orpert in that portion of worlg and be compl*ely familiar
with the industry standards applicable to that portion of the work. Therefore,
copies of applicable standards have not been bound with these contract
documents; but are, nevertheless in flrll force and effect. Obtain copies from the
publication sourse, where needed for proper performance of the work.
AISC: American Institute of Steel Constnrctioq Inc.
l22l Avenue ofthe Americas
New Yorh N.Y. 10020
AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute
150 East 42nd Street
NewYorh N.Y. 10017
AITC: American Institute of Timber Construction
333 West Hampden Avenue
Englewood, CO 80110
A],{SI: AmericanNationalStandardslnstitute
(Successor to USASI and ASA)
1430 Broadway
NewYorhN.Y. 10018
APA: American Plywood Association - The Engineered
Wood Association
I 19 A Street
Tacoma WA 98401
01090-2 l-7554.01
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
o
American
See Door
o
Hardware ConsultantsASAHC:
ASHRAE:
ASME:
ASTM:
Society of Architectural
and Hardware Institute
American Society ofHeating, Refrigerating &
Air Conditioning Engineers, lnc.
345 East 47th Street
New Yorh N.Y. 10017
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
345 East 47th Street
NewYorh N.Y. 10017
American Society for Testing and Materials
1916 Pace Street
Philadelphia, PA 19103
Architectural Woodwork Institute
5055 South Chesterfield Road
Arlingtoq VA 22206
American Wood Preservers Bureau
2772 South Randolph Street
Arlington, VA 22206
American Wood Preservers Institute
2772 South Randolph Street
Arlington, VA 22206
American Welding Society, Inc.
2501 IIIV 7th Street
Malrri, FL 33125
Builders llardware Manufacturers Association
60 East 42nd Street
NewYork N.Y. 10017
Brick Institute of America @ormerly SCP!
1750 Old Meadow Road
Mcl-earu VA 22101
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
228 North LaSalle Street
Chicago,Il 60601
Door & Hardware Institute
1815 N. Ft. Meyer Drive
Arlington, V422209
Flat Glass lvlarkaing Association
1325 Topeka Avenue
Topeka, KS 66612
AWI:
AWPB:
AWPI:
BIA:
AWS:
BHMA:
DHI:
l-7554.01 01090-3
NAAMM:
I
T
T
I
t
I
I
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
FM:
FS:
PS:
Factory Mutual Engineering Corp.
I l5l Boston-Providence Turnpike
Norwood, PA 02062
Federal Specification (General Services Administration)
Building 197
Washington Navy Yard SE
Washington, DC 20407
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
221 North LaSalle Street
Chicago, Illinois 60601
National Builders Hardware Association
See Door & Ilardware Institute.
National Bureau of Standards
(U S Dept of Commerce)
Gaithersburg MD 20234
National Concrete Masonrv Association
6845 Elm Street
Mcleaq VA 22101
National Electrical Code by NFPA
National Electricd Manufacturers Association
155 East 44th Street
New York" N.Y. 10017
National Fire Protection Association
470 Atlantic Avenue
Bostorl MA 02210
National Woodwork Manufacturers Assoc., Inc.
400 West Madison Street
Chicago,IL 60606
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
(U.S. Dept. oflabor)
Government Printing Offi ce
Washington, DC 20102
Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Road
Skokie, n- 60076
Product Standard ofNBS
(U.S Dept ofCommerce)
Government Printing Offi ce
Washingoq N, 20402
NBHA:
NBS:
NEC:
NEMA:
NFPA:
PCA:
01090-4 t-7554.01
3.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
SDI:Steel Deck Institute
135 Addison Avenue
Elmhurst, n- 60125
Steel Door Institute
2130 Keith Building
Cleveland, OH 44115
SDI:
SJI: Steel Joist Institute
2001 Jefferson Davis Highway
Arlingto4 vA 22202
SMACNA: Sheet Metd & Air Conditioning
Contractof s National Association, Inc.
8224 Old Courthouse Road; Tysons Corner
Vienna, VA 22180
TCA: Tile Council of America, Inc.
P.O. Box 326
Princetoq N.J. 08540
UL: Underwritet's Laboratories, Inc.
207 F,a;st Ohio Street
Chicago, OH 6061I
WWPA: Western Wood Products Association
(Grading Rules)
1500 Yeon Building
Portland, OR 97204
Trade Associations, Standards and Abbrwiations:
References in the Contract Documents to publications and recommendations,.by
either name or abbrwiation thereof,, include but are not limited to the following
trade associations, technical societies, government agencies, recognized
authorities and standards:
AAIvIA: AmericanArchitecturalManufacturersAssociation
2700 River Road, Suite I 18
Des Plaines, IL 60018
(312)699-73r0
AAI.{: AmericanAssociationofNurserymen,Inc.
230 Southern Building
Washingto4 D.C. 20005
AASHTO: American Assoc. of State Highway & Transportation Officials
(Also AASHO)
341 National Press Building
Washington, D.C. 20004
ACI: American Concrete Institute
Box 19150 Redford Station
Detroit, MI 48219
r-7554.01 01090-5
o
of America
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
t
I
I
t
T
T
I
I
I
AGC: The Associated General Contractors
1957 East Street, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006
AI: The Asphalt Institute
Asphalt Institute Building
College Parlq MD 20740
AIA: The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue
Washingtor\ D.C. 20006
NSPE: The National Society of Professional Engineers
2029K StreetNW
Washington, D.C. 20006
B. Trade Regulations:
l.General: The manner in which standards and trade association recommendations
have been specified, and the nunner in which the contract documents have been
subdivided and organized, are not necessarily for the purpose ofaccommodating
trade regulation and jurisdictional agreements among trade unions and cor.rncils,
nor is this intended to interfere with the Contractols proper handling of
assignments, conflicts and rulings. Comply with trade regulations in the manner
which will avoid delays and claims, and which will ensure that the work is
performed in accordance with the iequirements of the Contract Documents.
Reconcile conflicts promptly as they arise.
Losses, delays, claims and additional costs which result from inadequate or
improper handling (by the Contractor) of conflicts with trade regulations will not
be considered as basis for change orders.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01090-6 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
SECTION 01100
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART I - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. An essential condition ofthis Contract shall be the scheduling and conduct ofall
phases of constnrction operations in such a manner th,at the Owner's operations
within the building shall- be unintemtpted at all times, except for such limited
intemrption as is required.
2. Contractor shall repair at his own expense all damage done to_Ownerls property,
unknown utilities -and adjoining public property as a result of Contractol's
construction activities.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
I.O2 PROJECT/SITECONDMONS
A. Access and use of site:
l. Contractor shall use the designated site access for construction offices and
material storage in such a m-anner that access to existing building remains
accessible at all times for use.
2. Confine operations to as limited a use of the existing building as possible. A route
of access io and from the work for employees shall be agreed upon and it shall be
the Contractor's responsibility to see that the agreed route is maintained in order
to prevent unwarranted or unnecessary traffic through the e:risting building.
B. OwnerNotice and Approval:
1. All arrangements and scheduling in connection with the work of this Contract
shall be maAe wittr and subject to the approval ofthe Architect and the Owner.
2. All work under this Contract which will require interruption of service of the
existrng building shall be scheduled to suit the need and convenience of the
Owner-ls ooeradon. and arransements shall be made with the Owner and the
Architect dt bast two (2) days In advance of tle start of such work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
l-7554.01 0l100-l
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.OI RENOVATION
A. Construction activities of all areas to be constructed in existing facilities shall be
completely separated from rest of the building by dust-proof enclosures erected by
Contractor.
B. All surfaces in existing facilities not indicated to be remodeled, or removal of existing
items by any Contractor, shall be repaired by the responsible Contractor to match
existing adjoining similar surfaces.
3.02 CLEAI.IING
A. All areas within existing facilities, which are not within enclosed areas to be
constructed used for access to work areas shall be completely cleaned of all debris and
made nbroom-clean" at the end of each day's work.
B. Dust which penneates areas of existing facilities because of improperly constructed
dust-proof baniers shall be the respgnsibility of the Contractor. Completely clean all
such areas to the satisfaction of the Owner at no additional cost.
3.03 CONSTRUCTIONSEQITENCE
A. In order to accommodate the unintemrpted operation of the oristing building during
tlte various phases of constructioq the sequence of construction operations shall be as
follows:
l. Basically, the sequence concept is to: (l) prepare the existing facility to
function during the building addition through substantial completion; (2)
thence occupy the newly built portion; and (3) upon completiorq finally
reoccupy the renovated Portion.
2. Some ovedapping between the several construction operations will occur, and
where possible, permission maybe granted to start certain portions of the work
before the previous operations were completed in their entirety. Such detail
scheduling shall be done as the work progress€s, provided that the Owner's
operations remain unintemrPted.
3. Where it may not be possible to complete certain mechanical and electrical
services in connection with making the work complete and ready for
occupancy, t€,rnporary services as directed and as approved shall be installed to
permit occupancy by the Owner at the earliest possible date.
4. The construction sequence and related Drawings are intended to aid the
Contractor in bidding and in scheduling his work. Deviations of sequence may
be made upon approval ofthe Ovmer and the Architect.
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
END OF SECTION
1-7554.01
/ftfl\)sl/ror or vrtl!>/
01100-2
I
I
t
I
t
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
sEcTroN 0rr20
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDIJRES
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI STJMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Re,novationcoordination.
2. Cutting and patching.
3. Protection.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.
2. Section 01040 - Coordination.
3. Section 01100 - Special Project Procedures.
4. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
5. Section 02070 - Selective Dernolition.
I.O2 PROJECT/SITECO}{DITIONS
A. Rder to Section 0l100.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 . HGCUTION
3.OI ALTERATIONS
A. Coordinate work of trades:
l. Schedule elements of alterations and renovation work.
2. Cut, move, and remove items as necessary to provide access or to allow
alterations and new work to proceed.
3. Patcb" repalr, and refinish existing items to remain, to the specified conditions for
each material.
4. Coordinate pourer outages and major intemrpfions of progress of construction
work with the Owner.
l-7554.01 01120-l
o
Cutting
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
B. Alterations,and Protection:
l. Assign to trades qualified to perform the work.
2. Cut and remove minimum necessary, and in a manner to avoid damage to adjacent
work.
3. Cut finish surfaces zuch as tnasonry, tile, flooring or metals by methods to
terminate surfaces in a straight line at a natural point of division.
4. Protect existing finishes, equipment and adjacent work.
Coordinate with Owne/s use ofthe facility:
l. Coordinate construction phasing
Z. Schedule intemrptions of building utilities for hours when building is closed to
normal operations, i.e., weekends, evenings, etc.
3. Sequence of Construction and Remodeling: See Drawings and Section 01010
Surirmarv of Work.
Products for patching extending and matching:
l. Provide same products ort)?es of construction as that in existing structure, as
needed to patch, extend, or match ocisting work.
2. Presence ofa product, finisb or type ofconstructiorq requires that patching and
extending shall match.
Patching existing facilities :
l. Facilities damaged or removed due to required construction work, shall be
patched, repaired, or replaced.
F. Transition from existing to new work:
G.
l. Make a smooth and workmanlike transition.
2. Patch work shall match existing adjacent work.
Dust Control:
l. Control dust created as a result of construction operations.
Fire Protection:
l. Maintain good housekeeping practices.
2. Suitable storage space.
3. Provide fire extinguisher at each location where cutting or welding is being
performed.
C.
D.
0tt20-2 l-7554.01
I
!
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
3.02 CLEAI{ING
A. All areas within existing facilities, which are not within enclosed areas to be constructed
used for """"rr-io *5* ariaJ'shall be completely cleaned of all debris and made
"broom-clean" at the end of each day's work.
B. Dust which permeates areas of existing -facilities belause of imp:operly. ?on|lry:t:g
dust-proof birriers shall be the resp_onsibility of the Contractor. Completely clean all
such ireas to the satisfaction of the Owner at no additional cost'
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 0l120-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
?/
SECTION O12OO
PROJECTMEETINGS
PART I.GENERAL
I.OI STIMMARY
A. Section includes:
l. Pre-constructionmeeting.
2. Progress and Coordination meetings.
3. Specially called meetings.
I.O2 SYS]EMDESCRIPTION
A. General Procedure:
l. Prepare €enda for meetings.
2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date.
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
4. Preside at meeting.
5. Record the minutes; include sigrrificant proceedings and decisions.
6. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within two days after each meeting
and send to:
a. Participants in the meeting.b. Parties afiected by decisions made at the meeting.c. Consultant (2 copies).
7. Representatives of Contractors, Subcontractors, and supplies attending meetings
shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalfofthe entity each represents.
B. Pre-constructionMeeting:
l. Schedule witlin ten days after date ofNotice to Proceed.
2. Location designated by the Owner and convenient for all parties.
3. Attendance:
a. Owner'sRepresentative.b. Architect'sRepresentative.c. Consultants, as applicable.d. Contracto/sProjectSuperintendent.e. MajorSubcontractor(s).f Others as appropriate.
I
I
T
I
I l-7554.01 01200-l
4. Suggested Agenda:
a. Distribution and Discussion of:
1) List ofmajor subcontractors and suppliers.2) Projectedconstructionschedules3) Critical work sequencing.4) Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
5) ProjectCoordination,6i Deiignation of responsible personnel.
b. Procedures and Processing of:l) Field decisions.2) Proposal requests.3) Submittals.4) Change Orders.5) Applications for PaYment.c. Adequacy of Distribution of Contract Documents.
d. Prociduies for Maintaining Record Documents.e. Use ofPremises:l) Office, work, stagng, and storage areas.2) Owner'srequirements.f temporary consfruction Facilities, Utilities, Controls, and Construction
Aids.
s. Safety, First-aid, Security, and Housekeeping Procedures.
h. Administrative Procedures and Documents as Required by Owner.
C. Progress and coordination meetings:
l. Progress meetings shall be held weekly for the duration of the- project . Meetings
shail be scheduled for a minimum of two hours and extended as required. The
Owne/s Representatives will attend all meetings.
2. Attendance:
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
t
I
T
I
t
0
I
I
T
I
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
c.
Ownet's Representative.
Architect's Representative.
Consultants, as applicable.
Contractor's Project Superintendent.
Subcontractor as appropriate to the agenda.
Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda.
0thers as appropriate.
3. Suggested Agenda:
a. Review of work progress since prwious meeting.
b. Field observations, problems, and conflicts.
c. Problems which impede Construction Schedule.
d. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
e. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.
f Revisions to Construction Schedule.
s. Coordination of schedules.I Progress and schedule during succeeding work pgrigd
i. Reriew submittal schedules and expedite as required.
i. Maintenance of quality standards.'k. Pendingchanges'andiubstitutions.
01200-2 l-7554.01
l. Review proposed changes for:l) Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date.2) Effect on other contracts ofthe Project.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART3 -DGCUTION
Not Used
EI{D OF SECTION
t-7554.0r 01200-3
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
sEcTroN 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART I . GENERAL
I.OI SIJMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. SubmittalRequirements.
2, Shop Drawings.
3. Product Data.
4. Samples.
5. Manuhcturerslnstructions.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.
2. Section 01370 - Schedule of Values.
3. Section 01400 - Quality Control.
4. Section 01600 - lvlaterial and Equipment.
5. Section0l63l -Product Substitutions.
6. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
7. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
C. Work Not Included:
l. Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents, nor required by
approved modifications to thb Contract Documents, will not be rwiewed by the
Architect.
2. It is understood that the Contractor may require his subcontractors to provide
drawings, setting diagrams, and other inf6rmaiion exclusively {or thg purpbses of
coordinating the work. Such data shall remain transactions between the
Contractor and subcontractors and will not be reviewed by the Architect.
r.o2 SUBMITTALREQUIREMENTS
A. Make zubmittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such s€quence
as to cause no delav in the work.
1-7554.01 01300-l
Number of submittals required:
l. Shop Drawings: Submit one reproducible transparency and two opaque
reproductions.
2. Product Data: Submit two copies; one will be retained by the Architect.
3. Samples: Submit number stated in each specification section.
Submittals shall include, but not necessarily limited to the following:
l. Date of submittal and dates of any prwious submittals.
2. Project title and number.
3. Contractidentification.
4. Names of:
a. Contractor.b. Subcontractors.c. Suppliers.d. Manufacturers.
5. Identification of product, with the Specification Sectioq Article, and Paragraph
Numbers.
Field dimensiong clearly identified as such.
Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.
Identification of revisions on rezubmittals.
Contractor's review and approval.
An 8 inches x 3 inches blank space in lower right-hand corner for Contractor and
Architect starnps.
D. Timing of Submittals:
1. As specified in Section 01310, the Progress Schedule, prepared for the work shall
inclurle an itemized listing of the required submittals with submission dates.
2. Schedule shall allow not less than 5 working days for fuchitect's rwiew, and an
additional 5 days each for the Owner's or Architect's consultant's review, not
including time necessary for delivery or rnailing, and shall cause no delay in the
work or tle work of any other Contractor.
3. Extension of Contract Time will not be granted because of the Contractor's failure
to make timely and correctly prepared and presented submittals with allowance
for the checking and review periods.
B.
C.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
t
I
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
I
I01300-2
At(t"|'iw/ron or vruPl
lE&d$'.st
l-7554.01
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
Submittal Log:
1. ldaintain an accurate submittal log for the duration of the worlg showing current
status of all submittals at all times.
2. Make the submittal log available to the Architect for review, upon request.
Schedule of Submittals:
l. Prior to the fust payment request, submit to the Architect a schedule of submittals
identi$ing each'submittal by material or product, specification section, and
anticipated date of submiual.
2. Submittal dates shall be identical to those entered in the Construction Schedule.
3. This schedule shall be kept current and reissued on a periodic basis.
Grounine of Submittals: Unless otherwise specified, make submittal in groups
contairniig all associated items to ensure that infoimation is available for checking each
item when it is received.
Deviations:
l. At time of submissioq give notice in writing in the zubmittal of any dwiation from
the requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Indicate or describe deviations including other changes required to correlate the
work.
3 . State in writing variations in costs caused by the dwiations and_ assumption of the
cost ofthe defration and related changes ifdeviation is accepted.
4. Tabulate deviations by Specification number and title.
I. Contractor's Review and Approval: Each submittal shall bear Contractor's review and
approval starnp certifying that the Contractor:
l. Has reviewed, checked, and approved the submittal and has coordinated the
contents with-requirements of th-e work and the Contract Documents including
related work.
2. Has determined and verified quantities, field measurements and construction
criteria, materials, equipment, catalog numbers, and similar data, or will do so.
3. States that the work covered by the submittal is recommended by Contractor.
4. That the Contractor's warranty wil fully apply
5. The Contracior's stamp shall be dated and signed by the Contractor in wery case.
J. Corrections:
l. Make all required corrections and resubmit required number of corrected
submittals until accepted.
E.
F.
G.
l-7554.01 01300-3
L.
2. Direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called
for on the prwious submittals, and state in writing all variatio_ns in costs and
aszumption of cost of related changes the same as is required for deviations in
paragaph "Deviations. "
Check of Returned Submittals:
l. Check the zubmittals returned for correction and ascertain if the Corrections result
in extra cost above that included under the Contract Documents, and give written
notice within 5 working days rf, in Contractor's opinion, such extra cost results
from corrections.
2. By failing to so notify or by starting qny york covered by a submittal Contractor
waives ali claims for extra costs resulting from required Conections.
Review and Acceptance:
l Submittals will be reviewed with reasonable promptness, but only for
conformance with the desigrr intent of the project and with the information given
in the Contract Documents.
Z. The acceptance of a separate item as zuch will not indicate acceptance of the
assembly in which the item functions.
3. Acceptance of submittals shall not reliwe Contractor of responsibility for any
deviation from requirements of the Contract Documents or for any rwision in
resubmittals unless the Contraclor has given notice in writing of the dwiation or
revision at the time of submission or resubmission and written acceptance has
been given to the specific dwiation or rwision, nor shall any acceptance relieve
the Contractor of rbsponsibility for errors or omissions in the submittals or for
accuracy of dimensiohs and quantities, the adequasy of connections, and the
proper ind acceptable fitting, orecutiorl functioning and completion ofthe work.
Incomplete Submittals: Incomplae zubmittals, rlclu$ing_ those not cpnectlY
transmitted, not correctly titled and identified, or not bearing Contractor's review and
approval stamp, will be returned to the Contractor without review.
Interrelated Submittals: Except where preparation ofa submittal is dependent upon the
approval of a prior submittal Cll submittals pertaining to the same class or portion of the
wtirk shall be submitted simultaneously.
Expense: Costs for the preparation, conectioq delivery, and relurn of the submittals
shall be borne by Contractor.
DISTRIBUTION
Distribut€ reproductions of Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data which caxry the
Architect stamp of review to:
l. Project site file.
2. AffectedContractors.
Distribute samples which carry the Architect's stamp of rwiew as directed.
I
T
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
t
t
I
N.
o.
1.03
A.
B.
01300-4 l-7554.01
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
and others
I
I
C. Provide additional distribution to governing authorities
proper performance of the Work.
as necessary for the
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.OI SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Scale and Measurements: Make Shop Drawings accurately to:
l. A scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method
of connection to the work.
2. Include technical and performance data as necessary to illustrate the Drawings'
3. Copies of Drawings marked to show Shop Drawing information are not
acceptable.
B. Correction and Acceptance of Shop Drawings:
l. The Architect will indicate the corrections, notations, or accePtance and return
them to Contractor.
2. Rezubmit in same manner if Shop Drawings are not accepted.
C. Composite Shop Drawings and Field Layouts:
l. Prepare and submit composite Shop Drawings and Field Layouts as.required to
solie tight field conditioirs and whin requireil to coordinate the work of several
trades.
2. Include dimensioned plans, elwations, sections, and details and given complete
information particulariv as io kinds and types of materials and equipment, size and
location of sieeves, inserts, attachments, chases, openings, conduits, ducts, boxes,
and structural interferences.
3. Coordinate these composite Shop Drawings and Field Layouts in.the field for
proper relationship to work of apflicable trades based on field conditions.
4. Contractor shall have competent personnel readily available for coordinating,
checking, and supenrision ofField Layouts.
5. The procedures for submittals and resubmittal, and final Distribution shall be as
specified for Shop Drawings.
2.02 MANTIFACTURFR'S DATA AI{D INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
A. Where contents of zubmitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent
to the submittal clearly show which portions of the contents are being submitted for
review.
B. Submit product data to veri$ conformance wit! the Specification complete with
material'list, catalogs, brochures, technical performance data and manufacturers
installation instructiois when required by a Sectibn of this Specification.
l-7554.01 01300,5
C. For products only by reference standards, list for
o
each
Name and address of manufacturer.
Trade name.
Model or catalog designation.
Manufacturer's data
a. Referencestandards.b. Performance test data.
I
I
I
I
t
o
specified
l.
1
t.
4.
such product
D. Where work is required to be installed in accordance with the product manufacturer's
directions, submit and distribute the necessary copies of such instructions.
2.03 CERTIFICATES
A. Deliver all certificates to the Architect.
B. Each certificate required under the Contract Documents shall be signed by the indMdual
officer, or the agent laurfrrlly authorized to execute the certificate by title, description, or
other acceptable evidence.
C. All certfficates shall be sworn and notarized as to the conectness and validity of the
contents, and duplicate copies shall be notarized to be true copies.
2.04 SAMPLES
A. Provide samples, when required by technical sections of this Specification or requested
by the Archiiect, identical to the precise article proposed to be provided.
B. Number of Samples Required:
l. Unless otherwise specified, submit samples in the quantity which is required to be
returned, plus one which will be retained by the Architect.
2. By.preanangement in sp9cF{ cafjs:.a grngle sample. may be submitted for
review and, when accepted, be installed in the work at a location agreed upon by
the Owner and the Architect.
C. Office Sample5; $rrffisisn! size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and
attachment devices.
2. Full range ofcolor, texture and pattern.
3. Identify each sample, giving fu[ information.
D. Field Samples and Mock-ups:
l. Provide material for erection at job site, FOB job site.
I
I
I
t
I
t
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
I01300-6 l-7554.01
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-2. Sizeorarea: That specifiedintherespective
o
specification
3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished.
2.05 COLORS Al.lD PATTERNS
A. Unless the precise color and pattern is specifically stlpqlteg in the Contract Documents,
and whenever a choice of 6olor or pdttem is -available in specified products, submit
accurate color and pattern charts to the Architect for selection.
PART 3 - E)GCIIIION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 01300-7
I
t sEcrroN 01400
QUALITY CONTROLt
I
I
t
I
I
B.
t
I
I
I
c.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
1.02
A.
B.
Section Includes:
l. TestingrequiredofContractors.
2. Contractor's quality control systems.
3. Manufacturer's Field Service.
4. Independent Testing Agency Services.
Related Sections:
l. Section 01300 - Submittals.
2. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
3. Section 02520 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving
4. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
5. Section O42OO -Unit lvlasonry.
6. Section 05120 - Strucnral Steel.
7. Section 05200 - Metal Joists.
8. Section 05300 - Metal Decking.
TESTING - GENERAL
The term "testing" as used herein is defined as testing and/or inspection.
The Contractor shall provide such equipment and facilities a-s the Testing Aggncy Tly
require for conductin-g field tests aird- for collecting and forwarding -samples. The^
Contractor shall not usi any materials or equipment represe4ed,by samples until tests, if
required, have been made ind the materiali or equipment-found to be acceptable. Any
pr6duct which becomes unfit for use after acceptance shall not be incorporated into the
work.
All materials or equipment proposed to be used may be testd at any timg .during. their
preDaration or use'. The C6ntiactor shall furnish the required samples without charge
irnd shall coordinate testing with the fuchitect, Engineerand Testing Agency to allow
sufficient time for testing-before placing orders oi starting work. Products may be
tested either prior to shipment or after being received at the job site.
l-7554.01 01400-l
D.Tests slrall be made by- an accredited testing agency with a minimum of 5 years
experience in the specific type of testing to bJ performea. Except as otheiurise
provided, sampling.and testing of all materials and ihe laboratory metirods and testing
equipment shall be in accordance with the latest standards and tentative methods of thE
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
Where additional or specific information concerning testing methods, samples sizes,
etc., is required, such furformation is included undertlis sectio=n ofthe Specifiiations.
TESTTNG REQUTRED OF CONTRACTORS
The follo-wing testing shall be performed at the orpense of the Contractor installing the
material being tested:
l. ldaterial or Method Substitution: fury tests of basic material, fabrication
equipment or method offered as a zubstitute for specified items or methods on
which a test may be required in order to prove its compliance with the
specifications.
2. Product Performance Verification: The supplier of products specified based on
performance criteria shall, at the request of tne erinitect, insbect the installed
prodgct and gerti$ conformance of the product to specified iriteria under the
instdled conditions.
3. Masonry: Submit the following tests for each class of unit and trrye of masonry
assemblage two weeks prior to start of construction. Prepare specimens and tejt
in accordance with Uniform Building Code and standards iited therein.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
1.03
A.
Tests made on individual masonry units within the last four montls.
Current mortar test including mortar proportions.
Cunent grout test including grout proportions.
Prism test, consisting of five prisms, each made fiom the same materials and
under the same conditions as for the structure.
l) Include Tortal and gr-out prop,ortions used in test specimens.2) Substantiate Qaq each tlpe of masonry assemblag6 meets or exceeds
the required 28 day compressive strength (fm).
B. Corrective measures rgsultinq to$.*y test that failq shall be paid for by the installing
Contractor/Subcontraotor and shall be zubject to the following ionditions:
L Quantr{ and nature of additional testing, if required, will be determined by the
responsible consultant.
2. All additional tests shall be taken in the presence ofthe responsible consultant or
his representative.
3. Proof of noncompliance will make the installing Contractor/Subcontractor liablefor any corrective action which the responsible consultant feels is prudent,
including complete removal and replacement of defective materials.
4. Nothing contained herein is htended to imply that the installing
Contractor/Subcontractor does not have the right to hivb tests performed on ani
material at any time for his own information and job control so lbng as the Owner
a.
b.
c.
d.
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
I01400-2 l-7554.01
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
does not assume responsibility for costs or for giving them consideration when
appraising quatlty of materials.
TESTREPORTS
Reports of all tests shall be distributed by the testing agency as follows:
l. Copy - Contractor's Project Manager.
2. Copy - Contractor's Field Superintendent.
3. Copy - Applicable supplier or Subcontractor.
4. Copy - Owner.
5. Copy - Applicable Engheer.
6. Copy - Architect.
7. Other copies - as directed.
CoNTRACTOR'S QUALTTY CONTROL SYSTEM
General: The General Contractor shall establish a quality control system and shall
perform sufrcient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of his
Subcontractors, to ensure conformance to the Contract Documents for materials,
workmanship, constructio4 finish, functional performance and identification.
Contracto/s quality control system is the means by which he assures himself that his
construction cbmplies with thd requirements of the Contract Documents. Controls shall
be adequate to cover all construction operations.
Pre-Construction Conference:
l. Contractor shall schedule and conduct a pre-construction conference to review
ttre daailed quallty control and constniction requirements for each of the
materials and/or systems listed below, not less than l0 working days prior to
commencement of the applicable portion of the work.
a. Foundations.b. Cast-in-place concrete.c. Soil compaction.d. Structural steel.e. Metal deck,f Masonry.
2. The Contractor shall require responsible representatives ofeach party concerned
with that portion of the work to attend the conference, including but not limited
to the following:
a. Contractorsuperintendents.b. Materials supplie(s) or fabricator.c. Installation Subcontractor(s).d. Agency responsible for Contractor-fumished testing.
l-7554.01 01400-3
1.06
A.
B.
1.07
A.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
I
for
for
c.
3. The Architect, responsible Engineer and Owner's Testing Agency will be present
and shall be notified by the Contractor at least 5 days prior to the scheduled date
of each such conference.
4. Minutes of each conference shall be recorded by the Contractor and shall be
distributed by him in typed form to each party in attendance within 5 days ofthe
meeting. One copy of these minutes shall also be transmitted to the Owner's
representative and to the Architect for information.
Records: Contractor shall maintain correct records on an appropriate form for all
inspections and tests perforrned, instructions received from the Architect, responsible
En$neer or Testing Agency, and actions taken as a result of those instructions. These
records shall include the required inspections or tests, nature of defect, and corrective
action taken. Contractor shall document inspections and tests as required by each
section of the Specifi cations.
MANUFACTTJRER'S FIELD SERVICES
When specified in respective Specification sections, Contraclor shall require supplier or
manufacturer to provide qualified personnel to observe field conditions, conditions of
surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, testing and to make appropriate
recommendations.
Manufacture/s representative shall submit written report to the Architect and
responsible Engineer listing observations and recommendations.
INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY SERVICES
General: The Ov',ner will employ and pay for the services of an independent Testing
Agenry to perform the following inspectiong tests and other services. Semices slnll be
performed in accordance with requirements of governing authorities and with specified
standards.
1. Contractor shall cooperate with Testing Agency personnel and shall furnish tools,
sample ofmaterials, design mixes, equipment, and assistance as requested.
2. Contractor shall provide and maintain" for the sole use of the Testing Agency,
adequate facilitiei for the safe storage and proper curing of concrete testing
cylinders on the project site for the first 24 hours after casting as required by
ASTM C 31, Method ofMaking and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the field.
3. Contractor shall notify Testing Agency 24 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring testing or inspection services.
4. Contractor shall make arrangements with the Testing Agency and pay
additional samples 8nd tests made for the Contractor's convenience or
retesting of failed samples.
5. Retention of an independent Testing Agency by the Owner shall in no way relieve
the Contractor of responsibility for performing all work in accordance with
contract requirernents.
014004 l-7554.01
B.
c.
I
l
I
l
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
6. The Testing Agency inspector shall familiarize himself with all applicable portions
of the Contract Docuinents pertaining to his area of investigation prior to
performing his services.
Soil Material and Soil Compaction:
l. The Testing Agency will prepare one optimum moisture-ma"ximum density curve
for each type of soil encbuntered in subgrades under paved areas or areas to
receive co-nipacted fill. Ma:<imum densitids are to be d-etermined in accordance
with ASTMD 698.
2. Each type of borrow material will receive:
a. Mechanicalanalysis.b. Moisture-densitycumedetermination.c. Plasticityindexdetermination.
3. Compacted fill under structural slabs and subgrades under compacted fill or-paved
areas- shall be tested as indicated below. General site testing frequency shall be
determined by the Owner's Soil Engineer.
a. The top 12 inches of subgrade resulting from excavation shall have the
maximrim densrty at optimim moisture. Nlake at least one field test per 500
square feet ofarea, but in no case less tlan three tests.b. In each compacted fill layea make one field density test for every olerlaytqg
500 square ieet ofarea, but in no case less than three tests. Perform field
density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2167.
4. The relative density of a cohesionless, free-draining soil, expressed as a
percentagg is defined as its state of compactness with respect to the most loose
and most compact states at which it can be placed by laboratory procedures. The
relative density witl be based on the following formula, wherein the mar<imum
density is the highest dry unit weight of the soll minimum dursrty is lorvest dry
unit weight of tf,e soil, and in-place densrty is the dry unit weight of the soil in
place:
a. Relative Density (percent):
Max. Den. x (in-place den. - min. den.) x 100
In-place den. x (mo<. den. - min. den.)
Concrete Work:
l. Concrete inspection and testing will be made in accordance with building code
requirements, and Contract Documentq and will include the following:
a. Testing concrete for strength, slump, air content, temperature, and wetghtt
b. MakinE and testing concrete cylinders, including furnishing rylinder
containers for specimens.c. Inspection at the batching plant.
d. Tri'nsporting and storingof all specimens involved in testing and inspection.
Test iylinders are to be transported to laboratory not later than 24 hours
after casting.
l-7554.01 01400-5
a.
e. Inspection of mixing and placing of concrete at the site, including recording
of: amount and location of concrete placement, truck number and amount
of water added to each load of concrete tested, time of transit, time mixed
on job, time placement was completed, and any other pertinent information.f Slump Test: Test each truckload of concrete delivered to the Site. If slump
is greater than the upper limits specified in the Schedule of Concrete Mixes
in Section 03300, the concrete in that truckload will be rejected.g. Air Content: Test each truckload of concrete delivered to the Site. If air
content is less than the lower limits or greater than the upper limits specified
in the Schedule of Concrete Mxes in Section 03300. the concrete in that
truckload will be rejected.
Test Specimens:
a. The Testing Laboratory will take specimens of each class of concrete from
different locations on the job as following: At least one set of four cylinders
for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof of all concrete, but not less than
one set for any one day's operations.b. For concrete placed by pumpin& test specimens and concrete used for
determination of slump, air content, and weight are to be taken at the point
of placement of concrete into the forms.c. Samples will be obtained in accordance with ASTM C 172.d. Making, curing and subsequent handling of test cylinders, except as
modified hereiq shall be in accordance with ASTM C 31. Testing shall be
in accordance u,ith ASTM C 39.e. The cylinders shall be placed in laboratory storage under moist curing
conditions at approximately 70oF within 24 hours after molding, and
maintained therein until tested. Tests will be as follows:l) One cylinder shall be tested at 7 days for ffirmation.2) Two cylinders slnll be tested at 28 days for acceptance. The
acceptance test results shall be the average sfength of these two
cylinders.3) One cylinder shall be tested at 56 days for information.
Test Reports: Reports of cylinder tests shall be zubmitted as specified in Article
1.04 above within five days of laboratory testing. Test reports shall, as a
minimunL include:
a. Project data including project name and address, concrete supplier's delivery
ticket number and mix identification number, Testing Agency's test or
cylinder identification number, and location of pour.
b. Results of field testing at time of sampling including date and time of
sampling, amount of water added at site prior to sampling, ambient air
temperafure and concrete temperature, concrete slump and air content, and
concrete wet unit weight.c. Results of laboratory testing including date test specimens were transported
to laboratory, date and age of concrete at time of testing, compressive
strength of each cylinder tested, average compressive strength of tested
cylinders, and specified design strength ofconcrete represented by the test.
Additional Testing: Contractor shall bear the cost of testing and inspection
resulting as a consequence ofthe following:
a. Work not in compliance with the Contract Documents.
I
I
I
t
T
T
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
t
t
t
I
3.
4.
I
I01400-6 l-7s54.01
I
I
I
I
t
I
l
b. Testing requested by the Contractor or
o
Subcontractor
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
rylinders for early breaks, etc.
c. t'esting to verify the adequacy of work done without prior notice, without
properiupervision, or coritrary to standard construction practice'
5. Reinforcing Steel Inspection: Concrete reinforcing sh_all be ingpecle! prior^to
closing ofioncrete fo'rm work or placing of concrete.. Insp.ect all reinforcing for
confofinance with contract requirements. Submit written . rep_orts of all
inspections such in accordance wlith nrticte 1.04 on a weekly basis. Such rpports
shi[ included a description of each area inspected, deficiencies noted, and
conective action undertiken to resolve such deficiencies. Deficiencies observed
shall immediatelv be brought to the attention of the Contractor's Field
Superintendent airA neinforci-ng Placers Foreman. In the event deficiencies are
not corrected, or if an interpritation of the contract documents is required, the
Structural Engineer shall be irnmediatd notified.
6. Monitoring of Batch Plant Quality control: T-he lesting ASency ryttt qatgail a
continuoui record for each ilass bf concrete showing the results of each 28-day
acceptance test, the moving coefficient of variation of the last 30 acceptance tests,
and ihe movinc averase strennth of the last three (3) recorded. Records will be
maintained at fhe iob-site andwitt be submitted to the Architect and Structural
Engineer on a biweekly basis and within thr.ee_working days of the close of the
rep-orting poiod. Codfficient of variation shatl be computed in accordance with
ACI30l equation (3-l).
D. Structural Masonry:
L Prepare test specimens in accordance with the requirements of the goveming
building code.
2. Tests, consisting of three prisms each made in the field from materials currently in
,rse, ihall be coi'ducted foi each 5000 square feet, or lactign thereof, of structural
maionry tkoughout tle course of constiuction. Not less than two such tests shall
be conducted for the project.
3. Prism test result for 28 day test shall be approved prior to start ofconstruction.
4. Mortar and grout tests shall be conducted on materials used to construct the first
set of three -Drisms. In tle event such tests fail to achiwe the required strength,
perform addiiional testing as required by the Structural Engineer.
E. Structural Steel and Metd Fabrications:
l. The Testing Agency's inspector will perform his duties in such a way that ngit$r
fabrication-nor-ereition ii unnecessaiily delayed or impeded. In no case will the
inspector recommend or prescribe the method of repair of a defect'
2. Shop inspection by the Testing Agency for all _columns arrd 20/ o of beams and
gird;rs itratt inctirde examination of steel fo-r straightness -and . alignment,
Eonformance to length tolerances, fissures, mill scale, and other defects and
deformities as descibed in ASTM A 5, and examination of aforementioned
fabricated pieces for conformity with approved shop drawings. Testing of
welding will be performed as required herein.
zuch as additional
t-7554.01 01400-7
I
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
b.
J.
5.
Field inspection by the Testing Agenry of erected steel will be such as to assure
that the work conforms to specified requirements and will include:
Shop inspection may be deleted ifthe fabricator is an approved fabricator
and satisfies the requirements of the l99l Uniform Buidling Codg Section
306(0.
Inspection of field welding as required herein.
Ascertainment of proper fit and dignment.
Ascertainment of proper installation and tensioning ofbolts.
Ascertainment that Contractor's erection procedures adequately correct for
distortion and shrinkage h field welded assemblies and connections.
Reports of such measurernents shall be submitted to the Architect and
Structural Engineer within two days of completion of welding.
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.Welding and Materials:
Assernblies supporting structural elements: 1009/o
Assemblies supporting curtain wall elements: 20lo
The Testing Agency shall test field welds as follows:l) All welds 100% visual.2) All full or partid penetration groove welds in transfer elements:
1007o ultrasonic.3) All other full or partial penetration groove welded connections and
splices: l0% ultrasonic.
Inspection of welding by the Testing Agency will be such as to assure that
the work conforms to specified requirements, and will include:l) Ascertainment that electrodes used for manual shielded metal-arc
welding and the electrodes and flux used for submerged arc welding
conform to the requirements of Section 05120 Structural Steel.2) Ascertainment that the approved welding procedure and the approved
welding sequenc€ are followed without deviatioq unless specific
approval for change is obtained from the Structural Engineer.3) Ascertainment that the welding is performed only by welding
operators and welders who are properly certified. The Testing
Agency shall witness such qualification testing of welding operators
and welders, as may be required.4> Ascertainment that the fit-up, joint preparation, size, contour, extent
of reinforcement, and length and location of welds conform to
specified requirements and the contract drawings, and that no
specified welds are omitted or unspecified welds added without
approval of the Structural Engineer.
The Testing Agency shall perform tests in the Fabricator's shop as follows:l) All welds; 100% vizual.2\ All full or partial penetration groove welded connections and splices:
1007o ultrasonic.3) All other welds: l0plo magnetic particle.
Embedded plates and assernblies shall have all welded reinforcing tested by
magnetic particle and all stud connectors tested in accordance with Article 1.08 in
the following quantities:
a.
b.
c.
01400-8 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
d. Additiond testins will be required of:l) Forty perient inspection level: If more -than l0 percent of the' ultraioilcallv insp'ected welds are rejected, then an additional 20
peroent of ail such welds shall be ultrasonically.teste.d If lO.percent
bfthese additional welds are found to be rejectable, than an additional
20 percent of all such welds shall be ultrasonicqllV tested' If 10
perient of this group axe rejected, then all of the welds shall be
ultrasonicallv tested.2) Tur percent inspection lwel: If more than l0 percent-of the tested' weldi are reiecied. then an additional l0 percent of all such welds
shall be testdd. Tliis prooess shall be repealed until the rejection rate
drops below one in 10.3) Alliost of additional inspection required by this paragraph shall be
bome bv the Contractor.e. In addition, i'f defective welds are discovered, the remaining uninspected
welds shall ieceive such ultrasonic or magnetic particle inspection as may be
required by the Structural Engineer.f. Th'e weldi-ng inspector will liave the authority to reject weldments. Such
rejection mly b-e based on visual inspgction. where in his opinion the
wlldment would not pass a more detailed investigation.g. Reports by the Testiirg Agenry's inspector will co-ntain, as a minimum, an" adinuate fescription oTeaEtr wild teited, the idurtifring mark of the welder
respbnsible for ihe weld, a critique of any defects 19ted^by visual.inspection
or iesting, and a statement regaiding thaacceptability 9f t!9 weld tested, as
judged b! cunent A.W.S. staiaards. Reports-shall be distributed as early as
posiiUte
-but not later than one work- week after the tests have been
ierformed. The Structural Engineer shall b9 notified by phone if, in the
j:udgment ofthe inspector, test results reqrrire immediate comment.
h. 'Railiographic testing may-be substituted fbr ultrasonic.
6. High Strength Bolts:
a. Standaxd Bolts:l) Inspect the bolt tightness of l9lo of the- bolts (minimum .of 2),' sel6cted at random in each high strength bolted connection of
structural steel framing on the project. If rejectable bolts are found in
any connection, all tf,e remaining bolts in that connection slnll be
injpected for tightness. Inspecti6-n procedure s!4!!e in accordance
widh "specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490
Bolts" -aDDroved bv Research Council on riveted and Bolted
Structurai ioints of the Engineering Foundation (Research Council on
Structural Connections).b. Tension control (Self-Indicating) Bolts:l) Inspect tightness of lfflo (minimum of 2) of.the bolts, selected at' raniom ii'each hich strenlth bolted connection of structural steel
framing on the proj6ct in acdordance with a (l) above.
2) Perforiir a visial -inspection of all remaininC high strength bolted
connections to assureihat all torque-offsplines have been sheared.
3) When splines are not sheared, the TestingAgency shall determine that
proper 6olt tension has been achieved by the application of a properly
talibrated testing torque or the Contractor may, at his optioq-r-emove
and replace all -bolts-with unsheared splinesr -4l- .ort of additional
inspection required by this paragraph shall be borne by the
Contractor.
l-7554.01 01400-9
F. Metal Deck:
l. The Testing Agency will visually inse€ct all maal dcck to verify that material is in
acceptable condition and has been propcrty instdled.
2. The Testing Agenoy sha[ visndly impcct all deck welds prior to being covercd by
otherwork.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 -HGCUTION
Not Used
EI{DOF SECTION
01400-10 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN 01500
TEMPORARY F'ACILITMS AND CONTROLS
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI SI]MMARY
A. Section Includes:
L Electricity,LiShtinS.
2. Heat, Ventilation.
3. Telephone Service.
4. Water.
5. SanitaryFacilities.
6. Barriers.
7. Enclosures.
8. Protection of installed work.
9. Security.
10. Water control.
I l. Cleaning during construction.
12. Field offices and sheds.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01010 - Summary ofWork.
2. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
I.O2 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION
A. Provide temporary facitities and services at the time first needed at the site an$ Tatnta$
expand, andmodi$ the facilities as needed tkoughout the construction period and do
not remove until no longer needed.
B. Payment for Utilities:
l. utilities provided by city (electricity, water, sewer) will be at @ cost to
Contractor.
2. Utilities not provided by City (portable heater fuel, telephone) will be paid by
Contractor.
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 01500-l
o
SURAN1.03 QUALITY AS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. All temporary facilities and controls relating to,protection of life,-tpqttb and public
welfare
-shall -conform to applicable provisions of all local, state and federal laws, with
latest amendments.
B. Use qualified tradesmen for the installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities
wheri they will serve the total project construction work adequately and result in
minimum interference with performance of the work.
C. Relocate, modify, and extend facilities as required during the course of the work to
properly accommodate the entire work ofthe project.
I.O4 POWERA}{DLIGHTING
A. Provide all temporary power distributior\ devices and lighting
B. Provide necessary personnel, on overtime if necessary, to turn lights on and off at
beginning and end of day's work.
C. All temporary electrical work shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical
Code.
D. Provide 208 V. outlets and I l0 V. 60 rycle outlets in each building Locate outlets on
movable panelboards for relocation from time to time. Protect each outlet by indMdual
GFI breakers.
E. Preliminary lighting of any enclosed area must be accomplished _prior to installation of
temporary tig[tingl Preliininary light must be a minimurir of 5 fbotcandles per square
foot ofenclosed space.
F. After enclosure of the building provide temporary lighting for finish work in each room
as the work progresses.
G. Permanent lighting system shall be used for ternporary lighting as quickly as possible.
H. Maintain lighting and make routine repairs.
I.O5 HEAT, VENTILATION
A. Provide as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations, to
protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity.
B. The pennanent heating system in wiole, or in part, shall _not_be used for temporary_heat
with6ut the written pemrission of the Owner. If permission is granted, replace all filters
before Owner accepts building. Any operation of any part of the new permanent
heating system shall not constitute acceptance ofthe system.
C. Provide ventilation of enclosed areas to cure materials, to disperse humidity, and to
prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
D. Portable heaters shall be standard approved units complete with controls.
01500-2 l-7554.01
I
t
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
removal,and for fuel consumed by
I
I
t
I
I
E. Pay costs of installatiorg maintenance, operation and
portable heaters.
I.06 TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Provide telephone service to field office.
l. Standard telephone.
2. Cordless telephone.
3. Facsimile telecopy machine with dedicated line.
4. Provide bell on exterior of field ofrces.
B.
c.
r.07
A.
B.
1.08
A.
B.
c.
construction personnel.
I,O9 BARRIERS
A. Barricades, Waming and Lights:
l Provide traffic barriers where required to control vehicular and pedestrian traffic
around the site.
2. Comply with recognized standards and code requirements for the erection of
adeqirite barricadeJwherever needed to prevent accidents and losses.
3. Paint and provide illumination and flashing lights as appropriate to conditions.
B. Provide as required to prevent pubtc entry to construction ar€as and to protect existing
facilities and adjacent piopertiel from damage from construction operations.
C. Paint with appropriate colorg graphics, and warning signs-tg jnform personnel at the
site ofthe gel{erai public where exposure exists ofthe hazard being protected.
Pay costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges for local calls.
Toll charges shall be paid by the parfy who places the call.
WATER
Extend branch prptng with outlets located so that water is available by use of hoses.
Provide adequate supply of potable drinking water.
SA].IITARY FACILITIES
comply with governing regulations, including safety and.hedth.codes for the type,
num6ei, locati6q operaiiorfand maintenance of fixnries and facilities.
Install sanitary facilities in available locations which will serve the needs of personnel at
the project site.
Toilet rooms in existing buildings or in new construction will not be available for use by
t-7554.01 01500-3
o
lighting where appropriate and needed
flashing red lights where appropriate.
o
the recognition
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
D. Provide
including
of the facility,
E. Provide barriers around trees and plants desigrated to remain.
I.IO ENCLOSI.JRES
A. Provide temporary weather-tight closures of openings in exterior surfaces:
l. To provide acceptable working conditions and protection for materials.
2. To allow for temPorarY heating.
3. To prevent entry ofunauthorized persons.
4. Provide doors with self-closing hardware and locks.
1.II TEMPORARYFIREPROTECTION
A. Provide and maintain fire octinguishers, fire hoses and other equipment as necessary for
proper fire protection during construction. Such equipment is to be used for fue
protection only.
B. Comply with the applicable recommendations of NFPA No. l0 "Portable Fire
fxtiriglishers" for e,ach area of each construction actMty wherever combustible
materials, flammable liquids, and similar exposures to possible fires are present.
C. locate extinguishers where most convenient and effective for the intended purposes.
Store combustible materials in recognized fire-safe locations and containers.
I.I2 SCATtrOLDS ANID RUNWAYS
A. Provide scaffolds, runways, guard railq platforms, and similar ternporary construction,
as may be necessary for the performance ofthe Contract.
B. Facilities shall be oftype and arrangements as required for their specific use; shall be
substantially constructed, and well secured, shall comply with applicable rules,
1.13
A.
B.
regulations and State and local codes.
LADDERS, RAMPS A},ID STAIRS
Provide ladders, ramps, and temporary stairs for access to all levels of the construction
for general access by dl trades.
Individual contractors and zubcontractors shall furnish their own stepladders, scaffolds,
staglng, work platforms, and other facilities for use of their workmen and as necessary
to the expeditious completion of their work.
Provide required railings, closures, temporary partitions, safety protections, and waste
chutes as required by applicable safety laws and regulations and as necessary for safety
c.
ofall personnel.
D. Permanent stairways may be used for such purposes if adequately protected against
damage.
01500-4 l-7554.01
I
I
l
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
shaftsE.
1.14
A.
B.
c.
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
Proltdg temporary protection for installed products. Control traffic in immediate area
to rruIumrze damage.
Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
Protect finished floors and stairs from traffic, movement of heavy objects, and storage.
Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed zurPaces, on lawn and landscape
areas.
I.I5 SECURITY
A. Provide security program and facilities to protect Worb and Owner's operations from
unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft
I.16 WATERCONTROL
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide and operate pumping
equipment.
I.I7 CLEA}IINGDIJRINGCONSTRUCTION
A. Control accumulation ofwaste materials and rubbish; periodically dispose of oFsite.
B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other
contaminants during finishing operations.
1.18 FIELD OFFICES A}.ID SHEDS
A. Office: Weather-tight, with lighting, electrical out-lets, heating, cooling, and ventilating
equipment, and equipped with fumiture. Provide, in addition, space for projeCt
meetings, with tables and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.
B. Storage Shds for Tools, Materials, and Equipment: Weather-tight, with heat and
ventilation for Products requiring controlled -conditions, with adequate space for
organized storage and access, and lighting for inspection ofstored materials.
I.I9 OPERATIONS A}.ID TERMINATIONS
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in the use of temporary facilities at the project
sitC. Limit availability of facilitiis to essential and inteirded uses, so as to miniriire
waste and possibility of abuses and the resulting unsanitary and hazardous or dangerous
conditions.
B. Maintenance: Operate and maintain temporary facilities in good operating conditions
g"otSh the time of use and until removal is authorized. -Proteit from damage by
freezing temperatures and similar elements at the site.
C. Termination and Removal: At the time the need has ended for each temDorary facilitv.
or when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, oi at the time 6f
Substantial Completioir, promftly remove the faciliryunless requested by the Consuttant
to be retahed for a longer period of time. Completion or restore permanent work
Open wells and shall be enclosed as required by the Department of Public Safety.
t-7554.01
fs{t)')w/rorr or vmDl 01500-5
which may have been delayed or otherwise affected by the temporary facility. Rgplage
work which cannot be satisfactorily restored. Except as otherwise indicated, the
materials and equipment of temporary facilities remain the property of the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI CONSTRUCTIONFENCE
A. Provide 8'-0" high chain-link fence around entire perimeter of the building addition
project.
l. Fabric: 2" x9 gage diamond mesh.
2. Posts: Set at l0'-0u mardmum spacing, set in concrete.
B. Gates:
L 2-leaf swinging vehicle gate, l2'-0" wide.
2. Single leaf pedestrian gate, 3'-0" wide.
C. Provide emergency exiting through the construction barricade of new and existing
building during duration ofthe project.
PART 3 -E)GCUTION
Not Used
ENDOF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I01500-6 t-7554.0r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
sEcTroN 01580
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
PART 1 - GENERAL
I.OI SI]MMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project Identification Sigrr.
2. Maintenance.
3. Removal.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01010 - Summary ofWork.
2. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Field offices
and sheds.
r.o2 QUALTTYASSURANCE
A. Design sign and structue to withstand 100 miles /hr wind velocity.
B. Sign Painter: Engaged as professional sign painter for not less than three years.
C. Finisheq Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration
of construction.
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Show content, layout, lettering, colors foundatio4 structure, sizes, and grades of
members.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2,OI SIGNMATERIALS
A. Structure and Framing: New or used, wood, structurally adequate.
B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 314 nch
thiclg standard large sizes to minimize adequate joints.
C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized, aluminur4 or brass.
D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quallty, two coats. Colors designated by Architect.
t-7554.01 01580-l
o
E. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, contrasting colors
PART 3 -DGCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
by Architect.
A. Install projecl identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Owner-Contractor
Agreement.
B. Erect at designated location.
C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist
wind loadings.
D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely.
E. Paint sight-exposed surfaces of sigrr, supports, and framing.
3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
A. One painted sigrr of construction, design, and content shown on drawings, locations
designated.
B. Content:
l. Project title, logo and name of Owner as shown on Contract Documents.
2. Names and titles of Authorities.
3. Names and titles of Architect and consultants.
4. Name of Prime Contractor and major subcontractors.
C. Graphic Design, Colors, Style oflettering: Designated by Architect.
3.03 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain sigrs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damages.
3.04 REMOVAL
A. Rernove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of project and restore
the area.
END OF SECTION
o
designated
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I01580-2 l-7554.01
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
sEcTroN 01600
MATERIALAND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Contractor's requirements for selecting products.
2. Delivery, Storage and Handling.
3. Manufacturer'slnstructions.
4. Product Options.
5. Products List.
6. SystemsDemonstration.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.
2. Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
3. Section 01400 - Quality Control.
4. Section 01631 - Product Substitutions.
5. Section 01730 - Operations and ldaintenance Data.
I.O2 DEF'IMTIONS
A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms
used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes,"
"accessorieg" and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well
recognized meanings in tlte construction industry.
l "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Worlg whether purchased
for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term -"product"
includes thi terms "material," "iquipmeni,"'"systern," and terms of similaiintent.
a. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product namg
including make or model designatio4 indicated in the manufacturer's
published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
I
I
I
t
I
2. uMaterials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed,
lniqhed, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of
the Work.
l-7554.01 01600-1
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.04
A.
B.
3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually
operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.
PRODUCTS
Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in
writing by the Architect.
Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
l. Desigrr, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and shop
practices.
2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be
interchangeable.
3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical and by the same
manufacturer.
4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to
unless variations are specifically approved in writing.
6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an establislrcd Sample,
the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches
satisfactorily.
a. Where no product available within the specified category matches
satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply
with provisions of the Contracl Documents concerning "substitutions" for
selection of a matching product in another product category, or for
noncompliance with specified requirements.
7. Vizual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase ". . .
as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures. . ." or a similar
phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified
requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern and texture from the
product line selected.
Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is
designed or is specified.
DELIVERY, STORAGE A}ID HANDLING
Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to
avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the site.
Transport products by methods to avoid product damage; deliver in undamaged
condiiion in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging dry.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I01600-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Provide
damage.
personnel to handle products by
o
methods to prevent soiling or
D. Promptly inspect deliveries to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities
are correct, and products are undamaged.
E. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instruction, with seals and labels
intact ind legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within
temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instruction.
F. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above gFoul$.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covenng; provtde
ventilation to avoid condensation.
G. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing
with foreigrr matter.
H. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to ensure
produits are uidamajed, and are maintained rinder required conditions.
-
I. Store heavy materials away fiom project sfircture in a manner that will not endanger
the supporting construction.
I.O5 MANUFACTI'RER'SINSTRUCTIONS
A. When Contract Documents require that installation of Work shall comply with
manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to
parties involved in the installatio4 including one copy to Architect and one copy to the
Contractor.
l. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the Project site during installation and
until completion of the Project.
B. Ilandle, install, connect, cleaq condition and adjust products in strict accord witl such
instructions and in conformity with specified requir€ments.
l. Should Project conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's
instructions, consult with Architect for further instructions.
2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.
C. Perform Work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory
step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract
Documents.
I.06 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards
meeting those standards.
or by Descripfion Only: Any product
o
equipment and
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers Accompanied by the Term
"approved
-zubstitution", "or equal" or "or approved equal": Submit a request for
approval for any manufacturer not specifically named following procedures in Section
01631 - Product Substitutions.
l-7554.01 01600-3
t
Request
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
l. Submit each request on a completed Substitution form located at the end
of this Section.
C. Products Specified by Naming Several Manufacturers or Term "approved substitution":
Products of named manufacturers meeting Specifications, no options, no substitutions
allowed.
D. Products Specified by naming Only One lvlanufacturer: No options, no substitutions
allowed.
E. Architect will review requests for product options, where permitted, with reasonable
promptness, and noti$, in writing, of the decision to accept or reject the request.
I.O7 PRODUCT LIST
A. Within 15 days after signhg of Agreement, submit 3 copies of complete list of major
products proposed for use, with generic name of product, name of manufacturer, trade
name, and model number ofeach product.
L Provide a written explanation for omissions of data" and for known variations
from Contract requirements.
2. Coordinate the product list schedule with the Contracto/s Progress Schedule and
the Schedule of Submittals.
3. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to the Contractor within
2 weeks of receipt of the product list schedule. No response within this time
period constitutes no objection to listed s or products, but does not
constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract
Documents. The Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product
selections, containing a briefexplanation ofreasons for this action.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI PRODUCT SELECTION
A. General Product Requirements: Provide undamaged products that comply with the
Contract Documents, an{ unless otherwise indicate4 unused at the time of installation.
l. Provide products complete with all accessories, trfuq finish, safety guards and
other dwices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended
use and effect.
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.OI SYSTEMSDEMONSTRATION
A. Prior to final inspectioq demonstrate operation of each system to Architect and Owner.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation" adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and
systems, using the operation and maintenance data as the basis of instruction.
0r600-4
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
PROJECT: V.il Public work3 . Ph!s. ll - Melnlcnancc erd Stor.gc Eullding
SPECIFIED ITEM:
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Date
Paragreph D6cription
The undeEigned r€quesG co||3ideration of the tollo lng:
PROPOSED
Atached (hta indudes prodLFt d6crldim, tPccilicdons, drdvlng8, phdographs, pe ormance and t€st (bta adequate tor e\aluation of
the requ6t; appli:able portions ot the d# are dearty ldentified.
Attached (hta also tncludos a d#iled descdptlon of changG to the Cor ract Oocumcnts which the proPced subctitution will require for
itg proper iffitellalion.
The undersigned certifies that th3 tolkrwing Fragraptrs, unless modfed by aftacfimsr s, are conect:
1 . Th€ proposed subGtiru on do€6 ncd affed dim€nsbns shown on Dt6'vings.
2. Th€ undcEigned will pay for ohang€s to th€ bulldlng &slgn, Inoluding enginccrlng d6bn, detailing, and constnrction coGts caused
by the ]lqu€ded subGtihrtion.
3. The prcpccd subGilitutbn will har€ no advqse effe.t m other trad€s, ltE condruclbn s.fi€dule, or sp€cmed warrar y
reouiremenF.
4. Mainlenarce and servic. pa 6 will be localty aailable for lho plopos€d substitutlon.
The undaFigned further stebs that the functim, app€annoe, lnd quelity of the prcpoeed subEditutbn are equi\Elent or superior to lhe
specmed it m.
Submiued by:
Signafure For Use by the d6ign consulhnt
tlAccepted I I Accepted as notcd
I I NdAccepted [ | Received too late
BY
Remarks
Firm
Address
Telephone
Attachments:
iilinm, DESTcN
B.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
SECTION 01631
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for
substitutions made after award of the Contract.
B. Related Sections:
1.02
l.03
A.
B.
L Section 01090 - Reference Standards: Applicability of industry standards to
products specified.
2. Section 01600 - ldaterials and Equipment: Procedural requirements governing
the Contractor's selection ofproducts and product options.
DEFINITIONS
Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modiff the meaning of
other terms used in the Contract Documents.
Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of
construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award
of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not
considered substitutions :
1. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior
to award of Contract are considered as included in the Contract Documents and
are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.
2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect.
3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract
Documents.
4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations
and orders iszued by governing authorities.
SIJBMITTALS
Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in
the form and in accordance with procedures required for Change Order proposals.
Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each
request. Include related Specification Section and Drawings numbers. Provide
complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitufions,
and the following informatio4 as appropriate:
t-7554.0r 01631-l
l. Product Data, including Drawings and
installation procedures.
products, fabrication and
o
description of
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
c.
2. Samples, where applicable or requested.
3. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with
those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as
size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect.
4. Coordinate informatioq including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and
sepaxate Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed
substitution.
5. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction
Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution.
Indicate the effect oftle proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.
6. Cost information" including a proposal of tlre net change, if any in the Contract
Sum.
7. Certification by the Contractor that the zubstitution proposed is equal to or better
in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that
it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractot's
waiver of rights to additional payment or time, that may subsequently become
necessary because ofthe failure ofthe substitution to perform adequately.
Architect's Action: Within one week of receipt of tle request for zubstitutiorq the
Architect will request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation
of the request. Wittrin 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week 6f receipt of the
additional information or documentatioq which ever is later, the Architect will notifu
the Contractor ofacceptance or rejection ofthe proposed zubstitution. Ifa decision on
use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use
the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in the fomr of a Change Order,
when time or change in Contract arnounts are involved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI STIBSTITUTIONS
A. Conditions: The Contracto/s substitution request will be received and considered bv
the Architect when one or more of the followiirg conditions are satisfied, as determinef,
by the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record
noncompliance with these requirements.
L Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required.
2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents.
3. The request is timely; fully documented and propedy submitted.
4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the
Contract Documents.
01631-2 t-7554.01
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
5. The specified product or rnethod.of construction cannot be provided within the
Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the prorluct or method
cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or
coordinate actMties properly.
6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary
approval by a goveming authority, and the requested substitution can be
approved.
7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy
conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting
responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear.
8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in amanner
that is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that
the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.
9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with
other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution
can be coordinated.
10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a uralranty
required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the
proposed substitution provide the required warranty.
B. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data
or Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract
Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does
it constitute approval.
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 01631-3
B.
c.
D.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
sEcTroN 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI ST]MMARY
A. Section Includes:
t.02
A.
B.
l. SubstantialCompletion.
2. Final lnspection.
3. CloseoutSubmittals.
4. Final Adjustment Costs.
5. Warranties.
6. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
Related Sections:
l. Section 01010 - Summary ofWork.
2. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
3. Section 01710 - Final Cleaning.
4. Section 01720 - Projea Record Documents.
5. Section 01730 - Operating and Maintenance Data.
STIB STA}ITIAL COMPLETION
The Contractor shall submit written certification that project, or designated portion of
project, is substantially complete and shall request, in writing, a final inspection.
Should the Architect determine that the work is substantially complete, a punch-list will
be prepared listing deficiencies that need to be corrected before final acceptance. A
notice bf substanti-al completion with the deficiencies noted will be issued.
Should the Architect determine that the work is not substantially complete, the
Contractor wilt immediately be notified, in writing stating reasons. After Contractor
completes work, a certificaiion and request for final inspection shall be resubmitted.
Comply with procedures stated in General Conditions of the Contract for issuance of
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
Owner may occupy designated portions of the Project of the purpose.of installation of
equipment, undeifrovisi-on stat;d in Certificate of Substantial Completion.
l-7554.01 01700-l
I.O3 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Contractor shall submit written certification that:
l. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
2. Project has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of Owner's
Representatives and are operational.
I.O4 CLOSEOUTSUBMITTALS
A. Submit before final payment request.
B. Project Record Drawings: Refer to Section 01720.
C. Maintenance Manuals: Refer to Section 01730.
D. Evidence of Payments, and Release of Claims: The Contractor is required to submit the
following before his final Application of Payment:
l. Contractor's Affidavit of Payments of Debts and Claims: AIA G706.
2. Contractor's AfEdavit of Release of Liens (Claims): AIA G706A with:
a. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: AIA G707.b. Contractot's release ofwaivers of claims.c. Separate release of waivers of claims for subcontractors, suppliers, and
other with claim rights, against property of Owner, together with list of
those parties.d. Project Record Documents, and certification as to accuracy.
3. All submittals shall be duly executed before delivery.
E. Warranties and Bonds: As specified in individual sections.
F. Spare Parts and Materials: As specified in indMdual sections.
G. Keys and Keyrng Schedule.
H. Spare Parts and Materials.
I. Evidence of Payments and Release of Claims.
1.05 FINAL ADruSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit final statement of accounting to the Owner.
B. Statement shall reflect all adiustments:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I01700-2
l. Original Contract Sum.
t-7554.O1
I
I
I
o
and deductions
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Additions resulting from:
a. Prwious change orders.b. Unit prices.c. Other adjustments.d. Deductions for uncorrected work.e. Deductions for reinspection payments.
1.06 PREPARATIONFORFINALPAYMENT
A. Iszuance of a Certificate of Final Payment is subject, but not limited, to the following
conditions:
l. The Contractor's Project Superintendent shall remain in attendance,_full_time on
site, on the project- until ill punch list items have been completed to the
satisfaction ofthe Ovvner and the Architect.
2. Project Superinturdent as referenced herein is defined as the Contractor's General
Suferintendent who has served on site, on a full-time basis during the duration of
the project.
I.O7 POST-CONSTRUCTIONINSPECTION
A. Prior to expiration of one year from date of final acceptance, the Architect will conduct
6-month arid t t-month inipections to determine whetlier corrective work is required.
B. Contractor will be notified in writing of all deficiencies.
C. Corrective work must start on noted deficiencies within l0 days of receipt of
notifi cation to Contractor.
I.O8 PROJECTRECORDDOCIJMENTS
A. Refer to Section 01720 - Project Record Documents.
B. Store documents sepaxate from those used for construction.
C. Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal any work until required
information has been recorded.
D. At contract closeout, submit documents with transmittal letter to the Architect
containing date, Project title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and
signature of Contractor.
1.09 MISCELLAI.IEOUS KEYS, SWITCHES, ETC.
A. At the completion ofthe project, all loose keys and wrenches shall be accounted for and
turned over to the Owner, including:
l. Hose bibb keys.
2. Adjustment keys and wrenches for door closers and panic hardware.
3. Keys for electrical switches, electrical panels, etc.
l-7554.01 01700-3
1.10 WARRA}ITIES
A. All warranties for all equipment shall be included in the O & M Manual.
B. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall remedy any defects due to faulty materials
or workmanship and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall
appear in his work within a period of one year from the date of Ngtigg of_Acceptance
and in accordance with the terms of any special warranties provided in the contract.
The Owner shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.
C. Upon completion of his worlg the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect in duplicate,
a written wa.rranty based on the provision of this Article properly signed and notarized.
Warranty shall be addressed to the Owner.
D. Execute Contracto/s submittals and assemble documents executed by zubcontractors,
suppliers, and manufacturers. Provide table of contents and assemble in binder with
durable plastic cover.
E. Submit material prior to final application for payment. For e.quipment put into use with
Owner's permission during constructioq zubmit within l0 days after first operation. For
items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion" provide
updated srbgi{al within ten days after aoceptanse, listing date of acceptance as start of
warranty period.
I.I I OPERATION A}.ID MAINTENAI{CE DATA
A. Refer to Section 01730 - Operating and Maintenance.
B. Mechanical - By Mechanical Subcontractor: See Division 15.
C. Electrical - By Electrical Subcontractor: See Division 16.
I.I2 DEMONSTRATIONS
A. Refer to Section 01730 - Operating and Maintenance.
B. Mechanical - By Mechurical Subcontractor: See DMsion 15.
C. Electrical - By Electrical Subcontractor: See Division 16.
1.I3 SPARE PARTS ANID MAINTENA}ICE MATERIALS
A. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each
Section, in addition to that used for construction of work. Coordinate with Owner,
deliver to Project site and obtain receip prior to final payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NotUsed
PART 3 -DGCUTION
Not Used
t
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I01700-4
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN 01710
FINAL CLEANING
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Clean-up during construction.
2. Final clean-up procedures.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
2. Section 01700 - Contract Close-out.
I.O2 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION
A. Clean-up during construction:
L The project shall be kept free from all surplus materiat waste material, dirt and
rubbish cursed by construction operations.
2. Leave the work clean and spotless, unless more exact requirements are required.
3. In case of dispute, the Owner may remove all such items and charge the cost of
such removal to the Contractor.
B. Subcontractorclean-up:
l. Each subcontractor shall perform daily clean-up for that respective trade.
2. Transport rubbish to an on-site location designated by the Contractor who will
arrange for its removal.
C. Cleaners; With the exception of clean-up of the site and cleaning specifically assigned
undervarious sections ofthe specifications, all final clean-up ofexterior and interior of
the building shall be done by prbfessional cl'eaners.
l. Exterior: In addition to items specified below, any new surfaces on exterior,
concrete, metal, etc., slnll be carefully and thoroughly cleaned.
2. Glass: Both sides of all glass in work areas shall be carefully and thoroughly
cleaned by professional window cleaners and left absolutely clean and free from
paint, greisi, dirt, etc.
3. Hardware: Clean and polish all hardware and leave clean and free from paing
8r@s, dirt, etc.
l-7554.01 01710-l
4. Plumbing: Clean and polish all plumbing fixtures, fittings, and exposed plated
piping. Leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. Remove all labels.
5. Electrical: Clean and polish all electric fixtures, fittingt, including glassware,
switchplates, etc., and leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc.
6. Equipment: Carefully and thoroughly clean all items of equipment, mechanical,
electrical, cabinets, ductwork, etc.
7. Floors: Thoroughly clean all floors. Mop resilient floor coverings with warm
water and mild detogent as recommended by manufacturer of the tile, tlen
thoroughly machine buff Vacuum and clean carpeting. Damp mop or scrub
concrete floors qs required to leave them thoroughly clean when site orbuilding is
turned over to the Owner.
D. Completion: The entire work inside and out, and the entire premises shall be in first-
class, clean condition upon completion before being accepted by Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 -E)GCUTION
Not Used
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
EI{D OF SBCTION
otTto-z t-7554.01
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
t
I
SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI ST]MMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Record document definition.
2. Recording and content.
3. lvlaintenancerequirements.
4. Submittalrequirements.
B. Related Sections
l. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
2. Section 01730 - Operating and Maintenance Data.
I.O2 DEFINITIONS
A. Project Record Documents are intended to indicate all clanges and deviations from
ori{inal contrsct documents and permanently record the "As-Built" condition of
material, equipment and structure.
B. Project Record Documents include the following:
l. Contract Drawings.
2. Project Ndanud.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders.
5. ModificationsandClarifications.
6. Approved Shop Drawings.
7. Approved Product Data.
8. Manufacturer's Certifications.
9. Project Test Results
l-7554.01 0t720-l
I.O3 STIBMITTALS
A. Submit project record documents in conformance with Section 01700.
B. "As-Built" drawing submittal shall be approved prior to final payment.
1.04 QUALTTYASSURANCE
A. RecordingRequirements:
l. Use different colored pencil or pen for each system.
2. Provide color legend.
3. Provide symbol technique identical to contract drawings.
4. Record data prior to permanently concealing work.
B. MaintenanceRequirements:
1. Record documents shall be available for inspection by the Owner, Architect and
Consultants.
2. Update record documents weekly.
3. Maintain separate set of documents for record use.
4. Maintain documents in cleaq dry legible condition.
C. Record Drawing Content:
l. Record detail and dimension changes.
2. Locate concealed work including:
a. Interior and exterior utilities.b. Valves.c. Dampers.d. Controls.e. Junction boxes.f. Cleanouts.
S. Access doors.
D. Record Specification Content:
l. Manufacturer, catalog number and trade name of product installed.
2. Changes.
3. Pertinent data not originally specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t01720-2 l-7554.01
I
I
PARr3 -E)GCrrrION
I
I
T
I
oo
END OF SECTION
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
|
1-7554.0r 0t720-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01730
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SIJMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Format and content of manuals.
2. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
3. Schedule of submittals.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittals procedures.
2. Section 01300 - Submittals: Shop drawings, product data, and samples'
3. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions.
4. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Systems demonstration.
5. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Closeout Procedures.
6. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents.
7. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Warranties and bonds.
8. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and
maintenance data.
I.O2 QUALITYASSI.JRA}ICE
A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of
described products.
I,O3 FORMAT
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
B. Binders; Commercial quality, 8-ll2 x ll inches, thrggring binders with hardback,
cleanabfe, plastic covers; oneiich maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used,
correlate data into related consistent groupings.
c. cover: Identifu each binder with typed or printed title oPERATION AND
MAINTENA){Cfi nqSfnuCTIoNS; liit titte of -Project identify subject matter of
contents.
t-7554.01 01730-l
D. Arrange content by systems, under section numbers and sequence ofTable ofContents
ofthis Project Manual.
E. Provide tabbed fly leaffor each separate product and system, with typed description of
product and major component parts of equipment.
F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper.
G. Drawings:
1. Provide with reinforced punched binder tabs.
2. Bind inwithtext.
3. Fold larger drawings to size oftext pages.
I.O4 CONTENTS, EACH VOLI.]ME
A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect, Engineer and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of
products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.
B. For Each Product or Systern: List nameg addresses and telephone numbers of
zubcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component
parts, and data applicable to installation; delae inapplicable information.
D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts o{
equipmEnt and syitems, to
-show
control and flow diagrams. Do not usd ProjecrRecord
Documents as maintenance drawings.
E. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of
instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturet's instructions.
F. Warranties and Bonds: bind in copy of each.
I.O5 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS A}.ID FIMSI{ES
A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data" with qatalgs
number, sizg compositioq and color and tocure desigrrations. Provide information for
re-ordering custom manufactured products.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for
cleaning agents and methods, precautions qgahst detrimental agents and methods, and
recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C. Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: Include prgduct- data listing
applicable reference standards, chemical compositio4 and details of installation.
Plovide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional Requirements: As Specified in individual Specifications sections.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I01730-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
with tabbed
N.
o.
P.
I
I
t
t
I
I
E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data,
for insertion of data.
fly sheet and space
1.06 MANUAL FOREQUIPMENT A].lD SYSTEMS
A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of.uryt or system,.and
component paris.' Gve function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
con&tions. Ilnchde performance curves, with erigineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications.
C. Include as-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, bfe"k-tq and routine normal . operating
initructioins and sequences. Include re0irlatioru control, stopping, shut-down,. and
emergency instructions. Include sunmer, winter, and any speclal operatmg rnstructlons.
E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and grride for trouble-shooting;
disassemblS repilr, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing,
and checking instructions.
F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
G. Include manufacturet's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
J. Provide as-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with as-installed color coded piping
diagrams.
L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to
flow and control diagrams.
Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended
quantities to be maintained in storage.
Include test and balancing reports.
Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Specifications sections
Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space
for insertion ofdata.
I.O7 INSTRUCTIONOFOWNERPERSONNEL
A. Before final inspectio4 instruct Ovmer's designated personnel in operation, adjustment,
and maintenanie of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. For
l-7554.01 01730-3
o
requiring
o
instructions
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
T
I
I
equpment
six months.
seasonal operation, perform for other seasons within
B. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis of instruction. Review contents of
manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
C. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when need for
such data becomes apparent during instruction.
I.O8 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents
before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.
B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction
and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.
C. Submit on copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection.
Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content
of documents as required prior to final submittal.
D. Submit two copies of rwised volumes of data in final form within ten days after final
inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - E)GCITTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01730-4 l-7554.01
I
t
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
T
sEcTroN 02010
SIIBSIJRFACE EXPLORATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Reference to Owner-provided Soil and Foundation Investigation'
2. Interpretation and use.
3. Examination of site.
B. Related Documents:
1. Geotechnical Data: Owner's Soils Report.
2. Section 01400 - Quality Control.
3. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Soils engineering services requirements.
I.O2 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION
A. Owner-provided soilsinvestigation.
l. The Owner's Soil Engineer,
2. Responsibility and payment for soils engineering services for quality control, and
earthwork shall be included in the respective sections.
B. DesignRequirements:
l. The Soils Report was prepared for desigrr purposes in accordance with generally
accepted soil and foundation engineering practices.
2. No other warranty expressed or implied is made as to the professional advice
included in the report.
C. PerfiormanceRequirements:
l. The exploratory borings were spaced in order to obtain a comprehensive picture
of the subsoil condition.
2. Erratic soil conditions may occur between test holes. If such conditions are found
during construction opera:tions, the Architect and Owner shall be notified.
t-7554.01 02010-l
o
CONDITTO1.03
A.
B.
PROJECT
by the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
Not Used
ENDOF SECTION
The Contractor shall oramine the site before submitting Bid to determine character of
materials to be encountered and all conditions which will €ffect work, time and cost.
Bench marks, monuments, and other reference points, shall be provided and maintained
02010-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
sEcTroN 02060
BI'ILDING DEMOLMON
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SI]MMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Demolish designated structures including fences, concrete slabs on grade, and
asphalt paving.
2. Remove materials from site.
3. Remove foundations and demolish basement floor slabs.
4. Remove underground tanks and piping.
5. Disconnect, cap, and identi$ utilities.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary controls: Barricades,
fences, landscape protectioq and dust control.
2. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents.
3. Section 02110 - Site Clearing: Site clearing outside periphery of existing
structures.
4. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
t.02 QUALITYASSURAI.ICE
A. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits.
l. Coordinate with regulating authorities in order to shut offall electric, gas, water
and sewer connections.
2. Pay for all sendce changes and charges caused by street cutting to shut offutility
connections of the site.
B. Coordinate with regulating authorities and pay any fees or charges required to obtain
water for dust control.
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule under provisions of Section
01300.
B. Submit record documents under provisions of Section 01700.
I
I l-7554.01 02060-l
1.04
A.
B.
PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
Existing Condition:
l. Condition of the Structures:
a. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and discontinued in use prior to
the start of the work. The Ovvner assumes no responsibility for the actual
condition ofthe structures to be demolished.b. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be
maintained by the Owner insofar as practicable. Variations within the
structures may occur by the Olvnerls removal and salvage operations prior
to start of demolition.
2. Protection:
a. The contractor shall be fully responsible for protection of existing buildings
srrrounding property and all persons. The Contractor shall also provide all
shoring, temporary barricades, temporary enclosures and zuch tarpaulins as
necessaq/ to protect the ocisting buildings and their contents from dam4ge
of any kind caused by demolition work or weather conditions. Immediately
following removal of mechanical and electrical apparatus, cap or plug all
open piping, and conduits, etc.
Environmental Conditions:
l. Pollution Controls:
a. Use water sprinkling temporary enclozureg and other suitable methods as
necessaf,y to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air,
to the lowest level of air pollution practical for the condition of work.
Comply with a[ goveming regrrlations.b. Clean adjacent remaining structure and improvements of all dust, dirt, and
debris caused by demolition operations. Return areas to condition existing
prior to the start of the work.
2. Explosives: The use of orplosives will not be permitted.
3. Traffic:
a. Conduct demolition operations and the removal of debris to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities.b. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities
without permission from the Architect. Provide alternate routes around
closed or obstructed traffic ways and circulation routes required by Owners
operations.
4. Utilities:
a. Before disconnecting, removing, plugging or abandoning any o<isting
utilities serving the building notify all utility corporationg companies,
individuals or local authorities concerned. Disconnecl electrical service
and/or cut off and cap gas, water and sewer senrices at the mains on the
property or in the street as required by the responsible utility company, or
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
t02060-2
ffih)-ws.€#,1€-
l-7554.01
I
I
t
t
t
t
t
I
t
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
local authority, or relocate as shown on the Drawings. Rernove and cut off
and plug or cap all utilities within the existing building areas, except those
designated to remain.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI SALVAGE
A. Items of salvageable value to the Contractor may be removed from the structure as the
work progresses.
B. Salvaged items must be transported from the site as they are removed.
C. Storage or sale or removed items on the site will not be permitted.
PART 3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI PREPARATION
A. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring if
required.
B. Protect existing landscaping materials, sppurtenances, structures which are not to be
demolished.
C. Disconnect, remove, and cap designated utility lines within demolition areas.
D. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify utilities and indicate capping locations
on Project Record Documents.
BUILDING DEMOLMON
Demolish buildings completely and remove from the site. Use such methods as required
to complete the work within the limitations of goveming regulations.
Small structures may be removed intact only when acceptable to the Architect and
approved by the roadway authorities having jurisdiction.
Proceed with demolition in a systematic manner, from the top of the structure to the
ground. Complete demolition work above each floor or tier before distributing any of
the supporting members on the lower levels.
Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by means of hoists, derricks,
or other suitable methods.
Break up and remove concrete slabs-on-grade, unless otherwise shown to remain.
Locate demolition equipmant th,roughout the structure and remove materials so as to
not impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors or framing.
3.O2
A.
B.
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
l-7554.01 02060-3
c.
3.04
A.
B.
c.
D.
3.03 BELOW-GRADECONSTRUCTION
A. Demolish foundations walls, utility lines, manholes and related structures to the
following depths.
l. General Site: Remove to 3 feet below existing grade.
2. Structural areas within 5 feet either side of foundation walls and column bearinc
pads: Remove completely to a depth of at least 3 feet below bearing elevation oT
foundations.
3. Utility Trenches: Where existing below ground structures conflict with new
utility trenches, the obstructions shall be completely removed and back filled with
structural fill.
B. Demolish concrete basement floor slabs into pieces no larger than four square feet.
Slabs are not required to be removed if location below the elevations described in
paragraph 3.03 above.
Pump out buried tanks located within demolition area. Remove underground tanks,
components, and piping from site.
FILLING BASEMENTS A}ID VOIDS
Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from the demolition of structures
in conformance with Section 02200.
Use satisfactory soil materialq consisting of stone, gravel, and sand, free from debris,
traslq frozen materials, roots and other organic matter, and stones.
Prior to placement of fill materials. Insure that areas to be filled are free of standing
water, frost, fiozen material, trash and debris.
After fill placement and compaction, grade the surface to meet adjacent contours and to
provide surface drainage.
3.05 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISI{ED MATERIALS
A. Remove from the site all debris, rubbis[ and other materials resulting from demolition
operations.
B. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials
encountered.
C. lurning of removed materials from demolished structures will not be permitted on the
slte.
D. Transport all materials removed from demolished structures and dispose of offthe site.
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I020604
END OF SECTTON
1-7554.01
I
t
T
I
T
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
T
sEcrroN 02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLMON
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Extent of selective demolition work is indicated on Drawings.
B. Types ofSelectiveDemolitionWork:
l. Demolition requires the selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of the
following:
a. Portions of building structure indicated on Drawings and as required to
accommodate new construction.b. Removal of interior partitions as indicated on Drawings.
c. Removal of doors and frames indicated "remove."d. Removal and protection of existing material, fixtures and equipment items
indicated "salvage" or reused.
I.O2 SIJBMITTALS
A. Schedule:
l. Submit schedule indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for
selective demolition work-td th-e Owner for review prior to commencement of
work. Include coordination for shut-ofi, capping and continuation of utility
services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection.
a. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to enzure
unintemrpted progress of Owner's on-site operations.
I.O3 PROIECTCONDITIONS
A. Occupancy:
l. Owner's personnel will be continuously occupylqg areas_of -the building
immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective
demolition-work in manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's
normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of
demolitioh activities which will swerely impact Owner's normal operations.
Secure Owner's approval of all activities which will impact normal operations.
B. Condition of Structures:
I . The Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structres to
be demolished.
l-7554.01 02070-l
c.
a. Conditions existing at time of commencement of contract will be maintained
by the Owner insofar as practical. However, variations within structure may
occur by the Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of
selective demolition.
Partial Removal:
l. Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to the Owner may be
rernoved from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site
as they are removed.
a. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
Protection of Persons and Property:
L Provide temporary banicades and other forms ofprotection as required to protect
Owner personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work.
Remove protective dwices at completion of work.
a. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of
Owner personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of
building.
Traffc:
l. Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walls, and other adjacent occupied or
used facilities.
a. Do not close, block or otlerwise obsnuct streets, walks or other occupied
or used facilities without written permission from authorities having
jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafrc
ways if required by goveming regulations.
Explosives:
l. Use of explosives will not be permitted.
Utility Services:
l. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remair\ keep in sendce, and protect against
damage during demolition operafi ons.
a. Do not intemrpt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except
when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
temporary services during intemrptions to existing utilities as acceptable to
the Owner. Pay special attention not to disturb computer power systems or
associated grounds.
Environmental Controls :
l. Use water sprinHing, temporary enclosures, and other zuitable methods to limit
dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with
governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
D.
F.
G.
02070-2 t-7554.01
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions
such as ice, flooding and pollution.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will
be perficrmed. Photograph o<isting damage to structure surfaces, equipment or to
surrounding properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective
demolition work; file with the Owner prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement,
settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
l. Notiry the Owner immediately if safety of structure is endangered. Take due
precautions to properly support structure.
B. Cover and protect furniture, equipment and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage
when demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not
been removed.
C. Erect and maintain dust-proof partitions and closures as required to prevent spread of
dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building.
L Where selective demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of
the building, construct dust-proof partitions of minimum 4 inch studs, 5/8 inch
drywall (oints taped) on occupied side, l/2 inch fire-retardant plywood on
demolition side, and fill partition cavity with sound-deadening insulation.
2. Provide weatherproof closures for o<terior openings resulting from demolition
work.
D. Locate, identi$, stub-offand disconnect utility services that are not to remain.
l. Provide by-pass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to
occupied areas of buildhg. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to the
Owner ifshut-down ofservice is necessary during change-over.
3.03 DEMOLMION
A. Perform selective demolition work in a svstematic manner. Use such methods as
required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition
schedule and governing regulations.
l. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at
junctures with construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand
tools; do not use power-driven impact tools in buildings.
l-7554.01
,/:\A\\\hlSz; /
torx of vuEY 02070-3
2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to
avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors or framing.
a. Do not throw any debris or salvaged material from above grade floors of
building to grade. Construct chutes as required to conduct debris safely to
grade disposal areas ofrefuse containers.
3. Do not cut or alter any structural member without the Owner's authorization.
B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with
intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and
extent of the conflict. Submit report in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of
directive, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job
progress without delay.
3.04 REUSEDMATERIALS
A. Reused ltems:
l. Where indicated on Drawings or in Specifications, carefully remove indicated
items, clean and store until ready to prepare for reinstallation.
2. Iterns to be reused for reinstallation as follows:
3.05 DISPOSAL OFDEMOLISIIEDMATERIALS
A. Remove debris, rubbish and otler materials resulting from demolition operations from
building site. Transport and dispose of materials offsite in legal manner.
L If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with
applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and
protection against o(posure or environmental pollution.
2. Buming of removed materials is not permitted on project site.
3.06 CLEANINGA}.IDREPAIR
A. Upon completion of demolition worlg remove tools, equipment and demolished
materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean.
B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return structures and surfaces
to remain to condition oristing prior to commenc€ment of selective demolition work.
Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition
work.
END OF SECTION
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
T
!02070-4 t-7554.01
loo
sEcrIoN 02110
I SITE CLEARING
I PARr l -cENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
il A. Section Includes:
t l. Clear site of plant life and grass.
ll 2. Remove root system oftrees and shrubs.
| 3. Remove surfaoe debris.
4. Stripping and storage of existing topsoil.
I B. Related sections:
r l. Section 02200' Earthwork.
I r.o2 REGULAT'RYREeTIREMENT'
I A. Conform to applicable code for disposal of debris.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I z.or roPso'
- A. Material stripped from site consisting of loose friable loam reasonably free of
I admixtures oiiubsoil, refirse, stumps, roiks, bruslq weeds, or other material detrimental|| to proper dwelopment ofvegetative Srowth.
I PARr3-r><ncurIoN
3.OI CLEARING
I A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution ofWork.
I B. Remove trees and shrubs within marked areas.
a] l. Grub out stumps, roots, and surface rock.
I C. Clear undergrowth urd deadwood, without disturbing srbsoil.
3.02 TOPSOLEXCAVATION
I A. Remove all so4 topsoil, organic earth to 6 inch depth, stock pile topsoil as designatedr on Drawings or directed by Architect.
t 3.03 PRorEcrIoN
A. Protect plant growth and features remaining as final landscaping.t
I l-75s4.01
/ftill.)t+4/
rorr or vr[F/
l! E:r$'sf
021l0-1
B. Protect bench rnarks and o<isting work from damage or disphcernent.
C. Msintain designated site acc€ss ftr vehicle and pedestrian traffic.
3.04 REMOVAL
A. Remove debris from site.
EI{DOF SBCTION
o2tto-2 1-7s54.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
sEcTroN 02200
EARTEVYORK
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Extent of earthwork is indicated on Drawings.
2. Removal, stockpiling and placement of topsoil.
3. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements.
4. Removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated.
5. Disposal of materials removed.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 02010 - Subzurface
reference.
2. Section 021l0 - Site Clearing.
Exploration: For Contractor's information and
r.o2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prior to the start of constructiorL meet with a representative of Soils Engineer and the
Contractor to discuss site preparation, grading specifications, equipment to be used, and
any unusual soil conditions or special requirements.
B. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable
requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
l. Uniform Building Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the
Uniform Building Code pertaining to grading excavation.
2. Geotechnical Report Compliance: Perform excavation, bacldll, and fill work in
compliance with recommendations of Geotechnical Report.
C. Testing and Inspection Service:
l. A testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection_gervile lor quality
control tEsting during earthwork operations shall be employed by the Contractor,
not the Subcontractor.
I.O3 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are
to remin in place, provide adeqriate meins of support and protection during earthwork
operations.
l-7554.01 02200-l
l. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered
during excavation, consult utility Owner immediately for directions _ -Cqgqeralewith Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in
operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction ofutility Owner.
B. Protection ofPersons and Property: Banicade open excavations occurring as part of
this work and post with warning lights.
l. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavernents, and other facilities from
damage caused by settlernents, laterd movement, undermining, washout and other
hazards created by earthwork operations.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.OI SOILMATERIALS
A. Definitions:
l. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil
classification group GW, GP, GM GC, SW, SP, SM and SC.
2. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487
soil classification groups ML, I\fft CL, CE OL, OH and PT.
3. Bacldll and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel
larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materids, vegetable
and other deleterious matter.
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.01 ToPsoL
A. Topsoil shall be removed and stockpiled for use-after grading has-been completed. The
sto-ckpile areas shall be within 1,000 feet of the center of the construction area.
Stockpile areas shall be desigrated by the Contractor.
B. Excess topsoil strall be on site in an area designated by the Ovmer. Waste areas shall be
within 1500 feet of the center ofthe construction area.
C. Topsoil shall be placed to a depth of 4 inches in all areas not to receive surfacing or
structures.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation is unclassified, and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated,
regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered.
B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade
elwations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's
expense.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
l
I
t
l
I02200-2 l-7554.01
c.
D.
F.
G.
H.
I
T
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.03
A.
B.
Additional Excavation: If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at requjred
subgrade elevations, carry excavations deefer and replace excavated material as
directed by Architect.
l. Removal of unsuitable materid and its replacement as directed will be paid on
basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work.
Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to-comply with local codes and
ordinarices having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because
ofspace restrictioni or stability ofmaterial excavated.
l. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of
backfilling.
Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or-ground water from flowing into
excavationi and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
L Do not allow water tO accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent
softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting -footingl, and soil changes
detrimei'tat to stabilitv of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain
pumps, well points, slrmps, zuEtion and discharge ^lines, and olher dewatering
system components necessary to convey water away trom excavauons.
2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits to convey rain-water and water removed from excavations to
collecting or run-off areas.
Material Storage: Stockpile excavated materials until required for bacldll. Place, grade
and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
l. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store
within &ip line of trees indicated to remain.
Excavation for structural fill shall be to the limits indicated on Drawing.
Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections,
elwations and grades as shown.
COMPACTION
General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage
of density specified for each area classification indicated below.
Percentage of Morimum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the
followinf percentages of marimirm density determined in accordance with ASTM D
t557.
l. Roads and Paved Areas: Compact top 12 inches ofsubgfade and each layer of
bacldll or filt material to a minimum of95 percent ma,rimum density.
2. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of
backfill or fili material to a minimum of 85 percent maximum density.
l-7554.01 02200-3
c.
3. Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill
material to a minimum of 90 percent morimum density.
4. Structural Fill: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or
fill material to a minimum of 95 percent ma,ximum density.
Moisture Control: Soils shall be placed with moisture content of plus-or misuc 2
percent of optimum moisture. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be
moisture conditioned before compactioa unitbrmly apply water to surfsce of subgfade,
or layer of soil material, to piwent free water appearing on surface during or
subsequent to compaction operations.
l Remove and replacg or scarify and air dry, soil materid that is too wet to permit
compaction to specified denstty.
a. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit
compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist dryrng
by discing hanowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a
satisfactory value.
BACKFILL A}.ID FTIL
General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for
each area classification listed below.
1. In excavations, use satisfac'tory excavated or borrow material.
2. Under grass areas, use satisfactory o<cavrted or borrow material.
3. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
Bacldll excavations as prornptly as work permits.
Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetatio4 debri-s, unsatisfacto-ry soil materi-als,
obstructions, and deieterious materials from ground zurface prior to placement of fills.
Plow, strip, or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than I vertical to 4 horizontal so that
fill materid will bond with odsting surface.
l. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under
"Compaction"- 6r particular area classificatioq break up ground surface,
pulverize, moisture-condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to
iequired depth and p€rcentage of ma:<imum density.
GRADING
General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including
adiacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact
with uniform levels or slopes between points where elwations are indicated, or between
such points and existing grades.
Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away
form structures and to prevent ponding.
l. Finish surfaces free from inegular surface changes, and as follows:
T
1
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.04
A.
3.05
A.
B.
c.
B.
02200-4 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than
0.10' above or below required subgrade elevations.
Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-sectiolg with
finish surface not more than 0.10'above or below required subgrade elevation.
4. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-
sectioq with finish surface not more thali. l/2 inch above or below required
subgrade elevation.
Compaction: After grading, oompact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated
percentage of ma:<imum or relative density for each area classification.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Qudrty Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service-to inspect and
approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed.
Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method),
ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method) or ASTM D 2922 (nuclear method), as
applicable. When ASTM D 2922 is used, the calibration curves shall be checked
and adjusted using only the sand cone method as described in ASTM D 1556.
ASTM D 2922 results in wet unit weight of soil and when using tlds method,
ASTM D 3017. The calibration checks of both the density and moisture gages
shall be made at the beginning of a job, on each different type of material
encountered, at intervals as directed by the Architect.
Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: ldake at least one field density test of
subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no ,case less
than 3 tests. In each mmpacted fill layer, make one field density tests for every
2000 sq. ft.ofoverlaying building.slab or paved area, but in no case less than 3
tests.
B. If in opinion of Architwt, based on testing service reports and inspectioq subgrade or
fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction
and testing at no additional expense.
3.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded fueas: Protect newly graded from traffic and erosion. Keep free
oftrash and debris.
l. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, ooded, and rutted areas to specified
tolerances.
B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re-shape, and
compact to required density prior to further construction.
C. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general
project warranty period, add bacldll materid and compact. Restore appearance,
quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate
evidence ofrestoration to greatest extent possible.
z-
J.
c.
3.06
A.
t.
1-7554.01 02200-5
3.08 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS A].ID WASTE MATERIALS
A. Removal to Designated Areas on Owner's Property: Transport acceplable excess
excavated material-to designated soil storage areai onOwnet's property. ,Stockpile soil
or sDread as directed by (hvner. Waste area strall be within 1500 fea of the center of
the ionstruction areq ii an area desigrrated by the Owner. Waste areas shall be covered
with a minimum of 4 inches of topsoil.
I
1
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
END OF SECTION
02200-6 l-7554.01
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
sEcTroN 02513
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SL]MMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Full-depth asphattic concrete paving surface course and base course for all onsite
work.
I.O2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control.
B. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
C. Section 02580 - Pavement Markings.
I.O3 REFERENCES
A. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridgt Construction: Department of
Transportation, State of Colorado, l99l (CDOT Specs).
l. Section 401 - Plant Mx Pavements - General.
2. Section 702 - Bituminous Materid.
3. Section 703 - Aggregates.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Standards in Building Codes:
l. ASTM D 3549 - Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted Bituminous
Paving Mxhrre Specimens.
2. ASTM D 3203 - Percent Air Voids in compacted, Dense and Open Bituminous
Paving Mxture Specimens.
3. ASTM D 2172 - Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving
Mixhrres.
1.04 QUALITYASSURA}{CE
A. Perform work in accordance with CDOT Specs.
B. Mixing Plant: Confcrm to CDOT Specs.
C. Obtain materials from the same source throughout project construction.
l-7554.01 02513-l
I.O5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Asphalt Mix Desigrr for CDOT Grading C and Grading CX.
B. Submit certification for Class 6, ABC.
I.06 ENVIRONMENTALREQIJIREMENTS
A. Do not place asphalt when zubgrade surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or
surface is wet or frozen.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Asphaltic Cement: Comply with Subsection 702.01, CDOT Specifications, Viscosity
Grade AC-10.
B. Aggregates:
l. Use locally available materials and gradations orhibiting satisfactory record of
prwious instdlations.
2. Bituminous Base Course Aggregate: Crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed
slag, and sharp-edged natural sand, Subsection 703.O4, Grade C, CDOT Specs.
3. Bituminous Surface Course Aggregate: Crrade CX CDOT Specs.
4. Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles of limestone, Portland Cement or other
inert material complying with Subsection 703.06, CDOT Specs.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt, Grade CSS-lh complying with Subsection 702.04,
CDOT Specs.
B. Reclaimed asphalt will not be allowed.
C. Equipment used for paving shall comply with Section 401, CDOT Specs.
2.03 SOURCE QUALTTY CONTROL
A. Submit proposed mix design for approval prior to oommencement of work.
2.04 AGGREGATE BASE COIJRSE
A. Class 6, Aggregate Base course per Section 703, CDOT Specifications.
PART 3 - E)GCI.TTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verify that compacted zubgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I02513-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
Veri$ gradients and elevations ofsubgrade axe correct.
Surface Preparation:
l. Provide grade and location stakes under this Section as required for asphaltic
concrete paving work.
2. Fine Grading: For areas covered by this Section, finish fine.grade to accurate
levels so sp&ified minimum thickness of paving can be maintained with accurate
and uniform finish levels as indicated.
3. Scarify subgrade to eight (8) inches minimum,-moisten.subgrade to optimum
moishire coitent and re-conipact to 95 percent ofthe maximum standard Proctor
density within 2 percent of the optinium moisture content as determined by
ASTMD 698.
4. Proof Rolling: Operate heavy, rubber tired front loader or dirt-filled tandem
wheeled dum] trutt over subgrade of paved areas. Where soft spots occur,
remove loose'materials and replace with ioad base aggregate compacted to level
of subgrade at Contractor's expense.
5. Changes in weather such as freezing or precipitation_occrrrring after.subgrade is
proof rolled and before asphalt paving operations begtn will requre re-proot
rolling prior to paving.
6. Asphatt paving operations will begin within 24 hours after proof rolling.
D. Coordination:
l. Cooperate with other trades; arrange timing to avoid damage to the work
inclur{ing exterior concrste, grading, utilities, and seeding.
2. Before starting paving, ascertain utility lines, lighting, *iring, piping, curb.work,
general gradiig, and-healy trucking
-are complete so such operations will not
damage paving work.
3,02 PREPARATION.TACKCOAT
A. Apply tack coat on asphalt or concrete surfaces,over subgrade surface at a uniform rate
britlv-een 0.05 gallons ier square yard to 0. I 5 gallons per square yard of surface.
B. Apply to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters and previously constructed asphalt
pavements.
C. Coat surfaces of manholes and inlets frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt
pavement. Do not tack coat these surfaces.
D. Allow tack coat to dry until tacky to touch prior to paving.
3.03 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT
A. Place asphalt within 24 hows of applying tack coat.
B. Place to maximum of three (3) inches compacted thickness lifts'
B.
c.
l-7554.01 02513-3
C. Placing:
L Deliver job mix with temperature above 235 degrees F.
2. Place inaccessible and small areas by hand.
3. Paver Placing: Place in strips not less than ten (10) feet wide, unless otherwise
acceptable to the ArchitectlEn4seer. After first strip is placed and rolled, place
succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips.
4. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days'
work, to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to
have same tocure, density, and smoothness as other sections ofasphalt concrete
course. Clean contract surfaces and apply tack coat.
D. Rolling:
l. Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement.
2. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas
inaccessible to rollers.
3. Breakdown lolling_: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately
following rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown
rolling and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot
materid.
4. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mb<ture is
hot. Continue second rolling rmtil mixture thoroughly compacted.
5. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for
removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until all roller marks are eliminated and
course has attained modmum density allowed.
3.04 TOLERATICES
A. Flatness: Ma:rimum variation of 0.1875 inches measured with ten (10) foot straight
edge.
B. Scheduled Compacled Thickness: Within 0.125 inches.
C. Variation from True Elevation: Within 0.10 inches.
3.05 FrELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspecrion ag4 te_sting will be performed under provisions of Section 01400 by the
Owner as directed by the fuchitect.
B. Asphalt Pavements: Check compaction and compliance with desigrr mix by cutting test
plugs where directed in accorddnce udth ASTIvf D 979. Patchlore hol'es. Teit for
compaction minimum of 95 percent of Marshall design density, aggregate gradation
voids, and percent asphalt.
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
l
I025134t-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
c. one (1) test for density ASTM D 1188, ASTM D-2726, otD 2950 thickness ASTM D
3549, dnd air voids ASTh,I D 3203 per 300 tons of asphaltic material placed.
D. One (l) test for asphalt content ASTM D 2172 and aggregate gradation per 1500 tons
of asphaltic material placed.
E. All reports shall include densities to the nearest 0.1 lb. _per ft and compaction to $|re|t
0. I p6rcent. Ifa nuclear device is used, the report shall contain the method u.sed. (back
scatier or direct transmission geometry), results of the daily standardization checks and
the adjusted manufacturers cafibrationiirrve. The manufaiturers calibration curve shall
be adjirsted as required by ASTM D 2950 whenever a change in either the material to be
tested or the testing equipment is made.
F. Subgrade: Compaction tests shall be taken every 2000 square feet and/or as directed by
the Owner.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury until cooled and
hardened.
3.07 AC'GREGATE BASE COURSE
A. Place Class 6, ABC in lifts and cornoact to oroiect soecifications
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 02513-5
I
I
I
sEcTroN 02520
PORTLAI\ID CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete paving.
2. Curbs and gutters.
3. Sidewalks.
4. Cross-pans.
B. Related Sections:
l. section 01400 - Qudiry Control.
2. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
I.O2 QUALITYASSURA}.ICE
A. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement,
temperature, and weather conditions. Ritain until completion and fumish copy to
Architect.
B. Conform to lines, grades, and q/pical cross sestions shown on the Drawings.
I.O3 SI]BMTTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Reinforcemen! prefabricated sections.
B. Manufacturer's Data: Additives, joint materials, curing compounds.
C. Mx Design: Proportions of fine and coarse aggregate, water, cement, air content,
admixtures.
D. Placement: Method proposed, if requested.
I.O4 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Cold Weather: ExceDt bv specific written authorizatio4 cease concreting when
descending air temperaitre ii sliade and away from artificial heat falls below.3-5 degrees
F., and thEre is aost in subgrade. When concreting is permitted during cold weather,
temperarure mix at delivety- ttt"tt not exceed 80 degrees F. Fog sprayers or special
wetiing agents will be required for protection.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
I l-7554.01 02520-r
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI READYM)GDCONCRETE
A. AASI{TO MI57
2.02 CEMENT
A. AASHTO M85, Type tr, 565 poundVcubic yard.
2.03 AGGREGATES
A. Fine Aggregate: AASIITO M 6, 33 to 39 percent total.
B. Coarse Aggregate: AASIITO M 80, Size 67, 357 , or 467 .
2.04 WATER
A. AASIITO T 26
B. Slump l" to 4".
l. Water cement ratio: 0.48 maximum.
2.05 ADMIXTIJRES
A. Air Entraining Agent: AASHTO M 154, plus or minus l-l/2 percent.
B. Aggregate Size Air Content - perc€nt
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
3/8 inch
ll2nch
3/4 inch
I inch and larger
8
7
6
5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
C. Chemical-Admixtures: AASHTO M 194.
2.06 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Section 01400 for additional requirements.
B. Follow approved mix design.
C. Conform to applicable requirements of ACI 301.
D. Field cylinders shall produce 28 dzy mininrum compressive strength of 3750 psi.
Cement content 565 lb/cy minimum.
2.07 JOINT MATERIAL
A. AASIITO M I73.
l-7554.01 02520-2
t
I
I
I
o
MATERIALS
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
t
t
2.08 CURING
A. Burlap cloth from jute or kenaf - AASHTO M 182.
B. White liquid membrane - AASIilO M 148, I gaUl5O sf'
C. Sheet Materials - AASIITO M l7l, 4 mil.
PART 3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI PREPARATION
A. Check for soft spots bv proof-rolling or other means prior to setting forms. Remove
soft yielding miterial -aird replace.- Compqct to specifications. Wet to oplimull
moisture to-6 inches deep, not'more than 12 hours prior to placement so subgrade will
not absorb moisture from concrete.
B. Test for crown and/or elevation by subgrade planer to assure specified thickness. If
additional material used to bring subgrade to correct elwattoq compact to all loose
materials. No disturbance insideTorms after fine grading subgrade.
C. Forms shall be capable of supporting loads imposed by construction equipment:
l. Maximum deflection of l/4 inch.
Z. Straight and free from warp, with ma"rimum dwiation of surface l/8 inch.
3. Good conditioq clean, and strong enough to resist pressure of concrete when
placed.
4. Joined neatly and acourately to line and grade, and mechanically tamped to assure
firm placement.
5. Oil prior to concrete placement.
6. Form constnrction joints and blockouts in accordance with Drawings.
D. Set dowels, orpansion joints, preformed construction joints, and header boards in
accordance witti drawings. Securely stake preformed baskets to prevent movement.
Grease dowels on one side ofjoints with caps on greased end.
E. Bacldll behind forms as required to prevent water from entering subgrade'
3.O2 PLACEMENT
A. Deposit concrete near final position on grade with minimum segregation and without
darirage of subgrade. Opeiate transit -mixer outside forms at all times, except in
locations approved by the Architect.
B. Place concrete on subgrade in successive batches for full width between forms in
rnanner requiring as little rehandling as possible.
C. Spread mechanically to prevent segregation and separation ofmaterials.
t-7554.01 02520-3
D. Deposit excess concrete to provide roll ahead of strike
screed.
o
off screed for full length of
E. Consolidate concrete with vibrators and spade next to forms. Final surfaces shall not
have holes or honwcombs.
3.03 FINISHING
A. Use equipment dgsi.$ed t_o- spreaq consolidate, screed and. float freshly placed concrete
in one pass, providing well consolidated, homogeneous_mixhrre, requiring minimum of
hand fiirishin! to meet surface tolerances. Strike hand finished surfaces t tolerances by
methods agreed to by Architect.
B. Finished surfaces will be tested with a l0 foot straight edge parallel to center line
immediately following first floating of surface. Straight edge will be advanced 5 feet
and space under straight edge shall not orceed 3/16 inch.
C. Final finish pavements after floating and straight edging withcanvas belt, other suitable
belting 12 ihches wide, or rubbing. Work belt longitudinally with crosswise motion.
Curbs, gutter, cross pans, and sidewalks finished with burlap drag, wood float, or brush
to match existing adjacent concrete finish.
3.04 JOINTS
A. Contraction joints, minimum depth l/4 thickness of concrete.
l. Hand formed with tool" header board, or trowel pushed into surface to move all
aggegate from joint.
2. Saw joints as soon as concr€te can support equipment without maning, no later
than 12 hours after placement. First joints sawed approximately 60 feet apart,
intermediate joints sawed after initial joints. Joints to be straight, true and
perpendicular to centerline.
B. Longitudinal joints in conformance with Drawings.
l. Fabricated steel or plastic strip held rigidly in place with adequate pins driven into
subgrade.
2. Joints constructed by forms with recess and tie bars.
3. Sawed joints, with zuitable guidelines to ensure joint is true to line. Saw as soon
as possible to prevent erratic or uncontrolled cracking.
C. Construction joints perpendicular to centerline at end of each day's work. Use dowels,
bars or load transfer devices in all construction joints in accordance with Drawings.
D. Expansion joints with preformed joint filler in a vertical.position, deviating not more
than l/4 inch from a straight line. Install at all existing and proposed structures
projecting througlr" into, or against pavement, in accordance with Drawings.
E. Install joint sealant at temperatures above 50 degrees F. in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Clean all dust, debris, and water from joints.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
I
Il-7554.01 02520-4
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
3.05 CTIRING
A. Apply curing compounds, sheets, or burlap immediately after finishing and water film
has evaporated from surface.
B. Do not mark or mar finished surface.
C. Coat sides within one hour after form removal.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Provide plastic sheeting or other approved material to protect fresh uncured surfaces
from rain.
B. Cold Weather:
l. Maintain temperature of concrete above 50 degrees F. for minimum five (5) days
from placement.
2. Cover surface with plastic sheeting, straw, burlap and/or canvas if temperature
drops below 25 degrees F., within five (5) days of placement.
3. Remove and replace concrete damaged by freezing at Contractor's expense.
4. Calcium chloride shall not be used.
After completing concrete operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess materials, and
clean work area.
After ? days or concrete has attained 550 psi flexural strength. No vehicle loads
exceeding desigrr loading. No equipment pe-rmitted on new pavement until strength
attained.
END OF SECTION
c.
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 02520-s
I
I
I
sEcTroN 02s80
PA\IEMENT MARKING
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Handicapped qymbol marking.
2. Lane rnarking.
3. Parking stall identification.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 02513 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving.
r.o2 QUALTTYASSURANTCE
A. Mock-Up:
l. Provide samples ofthe following:
a. Traffic lane stripe, l0 linear feet.b. One parking stall stripe.
B. Approved samples may remain as paxt of the final work. Rejected samples shall be
removed from the substrate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Lane Marking Material:
l. Provide thermoplastic marking material complying with AASIITO M 249 or M
250 and Coloraiio Departmenf of Transporation Standard Specifications.
B. Thickness:
l. Not less than 60 mills.
C. Colors:
l. Opaque White.
PART 3 - E)(ECUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
A. Provide 4 inch wide stripes at all parking lanes as indicated.
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I l-7554.01 02580-l
B. Provide handicap symbols, lane rnrting stipoc and trafrc control symbols as indicated
and required.
EI{DOF SECTION
02580-2 l-7554.01
I
t
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN 02700
SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI ST]MMARY
A. This Section includes sewerage and drainage systems outside the building. Systems
include the following:
1. Storm drainage.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section.
l. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for foundation drain
connecting to storm drainage system.
I.O2 DEFIMTIONS
A. Drainage Piping: System of sewer pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of
storm drainage.
1.03 PERFORMANCEREQI]IREMENTS
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test
pressr[e.
1.04 SIJBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and DMsion I Specification Sections.
B. Product data for the following:
l. Storm-water disposal systems.
I.O5 QUALITYASSTJRA}.ICE
A. Environmental Agency Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to storm
drainage systems.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional
requirements of system components and are based on specific manufacturer types
indicated. Other manufacturers'products with equal performance characteristics may be
considered. Refer to Division I Section "Product Substitutions."
l-7554.01 02700 - |
I,06 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and veri$ existing
utility locations.
r.07 SEQUENCINGAI.ID SCHEDLJLING
A. Coordinate with interior building drainage systems.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.OI PIPES A}{D FITTINGS
A. Comrgated-Steel Pipe: ASTMA760, Typel, made from ASTM 4444, zrnc-coated
steel sheet for bandedjoints.
l. Fittings: Fabricated to tlpes indicated and according to same standards as pipe.
2. Connecting Bands: Standard couplings made for comrgated-steel pipe to form
soiltightjoints.
3. Metal end section at inlet.
2.02 OUTFALLPROTECTION
A. Metal end section at inlet.
B. Riprap: Broken stone, irregular size and shapg D50 = 6 inches.
PART 3 . E)GCUTION
3.OI DRAINAGEPIPINGAPPLICATIONS
A. Pipe Sizes l8 to 36 Inches: Comrgated-steel pipe; comrgated-steel fittings; connecting
bands; and soiltight, coupled joints.
3.02 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A}ID INSTALLATION
A. Comrgated-Steel Pipe: Join and install according to ASTM A 798. Use soiltight joints
made with coupling bands and gaskets, except where other joints are indicated.
3.03 STORM DRAINAGE INLET A}ID OUTFALL INSTALLATION
A. Install metal end sections at inlets.
B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.
I
t
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
T
I
I
t
t
I02700 - 2 t-7554.01
t FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and zuperfluous material as the work
progresses. Maintain swab or drag in prping and putl past each joint as it is completed.
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 02700 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
t
I
I
I
SECTION O2ETO
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART I.GENERAL
I.OI DESCRIPTTON
A. Provide an underground inigation system as shown and specified including:
l. Automatic irrigation system including pipinS, fittings, sprinkler heads and
accessories.
2. Valves, backflow preventer and fittings.
3. Controller. control wire.
4. Testing.
5. Excavating and bacldlling irrigation system work.
6. Associated orterior plumbing and accessories to complete the system.
7. Pipe sleeves.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
2. Section 02933 - Seeding.
3. Section 02953 - Trees, Plants and Ground Covers.
4. Section 02955 - TreeRelocation.
5. Division 16 - Electrical.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. Materials, equipment and methods of installation shall comply with the following codes
and standards:
l. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA):
2. National Electrical Code.
3. American Society for Testlng and Materials, (ASTM).
4. National Sanitation Foundation, (NSF).
l-7554.01 02810 - I
5. Irrigation Association, (IA).
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer's Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience installing irrigation systems of
comparable size.
I.O4 STIBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each of the system
components in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit the following material samples:
l. Piping and fittings.
2. Clamps.
3. Wire connectors and sealer.
C. Submit the following equipment samples:
l. Sprinkler heads, I of each type, complete with housing.
2. Valves and valve access boxes.
3. Controller.
D. Approved equipment samples will be retumed to Contractor and may be used in the
Work.
E. Upon irrigation system acceptance, submit written operating and maintenance
instructions. Provide format and contents as directed bv the Architect.
F. Irrigation System Record Drawings:
l. Keep and update field copy daily. Legibly mark to record actual construction.
2. Indicate horizontal and vertical locations, referenced to two perrnanent surface
improvements.
3. Identi$ field changes of dimension and detail and changes made by Change
Order.
4. Provide reproducible mylar Project Record Drawing of actual construction.
Include all information from Contract Drawings. Draft Project Record Drawings
with ink using standard drafting techniques and procedures.
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
II
t
I
I
I02810 - 2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.O5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver inigation system components in manufacturer's original undamaged and
unopened containers with labels intact and legible.
B. Deliver plastic piping in bundles, packaged to provide adequate protection of pipe ends,
both threaded or plain.
C. Store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration.
D. Provide secure, locked storage for valves, sprinkler heads and similar components that
cannot be immediately replaced, to prevent installation delays.
I.06 PROJECTCO}IDITIONS
A. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings.
B. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns and other features designated to remain as part of
the final landscape work.
C. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by inigation system work
operations.
D. Promptly noti$ the fuchitect ofunexpected subsurface conditions.
E. Inigation system layout is diagrammatic. Exact locations of piping, sprinkler heads,
valves and other components shall be established by Contractor in the field at time of
installation.
l. Space sprinkler components as indicated
2. Minor adjustments in system layout will be permitted to clear existing fixed
obstructions. Final system layout shall be acceptable to the Architect.
F. Cutting and Patching:
l. Cut through concrete and masonry with core drills. Jack hammers not permitted.
2. Materials and finishes for patching shall match existing cut surface materials and
finish. Exercise special care to provide patching at openings in exterior walls
water tight.
3. Methods and materials used for cutting and patching shall be acceptable to the
Architect.
l-7554.01 02810 - 3
I
IPART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI ACCEPTABLEMANUFACTURES
A. Manufacturers and system component model numbers are indicated on the Drawings.
2.O2 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Provide only new materials, without flaws or defects and of the highest quality of
their specified class and kind.
2. Comply with pipe sizes indicated. No substitution of smaller pipes will be
permitted. Larger sizes may be used subject to acceptance of the Architect.
Remove damaged and defective pipe.
3. Provide pipe continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer's name of
trademark, size schedule and type ofpipe, working pressure at 73 degrees F., and
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approval.
B. Plastic Pipe, Fittings and Connections:
l. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: ASTM D 2241, rigid, unplasticized PVC, extruded from
virgin parent material. Provide pipe homogeneous throughout and free from
visible cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, wrinkles and dents.
a. I inch Diameter and Under: SDR 21, Class 200.
b. Over I inch Diameter: SDR 26, Class 160.
2. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D 2239 flel<ible polyethylene pipe rated at 100 psi
minimum working pressure.
3. PVC pipe fittings: ASTM D 2241 Schedule 40 PVC molded fittings suitable for
solvent weld, slip joint ring tite seal, or screwed connections. Fittings made of
other materials are not permitted.
a. Size slip fitting socket taper to permit a dry unsoftened pipe and to be
inserted no more than halfuay into the socket. Saddle and cross fittings are
not permitted.
b. Schedule 80 PVC pipe may be threaded.
c. Use male adapters for plastic to metal connections. Hand tighten male
adapters plus one turn with a strap wrench.
4. InsertFittings: ASTMD2466inserttypefittings.
t
I
T
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I02810 - 4 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
a. Saddle and cross fittings not permitted.
C. SprinklerHeads, Pumps, Valves and fusociated Equipment:
l. Refer to Drawings for materials list.
D. Controls:
l. Refer to Drawings for materials list.
E. Electrical Control Wire:
1. Electrical Control and Ground Wire. Type of 600 volt AWG control cable No.l4
or larger.
2. Provide one extra wire to furthest valve locations.
3. Wire Color Code:
t. Provide control or "hot" wires red in color.
b. Provide common or "ground" wires white in color'
c. Provide extra wires black in color.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Drainage Fill: ll2 inch to 314 inch washed pea gravel.
B. Fill: Clean soil free of stones larger than 2 inches diameter foreign matter, organic
material and debris.
l. Provide imported fill material as required to complete the work. Obtain rights and
pay all costs for imported materials.
2. Suitable excavated materials removed to accommodate the irrigation system work
may be used as fill material subject to the Architect's review and acceptance.
Clamps: Stainless steel, worm gear hose clamps with stainless steel screws.
Low Voltage Wire Connectors; Socket seal type wire connectors and waterproof
sealer.
E. Valve Access Boxes: Tapered enclosure of rigid plastic material comprised of fibrous
components chemically inert and unaffected by moisture corrosion and temperature
changes. Provide lid of same material, green in color'
l. Size: 12 inches deep x 38 inches long x 13 inches wide base dimensions.
c.
D.
l-7554.01 02810 - 5
PART 3 -DGCLTTION
3.OI EXAI4INATION
A. Examine final grades and installation conditions. Do not start inigation system work
until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Layout and stake the location of each pipe run and all sprinkler heads and sprinkler
valves. Obtain Architect's acceptance of layout prior to o(cavating.
B. Coordinate instdlation of sleeves prior to pavement subgrade preparation.
C. Place sleeves as indicated for installation of piping and control wire.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Excavating and Backfilling:
l. Excavation shall be considered unclassified excavation and include materials
encountered.
2. Excavate trenches of sufficient depth and width to permit proper handling and
installation of pipe and fittings.
3. Excavate to depths required to provide 2 inches depth ofearth fill or sand bedding
for piping when rock or other unsuitable bearing material is encountered.
4. Fill to match adjacent grade elevations with approved earth fill material. Place
and compact fill in layers not grester than 8 inches depth.
a. Provide approved earth fill or sand to a point above the top ofpipe.
b. Fill to within 6 inches of final grade with approved excavated or borrow fill
materials free of lumps or rocks larger than 2 inches in any dimension.
c. Provide clean topsoil fill free ofrocks and debris for top 6 inches offill.
5. Except as indicated, install irrigation mains with a minimum cover of 24 inches
based on finished grades. Install inigation laterals with a minimum cover of 18
inches based on finished grades.
6. Excavate trenches and install piping and fill during the same working day. Do not
leave open trenches or partially filled trenches open overnight'
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
02810 - 6 l-7554.01
I
I
'' B. Plastic Pipe:
I l. Install plastic pipe in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.t Provide for thermal expansion and contraction.
I 2. Saw cut plastic pipe using a square-in-sawing vice to ensure a square cut.r Remove burrs and shavings at cut ends prior to installation.
I 3. Install plastic to plastic joints with solvent weld joints or slip seal joints. Usef solvent recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Install plastic pipe fittings in
I ;il:'#:ffxi"lH:il:::3$T:f il;,,H::* contractor sha'arrange with
4. Install plastic to metal joints with plastic male adapters'
I 5. Install solvent weld joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
I 6. Allow joints to set at least24 hours before pressure is applied to the system.
I
7. Uncoil poly-pipe and insert fitting full depth. Secure poly-pipe to insert fittings
with stainless steel clamps. Double clamp pipe over 1-ll4 inches diameter .
!8. Maintain pipe interiors free of dirt and debris. Close open ends of pipe by
acceptable methods when pipe installation is not in progress.
t C. Sprinklers, Fittings, Valves and Accessories:
t I **11::Xl3t;1fi1,"*":*t*fi::,il:tr#l#:ffi:'*
in accordance wi'lh
I 2. Set sprinkler heads perpendicular to finished grades, except as otherwise
indicated.
I 3. Install pop-up spray heads with flexible swing pipe fittings. Maximum swing pipe
length shall be 4'-0".
I 4. Obtain Architect's review and acceptance of height for proposed sprinkler heads
and valves prior to installation.
I 5. Locate sprinkler heads to assure proper coverage of indicated areas. Do not
exceed sprinkler head spacing distances indicated.
I 6. Install quick coupling valves with an adjustable double swing joint riser assembled
by the use ofat least 3 standard 90 degree elbows. Fabricated double swingjoint
risers of schedule 80 PVC nipples and schedule 40 PVC elbows.
I
I
I 1-7ss4.01 02810 - 7
7. Install backflow prevention valve, fittings and acccssories as shown or required to
complete the system.
8. Install controller as detailed.
9. Install in-ground control valves in a valve access box as indicated.
10. Install valve access boxes on a suitable base of gravel to provide a level
foundation at proper grade and to provide drainage ofthe access box.
ll. Seal threaded connections on pressure side ofcontrol valves with teflon tape or
approved plastic joint type compound.
Control Wiring:
l. Install electric control cable in the piping trenches wherever possible.
a. Place wire in trench adjacent to pipe.
b. Install wire with slack to allow for thermal expansion and contraction.
c. Expansion joints in wire may be provided at 200-foot intervals by making 5
to 6 tums of the wire around a piece of 1/2 inch pipe instead of slack.
d. Where necessary to run wire in a separate trench, provide a minimum cover
of 12 inches.
2. Provide sufficient slack at site connections at remote control valves in control
boxes, and at all wire splices to allow raising the valve bonnet or splice to the
surface without disconnecting the wires when repair is required. 24 inches
minimum slack.
3. Connect each remote control valve to one station of a controller except as
otherwise indicated.
4. Connect remote control valves to common ground wire system.
5. Providee wire connections to remote control electric valves and splices of wire in
the field, using wire conn@tors and sealing cement in accordance with
manufacturer' s recommendations.
6. Provide tight joints to prevent leakage of water and corrosion build-up on the
joint.
7. Provide separate sleeve for wiring where required.
Sleeves:
l. Provide new sleeves for all locations where existing sleeves are not indicated.
Install new sleeves prior to paving installation.
I
t
I
I
D.
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
02810 - 8 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. Flushing, Testing and Adjustment:
l. After sprinkler piping and risers are installed and before sprinkler heads are
installed, open control valves and flush the system with fuU head ofwater.
2. Perform system testing upon completion of each section. Make necessary repairs
and retest repaired sections as required.
3. Adjust sprinklers after installation for proper and adequate distribution of the
water over the coverage pattem. Adjust for the proper arc ofcoverage.
4. Tighten nozzles on spray type sprinklers after installation.
a. Adjust sprinkler adjusting screw on lateral line or circuit as required for
proper radius.
b. Interchange nozzle patterns as directed by the Architect, to give best arc of
coverag€.
5. Adjust all electric remote control valve flow control stems for system balance.
6. Test and demonstrate the controller by operating appropriate day, hour and
station selection features as required to automatically start and shut down
inigation cycles to accommodate plant requirements and weather conditions.
Program controller according to Architect's instructions.
G. Service:
l. When requested, return to the site during the subsequent fall season and winterize
the systern. Drain all water from the system or blow out the system with
compressed air. Instruct Owner's work force in proper winterization procedures
3.04 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL
A. Stockpile, haul from site, and legally dispose of waste materials, including unsuitable
excavated materials, rock, trash and debris.
B. Maintain disposal route clear, clean and free of debris.
3.05 ACCEPTANCE
A. Test and demonstrate to the Architect and Owner the satisfactory operation of the
system free ofleaks.
B. Instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation of the system, including
adjustment of sprinklers, controllers, valves, pump controls and moisture sensing
controls.I
I
I l-7554.01 02810 - 9
C. Upon acceptance the Owner will assume operation of the system.
3.06 CLEAI.IING
A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the Work.
Remove from site all excess materials soil, debris and equipment. Repair damage
resulting from irrigation systern installation.
END OF SECTION
02810 - l0 l-7554.01
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
SECTION 02830
CHAINLIIYKTDNCE
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Exterior Chain Link Fencing: Fencing work required by this Section includes
relocation and installation of existing fencing as indicated in the Drawings.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 03300 - Concrete.
I.O2 QUALITYASSIJRA}ICE
A. Installation shall conform to the requirements of the Chain Link Fence Manufacture/s
Institute, CLFMI.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Except as listed in this Part 2, all materials are existing salveged fencing materials.
2.O2 TIES ORCLIPS
A. Provide of adequate strength and in sufficient number for attaching the fabric to line
posts at intervals not exceeding 15 inches.
2.03 CONCRETE
A. Provide concrete consisting of Portland cement, ASTM C 150, aggregates, ASTM C
33, and clean water.
B. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500
psi, using at least 4 sacks of cement per cu. yd., I inch mo<imum size aggregate,
mo<imum 3 inch slump, and 2 percent to 4 perc€nt entrained air.
2.04 TENSIONWIRES
A. No. 7 gage galvanized steel wire.
PART 3 . DGCUTION
3.OI POST SPACING
A. Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate (using post-hole digger) holes for posts to
diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil.
l-7554.01 02830-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
l. Excavate holes for each post to minimum diameter recommended by fence
manufacturer, but not less than four times the largest cross section of post.
2. Excavate hole depths approximately 3 inches lower than post bottom, with
bottom ofposts set not less than 36 inches below finish grade surface.
3. Crown exposed surfrce of the concrete to shed water.
Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation.
Space a maximum of l0 feet o.c.
l. Protect portion ofposts above ground fiom concrete splatter. Place concrete
around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical
and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, extend concrete footings 2 inches above grade and
trowet to a crown to shed water.
Brace Assemblies: Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides ofcorner and
pull posts. Locate horizontal braces at midheight offabric on fences with top rail and at
two thirds fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when
diagonal rod is under proper tension.
Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric before
stretching fabric and tie to each post with not less than same gage and type ofwire. Pull
wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with O.I20-inchdiameter (ll-
gage) hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24
inches o.c.
Fabric: Leave approximately 2 inches between finish grade and bo$om setvage unles-9
otherwise indicaie{. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install
fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to fiamework so that fabric remains under
tension after puiling force is released. Join rolls of wire fabric by weaving a single
strand into the ends of the rolls to form a continuous mesh.
Tension or Stretcher Bars; Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and
gate posts with tension bands spaced not over l5 inches o.c.
Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to secure fabric firmly to posts and rails. Bend
ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing.
l. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches o.c. and to rails and braces
24 inches o.c.
Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence
opposite the fabric side. Peen ends ofbolts or score threads to prevent removal ofnuts
for added security.
02830-2
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
SECTION 02933
SEEDING
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI DESCRIPTION
A. Provide wildflower/native grass seeding as shown and specified including:
l. Soil preparation.
2. Seeding wildflower/native grass areas.
3. Mulching.
4. Maintenance.
B. Related Sections:
L Section 02200 - Earthwork.
2. Section 02810 - Irrigation System.
3. Section 02953 - Trees, Plants and Gtound Covers.
4. Section 02955 - Tree Relocation.
I.O2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit seed vendor's certification for required grasVwildflower seed mixture indicating
percentage by weight and percentages of purity, germination and weed seed for each
grass species.
B. Submit the following materials certification:
l. Fertilizeranalysis.
2. Tackifier.
I.O3 DELIVERY, STORAGE ANID HANDLING
A. Deliver seed and fertilizer materials in original unopened containers showing weight,
analysis and name of manufacturer. Store in a manner to prevent wetting and
deterioration.
l-7554.01 02933 - |
o I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I.O4 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Work Notification: Notifr Architect at least 7 working days prior to start of seeding
operations.
B. Protect existing utilities, paving and other facilities from damage caused by seeding
operations.
C. Perform seeding work only after planting and other work affection around surface has
been completed.
D. Restrict traffic from lawn areas until grass is established. Erect signs and barriers as
required.
E. Provide hose and lawn watering equipment as required.
F. The irrigation system shall be installed prior to seeding.
l. Locate, protect and maintain the irrigation system during seeding operations.
2. Repair irrigation syst€m components damaged during seeding operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Lawn Seed: Fresh, clean and new crop seed mixture.
l. Mixed by an approved method.
2. Wildflower/native grass seed mix as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Fertilizer:
l. Granular, nonburning product composed of not less than 50% organic, slow
acting, guaranteed analyses professional fertilizer.
2. Type A: Biosol, slow release organic fertilizer.
C. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch: Degradable green dyed wood cellulose fibeq or lo0P/o
recycled long fiber pulp, free from weeds or other foreign matter toxic to seed
germination, and suitable for hydromulching.
D. Tackifier: Liquid concentrate diluted with water forming a transparent three-
dimensional filmlike crust permeable to water and air, and containing no agents toxic to
seed germination.
E. Water: Free of substance harmful to seed growth. Hoses or other methods of
transportation furnished by Contractor.
02933 -2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
t
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
t
PART 3 . E)GCUTION
3.OI EXAI\4INATION
A. Examine finish surfaces, grades, topsoil quality and depth.
B. Do not start seeding work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.O2 PREPARATION
A. Limit preparation to areas which will be immediately seeded'
B. Loosen topsoil of lawn areas to minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones over I inch
in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish and o<traneous matter'
C. Grade lawn areas to a smootlq fiee draining, even surface with a loose, moderately
coarse texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions as required to drain.
D. Apply Type A fertilizer to indicated areas at a rate equal to 1.0 lb. of actual nitrogen per
1,000 square ferlt (220 lbs./acre).
E. Apply fertilizers by mechanical rotary or drop type distributor, thoroughly and evenly
iniirporated with soil to a depth of 3 inches by disking or other approved method.
Fertilize areas inaccessible to power equipment with handtools and incorporate into soil.
F. Restore prepared areas to specified condition iferoded, settled, or otherwise disturbed
after fine grading and prior to seeding.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Seeding:
l. Seed immediately after preparation of bed. Spring seeding between April I and
June 1, and fall seeding between Augrrst 15 and October 15, or at such other
times acceptable to the Architect.
2. Seed indicated areas within contract limits and areas adjoining contract limits
disturbed as a result of construction operations.
3. perform seeding operations when the soil is dry and when winds do not exceed 5
miles per hour velocitY.
4. Apply seed with a rotary or drop type distributor. Install seed evenly by sowing
equal quantities in two directions, at right angles to each other'
5. Sow wildflower/native grass seed atanteof l7 lbs. per acre (0.4 lbVl,000 sf).
t-7554.01 02933 -3
6. After seeding, rake or drag surface of soil ligbtly to incorporate seed into top l/8
inch of soil. Roll with light lavm roller.
B. Mulching.
l. Apply wood cellulose fiber mulch within 24 hours after seeding at a rate of 1,500
lbVacre (34lbs per 1, 000 sf).
3.04 MAINTENAI.ICE
A. Maintain seeded areas until completion and acceptance of the entire project.
B. Maintain seeded areas including watering spot weeding, mowing applications of
herbicides, fungicides, insecticides and reseeding until a full, uniform stand of grass, free
ofweeds, undesirable grass species, disease and insects is achieved and accepted by the
Architect.
l. Water daily to maintain adequate surface soil moisture for proper seed
germination. Continue daily watering for not less than 30 days. Thereafter, apply
ll2 nch of water twice weekly until acceptance.
2. Repair, rework and reseed all areas that have washed out, are eroded, or does not
germinate.
3.05 ACCEPTAI,ICE
A. Seeded areas will be inspected at completion of installation and accepted subject to
compliance with specified materials and installation requirements.
B. The Owner will assume maintenance of seeded areas upon acceptance of entire project.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Perform cleaning during installation ofthe Worlq and upon completion of the Work.
B. Remove from site all excess materials, debris and equipment.
C. Repair damage resulting frorn seeding operations.
END OF SECTION
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
II
t
I
I
II
I
I
I
t
I
I02933 - 4 l-7554.01
t
t
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
sEcTroN 02953
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVERS
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI DESCRIPTION
A. Provide trees, plants and ground covers as shown and specified including:
l. Soil preparation.
2. Trees, plants and ground covers.
3. Planting mixes.
4. Mulch and planting accessories.
5. Existing tree care.
6. Maintenance.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
2. Section 02810 - Irrigation System.
3. Section 02933 - Seeding.
4. Section 02955 - Tree Relocation.
t.oz QUALITYASSURAITCE
A. Plant names indicated, comply with "standardized Plant Names" as adopted by the latest
edition of the American Joint Committee of Horticulture Nomenclature.
l. Names of varieties not listed conform generally with names accepted by the
nursery trade.
2. Provide stock true to botanical name and legibly tagged.
B. Comply with sizing and grading standards of the latest edition of "American Standard
for Nursery Stock." A plant shall be dimensioned as it stands in its natural position.
C. Plants shall be nursery grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of
the project for a minimum of 2 years.
l-7554.01 02953 - |
I
I
I
I
D.
E.
Stock furnished shall be at least the minimum size indicated. Larger stock is acceptable,
at no additional cost, and providing that the larger plants will not be cut back to size
indicated. Provide plants indicated by two measurements so that only a maximum of 25
percent are of the minimum size indicated and 75 percent are of the ma,rimum size
indicated.
Provide "specimen" plants with a special height, shape or character of growth. Tag
specimen trees or shrubs at the source of supply.
l. The Architect will inspect specimen selections at the source of supply for
suitability and adaptability to selected location.
2. When specimen plants cannot be purchased locally, provide sufficient photographs
ofthe proposed specimen plants for approval.
Plants may be inspected and approved at the place of growttr, for compliance with
specification requirements for quality, size and variety.
l. Such approval shall not impair the right ofinspection and rejection upon delivery
at the site or during the progress of the Work.
STJBMITTALS
Submit the following material samples:
l. Mulch.
2. Plantingaccessories.
Upon plant material acceptance, submit written maintenance instructions recommending
procedures for maintenance of plant materials.
DELIVERY, STORAGE A}'.ID HANDLING
Deliver fertilizer materials in original, unopened and undamaged containers showing
weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Store in manner to prevent wetting and
deterioration.
Take precautions customary in good trade practice in preparing plants for moving;
materials that fail to meet the highest standards will be rejected.
l. Spray deciduous plants in foliage with an approved "Anti-Desiccant" immediately
after digging to prevent dehydration.
2. Dig, pack, transport and handle plants with care to ensure protection against
injury.
F.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
T
I
B.
02953 -2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
Inspection certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment invoice or order
to stock and on arrival, the certificate shall be filed with the Architect.
l. Protect plants from drying out.
2. If plants cannot be planted immediately upon delivery, properly protect them with
soil, wet peat moss, or in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
3. Water heeled-in plantings daily.
4. No plant shall be bound with rope or wire in a manner that could damage or break
the branches.
Cover plants transported on open vehicles with a protective covering to prevent wind
burn.
E. Provide dry, loose topsoil for planting bed mixes. Frozen or muddy topsoil is not
acceptable.
I.O5 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Work Notification: Noti$ Architect at least 7 working days prior- to installation of
plant material.
B. Protect existing utilities, paving and other facilities from damage caused by landscaping
operations.
C. A complete list of plants, including a schedule of sizes, quantities and other
requirements is shown on the Drawings. In the event that quantity discrepancies or
material omissions occur in the plant materials list, the planting plans shall govem.
D. The inigation system shall be installed prior to planting.
l. Locate, protect and maintain the irrigation system during planting operations.
2. Repair irrigation system components, damaged during planting operations.
1.06 WARRAI.ITY
A. Warrant plant material to remain alive and be in healthy, vigorous condition for a period
ofl year after completion and acceptance ofentire project.
l. Inspection of plants will be made by the Architect at completion of planting.
B. Replace, in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, plants that are dead or, as
determined by the Architect, are in an unhealthy or unsightly condition, and have lost
their natural shape due to dead branches, or other causes due to the Contractot's
negligence. Wanant replacement plants for I year after installation.
c.
D.
r-7554.01 02953 -3
C. Warranty shall not include damage or loss of trees, plants or ground covers caused by
fires, floods, freezing, rains, lighting storms or winds over 75 miles per hour, winter kill
caused by extreme cold and severe winter conditions not typical ofplanting area; acts of
vandalism or negligence on the part of the Owner.
D. Remove and immediately replace plants, as determined by the Architect, to be
unsatisfactory during the initial planting installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Plants: Provide plants typical of their species or variety, with normat, densely-
developed branches and vigoroug fibrous root systems.
t. Provide only sound, healthy, vigorous plants free from defects, disfiguring knots,
sunscald injuries; frost cracks, abrasions of the bark, plant diseases, insect eggs,
borers and forms of infestation.
2. Plants shall have a fully developed form without voids and open spaces.
3. Plants held in storage will be rejected if they show signs of growth during storage.
4. Dig balled and burlapped plants with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient
diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary
for full recovery of the Plant.
a. Provide ball sizes complying with the latest edition of the "American
Standard for Nursery Stock."
b. Cracked or mushroomed balls are not acceptable.
5. Bare Root Plants: Dig with adequate fibrous roots, covered with a uniformly
thick coating of mud by being puddled immediately after they are dug, or packed
in moist straw or Peat moss.
6. Container-Grown Stock: Grown in a container for sufficient length of time for
the root system to have developed to hold its soil togetheq firm and whole.
a. No plants shall be loose in the container.
b. Container stock shall not be pot bound.
7. Provide tree species that mature at heights over with a single main trunk. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape are not acceptable
2.O2 ACCESSORIES
A. Topsoil for Planting Beds: Fertile, friablg natural topsoil of loamy character, without
admixture of subsoil material, obtained from a well-drained arable site, reasonably free
I
I
II
I
t
II
II
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I02953 - 4 l-7554.01
I
I
I
T
T
I
t
T
T
2.03
A.
B.
from clay, lumps, coarse sands, stones, plants, roots, sticks and other foreign materials,
with acidity range between pH 6.0 and 6.8.
l. Identi$ source location oftopsoil proposed for use on the project .
2. Screen topsoil to breakup and remove particles larger than 3/4 inches in diameter.
Organic Matter for Planting Beds: Shredded or pulverized manure at least one year old,
low in mineral and woody material, well composted to destroy weed seeds, free from
objectionable odor wet or dry, free from salts and other substances detrimental to plant
growth.
l. Screen manure to breakup and remove particles larger than 3/4 inches in diameter.
PREPARATION
Provide premixed flower, groundcover bed planting mixture consisting of 2 parts
screened topsoil to I part peat moss to part screened manure. Add l/2 pound 20-26-6
slow release fertilizer per cubic yard of planting mixture.
l. Keep planting mixture dry. Do not work planting mixture when wet.
2. Excavate planting bed areas to required depth. Provide beds a minimum of 12
inches deep.
If beds are not to be planted immediately cover to protect against contamination with
specified landscape fabric secured with 6 inch staples at 24 inches on-center .
Fertilizer: , . i,
L Granular, nonburning product composed ofnot less than 50 percent organic slow
acting, guaranteed analysis professional fertilizer.
/l!a. Type A: Treble superphosphate fertilizer containing 0 percent nitrogen, 26
percent phosphoric acid, and '08 potash (20-26-6) by weight or similar
B.
c.
t
t
I
T
t
I
t
I
I
I
approved composition.
b. Type B: Starter fertilizer containing 20 nitrogen, 25 percent phosphoric
acid, and 6 percent potash by weight or similar approved composition .
D. Organic Matter:
l. Shredded or pulverized manure at least one year old, low in mineral and woody
material; windrowed, heated to a minimum of 145 degrees F. and contain not less
that decomposed organic matter by weight, calculated on an oven-dry basis;
acidity in range of pH 7.0 to 8.0; have no objectionable odor wet or dry, and shall
meet following mechanical analysis:
l-7554.01 02953 - 5
PERCENT PASSING
(5cm) screen 100
I inch(2.5cm) screen 90 - 100
l/2inch(I. 3cm) screen 50 - 100
No. 100 mesh sieve 0 - 15
PERCENTRETAINED
0
0-l0
20-50
85 - 100
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
T
E. Stakes:
l. Softwood, 314 inch diameter x 8 inches long.
F. Water: Free of substance harmful to sod growth. Hoses or other methods of
transportation furnished by Contractor.
PART 3 - E)(ECTTTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine finish surfaces, grades, topsoil quality, and depth. Do not start sodding work
until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
I . Provide topsoil free of substances harmful to the plants which will by grown in the
soil.
3.02 MATERIALS
A. Peat Moss: Brown to black in color, weed and seed free granulated raw peat or baled
peat, containing not more than 9 percent mineral on a dry basis.
B. Fertilizer:
l. Plant Fertilizer Type "A": Commercial type acceptable to the Architect,
containing 12 percent nitrogen, 12 percent phosphoric acid, and 12 percent potash
by weight. One- fourth of nitrogen in the form of nitrates, l/4 in form of
ammonia salt, and l/2 in form of organic nitrogen.
C. Anti-Desiccant: Protective film emulsion providing a protective film over plant
surfaces; permeable to permit transpiratiorq mixed and applied in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
D. Basic Aspen mulch free of dirt and nonorganic material as provided by Direct
Landscape Supply, Littleton, CO, (303) 797-7733 .
02953 - 6 l-7554.01
I
I
I
t
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Water: Free of substances harmful to plant gfowth. Hoses or other methods of
transportation furnished by Contractor.
Stakes for Staking: Steel tee post, 6 feet length.
Stakes for Guying: Steel tee post, 24 feet length.
Guyingistaking Wire: No. l0 or 12 gage galvanized wire.
Staking and Guying Strap: 2 inch wide nylon straps ofsufficient length to avoid contact
of wire or grommets to trunk of tree .
Tree Wrap: Standard waterproofed tree wrapping paper, 2-ll2 inches wide, made of
two layeri of crepe kraft paper weighing not less than 30 lbs. per ream, cemented
together with asphalt.
Weed Control Barrier: Rot resistant polypropylene fabric, water and air permeable.
"Mirascape" or approved equivalent.
l. Plants planted in rows shall be matched in form.
Z. Plants larger than those specified in the plant list may be used when acceptable to
the Architect.
a. Ifthe use oflarger plants is acceptabte, increase the spread ofroots or root
ball in proportion to the size ofthe plant'
3. The height of the trees, measured from the crown of the roots to the top of the
top branch, shall not be less than the minimum size designated in the plant list.
4. No pruning wounds shall be present with a diameter of more than I inch and such
wounds must show vigorous bark on edges-
5. Evergreen trees shall be branched to the ground'
6. Shrubs and small plants shall meet the requirements for spread and height
indicated in the plant list.
a. The measurements for height shall be taken from the ground level to the
average height ofthe top ofthe plant and not the longest branch'
b. Single stemmed or thin plants will not be accepted.
c. Side branches shall be generous, well-twigged and the plant as a whole
well-bushed to the ground.
d. Plants shall be in a moist, vigorous condition, free from dead wood, bruises
or other root or branch injuries.
I
I
T
I
T
I
t
T
T
T
I
I
I
I
T
l-7554.01 02953 -7
3.03 ACCFSSORTES
A. T6psoil for Planting Beds: Fecile, friable, natural topsoil of loamy clyracter, without
admixture of subsoil material,.dbtained from a well-drained arable slC, reasonably free
:from clay, lumps, coarse sapds, stones, plants, roots, sticks and othdr foreign materials,
with acidity range of betwebn pH 6. O and 6.8 .
l. Identifu source location oftopsoil proposed for use on the project.
PART 4- DGCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine proposed planting areas and conditions of installation. Do not start planting
work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.O2 PREPARATION
A. Time ofPlanting:
L Evergreen Material: Plant evergreen materials between September I and
November I or in spring before new growth begins. If project requirements
require planting at other times, plants shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant prior to
planting operations.
2. Deciduous Material: Plant deciduous materials in a dormant condition If
deciduous trees are planted inJeaf, they shall be sprayed with an anti-desiccant
prior to planting operation.
3. Planting times other than those indicated shall be acceptable to the Architect.
B. Planting shall be performed only by experienced workmen familiar with planting
procedures under the supervision ofa qualified supervisor.
C. Locate plants as indicated or as approved in the field after staking by the Contractor. If
obstructions are encountered that are not shown on the Drawingg do not proceed with
planting operations until alternate plant locations have been selected.
D. Excavate circular plant pits with vertical sides, except for plants specifically indicated to
be planted in beds.
l. Provide planting pits at least 2 times the diameter of the root system. Depth of pit
shall accommodate the root system. Scarify the bottom of the pit to a depth of 4
inches.
2. Remove excavated materials from the site.
I
I
I
I
T
t
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
t
I
I02953 - 8 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
t
I
I
I
F.
E. Provide premixed planting mixture for use around the balls and roots of the plants
consisting of 5 parts planting topsoil to I part peat moss and V2 lb. plant fertilizer Type
"A" for each cu. yd. of mixture.
Provide premixed ground cover bed planting mixture consisting of 3 parts planting
topsoil to I part peat moss and ll2lb plant fertilizer Type "A" per cu. yd.
l. Provide beds a minimum of 8 inches deep.
2. If slopes are greater than 4 to I increase depth to 12 inches.
INSTALLATION
Set plant material in the planting pit to proper grade and alignment.
l. Set plants upright, plumb and faced to give the best appearance or relationship to
each other or adjacent structure.
2. Set plant material flush with the finish grade.
3. No filling will be permitted around trunks or stems.
4. Backfill the pit with planting mixture.
5. Do not use frozen or muddy mixtures for backfilling.
6. Form a ring of soil around the edge of each planting pit to retain water.
After balled and burlapped plants are set, muddle planting soil mixture around bases of
balls and fill voids.
l. Remove burlap ropes and wires from the tops of balls.
Mulching:
l. Mulch tree and shrub planting pits and shrub beds with required mulching material
3 inches deep immediately after planting. Thoroughly water mulched areas.
2. After watering, rake mulch to provide a uniform finished surface.
3. Install weed control barrier over grade prior to mulching tree and shrub planting
pits and shrub beds. Secure on slopes with "T" pin anchors.
4. Do not Mulch ground cover beds.
->
3.03
A.
B.
c.
I
I l-7554.01 02953 - 9
D.Wrapping Guyrng, Staking:
l. Inspect trees for injury to trunks, evidence of insect infestation, and improper
pruning before wrapping.
2. Wrap trunks of trees spirally from bottom to top $,ith specified tree wrap and
secure in place.
a. Overlap ll2 the width of the tree wrap strip and cover the trunk from the
ground to the height ofthe second branch.
b. Secure tree wrap in place with twine wound spirally downward in opposite
direction, tied around the tree in at least 3 places in addition to top and
bottom.
3. Staking/Guying:
a. Stakeiguy trees immediately after lawn seeding or sodding operations and
prior to acceptanc€. When high winds or other conditions which may affect
tree survival or appearance occur, the Architect may require immediate
staking/guying.
b. Stake deciduous trees under 3 inches caliper. Stake evergreen trees under
8'-0" tall.
Pruning:
l. Prune plant material only as directed by Archilect.
Care ofExisting Trees:
l. Selectively prune existing trees in designated areas as acceptable to the fuchitect.
2. Remove sucker shoots, dead, rubbing and damaged branching .
3. Fertilize designated existing trees with 2 to 3 lbs. of Type "A" plant fertilizer per
inch of trunk diameter, for trees less than 6 inches diameter and 3 to lbs for trees
greater than 6 inches diameter.
a. Fertilize in early spring before growth begins or in late October.
b. Fertilize at 2 to 3 feet on center in a triangular pattern to a depth of 18
inches within the driPline.
c. Injection or drilling fertilization methods when used, shall be acceptable to
Architect.
4. Water existing trees ev€ry two weeks until acceptance. Water thoroughly with a
fine mist sprinkler head, soaker hose or hose at a low flow rate over the entire
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
E.
F.
02953 - l0 l-7554.01
I
I drip line areas as required to allow water to penetrate to a depth of 12 inches to
l8 inches.
I 3.O4 MAINTENANCE
I A. Maintain plantings until completion and acceptance of the entire project.
-
B. Maintenance shall include pruning, cultivating, weeding, watering and application of
I appropriate insecticides and fungicides necessary to maintain plants free of insects and
r disease.
I l. Reset settled plants to proper grade and position'
2. Restore planting saucer and adjacent material and remove dead material.
I 3. Tighten and repair guy wires and stakes as required.
I 4. Correct defective work as soon as possible after deficiencies become apparent and
I weather and season Permit.
I 5. Water trees, plants, and ground cover beds within the first 24 hours of initial
I planting, and not less than twice per week until final acceptance.
I 3.05 ACCEPTA].ICE
I A. Observation to determine acceptance of planted areas will be made by the Architect,
I upon Contracto/s request. Provide notification at least l0 working days before
I requested inspection date.
t B. Planted areas will be accepted provided requirements, including maintenance, have been
I complied with and plant materials are alive and in a healthy, vigorous condition.
f C. Upon acceptance, the Owner will assume plant maintenance'
I 3.06 CLEANING
I A. Perform cleaning during installation of the Work and upon completion ofthe Work-
t
B. Remove fiom site all excess materials, soil, debris, and equipment'
r C. Repair damage resutting fiom planting operations.
I
I
I
I l-7ss4.01
END OF SECTION
/ftI\-)st/
mr oF v^r!t /02953 - ll
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02955
TREERELOCATION
PART I . GENERAL
I.OI DESCRIPTION
A. Perform existing tree relocation as shown and specified including the following
operations:
l. Preparing trees to be relocated.
2. Digging and transporting trees.
3. Heeling-in trees in temporary storage yard.
4. Replanting trees in designated locations.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 02110 - Site Preparation.
2. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
3. Section 02810 - Inigation System.
4. Section 02953 - Trees, Plants and Ground Covers.
t.02 QUALITYASSURAI.ICE
A. The Owner will pay for testing and inspection during tree relocation operations.
B. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the following standards:
l. AmericanAssociationofNurserymenrecommendations.
I.O3 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Known underground and surface utilities are indicated on the Drawings.
B. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns, and other features designated to remain as part of
the landscaping work.
c. Promptly notify the fuchitect of unexpected subsurface conditions.
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 02955 - I
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2,OI MATERIALS
A. Burlap and Rope: Biodegradable, of sufficient size and weight to support and retain
rootball soil without tearing, stretching or breaking.
B. Wire, Cable and Chicken Wire: New material free from rust, kinks and fraying, of
sufficient size and weight to support intended loads.
C. Water: Clean and potable, frec from substances detrimental to plant growth.
D. Topsoil: Natural, friable, fertile soil characteristic of productive soil in the vicinity,
reasonably free of stones, clay lumps roots and other foreign matter.
E. Organic Matter:
l shredded or pulverized manure at least one year old, composted to destroy weed
sends, low in mineral and woody material, free from objectionable odor wet or
dry.
2. Manufactured compost product from recycled sewage sludge and ground organic
material, free from heavy metals, salts and other substances harmful to plant
growth, free from objectionable odor wet or dry.
F. Guyrng and Staking Materials: Refer to Section 02953 - Trees, Plants and Ground
Covers for description of materials.
G. Anti-Desiccant: Protective film emulsion providing a protective film over plant
surfaces; permeable to permit transpiration, mixed and applied in accordance with
manufacture's instruction.
H. Fertilizers:
l. Foliar Feeding Fertilizer: l0-10-10 water soluble fertiliz€r
2. Backfill Fertilizer: Slow release, balanced fertilizer, 20-20'20.
PART 3 . E)GCUTION
3.OI PREPARATION
A. Rootball Size: Diameter equal to 12 times the trunk diameter at 12 inches above
ground level. Deviation from rootball size may be approved by the Architect based on
the availability of mechanical transplanting equipment.
l. "Roundabout" mechanical transplanting equipment utilized shall create a rootball
diameter of at least 90 inches.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
t
I
I02955 - 2
As(\)-)wi
rorN op !rll;]l-7554.01
I
I B. Apply anti-desiccant spray over entire plant surPace at the heaviest rate recommended
I bY the manufacturer.
I C. Ti+up lower branches to minimize interference wilh digging oPerations. Pruning of
I lower branches will not be allowed unless acceptable by the Architect.
t 3.02 DIGcINGANDTRANSPoRTINGTREES
A. Hand Digging:
I l. Excavate trench 6 inches to 12 inches outside finished rootball size to depth of
majority of lateral roots.
I z. Form trench of sufficient width to work comfortably. Shape ball by hand to a
rounded form with the base 8 inches to 12 inches smaller than the top diameter'
I 3. Provide clean root cuts. Tightly cover rootball with burlap or other acceptable
material securing wrap with nursery nails. Drum lace rootball with rope or cable,
I depending on size, and overlap with chicken wire. Tighten chicken wire by
I twisting with a hay hook or similar device.
|
4. Undercut one side of rootball and tip to break free'
5. Lifting method of rootball will depend on size and weight. Provide manpower'
I equipment and rigging as necessary to move tree without damage to rootball,
I trunk or branches. Lift tree by slinging or cabling rootball unless other means are
acceptable to the Architect.
I 6. Transport tree short distances by hand cart or with lifting equipment when
possible. Transport trees longer distances by loading and securing to a vehicle or
I trailer. Use timbers, hay bales or similar material to suPPort and stabilize rootball
I during transport.
I B. Mechanical Machine Digging:
t l. Sharpen tree spade blades as necessary to cut roots cleanly. Prune roots
I extending between blades cleanly after lifting.
I 2. Center tree between blades and insert blades to full depth'
I 3. Lift tree and secure to equipment for transporting'
| 3.03 TEMPORARY STORAGE
t A. Temporary Receiving Pits:
I l. Prepare receiving pits prior to digging trees to be moved'
l-7554.01
I
I 02955 -3
B.
2. Space receMng pits a minimum of l8 feet on-center.
3. Excavate receiving pits to a depth ofone-halfofthe final rootball depth and 2 feet
greater in diameter.
Heeling-in Trees:
l. Place tree in the center of the receiving pit. Do not remove burlap, lacing and
chicken wire for hand dug trees. Do not extract blades of mechanical
transplanting machine.
2. Backfill receMng pit with topsoil, tamping firmly in place. Extract blades of
mechanical transplanting machine after completion of backfilling. Do not leave
voids or pockets in receMng pits.
3. Mound topsoil around exposed portion of rootball.
4. Provide a minimum cover of 6 inches over the top of the rootball and a minimum
cover of 12 inches on the sides.
5. Slope sides oftopsoil mound to a stable angle of repose.
Temporary Guying:
l. Guy stored trees in at least two directions according to the prevailing wind.
Guying shall prevent trees from being shifted or tilted by wind.
2. Use tree straps, cable and stakes as required to securety guy trees.
Watering:
l. Water stored trees thoroughly after completion of bacldlling and guying. Water
trees the same day that they are moved. Provide sufficient u/ater to moisten
rootball and backfill material.
2. Monitor rootball moisture daily to prevent root ball from drying during the
duration of temporary storage.
3. Mist foliage with fine spray twice a day (moming and afternoon) to reduce
moisture loses through transpiration,
Site Restoration:
l. Restore temporary storag€ site to original condition afrer trees have been moved
to final location.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
D.
02955 - 4 l-7554.01
t
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
3.04 REPLANTING
A. Orientation:
l. Orient tree in designated location by either:
r. Setting plant at same solar orientation as it originally located.
b. Setting plant to match the slope ofthe ground surface.
2. Ground surface orientation shall take precedence over solar orientation.
B. 'ReceMng Pit:
L For hand dug trees follow specifications in Section 02953 - Trees, Plants and
Ground Covers. Diameter of receiving pit need only be large enough to allow
backfill soil to be easily worked-in around roots.
2. For machine dug trees prepare receiving pit with same machine used in digging
operation. Scari$ sides of pit to eliminate slick side. Use transplanting machine
to redig and transport tree from temporary storage site.
3. Backfill any voids with topsoil after placing tree in receiving pit.
C. Watering and Mutching.
L Water planted tree thoroughly to moisten rootball and settle backfill material.
2. Construct basin around tree at edge of rootball. Add inches of organic mulch to
basin after initial watering.
3. Monitor rootball moisture daily to prevent rootball from drying.
4. Mist foliage daily (aftemoon) to reduce moisture loss through transpiration. Wet
foliage just to runoff.
D. Guying:
l. Guy trees in accordance with Section 02953 - Trees, Plants and Ground Covers
requirements.
E. Fertilization.
l. Foliar feed transplanted trees with operation once per week. Feed during morning
hours only. Mix fertilizer at a rate of 2 ounces per 100 gallons of water with a
detergent spreader added at a rate of8 ounces per gallons ofwater.
2. Apply bacldll fertilizer to surface of planting pit at a rate equal to 0.20 pounds of
nitrogen per square yard. Do not apply fertilizer close to trunk-
t
t
I
I
I l-7554.01 02955 - 5
3. Calculate fertilizer application by the following formula:
a. Pit area (sq. yd.) x 0.20lb. x l00floN = Ib. per planting pit
F. Pruning:
l. Utilize industry acc€pted pruning practices.
2. Prune only broken or damaged branches back to trunk or first good lateral.
END OF SECTION
02955 - 6 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
SECTION O33OO
CONCRETE WORK
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Work consists of furnishing all tabor, materials and equipment necessary for
completion of the following work:
a. Formwork, complete with required shoring, bracing and anchorage-b. Reinforcing, complete with required supports, spacers and related
accessones.c. Cast-in-place concr€te including footings, grade beams, walls, slabs-on-
grade, and stairs.d. Finish and cure for floor slabs and topping.e. Special finishes for architectural concrete.f Instdlation ofembedded items furnished by ot}ters.g. Miscellaneous concrete work such as equipment bases, and splash pads.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Concrete Testing.
2. Section 02520 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving.
3. Section 03560 - Cementitious Floor Patching.
I.O2 WORK INSTALLED BI.]'T FURMSHED BY OTIIERS
A. Anchor Bolts, Weld Plateg and Bearing Plates and Angles Cast into Concrete:
Furnished under Section 05500 Metal Fabrications.
B. Railing Sleeves: Furnished under Section 05500 Metal Fabrications.
l.o3 QUALTTYASSURAI.ICE
A. Reference Standards: Perform all cast-in-plac,e concrete work in accordance with
"Specifications for Structural Concrete for buildings,u ACI 30,1, unless amended or
superseded by requirements of this Section or General Notes on the stnrctqql drawi{tgq.
Copy of ACt30l-wil1be available for review at Architect's office during bidding period.
Keep copy of ACI 301 in Contractor's field ofrce for duration of project.
B. Design Criteria:
l. Concrete: See General Notes on Structural Drawings and ACI 301, Chapter 3.
I
I t-7554.01 03300-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
c.
D.
E.
2. Formwork Design: The General Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the
safety of the formwork and shall provide all necessary desigq constructiorq
materials and maintenance to produce the required concrete work safely.
Testing Agency: All testing shall be done by an approved testing laboratory selected
and paid by the Owner. Contractor slnll furnish testing agency access to work,
facilities, and incidental labor required for testing and inspection. Retention by the
Owner of an independent testing agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for performing all wo$ in accordance with the contract requirements.
Source Quality Control: The Architect, Structural Engineer and Testing Agency shall
be ofered unintemrpted access to the ready-mix batching plant at all times that the
work is in progress.
Record of Work: A record shall be kept by the General Contractor listing the time and
date of placement of all concrete for the structure. Such record shall be kept until the
completion of the project and shall be available to the Architect and Structural Engineer
for examination at any time.
Approval: All formwork surfaces that will provide the finish surface of exposed
concrete must be approved by Architect before depositing concrete.
SUBMITTALS
Mix Designs:
L Submit zubstantiating data for each concrete mix design contemplated for use to
the Architect and Structural Engineer not less than trro weeks prior to first
concrete placement. Data for each mix shall, as a minimurq include the
following:
Mix identification designation (unique for each mix submitted).
Statement of intended use for mix.
Mix proportions, including all admixtures used.
Manufaaure/s data and/or certifications verifying conformance of all mix
materials, including admixtures, with specified ieqiirements.e. Wet and dryunit weight.f Entrained air content.g. Design slump.h. Required average str€ngth qualification data per ACI 301 3.9.1 and,3.9.2.
Submit separate qualification data for each production facility which will
supply concrete to the project.
i. Average strength qualification data (trial mix data or field test data per ACI
301 3.9.3). When field test data is used to qualifr average strength, submit
separate qualification data for each production facility which will zupply
concrete to the project.j. Field test data submitted under h and i above shall include copies of the
Concrete Testing Agurcy's report from which the data was compiled.
2. Separate design mixes are required for each strength and class of concrete, each
change in qpe and/or quantity of mix materials including admixtures, each change
in slump limits, and each change in entrained air content.
F.
1.04
A.
a.
b.
c.
d.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
l
I03300-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
B. Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing specified under Section 01300.
Indicate bar sizes, spacing, lo-cations, and quintities ofreinforcing steel and wire fabric,
bending and cutting schedules, and zupporting and spacing devices. Indicate exact
locatio-ns of all opeilngs, framing or sp6iiat coiditions affectlng the work. Provide l/4
in. scale elevations of atl walls with reinforcing shown.
I.O5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, A}ID HANDLING
A. Concrete:
l. Hauling Time: Discharge all concrete transmitted in a truc-k-mixer, agitatoq or
other tiansportation defce not later thtan l-ll2 hours, -or 300 revolutions of the
drum after ihe mixing water has been added, whichever is earliest.
2. Extra Water: Deliver concrete to the job in exact quantities required by the
design rnix. Should extra water be required before depositing the-conc19tg, the^
Coniractor's Superintendent shall have sole authorityto authorize the addition of
water. Any additionat water added to the mix after leaving the batch-plant shall
be indicated on the truck ticket and simed by the person responsible. Where
extra water is added to the concrete] it shlall be- mixed thoroughly for 30
revolutions of the drum at mixing speed. Water may be added at the site only
once to each batch.
I.06 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. EnvironmentalRequirements:I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l. Cold Weather Placement: When depositing concrete after the first frost or when
the mean daily temperatures are betow 40 ilegrees F., follow recommendations of
ACI 306. Maintain concrete temperature it a miriimum of 55 degrees F.. for
sections having a minimum dimension of 12 in., or 50 degrees F. for sections
having a minimum dimension of 12 in. or greater, for not l99s lhan 72 hours after
depoiiting. The concrete may not contain calcium chloride or admixtures
coirtaining more than 0.05 percbnt chloride ions or thioryanates. The specified
non-chlofrde accelerator or fiigh-early strength Type III cement may be used when
approved by the Structural Ei'gineer. Do not pl-ale concretg willout apProval of
th6 Structdrd Engineer on days when temperature at 9:00 AM is below 30
degrees F. Job cuied cylinders ior verification ofstrength and/or the.gleqlacy of
thJContractor's protective methods may be required by the Structural Engineer.
2. Hot Weather Placement; When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow
recommendations of ACI 305. The teinperadrre of concrete at time of placement
shall not exceed 90 degrees F. Protect to prevent rapid drying. Start finishing
and curing as soon as possible. When the air temperature is expected to exceed
90 degree-s F., the Coritractor shall obtain approval from_the Structural Engineer
of the-procedures to be used in protecting,-depositing,.finishing, a,nd curing the
concret-e. The specified water reducing retarding admixture may be used upon
approval of the Siructural Engineer. The use-of continuous wetting or fog sprays
niiy be required by the StruCtural Engineer for 24 hours after depositing oJ the
woik may 6e restritted to evenings or ilghts, especially in times of low humidity.
l-7554.01 03300-3
B. Protection. Protect newly finished slabs from rain damage. Protect finished slabs from
mortar leakage from pouring of concrete above. Cover masonry walls, glazing, and
other finish materials with polyethylene or othenrrise protect from damage due to
pouring ofconcrete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
GENERAL
All materials in accordance with ACI 301, paragraphs as listed, unless amended or
superseded by requirernents of following articles or General Notes on the structural
drawings.
CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS (ACI 301 2. 1)
General: Unless otherwise specified, use one brand and tlpe of cement tkoughout the
project.
Portland cement: ASTM C 150 Type I.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618 ClassF or C.
ADMD(TURES (ACI 30r 2.2)
General: Unless specifie( no admixhres may be used without specific approval of tle
Architect and Structural Engineer.
Air Entraining Agent: Conform to ASTM C 260. Add air entraining agent when
required as inilicted in ACI30l 3.4.1. and as required herein.
Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C 4g4, Type A: Euclid Chemical
Company Eucon WR-75; Master Builders Pozzolith l22lIE; Protex PDd or
equivab;lt. The admixture shall not contain more chloride ions than are present in
mirnicipal drinking water.
High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): Conform to ASTM C 494,
rfre r ir G: Euclid Cliemical Comiany Eucon 37i Sika Chemical Corporation
Siliament; or equivalent. The admixture shall not contain more chloride ions than are
present in municipal drinking water.
Non-Chloride Accelerator: Conform to ASTM C 494, Tlpe C or E: Euclid Chemical
Company, Accelguard 8O; W.R. Grace & Co. Daren Set Accelerator; or equivalent.
The adririxture shall not contain more chloride ions tlan af,e present in municipal
drinking water. The admixture manufacturer shall have lorlg term_test data proving non-
conosive effect on reinforcing steel using an acceptable accelerated corrosion test
method.
Calcium Chloride: Calcium chloride or admixnres containing more than 0.05 percent
chloride ions or thiocyanates are not permitted.
Certification: Written conformance to above mentioned requirements and the chloride
ion content of the admixture will be required from the admixhre manufacturer prior to
mix desigrr review by the Structural Engineer.
2.0r
A.
2.02
A.
B.
c.
2.03
A.
B.
c.
D.
E.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
F.
G.
03300-4 L-7554.O1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
AGGREGATES (ACI 3or 2.4)
I
I
2.04
A.Continuously obtain each type aggregate from same source thnoughout the project.
2.0s STRENGTH (ACI301 2.3)
A. See General Notes on structural drawings.
2.06 DTTRABILITY (ACI3ol 3.4)
A. Concrete exposed to weather such as pqvilg, -sit9 wo1\, loading docks, and exterior
slabs shall nieet the requirements of ACI 301 3.4.1. AII concrete.subject to de-lcers
shall meet the requiremints of ACI 301 3.4.3 except that lightweight concrete shall be
proportioned for i compressive strength ofat least 5000 psi'
2.07 SLUMP (ACI30l 3.s)
A. Concrete with HRWR Admixture (Superplasticizer): 8 inches maximum less otherwise
directed by Structural Engineer.
B. All Other Structural concrete: 4 inches malrimum.
2.08 ADMTXTURES (ACI30l 3.7)
A. All concrete required to be air entrained shall contain an approved air entraining
admixture. All ioncrete shall contain the specified water reducing admixture and/or
high range water reducing admixture (Superpiasticizer). _A{ concrete slabs placed at air
teiilrperaf,.rres below 50 ddgrees F. shall c6ntiin the specified non-corrosive accelerator.
2.09 SELECTION OF PROPORTIONS (ACI 301 3.8, 3.9 A}'ID 3' I l)
A. Mix Design: Cost of concrete mix design by Contractor.
B. Selection ofProportions: Use method of ACI 301 3.9. Proportioning based on method
of ACI30l 3.10 not allowed.
l. Field test records used for documentation ofthe average strength produced by a
proposed mix in accordance with ACI 301 3.9.3.2 shall, in addition to the
requrements there listed, comply with the following:
a. The test record shall represent production concrete from-a silgle design
mix, produced during th-e past yiar, and may be composed of 30 or more
oonsecutlve tests.b. The test record shall represent concrete made with identical materials and
proportions (including ailmixtures) to the proposed nlx
c. Ttrd test reiord shil represent concrete proportioned-to produce.the
ma:rimum slump allowed'by these specifications, and for air entrained
concrete, withiri plus or miirus 0.5 p-ercent of the maximum air content
allowed.
2. Mixes proportioned on the basis of trial mixtures shall meet the provisions of ACI
301 3.9.3.3.
l-7554.01 03300-5
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
D.
E.
F.
3. Fly ash, in proportions not greater than 25 percent by weight of the total amount
of cementitioui materials, may be used when accepted by the Structural Engineer.
Cement content and/or watei-cement ratio for mlxes containing fly ash shall be
based on the totd weight of cementitious materials (Portland Cement plus fly
ash).
4. Pumped lightweight concrete mixes shall contain fly qtlt h proportions of not less
than'8 oeicent nor sreater than 20 percent by weight of the total amount of
cementiiious materiali and the specifiei air entriininglgent in quantities sufficient
for 5 percent to 8 percent total air conten-t by volume. Such mixes may contain
the sp-ecified waterieducing admixture and/or approved pumping aids.
Minimum Cement Content Concrete for slabs-on-gfade shall contain a minimum of
520 lbs. ofcement per cubic yard ofconcrete. Concrete fo1 city sidewafl<s shall contain
a minimum of 56O lbs. of cement per cubic yard. All other structural concrete shall
contain a minimum of 470lbs. per cubic yard.
Mix Type A:
l. Location:
2. Cement Tlpe:
3. Mor. fugregate Size:
4. Air Entrainment:
5. Slump:
6. CompressiveStrength:
MxTypeB:
l. Location:
2. Cement type:
3. Ma<. Aggregate Size:
4. Air Entrainment:
5. Slump:
6. CompressiveStrength:
Mix Tlpe E:
l. Location:
2. Cement type:
3. Max. Aggregate Size:
4. Air Entrainment:
Footings and Grade Beams
Type I
3/4 inch
4 percent plus I percent
4 inchma:<imum
3,000 psi
Interior Slabs on Grade
Type I
3/4 inch
6 percent plus I percent
4 inch maxinnrm
3,500 psi
Exterior Slabs on Grade
Type I
3l4nch
6 percent plus I percent
03300-6 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7. Max WC Ratio:
2.IO REINFORCING STEEL
4 inch maximum
4,000 psi
0.45
A. See General Notes on the structural drawings for types, grades or yield strengths. Use
60,000 psi yield strength if not otherwise ipecified. confolm to ASTM-A 615 plus
(Si), dformed Billet-Steel Bars or ASTM- A 706, Low.-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars
unllis indicated otherwise. Epoxy coated reinforcing shall c-onform to ASTM 4775.
All reinforcing bars in toppingda6s over precast, inCluding dowel bars, shall be epoxy
coated. Finish: Plain.
2.rr WELDED WIRE FABRIC (ACI301 s.2.5)
A. Mesh size and gage as indicated on the drawing. Conform to ASTM A 185, in flat
sheets. Finish: Plain
2.r2 E)(PAI.ISTONJOINTS (ACI 301 6.2)
A. Fiber Expansion Joint: ll?inchthickness. Conform to ASTM D 1751.
2.13 ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Form Tape: Bear No. 536 vinyl foam or equivalent.
B. Cone Ties: ll/16 inch diameter, I inch depth, plastic cone with suitable snap tie.
Provide flush plugs, color as selected.
C. Chamfer Strips: 3/4 inch 45 degree job cut wood, 3/4 inch 45 degree PVC, l/2 inch
diameter PVC , and 3/4 inch diameter PVC.
2.14 EPOXY ADHESIVES
A. With prior approval of the Architect and Structural Engineer as to methods and
procedr.rres, riike structural repairs with Euclid Chemical CollPaqy $199 -Egog J56'
460,463,6,r Sika Chemical Corporation Culma Dur Mortar, Sikadur Hi-Mod L'V., or
Sikidur iti-trloA. Where epolv iniection procedures are used, an approved low
viscosity epoxy, made by the freriousiy specified manufacturers, shall be used.
2.15 BONDING COMPOIJND FOR RESURFACING OR REPAIR
A. Euclid Chemical Company Euco Weld; Larsen Products Weldcrete; Sika Chemical
Corp. Sikabond, or equivalent.
2.16 CURING COMPOUND (ACI 301 r2.2.r.7)
A. Interior Slabs with Resilient Flooring or carpet or Left E;<posed:_-"SYPgt R33" or
"Super Pliocure" by the Euclid chJmical company, or "Master Kure" by^-Master
Buiiders. The coirpound shall conform to FCderal Specification TT-C-800A 30
percent solids content minimunL and have test data from an independent laboratory
5.
6.
Slump;
Compressive Strength:
1-7554.01 03300-7
indicating a maximum moisture loss of 0.030 grams per sq. cm. when applied at a
coverage rate of 300 sq. ft. per gallon. Manufasturer's c€rtificafion required.
B. All Other Interior slabs: Dissipating resin type, "Kurez DR" by the Euclid Chemical
Company, or equivalent.
C. Exterior Slabs, Sidewalks and Curbs: Clear styrene butadiene curing and sealing
compound.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
3.04
A.
B.
3.05
A.
3.06
A.
GENERAL
Install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, paragraphs as listed, unless amended
or superseded by following articles or notes on the structural drawings.
Use ready mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C 94; no job mixed concrete allowed.
EXAMINATION
All foundation bearing surfaces shall be inspected and approved by the Soils Engtneer
prior to start of formwork. All formwork zurfaces th4t will pr-ovide the finish surface of
bxposed concrete must be approved by the Architect before depositing concrete.
Completed installation of concrete reinforcement must be approved by the Struaural
Engineer/Testing Agency before depositing concf,ete.
PREPARATION
Underslab surfaces shall be fine graded to smootlr" level surface prior to installation of
slab forms.
FORtvf\ilORK (ACI 301, CHAPTER 4)
Eaf,th Cuts (ACI 301 4.1.3): Earth cuts may not be used as forms.
Anchors, Insertg Blockouts, and Built-In ltems: fuichor bolts, inserts, form blockouts,
and other items built into the concr€le shall be securely fastened to formwork or held in
place with templates. Insertion into concrete after pouring will not be allowed.
FORM REMOVAL (ACI30l 4.5)
Form Facing Material Rernoval: Form facing material which is removable without
disturbing shores may be removed when concrete is at leasJ seven (7) days old. Facing
may be removed earlier if specifically permitted by the ArchitecVStructural Engineer and
acceptable curing compound is applied to all formed surfaces immediately after form
removal.
FORMREUSE
Clean all form material suitable for reuse before erection. No form material will be
acceptable for reuse if, in the opinion of the Architect, it will not produce a finished
sufice required by these Specifications or called for on the drawings.
03300-8 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
REINFORCEMENT3.07
A.
WELDING (ACr 30l s.3)
Welding reinforcing bars not permitted except where specifically indicated. Protect
exposei bars intendfu for bonding with future constructioh from corrosion by providing
ad'equate covering. Use reinfoicing conforming to ASTM 706 where welding of
reinforcing is required unless otherwise specified on the drawings.
I
I
l
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
3.08 FIELD BENDING OF REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcement partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except as shown on
the drawings of specidcally permitted by the Structural Engineer.
3.9 PLACTNG (ACI 30r 5.5.3)
A. On vertical formwork, use approved bar chairs or spacers as required to maintain proper
concrete cover and bar position.
B. Free fall shall not exceed eight (S) feet in walls and columns, or five (5) feet in other
elements.
C. Guide the flow of concrete in walls and columns for vertical drop between the
reinforcing with a spout, down pipe, elephant truclg or other appropriate method.
3.r0 CoNSTRUCTION JOINTS OF STRUCTLIRAL MEMBERS (ACI30l 6.1)
A Waterstop: Install continuous waterstops between wall pours whenever exterior grade
is above interior floor lwel.
3.l l REPATR OF SURFACE DEFECTS (ACI 301 CHAPTER 9)
A. Allow Architect and Structural Engineer to observe concrete surfaces immediately upon
rernoval of forms.
B. Modi$ or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details, and elevations.
C. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and
otlier defecis. Patch, repair,-or-replabe exposed architectural finished concrete as
directed by the fuchitect.
D. Patching oftie holes is required.
E. Repair defects in structural concrete elements as follows:
L Deep Defects Exposing Reinforcing: Chip to sound concrete and clean
thorbughly to remove a[ toose concrite and dust. Apply_thin coat of_specified
epoxy ldhesive. Form and pour, or dry pack with specified non-metallic, non-
siuini< grout, prior to develoiment of tack-fiee condition of ep91y bonder. Strip
forms ifter grout has hardened and provide specified lnislt {op1.cure or apply
specified clelar curing and sealing corirpound immediately after finishing.
2. Defects Greater Than ll2lnch Depth Not Exposing Reinforcing: Chip, clean and
apply specified epory adhesive. Dry pack using specified non-metallic, noryshriqk
gi'out prior to deveiopment of tacli-free coridition of epory bonder. Provide
specified finish and cure per 3. l3 .E. I .
I
I t-7554.0r 03300-9
3. Defects ll?lnch Depth and Tie Holes:
o
Less Than
I
I
I
a. For concrete having a specified compressive strength of 5,000 psi or less:
chip and clean per 3.13.E.1. Dry pack, finish, and cure per 3.13.8.1.
4. Other equivalent repair procedures may be used subject to review and acceptance
by the Architect and Structural Engineer.
3.r2 FORMED SLJPS',ACEFIMSI{ES (ACI30l, CHAPTER l0)
A. Formed surfacc finishes per ACI 301 10.4. .ii
B. Shingles resulting from stop/start of slip-form operation shall be removed to achieve
finishes as specified above.
SCREEDS (ACI30l ll.3)
Continuous intermediate screed sfips set prior to concrete placement are required. For
slabs cast over metsl dec( place screeds along beam lines. Set screeds and adjust as
nec€ssary to achieve prop€r slab elevation and thickness.
JOTNTTNG SLABS-ON-GRADE (ACI 301 I l.s)
Construction Joints: Form joints as shown on the drawings.
Control Joints: Construct joints by saw cutting or with specified slab joint form. Make
saw cuts as soon as possible after placing concrete without dislodging aggregate to a
depth of l/4 ofthe slab thickness.
Slip Joints: Separate slabs-on-grade from vertical surfaces with non-compressible bond
breaker joint material unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
Interior Slabs to Receive Floor Covoing: Construct slabs in as large a placement area
as practicable. Locate construction joints on column center lines. Provide control joints
at column center lines and at intervals not more than 30 feet each way.
Exposed Interior Slabs: l,ocate construction joints on column lines. Provide control
joints at column center lines and at intervals not more than 15 feet each way.
3.13
A.
3.t4
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
c.
D.
E.
3.15 SLAB FTNTSTIES (ACI30l ll.8)
A. Floor finishes perACI 301 11.8.
3.16 SLAB FIMSHING TOLERAI.ICES (ACI 301 ll.9)
A. Slope to Drain: l/4 inch per foot.
B. Trowel Finish: Formed slabs Class AX - 3/16 inches in l0 feet. Slabs on metal deck
Class BX - 5/16 inches in l0 feet.
C. Floated Finish: Class BX - 5/16 inches in l0 fu.
D. Scratched Finish: Class CX - 5116 inches in 2 feet.
l
I03300-10 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
cuRrNG (ACI 3ol 12.1)3.t7
A.
B.
3.18
A.
3.19 FrELD QUALITY CONTROL (ACI30l, CHAPTER 16).
A. Delete. See Section 01400 for testing procedures and requirements.
3.20
A.
3.21
A.
B.
c.
END OF SECTION
General: Apply specified curing compounds immediately after final !rylhing of slabs.
Apply in quiritiliei recommendei by tlie manufacturer. See Section 2.24 for usage.
Slabs to Receive Hardener: Use materials and methods recommended by manufacturer.
FLOOR SEALER
Apply a second coat of the specified curing and seali-ng.compound. Apply.to. finish
cdriciete floors as indicated bn room finiih schedule just prior to completion of
construction. Coat surfaces uniformly, leaving no pin- holes or ga^ps, and at rate not
exceeding 500 sq. ft. per gallon. Upon completion" leave surface clean without
discoloration or traces ofexcess sealer.
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
D.
E.
EVALUATION AIID ACCEPTAI.ICE CRITENA (ACI 301 CHAPTER 17 AND l8)
Basis of evaluation and acceptance ofwork under this section shall be in accordance
with the provisions ofthese chapters.
MISCELLAI,TEOUS CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS
All other concrete work indicated on the drawings shall be provided and installed, even
though not specifically mentioned herein, to comflete the worh including the following:
Anchors: Install anchors furnished under Section 05500 in accordance with shop
drawings for structural or miscellaneous steel.
Equipment Bases: Install concrete bases for all pumps, boilers, tanks, fans transformers,
flooi mounted electrical equipment, etc., iricluding anchor bolts and inserts in
aocordance with setting diagrbris fumished by the contractor,responsiblefo_r installing
the equipment. Finish-all bises in a workmanlike manner with a troweled finish. The
basesihill be located and sizes determined by the Contractor fumishing the equipment.
Splash Blocks: Install 12 inches by 36 inches precast concrete splash blocks under all
d6wnspouts or roofdrain leaders emptying onto unpaved areas.
Light Pole Bases: FornL reinforce, and pour light pole bases as indicated on electrical
nriwings. Coordinate instaltatiiln of conduit
-and anchor bolts with electrical
contractor.
t-7554.O1 03300-l I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
t
I
SECTION 03560
CEMENTITIOUS FI,OOR PATCHING
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Cementitiousfloorunderlavment.
2. Sedant.
3. Preparation.
4. Application.
B. Related Work:
l. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching.
2. Section 09660 - Resilient Tile Flooring.
3. Section 09665 - Resilient Sheet Flooring.
4. Section 09680 - Carpet.
L.O2 QUALIFTCATTONS
A. Installation shall be by an approved applicator using approved equipment'
I.O3 DELIVERY, STORAGEA},IDHANDLING
A. All materials shsll be delivered in their original unopened packages and protected from
exposure to the elements.
B. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed fiom the premises'
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI CEMENTITIOUSPATCHINGSYSTEMS
A. EUCO Thin Coat, polymer modified patch kit manufactured by Euclid Chemical Co.
l. Distributed by:
a. Smalley and Company (777-3435).
b. Rio Grande Company (875-2211).
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t 1-7554.01 03560-l
o
substitutions
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Approved
l. Tamms Thin Patch.
2. Rio Grande "Vinyl Patch".
3. Tamms Floorstone SuPrerne.
2.02 JOINT SEALER
A. Dow Corning 888 SL (self lweling) one aomponent, silicone sealant.
B. Approvedsubstittttion.
l. Tremco SPectrem 2.
2. Sonneborn Sonolastic SL l.
PART 3 . E)GCUTION
3.OI PREPARATTON
A. Clean zubstrate to remove all dkt, debris, oil, grease or other contaminants.
3.02 JOINT SEALERAPPLICATION
A. Insert back-up material in floor slab joints to an optimum depth recommurded by the
sealant rnanufactur€r to p€rmit proper sealant thiclmess in relation to jofur width.
B. Apply sealant injoint and tool flush.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. After sealant cure, saturate zub*rate in conformancp with manufacturer's
recommendations.
Prime zubstrate immediately after safiration prooess.
Place topping by paving purnping or trowel in a continuous stream of material for
unifonn, lwel srface.
Finish and cure in conformance with the manufactureds instnrctions.
END OF SECTION
B.
c.
D.
I
I
I
t
t03560-2 l-7554.01
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
SECTION 03600
GROUT
PART I -GENERAL
I.O1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Work consists of fumishing labor, material, and equipment necessary for
installation of non-shrink grout at the following locations:
a. Under steel column bearing plates.b. Under steel beam bearings.c. Elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Steel framing and base plates: Section 05120 - Structural Steel.
2. Masonry grouthg: Section 04200 - Unit Masonry and 04230 - Reinforced Unit
Masonry.
I.O2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit catalog data on grout proposed for use.
I.O3 DELIVERY, STORAGEA]{DHANDLING
A. Deliver in original unopened dontainers and store in a dry place under cover.
I.O4 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain temp€rature of 40 degrees F. or above for at
least 72 hours following placement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI NON.SHRINKGROUT ORDRYPACK
A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Products:
l. Non-Metallic Grout: Use on of the following where grout is exposed to view or
weathering:
a. U.S. Grout Corporation "Five Star Grout".b. Prokrete lndustries "Propak".c. Master Builders nMaster Flow 928".
d. I^&M Chemical Company "Crystex".e. Euclid Chemical Company "Euco NS".
f Or approved equal.
I
I
I
I r-7554.O1 03600-l
B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorosive,
nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage
compensating agents, plasicizing and water-reducing agents, complying with
ASTM C I107, of consistency suitable for application, and a 30-minute working time.
PART 3 . DGCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
A. Completely fitl v/ith grout under beam and column bearings, ereotion blockouts,
connection blockouts or pockets, and elsewhere as required. Mix, install, and cure
grout according to manrfacture/s recommendations.
ENDOF SECTION
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I03600-2 t-7554.01
I
l
I
I
sEcTroN 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART I . GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Work consists of fumishing all labor, material and equipment necessary for
completion ofthe following work:
a. Interior and exterior load-bearing and nonload-bearing concrete unit
masonry walls and partitions complete with reinforcement and anchorage.b. Mortar for masonry.c. Grout for reinforced masonry.d. Build-in of items supplied by other trades.e. Cut and fit for other sections ofwork.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Calking ofMasonry Control Joints.
2. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames: Built-In Door and Window Frames.
3. Section 09900 - Painting: Finishes for masonry walls.
I.O2 WORK INSTALLED BUT FTJRNISHED BY OTIIERS
A. Anchor Bolts, Weld Plates and Bearing Plates Built into Masonry: Furnish under
Sections 0512b - Structural Steel 05500-Metal Fabrications and I 15-50 - Vehicle Wash
Equipment.
1.03 QUALTTYASSURAITCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with the following standards except where more
stringent requirements are stated herein.
l. American National Standards Institute, ANSIA{BS 2ll (A4l.l), "Building Code
Requirements for Masonry. "
2. American Society for Testing Materials, ASTlvI, tests as enumerated elsewhere.
3. National Concrete Masonry Association, NCMA5 "A Manual of Facts on
Concrete Masonry."
4. Portland Cement Association, PCd "Concrete MasonryHandbook."
5. Uniform Building code, UBC, Chapter 24 - lvlasonry.
B. Subcontractor Qualifications: Regularly engaged in subcontracting work of this type.
lvfinimum of 5 years experience on projects of similar size and complexity.
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 04200-l
c.
D.
1.06
A.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
1.05
A.
B.
SUBMITTALS
Design Mxes: Submit mix designs for reinforced masonry grout as required under
Section 03300 - Concrete Work.
Certificates: Furnish manufacturer's certification and test results indicating:
l. Masonry units meet specified ASTM requirements.
Product Data: Fumish manufacturer's certification and test results indicating that
masonry units meet specified ASTM requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, A}.ID HANDLING
Handle masonry units to prevent damage; store of ground and cover to keep dry.
Deliver and store mortar materials to prevent inclusion of foreign material and damage
by water.
Deliver packaged material in original manufac'turer's containers.
Material showing evidence of water or other damage is srbject to rejection.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Requirements:
l. Cold Weather Construction:
a. Preparation: Before beginning work, remove ice or snow formed on
masonry bed by carefully appling heat until top surface is dry to the touch.
Remove all frozen or damaged masonry. Do not lay masonry units which
af,e wet or frozen.b. Perform the following construction procedures as masonry work is
progressing. Temperature ranges referenced below are air temperature,
including wind chill materials, maintain mixing temperature selected within
l0 degrees F. Do not heat water above 160 degrees F.c. Air Ternperature 40 degrees F. to 32 degrees F.: Heat mixing water to
produce mortax temperature between 55 degrees F.d. Air Tanperature 32 degrees F. to 25 degrees F.: Heat sand and mixing
water to produce mortax temperatures between 65 degrees F. and maximum
of 120 degrees F.e. Air Temperature 25 degrees F. to 20 degrees F.: Heat sand and mixing
watef, to produce mortaf, tempefatures between 75 degrees F. and ma:rimum
of 120 degrees F. Use salamander or other sources ofheat on both sides of
walls under construction. Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15
mph.f. Air Temperature 20 degrees F. and Below: Heat sand and miing water to
produce mortaf, temperatures between 65 degrees F. and ma:rimum of 120
degrees F. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature
above 32 degrees F. Temperature of units when laid shall be not less than
20 degrees F.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I04200-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
l
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
C. Grouting: Temperature of masonry to be grouted shall not be less than 35- degrees-F. wheh grout is placed. Place grout in masonry-at a minimum
temperature of 7O-degrees it. and a maximum temperature of 120 degrees F
to produce in-place grout temperature of 70 degrees F. at end of wo-rk day.
Mdintain grorited masonry above 35 degrees F. for 24 hours following
placement of grout.h. Admixnrres: No mortar admixtures are permitted without the written
acceptance of the Architect and Structural Engineer.i. Froz-en Work: The above paragraphs are designed to permit masonry work
to continue during periods-of c-old temperature. Any frozen-masonry work
will be prima facii evidence that the above requirements have not been
complied with. The Contractor shall be required_to remove and replace all
fioz6n materials as directed by the Architecf and Structural Engineer'
2. Cold Weather Protection After Installation:
Mean Daily Air Temperature 40 degrees F. to 32 degrees _F.: Protect
masonry from rain oi snow for 24- hours by covering with a weather
resistive membrane.b. Mean Daily Air Temperature 32 degrees F. !o JQ {egrees F.: Cover
masonry c6mplete with weather resistive insulating blankets for 24 hours;
48 hours for grouted masonry.c. Mean Daily Air Temperature 20 degrees F. and Below: Maintain masonry
tunperatuie above ^32 degrees F. for 24 hours by- enclo-sure and
supllementary heat, by eleciric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps, or
other methods proven to be satisfactory.
3. Hot Weather Protection During Installation: When air temperature exceeds 99
degrees F. in the shade, protect-freshly laid masonry from direct exposure to wind
and sun.
4. Moisture Protection Dtring Installation: Where exposed to weatheq the top of
masonry walls shall be covered at the end of each day's work using a_ waterproof
materiai weighted down to insure its remaining in place. Maintain such protection
until final capping of the wall.
B. Protection of Completed Work From Physical Damage: Protect all projeaing Tq99nry-
liable to damage aher setting by suitable planking well supported. Jambs and sills of
openings used for passage shall be securely boxed.
C. Replace any masonry work showing damage or disfiguratio-n during the progress of
woik in i1s entirety. No patching or hiding of defects will be permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MORTAR A}ID GROUT MATERIALS
A. Obtain each type of exposed mortar material from one manufacturer for entire project.
B. Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM C 150, Tlpe I or II, except Type Itr may be used
for cold weather construction.
C. Hydrated Lime: Conform to ASTM C 207, Type S.
l-7554.01 04200-3
o
Mortar:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
l
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
E. Water: Clean, potable, and free fiom deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, or organic
material.
F. Aggregates for Grout: Conform to ASTM C 404.
G. Additives: None permitted, orcept as specified herein. Specifically, do not lower
freezing point ofmortar or grout by use ofcalcium chloride or other antifreeze agerfs.
2,O2 MDGS
A. Mortar:
l. Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specifications, for mortar types required.
Masonry cement not allowed without prior written acceptance by Architect and
Structurd Engineer.
a. Type S - average compressive strength at 28 days = 1800 psi.
B. Reinforced ldasonry Grout:
l. Fine and Coarse Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476. Grout shall contain a
minimum of six sacks ofPortland Cement per cubic yard. Add sufficient water to
provide proper consistency without segregation for pouring or troweling.
Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi required.
2. Fine Grout: Proportion by volume. One part Portland Cement, with not more
than one-tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two and one-fourth to
three parts sand.
3. Coarse Grout: Proportioned by volume. One part Portland Cement with not
more than one-tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two to three
parts sand, and not more than two parts gravel.
2.03 MASONRYUMTS
A. General: Obtain each type of orposed material from one manufacturer for entire
project.
B. Concrete Masonry Units:
l. Provide lightweight load-bearing nhollow" units for general use. Provide normal
weight and/or "solid" units where specifically indicated. Non-load-bearing units
unacceptable.
2. WeightClassifications:
a. Lighrweight: Less than 105 lbs. per cu. ft., oven-dry weight of concrete.b. Normal Weight: 125 lbs. per cu. ft., or greater, oven-dry weight of
concrete.
3. "Hollow" Units - Net area less than 55 percent of gross area: ASTM C 90, Type
I- Moisture-Controlled.
D. Aggregates for conformto ASTM C lzl4.
04200-4 l-7554.01
4.
5.
6.
l.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
T
I
o
Grade N - General Use.
"Solid" Units - Net area 75 percent or more of gross area: ASTM C 145, Type I
- Moisture-Controlled.
GradeN-GeneralUse.
Provide completely solid, net area equal to gross areq units where indicated
as "100 percent solid."
a.
b.
Curing: In moisture-controlled atmosphere at normal pressure and temperature,
or in an autoclave, to comply with requirements for Type I units.
Sizes and Shapes:
a. Face dimensions nominally 16 inches long by 8 inches high (15-5/8 inches
by 7-518 inches actual), eicept as otherwise indicated. Thickness nor-nlqlly
12 inches, l0 inches,''8 inches, 6 inches, 4 inches, and 2 inches (ll-118
inches, 9-518 inches, 7-518 inches, 5-518 inches, 3-518 inches, and l-5l8
inches actual) as indicated.b. Provide specialty shapes where required for bond beams,, lintels,-.corners,
jambs, sasi, conirol jdints, headers, bonding, and other similar conditions.
2.04
A.
WALL TIES A}{D REINFORCING
Wire Reinforcing:
General: Welded wire units, prefabricated lengths of not less than l0 feet, with
matching cornetr "L" and intersecting "T" units, ASTM A 82, with deformed
continuous side and intermediate rods, and plain cross rods; widths approximately
2 inches less than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to position
side rods for full embedment in mortar with mortar coverage of not less than 5/8
inch on joint faces orposed to exterior and not less than ll2inch elsewhere.
a. Type: Use ladder type in reinforced masonry walls.b. Gage: 9 gage side, intermediate and cross rods.c. Finish: Hotdip galvanized after fabricatioq ASTM A 153, Class B-2 (1.5
oz.per sq.ft.).
Provide units with 2 longitudinal rods, in bond beams as indicated.
B. Wire Ties:
l. General: Fabricate from 3/16 inch cold-drawn steel wire, ASTM A 82, unless
otlerwise indicated, of length required for proper embedment in wythes of
masonry.
a. Finish: Hot dip galvanized after fabrication ASTM A 153, Class B-2 (1.5
oz. per sq. ft.) or 7 mil copper coating ASTM B 227 , Grade 30 HS.
2. Provide rectangular ties for use with hollow masonry units; hooked type (90
degree bend, 2 hches min. hook) for use with solid masonry units.
C. Deformed Bar Reinforcing: ASTM A 615 plus (Sl), Grade 60.
t-7554.01 04200-5
D. Anchors:
l. Flexible Anchors: Where masonry is indicated to be anchored to structural frame
work with flexible anchors, provide two-piece anchors which will permit
longitudinal and vertical movement of masonry but will provide lateral restraint.
2. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabricatioq ASTM A 153, Class B-2 (1.5 oz. per
sq. ft.) or 7 mil copper coating, ASTM B 227, Grade 30 HS.
E. Concrete Inserts:
l. General: Advise concerned parties of specific requirements regarding placement
of inserts.
2. Unit Type: Furnish cast iron or malleable iron inserts of the type and size shown,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication with 1.5 oz. anc coating, ASTM A 153, Class
B-2.
F. Power Driven Anchors: "Pamsetn or equivalent low or standard velocity driven
fasteners. Minfunum l/8 inch shank diameter.
G. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed, ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Structural Steel Menrber Isolation Materid: I inch thickness, semi-rigid fiberglass,
flexible.
PART 3. DGCUTION
3.01 EXAI\,IINATION
A. Before begirrning worlg masonry installer shall inspect foundations or other bearing
surfaces for proper grades and elwations, freedom from dirt and other foreign materid.
B. Report unsatisfactory conditions immediately to the Coffiaclor.
3.02 PREPARATTON
A. Remove all dirt, ice, loose rust and scale from walls, ties, and reinforcing prior to
instdlation.
B. Clean all equipment for mixing, transportation, and placing mortar before starting work.
3.03 MEASUREMENT A}.ID MD(ING OF MORTAR A}ID GROUT
A. General:
L Grout to be used in higlr-lift grouted elements shdl be batched at a concrete plant
in accordance with ASTM C 94 and delivered to the site in transit mix trucks or
other suitable transportation dwices.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I04200-6 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
and mortar2. Grout to be used in lowJift grouted elements
Conform to requirements listed below.
may be job-mixed.
B. Job-Mixed Mortar and Crrout:
l. Measurement: Method of measuring materials shall be by either volume or weight
and such that specified proportions can be controlled and accurately mahtained.
Measurement of sand by shovel is not allowable.
2. Mixing: Mix cementitious materials and aggregate for at least tlree minutes for
mortar and five minutes for grout in a mechanical batch mixer, with the maximum
amount of water to produce a workable consistency.
3. Retempering: Mortars that have stiffened because-of evaporation of water from
the mortar may be retempered by adding water as frequently as needed 10 rqslore
required consistency, exiept thai mortai not used wiinn Z-tlZ hours after initial
mixing shall be discarded.
3.04 WALL TIES Al.lD REINFORCING
A. Single Wythe Block Walls: Reinforced by use of trussed design (ladder desig4 where
vertlcal cblls are reinforced) steel wire reinforcement placed continuogsly a! _16 inche_s
o.c. in bed joints. Install it 8 inches o.c. for 24 inches above lintels and below sill
openings. Ihstall at 8 inches on center for 24 inches above footings. Lap 8 inches at
ends and make continuous around comers.
B. Deformed Bar Reinforcing: Placement is indicated on Drawings. Where not otherwise
indicated, provide l-No. 3 vertical each side of each opening with a 2 fer,t minimum
extension fast sill and head and l-No. 5 vertical ful height at all unsupported edges and
each side ofeach control and/or expansionjoint.
C. Refer to Drawings for specialreinforcing conditions.
3.05 ACCESSORY ITEMS
A. Control Joints: 3/8 inch except where indicated otherwise. Provide control joints in
masonry walls as indicated on the Drawings. Joints shall be installed completely
through and full height of masonry.
B. Steel Structure Isolation: Wrap steel columns, beams, and other steel members with I
inch fiberglass batt insulation before covering with masonry. Wire, staple, tapg or glue
in place to prevent displacement during installation of masonry.
3.06 FORMS A}ID SHORES
A. Construct forms as required to shape, lines, and dimension indicated on_the Drawings
substantially and sufficiently tight toprevent leakage of mortar or grout.
_
Brace.or lie to
maintain p6sition and shafe. -Do nlot remove uitil masonry hai cured sufficiently to
support its own weight and other applied loads.
r-7554.01 04200-7
o
ONOF
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
3.O7
A.
G.
INSTALLATI
General:
MASONRYUNITS
l.
)
Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, lay all block in running bond.
Lay all tnasonry plumb ud true to lines, and to the tolerances indicated. Masonry
units shall be laid dry (not wetted). Provide full mortar joints. Mortar beds shall
be spread smooth.
In laying masonry, avoid over-plumbing and pounding of the comers and jambs to
fit stretcher units after being set in position. Where an adjustment is be made after
the mortar has started to hardeq remove mortar and re,place with fresh mortar.
Where cutting of units is necessary, make cuts with a motor-driven masonry saw.
All joints shall be plumb or level.
Adjust masonry dimensions and install starter units as required to eliminate small
cuts and to maintain bond.
Masonry dimensions for openings are nominal. Contractor to lay out masonry
openings to provide l/4 inch modmum caulk joint at all hollow metal jambs.
Tooling: Block: Joints that will remain concealed may be struck flush. Tool all joints
for exposed standard units with ooncave tool. Rake all joints for exposed ground face
units to a depth of l/4 inch.
Steel Door Jambs: Steel door jambs set in masonry shall have jambs grouted full of
mortar as wall is built up against same.
Built-in Members: Sleeves of proper size shall be provided by others, wherever
directed, to permit passage of pipes through walls. Build in all wall slewes, anchors,
plates, lintels, and other steel members provided by others. Properly set all such built-in
members.
Build-in steel lintels in beds of mortar and do neoessary pointing. Fill hollow mas,onry
cells with mortar or grout for minimum of 16 inches below lintel bearings or as noted on
the Drawings.
Pipe Chases and Recesses: Provide chases in masonry walls where indicated or directed
bymechanical or electrical subcontractors for pipes and conduits.
Build recesses where required for accommodation of equipment. All zuch recesses shall
have steel lintels if over 16 inches in width.
Access Panels: Install all access panels occurring in masonry walls. Access panels will
be furnished under other sections of these Specifications and shall be accurately located
as directed. Access panels shall be provided by the trade requiring them.
Cutting and Patching: Cut and patch masonry as part of the work of this Section by
experienced mechanics. Provide workmanship which will not tend to injure the strength
or appearance of any finished work. Cutting of finished masonry for the purpose of
building in members will not be allowed.
J-
4.
).
6.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
I,
04200-8 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.08 REINFORCEDMASONRY
A. General:
L Where indicated on tle Drawings, reinforce masonry with deformed steel
reinforcing bars and grout as indicated.
2. Construct with vertical alignment of cells and other spaces to be grouted to
provide continuous unobstnrcted openings.
3. Grout spaces less than 2 inches in width with fine grout using loyJt! 99*ing
techniqries. In spaces greater than 2 inches, use coarse grout using highJift or
low-lift grouting techniques.
4. Hold mortar in bed joints back ll4 inch from edges of masonry unit adjacent to
grout spaces, bevel back and upward from grout gpace. -Keep mortar droppings
out of ftout spaces. Head and bed joints shall be formed by shoving units at least
ll2nchinto place.
5. Support vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of lift and at intervals
not exceeding l92bar diameters.
6. When the grouting is stopped for one hour or longer, stop pouring of grout l-l/2
inches below the top of the uppermost unit.
B. Low-Lift Grouting: Grout lifts in single wythe construction not exceeding_16 inches
high. tmmediate$ puddle grout spacds wifh stict or rod (not trowel) sufficiently to
cause grout to flow into all spaces between masonry units.
C. High-Lift Grouting: Place vertical reinforcing in position after laying of masonry wall is
completed, but prior to grouting.
D. Provide clean-out openings at bottom of each reinforced grout cell; omit every other
unit on one side of wall for collar joint grouting. Where individual elements are
grouted, provide one or more openingi for eictr eleilent. Clean-outs to be of sufficient
iize and location to allow cleaning and inspection of grout spaces. During work, use
high pressurejet ofwater to remove excesi mortar and clean grout space. Seal clean-
out after inspection and before grouting.
E. Do not place grout until mortar has set and cured sufEciently to prevent "blow-outs".
Deliver grout in transmit mix trucks. Add water so slump is near maximum without
segregatibn. Pump grout from mixer into grout space as raprdly as practical and discard
if not in place within l-l/2 hours after water is first added to batch.
F. Depending upon weather conditions and absorption rate of masonry .units, !t! heights
and waiting periods may be varied. Under normal weather conditions with typi-cd
masonry units, individuai lifts of grout shall be limited to 4 feet in height with waiting
period between lifts of 30 to 60 minutes.
3.09 BRACING
A. Adequately brace masonry until cured and permanently zupported.
l-7554.01 04200-9
3.IO ALLOWABLE
A. Maximum variation from plumb:
l. In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises:
a. l/4 inchin l0 feetb. 3/8 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum.
2. For orternal corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines:
a. l/4 hch in any story or 20 feet maximum.b. ll2nch in40 tu
B. Ma;<imum variation from level or grades for ergosed lintels, sills, horizontal grooves,
and other conspicuous lines:
l. l/4 inch in any bay of20 feet
2. ll2nchin 40 feet
C. Maximum variation of linear building line from an established position in plan and
related portions of columns, walls, and partitions:
l. l/2'rrrch in any bar of 20 feet modmum.
2. 3t4 nchin 40 feet
3.1I POINTINGAI{D CLEA}.IING
A. Cut out any defecrive joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar. Dry
brush masonry surface after mortar has set at end of each day's work and after final
I
t
I
o
TOLERA}ICES
B.
c.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
E.
F.
ffiw/rlrx or rxlt /
pomung.
Upon completion of pointing and cleaning, leave the work area and surrounding
surfaces clean and free of mortar spotg droppings, and broken masonry.
Apply cleaning agent to sample wall area of 20 sq. feet in location acceptable to the
Architect, if cleaning by water does not produce satisfactory rezults.
Do not proceed with cleaning until sample is acceptable to Architect.
Follow manufacture/s recommendations.
Thorougily wet surface of masonry on which no efiflorescenoe appears before using
cleaning agent.
G. Scrub with acceptable cleaning agent.
H. Immediately rinse with clear water.
I. Work small sections at a time.
J. Work from top to bottom.
04200-10 t-7554.01
loo
r. K. Protect sash, metal lintelq glass, and other materials which may corrode when masonry
I is cleaned with acid solution.
L. Remove effiorescence or other stain in accordance with block manufacturer's
I recommendations.
ENDOF SECTION
t
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
r-7s54.01 04200-ll
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 05120
STRUCTIJRAL STEEL
PART I . GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Work consists of furnishing labor, maierial and equipment necessary for
completion of the following work:
a. Structural steel framing and support mernbers, pipe columns, and b-races
complete with requird' braces,'ionnection plat6s, welds, washers, boltg
nuts, shims, anchor bolts, and templates.b. Base plates and cap plates.c. Erectinc- connectiire-. field weldine. and adiusting for plumb and lwel.
d. CIher i6rk normaliy related to th-e above 6r speEifiedunder this Section.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01400 - Qualtty Control:
a. Weld Testing.' b. High Strength Bolt Testing.c. Testing ofShear Stud Connectors.
2. Section 03600 - Grout: Grouting under Base and Bearing Plates.
3. Section 05200 - Metal Joists: Steel Joists.
4. Section 05300 - Metd Decking: Steel Deck.
5. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing:
a. Load Bearing Steel Studs.b. Cold Formed Steel Joists.
6. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications:
a. Support Framing for Openings in Metal Deck.b. Looie Steel Anfle Lintils N6t Attached to Structurd Steel.
c. Steel Stairways.
7. Divisions 15 and 16 - Steel Supports for Mechanical or Electrical Equipment.
1.02 WORKFURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED
A. Anchor Bolts, Anchor Bolt Templates, Loose Bearing Plates and Embedded Items:
Installed under Section 03300 - Concrete Work or Section 04200 - Unit Masonry.
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t l-7554.01 05120-l
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
B.
c.
DEFTMTIONS
Structurd Steel: Load bearing structural metal framing excluding steel studs, loose
steel angle lintels built into masonry, support fiaming around openings in metal dech
steel stiirs and load bearing steel items specified under Section 05500 - Metal
Fabrications.
QUALITY ASSURA}.ICE
Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication of structural steel for projects of
similar size and difficulty with a minimum of five years orperience doing projects of
simitar size and difficulty. Subject to approval of Architect, Structural Engineer and
Owner.
Welder Qualifications: Wetding shall be done only by welding operators currently
qualified according to AWS Dl.l .
Testing Agency:
l. Testing and inspection will be made by an approved testing laboratory selected
and paid by the Own€r. Contractor shall furnish testing agency access to work,
facilities, and incidental labor required for testing and inspection. Retention by the
Owner of an independent testing agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for perfornring work in accordance with the Contract requirements.
2. Furnish the testing agency with the following:
a. A complete set of shop and erection drawings.b. Mll test reports.c. Information as to time and place of rolling and shipment of material to
shops.d. Ful[ urd ample means and assistance for testing materid.
e. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, etc., for
inspection of the work in the mills, shop and field.
f. Representative sample pieces requested for testing.
3. Each person installing connections shall !e assigned an identiSing symbol or
mar( -and shop and field connection shall be identified so that the inspector can
refer back to the person making the connection.
Reference Standards:
l. Desigrr" Detailing Fabrication and Erectioni Me.et requirements of AISC
"Sp*ification foi the Desig4 Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Bdildings," and AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and^
'Bridgesl" latest editions including supplements, except that in paragraph 4.2.1 of
the fuSC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," the
sentence; nThis approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of responsibility for
the desigrr adequacy ofany connections designed by the fabricator as a part ofhis
preparation of these shop drawings" is specifically deleted.
2. Welding: Meet requirements of AWS Stn"lctural Welding Code Dl.l, latest
edition.
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
D.
05t20-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
o
Specifications3. High Strength Bolts: Meet requirements of AISC
Joints Using ASTM A 325, latest edition.
4. Exposed Structural Steel: Meet requirements. of AISC Specifications for
Arihitecturally Exposed Structural Steel, latest edition.
5. Surface Preparation: Meet requirements of specifications contained in Steel
Structures Painting Council's M-anual, Volume-2, Systems and Specifications,
latest edition.
I.O5 STIBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings; Submit shop drawings as specified under_Section 01300. Clearly
indi6ate ptofiies, sizes, spaciirg and location-s of structural members, connections,
attachments, anihorag6s, hameid openings, size and t5pg 9f fasteners, 9aryber1, a1d
clearances. Indicate ieftied connections usins standard AWS welding symbols. Clearly
indicate net weld lengths, sizes and welding sequences.
B. Mill Test Reports: Mll Test Reports are not required for the project.
C. Design Calculations: Submit desigrr calcutations, bearing- the.seal and signature of a
Proflssional Engineer, employed -by the Contractor and registered in the State of
Colorado for the following:
l. Connections not as indicated on the Structural Drawings'
2. Request for substitution of mernber sizes or material grades.
3. Modification of the strength or configuration of structural framing.requested.for
the Contractor's convenieice, erection sequence or construction equipment and/or
materials.
D. Such calculations shall be in conformance with the reference standards cited herein and
shall clearly demonstrate applicability for the intended use.
I.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials to be installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices
which are embedded in cist-in-place concrete or masonry construction to the.project
site in time to be installed beicre the start of cast-in-place concrete operations or
masonry work.
l. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts
and other devices.
2. Templates shall be permanently marked with column center lines and north arrow.
B. Storage of Structural Steel: Structural steel members which are stored at-the prgject
site sFa[ be above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports and stored upright to
prevent twisting
l. Protect steel from corrosion. Store other materials in a weather-tight and dry
place, until ready for use.
for Structural
l-7554.01 05120-3
o
psckage
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken or contamer.
I.O7 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Protection: Protect any adjacent materials or af,eas below from damage due to weld
splatter or sparks during field welding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: Unless othenvise scheduled or indicated, meet requirements of ASTM
A 36 Structural Steel, latest editions.
B. Bolts: Meet requirernents of ASTM A 307, Carbon Steel Externdly and Intemally
Threaded Standaid Fasteners, latest edition.
C. High Strength Bolts: Meet requirements of ASTM A 325 High Strength Bolts for
Stirctural Steel Joints, including suitable nuts and plain hardened washers, latest
edition.
Pipe: Meet requirernents of ASTM A 53, T1rye E or S, Grade B, ASTM A 500, Grade
B, or ASTM A50l orcluding furnace butt welding latest editions.
Tube: Meet requirernents of ASTM A 500, Grade B, latest edition.
Filler Metals for Welding: Meet requireurents of AWS Dl.l, 70 Series.
. Primer Paim:
l. Non-Wet Areas: Modified alkyd, Carboline GP 818 or Tnemec 10-99.
2. Wet Areas: Zinc Filled Epoxy or Urethane Primer, Carboline 858 or Tnemec
90 -97.
H. Self-LubricatingBearingPlates:
l. Fluorogold Sliding Plates by Fluorocarbon Co.
2. Dixon Teflon Pad by Dixon CorP.
3. Approvedsrbstitution.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General:
l. Meet requhements of standards listed under I.04 D. Reference Standards.
2. Detailing and fabrication procedures shall account for distortion and shrinkage
due to welding processes, both in the shop and in the field.
B. Connections: Provide connections as shown or noted on the Drawings. Connections
not shown or noted slnll be standard Framed Beam Connections as shown in AISC
I
I
I
I
D.
E.
F.
G
051204
/a\NI\)'l|+4i
mrx or vrn t /r-7554.01
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
l
I
I
I
Manual of Steel Construction, 8th Editiorl pp 4-13 thru 4-37 inclusive, except that
bearing-type bolts in slotted holes may not be-ised to transmiJ ryy..c.ompon:nt of stress
in tne iir6ltlon of the slot. No combihation of bolts and welds shall be used to transmit
stress in the same laying surface ofany connection.
C. Marking: Mark members in protected, plainly visible _locations in accordance with
referenie numbers on setting diigrams. ftr-e member work point at each end of columns
sttatt U" determined and mike{in the shop with a centei punch or other acceptable
means. Marking shall be placed on the flanles and web gt elch e.nd of columns. Work
point shall be aidefined iri.USC Code of Standard Practice, Section 7.11.2(a).
D. Finished Work: Work shall be finished in accordance with the approved shop drawings
and shall be true and fiee from twists, kinks, buckles, open joints and other defects.
E. Cutting and Fitting: Perform necessary cutting, fitting and drilling for the
accommodation of other trades and do whatever is necessary to secure correct
information for samg both before and after steel is delivered. No cutting or drilling will
be permitted on the job without the approval ofthe Structural Engineer.
F. Mlling: Subassemblies with milled surfaces slratl be completely assembled and welded
before milling.
G. Welding: Comply with AISC specifications and latest American Wel{ing Sociely
standarls. Welds -not specified shill be 3/16 inch fillet continuous but not less than the
AISC minimum based oh the thickness of the parts joined.
H. Splices: Splicing of members to obtain the. require! lengths vrill_nol be permitted
without pri6r acc-eptance of the Structural Engineei unless shown on the Drawings.
L Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights indicated are not readily available, secure
the Architect's acceptance of suitable iizes in time to prevent delay due to such
substitutions.
2.03 ANCHORS
A. Provide anchors for columns, beams, channels, plates, etc., as indicated on Drawings,
located on shop drawings, or as required.
2.04 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:
l. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortaf,. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Galvanized zurfaces.
r-7554.01 05120-5
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted.
l. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits.
2. Prepare surfaces according to following SSPC specifications:
a. Non-Wet Areas (Modified Alkyd): SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning."
b. Wet Areas (Zinc Filled Epory or Urethane Primer): SSPC-SP 6
"Commercial Blast Cleaning. "
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparatio4 apply primer according to
rnanufacturer's instructions.
l. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, @mers, edges, and
exposed surfaces.
2. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to be zinc filled e,pory or urethane primer at
inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color ofsecond coat to
distinguish it from first coat.
D. Shop Painting:
l. Surface Preparation: After fabricatioq clean offloose scale, rust, weld or slag
flux depositg oil, grease, dirt, or other foreign material in accordance with SSPC-
SP3 Power Tool Cleaning.
2. Painting: Omit shop paint on surfaces to be enclosed in concrete, surfaces to be
weldedlcontact zurib6es in high strength bolted friction-Bpe connections, tops of
beams in composite constructioq surfaces to receive welded studs, or surfaces in
contact with selfJubricating bearing plates.
3. Apply modified allcyd shop primer at 2.5 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness and zinc
filled epory primer at 3.0 to 4.0 mils dry film thickness.
PART 3 -DGCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Prior to start oferectiorl the steel erector shall check the elevation ofbearing surfaces
and the location of embedded anchor bolts and connection plates, and shall report
deviations from the Contract Documents to the Architect and Structural Engineer.
B. Do not proceed with erection until unacceptable conditions are corrected.
3.O2 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Determine measurements onsite as required for correct fabrication
and installation.
B. Fabricator shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit of structural
steel.
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
t
I
T
I
t
I
II
I
I
I05120-6 l-7554.01
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
3.03 ERECTION
A. General: Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications for the Deslgn,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, latest edition, including
supplements, with additional requirements of t}is Section.
l. Base and Bearing Plates: Set base and bearing plates (and leveling plates) level
(+l/32 inch) and at correct elevations (*l/16 inch) Temporanly support on steel
'ivedges or ihims until zupported members are plumbed and grouting is complete<!.
2. Field Assembly:
a. Assemble structural steel fiames to the lines and elevations indicated within
the snecified erection tolerances.b. Aligi the various members foryng a complete frame or structure after
ass6mblv and adiust accuratelv before being fastened.
c. Measur6 and adiust for distofoon and shrlnkage of field welded assemblies. as erection proc'eeds. Submit procedure to Teiting Agency for review prior
to start oferection.d. Splice only where indicated on Drawings.
3. Field Connections: Make field connections with bolts, high strength bolts o: field
welding unless otherwise indicated. Clean existing surfaces before.welding to
existin[ steel. No drifting or cutting to enlarge unfair- holes will be allowed.
Make iltinor corrections b/reaming. Serious defects shall not be corrected in the
field without a decision
-by
the -Structural Engineer directing the method or
procedure for correction or remediation.
4. Compression Splices: Fasten splices in compressior after bearing surfaces have
been'brought irito contact. Clein bearing surfaces before assembling. Gaps l/32
inch wide-or great€r shall be closed by ilriving non-tapered mild steel shims full
depth of the bearing surface along the full length of the gap.
5. Temporary Bracing: Consider structural steel as non-self-supporting steel frtT".t
Provide suitable temporary bracing as necessary to marntaln structural steel ln
proper position until permanently secured. Leave temporary bracing in place as
required for safety.
6. Field Modification: Written acoeptanoe from the Structural Engineer must be
obtained before using cutting torbh for field modification or re-fabrication of
structural steel. The-structur:at steel fabricator shall be responsible for errors in
fabrication and conect fit in the field.
B. Erection Tolerances: Comply with requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice,
except as follows:
l. Columns:
a. Ma:rimum deviation of column from established center line shall not exceed
I inc[ accumulative from all sources.b. Bases'of columns shall be located on established center lines within +l/8
inch.
l-7554.01
Afl\)N#/
mrx ot vl[CY 05t20-7
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J.
4.
Members Connecting to Columns:
a. Horizontal deviation of member working point from position with respect to
supporting column working line shall not orceed +l/16 inch from the
location shown on Drawings.b. Elevation deviation of member working point with respect to upper splice
of supporting column shall not exceed plus l/8 inch or minus l/4 inch from
the elwation shown on Drawings.
Other Members: Deviation of member working point horizontal location and
elevation with respect to the upporting member shall not orceed +l/16 inch from
the location and elevation shown on the Drawings.
Lweling and plumbing shall be based on a mean ternperature of 70oF.
Compensate for difference in tanryerature at time of erection.
ENDOF SECTION
05120-8 l-7554.01
I
I
t
t
I
t
t
t
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN 05200
METAL JOISTS
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI STIMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Work consists of furnishing labor, material and equipment necessary for
fabrication and erection of metal joists and including bridging, anchors, and
related accessories.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 01400 - Qualrty Control: Weld testing.
2. Section 03600 - Grout: Grouting under base and bearing plates of masonry walls.
3. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Structurd ste€I.
4. Section 05300 - Maal Decking: Steel deck.
r.o2 QUALITYASSURAI.ICE
A Welder Qualifications: Welding slnll be done only by certified welding operators
currently qualified according to AWS Dl.l.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Joist manufacturer must be a member of the Steel Joist
Institute and regularly engaged in the manufacture ofthe products supplied.
C. Testing Agency: Testing and inspection will be made,by an approved testing laboratory
selectd and paid by theOwner. Contractor shall fumish testing agency access to-worh
facilities and incidlntd labor required for testing and inspection. Retention by the-
Owner of an indepurdent testin! agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for performing Work inaccordance with the contract requirements. .
D. ReferenceStandards:
l. Materids, Fabricatioq and Desigt:
a. Steel Joists: Meet requirements of Steel Joist Institute Standard
Specifications for Open Wib Steel Joists, J and H series, LJ and LH series,
and DLI and DLH series, latest edition.
2. Welding: Meet requirernents of AWS Structural Welding Code, D1.1, latest
edition.
3. Erection: Meet requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice, Section 7,
latest edition.
l-7554.01 05200-l
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: .Sgbmi! shop drawings as specified under Section 01300. Indicate
sizes, spacing and location of joists, connections, bridgtng, reinforcing anchorages,
cambers, loads and accessories. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS
welding symbols.
I.O4 DELTVERY, STORAGE AND }IANDLING
A. Store metal joists at the job site on platforms, skids or other supports and upright to
prevent twisting. Inspect joists and upon delivery. Repair or replace damaged joists as
direAed by the manufacturer subject to acceptance by the Structural Engineer. Keep
joists free from dirt and mud during storage and erection.
1.05 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Protection: Protect any adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld
splatter or sparks during field welding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI JOISTS
A. Construction: Construct joists and joist girders to conform to Standard
Specifications and in sizes, types and lengths indicated on flrawings, or required.
Bridging: Standard specifications unless otherwise indicated.
Extended Ends: Design for load carrying @pacrty equal to joists, or as indicated on the
Drawings, whichever is greater.
Accessories: Provide accessories as required and as indicated on the Drawings.
. Shop Painting:
l. Non-Wet Areas: Dip, spray or paint joists with one coat red oxide paint. Black
asphalt may be substituted where joists are concealed from view.
2. Wet Areas: Carboline Rustbond LT or Tnemec Series 27.
2.02 SHOPPAINTING
A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other forergn materials from fabricated
joists and acsessories to be primed as follows:
l. Surface Preparation, Non-Wet Areas: Hand tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2.
2. Surface Preparation, Wet fueas: Power tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.
B. Apply one shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a
continuous, dry paint film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil for non-wet area shop
B.
c.
D
E
I
I
I
I
t
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
T
t
I
I
I05200-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
t
t
primer and 1.0 to 2.0 mil thickness for Carboline Rustbond LT or 4.0 to 6.0 mil
thickness for Tnemec Series 27.
C. Surface preparation and painting of joists and joist accessories are included under
DMsion 9 Section'Painting.'
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Prior to start oferection" the ioist erector shall check the height and location ofbearing
surfaces and shall report awiltions fiom the approved shop -drawings to the Architect,
Structural Engineer ind General Contractor. The erector shall also verify that joists. are
undamaged aid ready for erection. Damaged.or twisted joists will be repaired or
replaced-as directed"by the manufacturer iubject to acceptance by the Structural
Engineer.
3.02 ERECTION
A. General: Handte and erect joists in conformance with standard specifications and in lhe
locations indicated on the Drawings. Do not drop or rack to cause permanent twist.
Joists dropped or damaged during -rection are subject to replacement.
B. Welding: Unless noted otherwise, weld joists to steel bearing'
C. Bridging: Adjustment of bridging location will be permitted for clearance of-ducts,
mecfr'arfcal eqiripment, recessel fighting fixtures, etc sr,rbj.ggt to_ acceptance by the
Architect and'St?udur;d Engineer. tomplete bridging and sidewall anchors before any
loads are applied to the joist system.
3.03 TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A. Touch-up damaged areas of shop paint where joists are exposed to view or weather.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Section 01400 for inspection and certification required of Supplier.
END OF SECTION
r-7554.Or 05200-3
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
sEcTroN 05300
METALDECKING
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI STIMMARY
A. Section Includes:
L Work consists of furnishing labor, material and equipment necessary for
completion of the following work:
a. Non-composite roof deck.b. Accessories including filler, ridge and valley plates, sump pans, €tc.
c. Reinforcernent at openings thru metal deck.d. Touch-up painting ofgalvanized deck.
B. Related Sections:
L section 01400 - Qudrty Control: Testing of stud shear connectors and deck
welding.
2. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Structural steel.
3. Section 05200 - Maal Joists: Steel joists.
4. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Roof opening deck support frames'
r.o2 QUALTTYASSURANCE
A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done only by welding operators currently
qualified according to AWS D. l. l.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Regularly engaged in production of metal decking.
C. Erector Qualifications: Mnimum of five (5) years experience in erection of metal
decking for projects of similar size and difEculty. Subject to approval of Owner.
D. Testing Agency: Testing and inspection will be made by an approved testing laboratory
selection and paid by the Ovmel. Contractor shall fumish testing agency .access to
work, facilitieiand incidental labor required for testing and inspection. Retention by the-
Own6r of an independent testing agbnry shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for performing Work in accordance with the Contract requirements.
E. Design Criteria: See Drawings for loading requirements, minimum section properties
and span. Design shall comply with the following:
l. Non-composite Deck:
a. Ma,rimum Flexural Working Stress: 20,000 psi.b. Morimum Roof Deflecti on: VZqO span lengtll center to center of supports
under live load.
r-7554.01 05300-l
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
F.
B.
B.
2. Span Conditions: Deck units shall be continuous over three or more adjacent
spans. Strength design ofdeck units shall be based on clear span length, edge-to-
edge ofsupports.
Reference Standards:
l. Desigrr and ldanufactuers: Meet requirements of Steel Deck Institute Basic
Design Specifications and AISC Specifications for the Design of Light Gage
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, latest edition.
2. Welding - Including Shear Stud Connectors: Meet requirements of AWS
Struchral Welding Code, Dl.l, latest edition.
SUBMTTALS
Manufacturers Data: Submit two copies of manufacture/s specifications and
installation instructions for each product specified. Include manufacturer's certification
as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. Furnish a copy of
each instruction to the installer.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified under Section 01300. Indicate
decking plan, deck profile, dimensions, gage, anchorage, supports projections, openings
and reinforcemen! finishes, applicable details and accessorieg location and capacity of
required deck shoring type locations and size ofwelds.
DELIVERY, STORAGE A}.ID HANDLING
Contractor shall inspect metal deck upon delivery to the site. Any damaged deck shall
be rejected immediately and replaced. Store metal deck at the site above ground on
platforms, skids or oth€r supports with one end elevated for drainage. Cover deck until
needed with a waterproofcovering ventilated to prevent condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.Ol
A.
MATERJALS
Sheet Steel: Minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi. conform to ASTM A 525, G60
where galvanized finish is used. Conform to ASTM A 6ll, Grade C where painted
finish is used.
Finishes: Conform to the following:
l. Galvanized Finish: ASTM 4525, G60 coating.
2. Painted Finish: Manufacturet's standard, baked oq rust inhibitive. Apply to
chemically cleane4 phosphatized surface.
Galvanized Touch-up Paint: Metallic zinc paint complying with FS TT-P-641, Type II.
FABRICATION
Form deck units in length to span four or more supports with flush" telescoped or nested
2 inch end laps and nested side laps.
c.
2.02
A.
05300-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
2.03 ACCESSORTES
A. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate of galvanized sheet steel of same quality as deck units.
Mnimum thicknes-s for roofs, 20 gage. Bend to provide tight fitting closures at open
ends and size ofdecking.
B. Cover Plates: Fabricate of sheet steel of same qualrty as deck units, l8 gage minimum
thickness.
C. Roof Sump Pans: Fabricate from single piece of slreet sleel .of same.quality as deck
units, 14 gige minimum thickness. Level Sottom and sloping_sides to direct water flow
to diain. -niaring flanges not less than three inches wid-e. -Recess not less than l'l/2
inches below roofdeck surfaces.
D. Welding Electrodes: AWS A5.l Class E-6022 or acceptable equivalent.
E. Hanger Tabs: 50 pound allowable load, maximum.
PART3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Prior to start of installation, check supporting members for correct layoul and alignment
and report deviations from the Drawings ib the Architect, General Contractor, and
Structural Engineer.
3.02 ERECTION
A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and shop drawings.
B. Placing Deck Units: Position deck units on supporting members and adjust to. final
positio-n with ends bearing on support and accuraiely aligned endto-end before being
iermanently fastened. pr6vide rooT deck end laps being plrmanently fastened. Provide
ioof deck
-end
laps of not less than 2 inches.- Do not stretch or contract si{g lap
interlocks. Placsdeck units flat and square, and secure to adjacent framing without
warp or deflection.
C. Fastening Roof Deck Units: Unless shown otherwise, fasten deck units as follows:
l. Roof Decks: Secure to supporting mernbers with U2 inch minimum diameter
fusion welds spaced 12 inchiS o.c. at end laps and 12 inches o.c. at intermediate
supports and at perimeter.
2. Where welded studs are field applied through declg such studs may be substituted
for deck fusion welds on a one for one basis.
3. Other Requirements: For 22 gage deck an9 lighterr-provide welds through 14
gage welding washers. Provide minimum of two welds per unit at each.supaort.
WEta or mec-hanicallv fasten end closures at 4 ft. o.c. Weld or mechanically fasten
side closures at 3 ft. b.c. Fasten side laps between adjacent deck units with welds,
button punch or Tek fasteners- in accordance with manufacturer's
recommeidations and at intervds not over 30 inches o.c. for roofs.
t-7554.01 05300-3
D.Fastening Comrgated Metal Forming: Secure to zupporting members with l/2 inch
minimum diameter fusion welds made through 14 gage welding washers. Mnimum
weld requirements are as follows:
I . End Laps: In valley of side laps and at center of sheet.
2. Intermediate Supports: In valley of side lap on wery other support and in valley
of center corugation of the remaining supports (to form an X pattem).
3. Exterior Edges: 12 inches on @nter.
MinimumNumber ofWelds Per 100 Sq. Ft. ofDeck Area:
l. 27 gage andthinner- 25.
2. All heavier gages - 15.
Cutting and fitting: Cut and fit deck units and aaoessories around openings and
projections through decking. Malce cuts neat, square, and trim. Cut openings true to
dimensions using maal sau's, drills, or shears. Do not torch cut.
Reinforcement at Openings:
l. Provide additional metal reinforcenrent and closure pieces as required for
strengtll continuity of decking and support of other work shown.
2. Mscellaneous openings not shown on the Drawings, such as those required for
vents, risers, conduits, etc., shall be cut and reinforced, ifnecessary, by the trade
requiring the opening.
Accessories:
l. Hanger Slot or Clips: Provide punched hanger slots between flutes where deck
units are to receive hangers for support of ceiling construction, air ducts,
difrrsers, or lighting fixtwes.
t. tlanger clips designed to clip over make side lap joints of deck units may be
used instead ofhanger slots.b. Provide manufactureds standard hanger attachment dwices.
2. Joint Covers: Provide metal joint covers at abuuing ends and changes in direction
of deck unitq orcept where taped joints are required.
3. Clozure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at open unoovered ends and edges of
roof decking and in the voids between decking and other construction. Weld into
position to provide a complete decking installation.
4. Roof Sump Pans: Place over openings in roof deckfurg and weld to top decking
surface. Space welds not more than 12 in o.c. with at least one weld at each
corner. Cut opening in bottom of sump pan to accornmodate drain.
5. Ridge and Valley Plates: Fasten to top surface of roof decking. Lap end joints
not less than 3 inches with laps in direction of water flow.
ffiw'/mr or v^rLDY
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
T
T
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
E.
F.
G.
05300-4 l-7554.01
I
l
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
T
I
I
I
I
6. Roof Insulation Support: Provide metal closure strips for support of roof
insulation adjacent to edges and openings.
3.03 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK
A. Do not use deck units for storage or as a working platform until permanently secured in
position.
B. The General Contractor shall assure that completed deck is not damaged by use as a
runway, storage of materials or subsequent work. He is to assure that construction
loads are not allowed which exceed the safe carrying capaclty of the deck.
C. Provide tabs, clips or other accessories acceptable to the fuchitect for hanging loads
exceeding 50lbs.
END OF SECTION
I
I
l-7554.01 05300-5
I
t
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
T
I
t
t
I
I
sDcrroN 0s400
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SI]MMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Load-bearing and nonJoad-bearing metal stud wall framing with anchorage,
bridgtng and bracing.
2. Metal joist framing with anchorage and bridging.
B. Related Work:
l. Section 05120 - Structurd Steel: Structural Steet.
2. Section 05210 - Metal Joists: Steel Joists.
3. Section 05310 - Metal Decking: Steel Deck.
I.O2 REFERENCES
l. Design and Manufacturers: Meet requirements of-AISC Specification.for the
DesiFr oflight Gauge Cold Formed St-eel Strucnral Members, latest edition.
2. Welding: Meet requirements of ASWDl.l.
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Prior to starting erection of studs, submit copies of manufacturer's
specifications covering all materials to be used with a[ materials and accessories plainly
identified.
B. See Section 01300 - Submittals.
l.o4 QUALITYASSURAIICE
A. Erector Qualifications: Minimum of three years successfrrl experience on comparable
cold-formed metal framing work.
B. Welder Qualifications: Currently qualified in accordance with AWS Dl.l.
I.O5 DELIVERY, STORAGEA}IDHANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened bundles or containers and store in a clean, dry
area until readv for use.
l-7554.01 05400-t
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANI.]FACTIJRERS
A. Western Metal Lath ComPanY.
B. Unimastlncorporated.
C. American Studco.
D. Approved substitution under provision Section 01600.
2.02 MATERIAL
A. Framing Members:
l. General: T1ryg size, gage, spacing and fasteners as shown on the Drawings and
required by these Specifications.
2. Studs and Track: Head and sill track and header members to be unpunched track,
same gage as studs or one gage heavier.
3. Finish: All framing members to have painted finish.
4. Steel: All framing members to be formed from steel conforming to the following:
a. 18 cage and lighter galvanized: ASTM 4446, Grade A or B.b. 18 gage and lighter painted: ASTM A 611, Grade C, 33 ksi yield.
c. 16 gage and heavier, galvanized: ASTM A,146, Grade D, 50 ksi fleld.d. 16 gage and heavier, painted: ASTM A 570, Grade 50, 50 ksi yield.
5. Stud Bridging:
a. 18 gage or heavier channel studs of same width as studs noted on
Drawings.b. Continuous minimum l-l/2 inch cold-rolled channels positioned through
stud punch-outs.
2.03 FASTENERS
A. Self-drilling, self-tapping scrEws, bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM A 90, Hot-Dip
Galvanized.
B. Anchorage Devices: Power driven or power actuated; drilled expansion bolts; screws
and sleeves.
C. Welding: ComplywithAWSDl.3.
D. Welding Electrodes: Conform to AMAW AWS A5.l or A5.5, 360)0( OR 370)()(
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
t
t
I
t
I
t
I
05400-2 t-7554.01
I
I
I
I
II
I
I!
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
PART3.E)GCUTION
3.OI ERECTION
A. Floor and Ceiling Track: Align floor and ceiling tracks according to^ Drawing
dimensions for wiil or partition l6cation. Secure with screws power driven fasteners or
welding at 24 inches bn center for interior stud walls and-12 inches on center for
exterior stud walls.
B. Studs:
l. Place studs (16 inches) (24 inches) on center as noted, and not more than 2 inches
from abutting walls and at each side of openhgs.
2. Connect studs to tracks with clips and ties, screws, or welding in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Construct comers using minimum of three studs.
4. Double studs at door, window and sidelite jambs.
5. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing.
6. Provide deflection allowance below zupported horizontal building framing in
ceiling or head track for nonload-bearing framing.
7. Splicing or wire tying offrarning components is not permitted.
8. Refer to Drawings for location of partitions extended to ceiling only, and
partitions extending through ceiling to structure above.
C. Joists: Sa floor or ceiling joists parallel and level, with end bearing, lateral braqilg an{
bridglng in accordance uith Oriwings and manufacturer's recommendations. Weld all
joint-s -and connections in accoidance with Drawings and manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Bridging and Diagonal Bracing: Install bridging and bracing of types and in.locations
indicitei on the Drawings. Uiless otherwisJiniicated, attach all biidging and diagonal
bracing by welding capable of resisting a force of 500 lbs. minimum.
E. Mscellaneous Framing and Funing:
l. Provide all necessary framing funing, etc., for special framing at recesses and
specidity items.
2. Attach cross studs or furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures behind
lavatory basins, toilet and-bat}room accessories, grab bars and other items
anchored to partitions or walls.
3. Install framing between studs for attachment of electrical boxes and other
mechanical and electrical items.
t-7554.01
E}ID OF SECTION
05400-3
I
I
I
sEcTroN 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART I.GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Referto schedule at end ofthis Section.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 03600 - Grout.
3. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry.
4. Section 05120 - Struclural Steel.
5. Section 05200 - Metal Joists.
C. Work Furnished but not Installed:
l. Anchor Bolts and Weld Plates for Anchoring Metal Fabrications: Install under
Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Anchor Bolts and Weld Plates for Anchoring Metal Fabrications: Install under
Section 04200 - Unit Masonrv.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. Steel: Meet requirements of AISC "Specifications for Architecturally Exposed
Structural Steel", latest edition and AISC "Specification for the Design, Detailing,
Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", latest edition.
B. Welding: Meet requirements of AWS "Structural Welding Code", Dl.l, latest edition.
I.O3 DEFINITIONS
A. Metal Fabrications: Synonymous with miscellaneous metals.
B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: As used under this Section, includes all metal
fabrications exposed to view.
C. Structural Steel: Includes steel columns and beams.
I.O4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified under Section 01300 for all custom
fabricated items under this Section.
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
r-7554.01 05500-l
o
reinforcing,
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
l. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments,
type offasteners and accessories.
anchorage, size and
2. Include erection drawings, elevations and details where applicable.
3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols.
4. Indicate net weld lengths and sizes.
B. Coordinate berween fabricator and installer before submission to Architect.
C. Product Data: Submit product data as specified under Section 01300 for all
manufacturefs stock items under this section.
l.o5 QUALITYASSI'RA}{CE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication ofmiscellaneous steel.
B. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done only by certified welding operators
currently qualified according to AWS Dl.l.
1.06 DELMRY, STORAGEAI.IDHANDIJNG
A. Materials to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts and otler anchorage devices
which are embedded in cas-in-place concrete construction to the project site in time to
be installed before the start ofcast-in-place concrete operations.
B. Provide setting drawings, templates, urd directions for the installation of anchor bolts
and other similar dwices.
C. Storage of Materials: Masls which are stored at the project site shall be above ground
on platforms, skids, or other supports. Protect steel from corrosion. Store other
materials in a weather-tight and dry place until ready for use.
D. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container.
I.O7 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Protection: Protect any adjacent materials or axeas below from damage due to weld
spatter or sparks during field welding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,OI MATERTALS
A. Steel Shapes, Bars, and Plates: ASTM A 36.
B. Steel Sheets: ASTM A 506.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 120, use standard malleable iron fittings.
D. Tube: Meet requirements of ASTM A 500, Grade B, latest edition.
05500-2 t-7554.01
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307 except steel to steel connections shall be ASTM 4325,
expansion bolts by approved manufacturer.
F. Welding Electrodes: Conform to AWS DI.1, 70 Series.
G. Primer Paint:
l. Non-Wet Areas: Modified alkyd, Carboline GP 818 or Tnemec 10-99.
2. Wet Areas: Zinc Filled Epory or Urethane Primer, Carboline 858 or Tnemec
90 -97.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate in accordance with details and reviewed shop drawings, all
miscellaneous items of metal work indicated or as necessary to complete the work.
Veriff dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication.
L All materials shall be new stock of types and sizes indicated.
2. Make all cuts clean and sharp with wire edges ground smooth. On completion,
the work shall be straight, rigid and tight, and free from defects of any nature.
3. Close exposed ends of steel pipe or tubing with welded caps.
4. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.
5. Fit and shop assemble, in largest practical sections, for deliveryto site.
6. Exposed mechanical fastenings shall be flusl1 countersunk screws or bolts,
unobtrusively located, consistent with desigrr of structure, except where
specifi cally noted otherwise.
7. Make exposed joints flush butt-type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened.
8. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications.
Fabiiiate anchorage and ielated components of same material and finish as metal
fabrication, unless otlerwise specified or detailed.
B. Welding: Comply with latest American Welding Society standards. Mter and cope
intersections and weld all around. Remove spatter, grind exposed welds to blend, and
contour surfaces to match those adjacent.
C. Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights called for are not available, secure
acceptance of the Architect and Structural Engineer for suitable sizes prior to
proceeding.
2.03 SHOP PAINTING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:
l. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches.
I
I
t
I
I t-7554.01 05500-3
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Galvanizedsurfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale,
and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC specifications as
follows:
l. Non-Wet Areas (Modified Allcyd): SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning."
2. Wet Areas (Zinc Filled Epory or Urethane Primer): SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparatiot\ apply primer according to
manufasturer's instructions. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints,
corners, edges, and ocposed surfaces.
I . Nply 2 coats of shop paint to be zinc filled epory primer at inaccessible surfaces
after assenrbly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from
first.
D. Shop Painting:
l. Surface Preparation: After fabricatioq clean off loose scale, rust, weld or slag
flux deposits, oil, grease, dirt, or other foreign material in accordance with SSPC-
SP3 Power Tool Cleaning for modified alkyd primer and SSPC-SP6 Commercial
Blast Cleaning for zinc fitled epor,y orurethane primer.
2. Painting: Omit shop paint o-n surfaces to be enclosed in concrete, surfaces to be-
welded] contact suribies in hiSh strength bolted friction-type connections, tops of
beams in composite constnrctioq surfaces to receive welded studs, or zurfaces in
contact with self-lubricating bearing plates.
3. Apply modified dkyd shop primer_ at 2.5_ to ].0 mils dry film thickness and zinc
fiIled epory primer at 3.0 to 4.0 mils dry film thickness.
2.04 BOLLARDS
A. Steel pipe 6 inches diameter by l/4 inch thickness by 7'-0" long.
B. Set in 12 inches diameter posthole with 4'-0' orposed above grade. Fill posthole with
concrete and pipe with concrete.
C. Steel pipe shall be galvanized.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
t
I
t
I
I
T
I05500-4 r-7554.0r
I
t
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
PART3.DGCUTION
3.01 FABRICATION A].lD ERECTION
A. Fabricate supplementary parts necessary to complete each iterq through work is not
definitely shown or specified.
B. Furnish to appropriate trades all anchors, sockets or fastenings required for securing
work to other construction.
C. Verify all dimensions and take all measurements. necessary at the site before fabrication
ofth6 various items to ensure fit in the construction.
D. Form materials to shapes indicated with straight lines, sharp angles, and smooth curves.
Drill or'punch holes with smooth edges.
E. Weld permanent shop connections. Continuouslyweld and-grind.smooth welds that will
be exiosed. Conceil fastenings where practica-ble. _
punch or drill for temporary field
connections and for attachment ofwork by other trades.
F. Fabricate work in shop in as large assemblies as is practicable.
G. Welding shall conform to the requirements for Shielded Metal Arc- Welding of the
Standarl Code for Arc and Gas W6lding of the American Welding Society.
INSTALLATION
Set metal work level, true to a line, plumb, or as indicated. Shim bearing plates with
metal, and grout solid with non-shrink grout.
Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC.
Weld field connections and grind smooth, where practicable. Conceal fastenings where
practicable.
D. Secure metal to masonry with embedded anchors, setting compoun4, l".a{ calking and
sleeves, or cement-sand-grouting. Expansion bolts and screws permitted for light duty
services only.
E. Metal worh in place, shall be approved before being covered.
3.03 SCIIEDIJLE
A. This Section includes, but is not specifically limited to metal fabrications and
components listed in the following schedule:
l. Refer to the Drawings for items not specifically scheduled.
2. Provide anchorage and attachments required for installation.
B. Interior and orterior bumper posts, bollards and guard rails.
C. Overhead door jamb and head framing.
3.OZ
A.
B.
c.
I
I
t
T
t
t l-7554.01 05500-5
o
bracketsD.
E.
F.
G.
Fabricated steel for mill worlg lavatories and fixed equipment.
Support angles and ernbed plates for fixed equipment.
Steel support and bracing angles as indicated.
All other miscellaneous anchors, sleeves, bolts, brackets, clips, inserts, tubing, bar stoclg
plates and other iterns not distinctly specified under other sections, but necessary to
bomplete each item through such work may not be shown or specified.
ENDOF SECTION
05500-6 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 05530
GRATINGS
PART I.GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
|' Precast, pre-sloped trench channel with coated ductile iron gratings.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
l. Division2 Section nsewerage and Drainage" for piping connections to trench
drains.
1.02 PERFORMANCEREQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install gratings to withstand the
following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the
grating materials, anchors, and connections.
l. Frames and Grates: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 250 lbf per sq. ft.
or a concentrated load of 8000 lbf,, whichever produces the greater stress.
I.O3 SUBMTTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for grating, manufacturer's clips and anchorage devices for gratings.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of gratings. Include plans, sections,
and details of connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates
for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections.
l. For installed gratings indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include
structural analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer
who was responsible for their preparation.
1.04 QUALITYASSURAITCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing gatings similar to that
indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance and with
sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 05530 - I
B. Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally authorized to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated that have resulted in the installation of gratings similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service
performance.
1.05 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which
gratings must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded
measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
l. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Worh guarantee
dimensions and proceed with fabricating gatings without field measurements.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTT'RERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requiremurtg provide Polymer-Concrete,
Channel Drainage Systems products by one ofthe following:
l. ABT,Inc.
2. ACO Polymer Products, Inc.
3. Innovative Plastic Products, Inc.
4. Quazite Div., Morrison Molded Fiber Glass Co.
2.02 POLYMER.CONCRETE CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. General: Modular system of precast, polymer-concrete channel sections, metal grates,
and appurtenances, desigrred so that grates fit into channel reicesses without rocking or
rattling. Include number ofunits required to form total lengths indicated.
B. Wide-Width, Lwel-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Systems: Include the following
components:
l. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps.
Include 8-inch inside width and l3-3l4-inch deep, rounded bottom with level
invert, and outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
l
t
I
t
I
I
I05530 - 2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Grates with slots or other openings that fit recesses in channels.
a. Material: Coated ductile iron.
3. Lochng Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to
channel sections.
C. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, except where
otherwise indicated.
D. Channel-Section, Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by system
manufacfurer.
PART 3 -DGCUTION
3.OI PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions,
and directions for installation of anchorages, including sleeves, anchor bolts, and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site'
3.02 DRAINAGE SYSTEMINSTALLATION
A. Assemble and install components according to manufacture/s written instructions and
as indicated.
B. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with final finished surface.
C. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants,
adhesives, fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer.
D. Embed channel sections and appurtenances in a 4-inch minimum depth of concrete
around bottom and sides.
E. Fasten gratesto channel sections ifindicated'
F. Assemble trench sections with flanged joints.
G. Embed trench sections and appurtenances in a 4-inch minimum depth of concrete
around bottom and sides.
3.03 ADruSTINGA}IDCLEAI\IING
A. Ctear interior of trenches and structures of dirt and superfluous material as the work
progresses. Maintain, swab or clean as it is completed.
l-7554.01 05530 - 3
B.
c.
Flush piping and other structures, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, to
remove collected debris.
Inspect to determine whether line displacunent or other damage has occurred.
l. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Not more than l/8 inch between units.
b. Deflection: Not more than l/8 inch under ftll loading.
c. Crushed, broke4 cracked, or otherwise demaged units.
END OF SECTION
ffiEC/mq or wrU05530 - 4 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
sEcTroN 05100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SI]MMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Types of work in this Section include rough carpentry for:
a. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking and sleepers.
b. Panel sheathing.c. Fasteners and connectors required for tlre Work.
B. Related Work:
l. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.
I.O2 DEFINITION
A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and
whicl is geireratiy not exposed, orc6p as otherwi-se indicated.
I.O3 SIJBMTTALS
A. Submit manufacture/s product data for rough carpentry wood treatment in accordance
with Section 01300.
B. Wood treatment data from chemical treatment manufacturer. Include chemical
treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling storing, installing, and finishing
treated material
l. Preservation Treatment: Include certification by treatment plant stating type of
solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservation retained, and
compliance with applicable standards.
2. Waterborne Preservative Treatment: Include certification that moisture content
of treated wood was reduced to levels specified prior to shipment to Project site.
3. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that treated
wood complies with specified requirements.
4. Warranty: Include warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of
treatment.
1.04 QUALITYASSIJRAI.ICE
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS20 and with applicablg rules of the respective
grading and inspecting ag6nlies for species and products indicated including moisture
Eontent and aciual sEdrelated to the indicated nominal sizes, except as othenrise
indicated.
l-7554.01 06100-l
B. Plywood Product Standards: Comply with PS I or, for products not manufactured
urider PS I provisions, with applicable APA PRP-108 Performance Standard for type of
panel indicated.
I.O5 DELIVERY, STORAGEA}IDHANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against o(Posure to
weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood above
ground level with uniformly spaced supports to prevent deformatioq and provide air
circulation within stacks.
I.06 PROJECT CONDITION
A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for
accurate fit. Conelate location of furring, nailers, blocking grounds and similar
supports to allow proper attachment of other Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANI.JFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
l. Wood-Preservative-TreatedMaterials:
a. Baxter: J. H. Baxter Co.
b. ChemicalSpecialties,Inc.
c. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc.
d. Ifickson Corp.
e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.
f Osmose Wood Preserving Inc.
2. Fire-Retardant-Treated lvfuterids, lnterior Type A:
a. Hickson Corp. nDricon".
b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. "$no-Gnrd".
c. Osmose Wood Presendng Inc. nFlame ProofLHC-HTT".
3. Air-InfiltrationBarriers:
a. AmocoFoamProductsCo.
b. Anthony Industries, Inc.; Simplex Products Division.
c. Celotex Corporation (The); Building Products DMsion.
d. DuPort Company; Fibers Department.
e. Raven lndustries, lnc.
f. Sto-Cote Products, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Lumber, General: Nominal sizes are indicated except as shown by detail dimensions.
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
I
I
I06100-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
D.
Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.
l. Provide dressed lumbeq SD4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent ma:cimum moisture content at time of
dressing.
B. Framing Lumber (2 inches through 4 inches thick): For light framing (less than 6 inches
wide) provide the following grade and species:
l. "No. 2 or Better" grade.
2. Douglas Fir.
C. For structural fruning (6 inches and wider and from 2 inches to 4 inches thick), provide
the following grade and species:
l. "No. 2 or Better" grade.
2. Douglas Fir.
Boards (less than 2 inches thick).
l. Exposed Boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished worh prqvtqe
boirds of 19 percent mardmum uS-Dry" m6isture content or "KD-19" and the
following species and grade.
a. Southern Pine'T,Io. I Boards".b. Any species graded'No. 2 Common Boards and Better" per WWPA rules.
2. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide
boards of 19 percent m&\imum moisture content (S-Dry or KD-19) and of the
following species and grade:
a. Redwood "Construction Common" (RIS).
b. Southern Pine "No. 2 Boards" (SPIB).
c. Any species graded "Construction Boards" or "No. 3 Common" (WCLIB or
ww?A).
Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide wood for support or attachment of other work
including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, fii.ting, grounds,. stripping and similar
memberi. Providalumber of sizes indicate4 *orked into shapes shown, and as follows:
l. Moisture Content: 15 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive
wood preservative treatment.
2. Grade: "No. 2 or Better" grade light framing size lumber of any species ligg{ by
PS 20 for size lumber as required.- Provide "Construction", grade boards (RIS or
WCLIB) or'T,Io. 2" boards (SPIB oTWWPA).
Plywood:
l. Trademark ldenti$ each plywood panel with appropriate APAtrademark.
F.I
I
t r-7554.0r 06100-3
4. Plynood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, APA
C-D grade designatioq plugged in with exterior glue and fire-retardant treated, in
thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than ll2inch.
2.03 WOOD TREATMENT
A. PreservativeTreatrnent:
Where lumber or plywood is indicated as nTreated", or is specified to be treated,
comply with applicable requirements ofAWPA Standards.
Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Qudity lvlark Requirements.
Wood nailers for roofing shall be preservative treated to comply with roof
manufactureds standards for Wolmanized or equal treatment.
Creosote and asphaltic preservatives are not acceptable.
Pressure-treated Above-ground ltems: Water-bome pres€rvatives complying with
AWPA C2 for lumber and C22 for plywood. After treatment, air dry or kiln-dry
to a mardmum moisture oont€nt of 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the
following:
a. Wood cants, nailers, anrbs, blocking stripping, and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing.b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking furring, stripping and similar concealed
members in contact with masonry or concr€te.c. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
Complete fabrication of treated iterns prior to treatment, where possible. If cut
after treatment, coat qrt surfaces with healty brush coat of same chemical used for
treatment. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard
damaged or ddective pieces.
Exposure Durability
B. Fire-RetardantTreatment:
l. Where fire-retardant or "non-com" lumber is specffied, required by code, or
otherwise indicate{ comply with the AWPA C20 for lumber and C27 for
plywood standards for preszure impregnation with fire-retardant chemicals to
achieve a flame-spread rating of not more than 25 when tested in accordance with
UL Test 723 or ASTME 84.
a. Provide tll- label on each piece offire-retardant lumber.b. Air dry or Kiln-dry treated items to a manimum moisture content of 15
Percent.
-9
Concealed Performance-Rated Plywood: Where plywood will be used for
concealed types of applications, provide APA Performance-Rated Panels
complyrng with requirements indicated for grade designation, span rating,
exposure durability classification, edge detail (where applicable) and thickness.
2.
3.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l.
/-.
3.
4.
5.
6.
061004 l-7554.01
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Use chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and plywood with the
following properties under conditions present after installation:
a. Bending strength, stifhess, and fastener-holding capacities are not reduced
below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation under
elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions
when tested by a qualified independent testing agency'
b. No form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes
related to treatment.
c. Contact with treated wood does not promote conosion of metal fasteners.
2,04 AIR-INFILTRATIONBARRIER
A. Asphalt-saturated organic fett complying with ASTMD226, Typel (No. 15 asphalt
felt), unperforated.
B. Contractor's Option: Air retarder complying with ASTM E 1677; made from
polyolefins; either crosslaminated films, woven strands, or spunbonded fibers; coated or
uncoated; with or without perforations to transmit water vapor but not liquid water; and
as follows:
l. Minimum Thickness: 3 mils.
2. Mnimum Water-Vapor Transmission: l0 perms when tested according to
ASTM E 96, Procedure A.
3. Maximum Flame Spread: 25 per ASTM E 84.
4. Mnimum Allowable Exposure Time: 3 months.
2.05 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of
high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per
ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nailq Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASMEBl8.6.l.
E. LagBolts: ASMEBl8.2.1.
t-7554.01 06100-5
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade d with ASTM A 563 hex nuts
and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.06 MISCELLA}IEOUSMATERIALS
A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a
sill sealer; l/4-inch nominal thickness, compressible to ll32 incfu setected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
PART3 -E)GCUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Discard units of materid with defects which might impair quality of work, and units
which are too small to use in fabricating work ftth minimuin joints or optimum joint
arTangement.
B. Set- carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true
and accurately cut and fitted.
C. Securelyattach caqpen!ry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as
reqlg.gq b-y recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposet carpentry work
and fill holes.
D. Securely attach rough caryentry work to zubstrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
a. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and altied fasteners.b. "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with
AFPA's "National Desiglr Specifications for Wood Construction.,'c. "Table 23-I-Q-Nailing Schedule" of the Uniform Building Code.
E. Use common wire nails, s(c€pt as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish
work. Select fasteners of size-that will not penetrate members where dpposite side will
be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connEctions between
members. Install fasteners without splitting ofwood. Pre-drill as required.
F. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to
weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity
G. Do not rip or mill fire retardant treated lumber unless acceptable to manufacturer after
treatment of cuts.
H. Wood Grounds, Nailers, Blocking and Sleepers:
l. Provide wherwer shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other
work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of
work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I06100-6 l-7554.01
l.
J.
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
J.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts
and nuts flush with surfacei, unless oth'e'nvise if,own. Builil into masonry during
installation of masonry w6rk. Where possible, anchor to formwork before
concrete placement.
Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated,. kgV-b3veled lumber
not less itran t-tlZ 6ches wide and of tliickness required to bring face of-ground
to exact thickness of finish material involved. Rembve temporary grounds when
no longer required.
I.Wood Framing:
K. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
Sheathing: Screw to framing.
Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports.
3.02 AIR-INFILTRATIONBARRIER
A. Cover sheathing with air-infiltration barrier as follows:
Provide framing members of sizes and on spacing ,shgwn, a1t{-ta*" openings as
showr\ or if n6t showrL comply with recdmmendations of "Manual for House
Framing', of American Forest'aid Paper Association. Do not splice structural
members between supports.
Firestop concealed spaces with wood blocking not less than 2 inches thiclq i! nol
blocked by other fraining members. Provide blocking at each building story level
and at ends ofjoist spans.
Installation of Plywood :
l. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in form No. E304,-
"APA Design/C6nstructib:n Guide - Residentid & Commercial," for types of
plywood products and applications indicated.
l.
I
l.
7
3.
Apply asphalt-saturated organic felt horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6 inch
end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
Apply air retarder to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Apply air-infiltration barrier to cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap.
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01
/:\NI\)./1wlmrx or vrtrt /06100-7
I
I SECTION 06200
FINISHCARPENTRY
t PARr l -.ENERALI ":'ffiJ,".*,
I
I
I
l. Miscellaneous interior and exterior exposed wood members commonly known as
"Finish Carpentry" or "Millwork".
2. Exterior wall siding.
3. Interior and exterior trim.
4. PlasticLaminate-FacedCasework.
5. Countertops including vanities and tops required for plastic laminate casework.
I 6. Installation of door hardware.
I B. Related Work:
I L Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications; support brackets for vanities.
2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.
3. Section 08611 - Wood Windows.
4. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.
L.Oz REFERENCES
I A. Applicable Publications: The publications listed below form a part of the Specification
to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic
I designation only.
I l. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards".
I B. Quality Standards: For the following types of architeclural woodwork, comply with theI indicated standards as applicable:
l. Standing and Running Trim: AWI Section 300.
2. Architectural Cabinets: AWI Section 400.
3. Shelving: AWI Section 600.
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
l-7s54.01 06200-t
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
B.
c.
D.
4. Miscellaneous Work: AWI Section 700.
5. Installation ofWoodwork: AWI Section 1700.
6. Formaldehyde Emission Lwels:
a. Particleboard: NPA 8 compliance.b. Medium Density Fiberboard: NPA 9 compliance.c. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA FE compliance.
STIBMITTALS
Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, product data and samples for finish carpentry and
millwork in accordance with Section 01300.
Shop Drawings: Showing location of each itenr, dimensioned plans and elevations,
large scale details, attachment devices and other components including hardware
schedule(s). Submit Shop Drawings for all millwork items required. Key Shop
Drawings to drawing and section number as shown on the Drawings.
Product data for each type of factory-fabricated product and process specified,
including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual
components, profiles, textures, and colors.
Samples for initial selection purposes of the following in form of manufacture/s color
charts consisting of actud units or sections of units showing full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for eachtype ofmaterial indicated.
l. Samples required include:
a. Wood veneers and solid wood.b. Plastic laminate.
Samples for verification purposes of the following:
l. Lumber and panel products for non-factory-applied finish, 50 square inches for
lumber andS-ll2 inches by ll inches for panels for each species and cut, finished
one side and one edge, with one-half of orposed surface finished.
2. Lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 square inches for
lumber and 8-l/2 inches by ll inches for panels for each finish system and color.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AI.ID HANDLING
Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to
prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
Do not deliver finish carp€ntry materials, until wet worlq grinding and similar operations
which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation
areas.
l. I4 due to unforeseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials must be stored in
other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for
installation areas.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
06200-2 l-7554.01
t
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
t
t
T
I
I
t
I
I
o
ITIONS1.05 PROJECT COND
A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodvork Manufacturer's and
Installer's coordinated advice for optimum t'emperature and humidity conditions. for
woodwork durine its storase and iirstallation. Do not install woodwork until these
conditions have 6'een attainfr and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus
1.0 percent of optimum moisture content fiom date of installation through remainder of
construction period.
B. Field Meazurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction,
check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before
manufacturing woodwork; show recorded meisurements on final. shgn tgyngt
Coordinate nianufacturing ichedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
l. Where field measurements cannot be made without delayng the Work, guaraqtee
dimensions and proceed with manufacture of woodwork without field
measurements. Cdordinate otler construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty for Siding: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer
and Installer agreeing to repair or replace siding that fails in materials or workmanship
within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to,
deformation or deterioration of siding beyond normal weathering. This warranty shall
be in addition to, and not a limitation of,, other rights the Owner may have against the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
l. Warranty Period for Siding @xcluding Finish): 25 years after date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. General:
I Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide
dressed or worked and dresied lurinber, as applicible, manufactured to the actual
sizes as required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and pattern as shown, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Panel Products:
1. Plywood Siding: Exterior-type, APA 303 series siding, in panel sizes indicated.
a. Thickness: ll2nch.
b. Type: 303-6-W, cedar faced, rough sawn" plain with no grooves'
2. Particle Board: 4S-lb-density panels for 314 inch and less, thicknesses complying
with AI.ISI 4208.1 for Gride l-M-l except that minimums for modulus of
l-7554.01 06200-3
o
edge
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
c.
elasticity and screw-holding capacity on face and
lb, and 225 lb, respectively.
shallbe 300,000 psi, 250
a. For 44-lb-density panels for thicknesses of 13116 inch to l-l/2 inch,
complying with AI{SI A208.1 for Grade l-M-l o<cept that minimums for
modulus of rupture, modulus of elasticity, internal bond, linear expansion,
and screw-holding capacity on face and edge shall be 1300 psi, 250,000 psi,
60 psi, 0.50 percent, 250 lb, and 175 lb, respectively.
3. Plywood: APA A-D Exposure I plywood, thickness(es) as shown.
a. Provide hardwood edges where shown.
4. Hardboard: PS 58, Class I (tempered), smooth one side or both sides where
indicated, l/8 inch t}ickness unless as othenuise indicated.
Exterior Millwork and Trim:
l. Lumber Trim: Provide finished lumber and moldings comp$ing with the
following requirements including those ofthe grading agency listed with species:
a. Species: Western red cedar; I.ILGA WCLIB, orWWPA.
b. Grade: A.
c. Texhre: One face saw textured, the other surfaced (smooth).
d. Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Solid lumber stock.
e. Lumber for Painted Finish: Glued-up lumber or solid lumber stock.
Interior Millwork and Trim:
l. Quality Standards: Comply with AWI 300, Custom Grade.
2. Wood Species: All interior wood species noted as "Wood Base", "Hardwood" or
uOak" shall be Red Oalq plain sawn.
3. Softwood Lumber and Trim: Any species listed in Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards, Custom Grade for painted finish for exterior and transparent
finish for interiors.
4. Ext€rior trim is to be solid or finger-joint primed Pine S4S No. I Grade. Back
prime facia boards.
5. Solid Stock: Selected for color and graining. Unless otherwise shown, provide
solid material of the same species as adjacent or abutting exposed, transparent
finished veneer.
E. Closet and Storage Shelving:
l. Shelving: APAB-DExposure I plywoodwithsolidwoodfrontedge.
2. SheMng and Rod Supports: K & V No. I195 zupports with ma;<imum spacing of
60 inches o.c. and K & V No. 660 rods.
D.
062004 s t-7554.01
a.
b.
c.
d.
I
I
t
I
t
t
T
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
T
I
I
o
laminate zurfacedF. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Provide plastic
casework and vanities specified in this Section.
l. Qualrty Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 "Architectural Cabinets" and its
Division 400C "Countertops. "
2. Selection for Pricing Purposes: Manufacturer's standard patterns, wood grains,
solid colors and finishes as selected by Architect.
3. Countertop Core Material: Particle board, thickness as noted.
a. For countertops within 5 feet of sinks or other "wet" area sources, provide
"Extetrior" grdde plywood or phenolic resin particle board complying with
ASTMD 1037.
4. Countertops: Minimum 3/4 inch thick with l/2 inch overhang. Finish top, front
and exposed sides with plastic laminate.
5. Backsplashes: Minimum 3/4 inch thick, fini_shed- with plastic lamingte on front,
top ani exposed side edges. Provide top scribe edges where required.
6. Plastic Laminate:
a. Square Edge Nosing: NEMA LD3, Grade GP50, General Purpose high-
pressure decorative plastic laminate.b. Backer Sheet: NEMALD3, Grade BK 20.
7. Nosing: Grade GP50 high-pressure decorative plastic laminate.
8. Aprons: Plastic laminate faced, 3/4 inch thick plywood or solid wood, in depth or
profile shown on the Drawings.
G. Plastic Laminate: Provide plastic laminate manufactured by Formica Corporation,
Nevamar, Wilson Art.
l. Finishes:
Plastic Laminate for Horizontal Surfaces: NEMA LD3 Type GP 50, 0.050
inch thich General-Purpose Type (high pressure).
Plastic Lanninate for Eiternal Verticd Sirrfaces:- NEMA LD3 Type GP 28,
0.028 inch thick, General-Purpose Type (high preszure).
Plastic Laminate for Cabinet Linings: NEMALD3 Type CL 20, 0.020 inch
thick.
Plastic Laminate for Concealed Panel Backing: NEMA LD3 Type BK 20,
0.020 inch thiclg Backer-Type (high pressure).
2.02 ACCESSORIES AI.IDNAILS
A. Anchor bolts. Steel, size as indicated, complete with nuts and washers.
B. Bolts: Lag, Toggle and Mscellaneous Bolts, and Screws. Type, size and finish best
suited for the intended use.
countertops for
t-7554.O1 06200-5
c.
D.
E.
F.
Clip Aneles: Steel, 3/16 inch thich size best suited for irfended use; or zinc-coated
steil or lron commercial clips desigrred for connecting wood mernbers.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
cadability to sustair\ without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when
initaUea- in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in
concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
indepurdent testing agency.
l. Material: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as required.
Nails and Staples: Size and tlpe best suited for the purposc, in accordance with Fed.
Spec. FF-N-I-OS when applicable to tlrye used. In general, 8 penny or larger nails shall
b6 used for nailing through I inch thick lumber and for toe nailing 2 inch thick lumber;
16 penny or largei nails shall be used for nailing through 2 inch thick lumber.
Screws: Selea material, t5pe, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS
FF-S-I I I for applicable requirements.
l. For metal fr'amfug and shelf supports, provide screws as recommended by metal
framing manufacturer.
2. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Stainless steel, noncorrosive aluminum
or hot-dip galvanized nails, in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of l-ll2
inches into substrate unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer.
a. Provide prefinished nails for face nailing of material to receive stain in color
to matchwhere face nailing is unavoidable.b. Countersink nails and fill surface where face nailing is unavoidable.
3. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring
devices of t1pe, size, material, and finish requir€d for application indicated to
provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.
a. Countersink nails, fill surface flush and sand where face nailing is
unavoidable.b. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity,
provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating
complying with ASTM A 153.
Adhesives: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives.
MOISTURE CONTENT
At the time lumber and other materisls are delivered and when installed in the Worlq
their moisture content shall be as follows:
l. Treated and untreated lumber 2 inches or less in tlrickness: 19 percent ma:<imum.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
G.
H.
2.O3
A.
06200-6 1-7554.01
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
2.04 CASEWORK
A. Cabinetry: AWI "Custom" grade, Section 400 "Architectural Cabinets" and its DMsion
4008 "Iiminate Clad Cabiiets" or Division 16008 "Modular Cabinets", Contractor's
option.
B. Casework shall be surfaced with plastic laminates on the exposed surfaces.
l. Interior sides and doors of cabinets shall be faced with plastic laminate balancing
sheets, putty color, with matte finish.
2. Cabinet doors and drawer edges shall be edged with PVC edging.
C. Frame cabinets and casework in a substantial manner with all necessary blocking,
braces, bottoms, etc. Cross supports under countertops shall be sufficiently heavy to
carry fhe weighi of a man with6rit saggng. Frame shall be pinned, glued, or screwed
together in accordance with AWI "Custom" Standards.
D. Cabinet backs not exposed to view shall be hardboard.
2.05 CASEWORKHARDWARE
A. Heavy duty, five knuckle 2-ll2 tnch institutional typg hinge. Mll ground, hospital tip,
tight 'pin f6iture with all edges eased. Hing€ to be full wrap arou_nd type of tempered
stlet .OSf inch thick. Each [inge to have minimum seven screws No. 8, 5/8 inch F.H.S.
M. to assure positive door action and alignment.
l. Provide two hinges for doors up to 48 inches high and three hinges for doors over
48 inches high.
B. Adjustable Shelf Standards: Knape & Vogt No. 255 with No. 256 supports. or optional
driiled holes at l-ll4 inch o.c.; dulal pr4 anti+ip clip supports rated at 300 lb/clip.
C. Door and Drawer Pulls: Surface mounted solid metal wire type, 4 inches wide, US26D
or US32D finish.
D. Drawer Slides: Knape & Vogt No. 5l I .
E. Drawer and Door Locks: Half-mortise type, disc tumbler and cam bolt, round cylinder
only exposed, plated finis[ with strike.
l. Provide Nationat Lock "RemovaCore" witl a minimum of 50 lock changes'
F. Grommets: l-l/4 inch diameter, black plastic with grommet cap.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection aggncles
and manufacturer's recommendatldns for moisture content of finish carpentry in relation
to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation
areas. Provide finish caxpentry with ri'oisture content that is compatible with Project
requirements.
l-7554.01 06200-7
B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles and
radius indicated for the following:
l. Lumber less than I inch in nominal thickness: l/16 inch.
2. Lumber I inch or more in nominal thickness: l/8 inch.
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
o
details
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
B.
c.
3.03
A.
EXAMINATION
Prior to starting worlg examine and daermine conditions of preceding
suitability and adequacy of performance to ensure compliance with
workmanship of this Section.
PREPARATION
Clean substrates ofprojections and substances detrimental to application.
Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas
before installation for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning recommended
by manufacturer.
Backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on tlre ext€rior. Comply with
requirements for surface preparation and application in Section "Painting".
INSTALLATTON
General: Closely fit and accurately set members to required lines and lwels, and rigidly
secured in place. Where detailed nailing requirements are not specified, nail size and
nail spacing shall be zuffcient to dwelop as adequate strength for the connection
without splitting the members.
Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted,
improperly reated or finishd not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with
proper jointing arrangernents.
l. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or pattems.
Provide blocking as necessary for the application ofgypsum board and other materials
or building items. Cut blocking to fit between framing members and rigidly nail.
Provide nailers and nailing strips as necessary for the attachment of finish materials.
Run strips in lengths as long as practicable, butt jointed, cut into wood framing members
when necessary, and rigidly secured in place.
Provide wood grounds as necessaqr for attachment of trim, finis[ and other work. Run
grounds in lengths as long as practicable, buttjointed, and rigidly secured in place.
Instdl funing strips as required at 16 hches on oenter, run in lengths as long as
practicable, butjointed and rigidly secured in place.
Install trim with lengths as long as practicable and closely fitted joints. Blind nail to the
extent practicable; set and fill face nailing with non-staining putty to match finish. Use
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
indicated. Ease edges to
work for
quality of
B.
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
06200-8 t-7554.01
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
!
I
I
screws for fastening to metal; set and fill same as for nails. Sta_g_ger and conceal joints.
Cope returns and ii'terior angles and miter at exterior corners. Use scarfjoints tor end-
to-end joints. Shoulder flat work to reduce warping.
L Match color and grain pattern across joints.
2. Install trim after drywall joint finishing operations are completed'
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood prior to nailing or fastening to. prgvent splitting.
Fasten to prevent movement 6r warping. Countersink nail heads on exposed
carpentry work and fill holes.
4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side
exposed to weather.
3.04 SIDINGINSTALLATION
A. Plywood Siding: Install panels with edges over framing or blocking. Nail at 6-inch
intervals at panel perimeter and l2-inch intervals at intermediate supports, unless
manufacturer recommends other intervals. Leave l/16-inch gap between adjacent
panels, unless otherwise recornmended by panel manufacturer. Leave l/8-inch gap at
perimeter and openings, unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer.
l. Seal buttjoints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations.
2. Install continuous metal flashing at horizontal panel joints with U8-inch expansion
gap.
3. Apply battens and corner trim as indicated.
4. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent by countersinking and filling, by
placing in grooves ofsiding pattern, or by concealing with applied trim or battens
as detailed. Do not nail through overlapping pieces.
B. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on the Drawings and as recommended by
siding manufacturer.
C. Finish: Apply finish within 2 weeks of installation.
D. Install siding to comply with manufacture/s warranty requirements.
3.05 APPLICATION OF HARDWARE
A. Install door hardware in accordance with Section 08710 - Finish llardware'
B. Receive, store and be responsible for all finished hardware.
C. Apply hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
D. Fit accurately, apply securely and adjust carefully.
1-7554.01 06200-9
E. Use care not to injure work when applyrng hardware.
F. Remove and replace doors so they may have bottoms painted.
G. Installation of hardware items selected from tle finish hardware allowance is a part of
this work.
H. The location of hardware in connection with doors shall be as follows (unless otherwise
shown on Drawings):
l. Center door knobs 38 inches above finished floor.
2. Locate upper edge of top hrnge7-ll2 inches below head of frame.
3. Locate lower edge of bottom ltngeT-ll2 inches above finished floor.
4. Space center hinges equal distance between top and bottom hinges.
I. Protect hardware until painting is complete. Prior to completion of this Work, examine
all doors and other finish hardware installed under this Section; adjust as required and
leave hardware in proper working condition.
3.06 ADruSTMENT, CLEAI{ING, FIMSHINGA}IDPROTECTION
A. Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible to eliminate
defects functiondly and visually; where not possible to repair proper$, replace
woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean finish carpentry work on orposed and semi-orposed surfaces.
C. Refer to DMsion 9 Section - Painting for final finishing of installed finish carpentry
work.
D. Protection: Installer of finish carpentry work shall advise Contractor of final protection
and maintained conditions necessary to ensure that work will be with out damage or
deterioration at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I06200-10 l-7554.01
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
SECTION 07160
BITIIMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI STIMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B.
l. Cold applied asphalt bitumen dampproofing.
2. Protectivecovering.
Related Work:
1. Section 03300 - Concrete Work: Concrete substrate jointing method.
SUBMITTALS
Submit product data under provisions ofSection 01300.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
Submit manufacturer's certificate that installed materials meet or exceed specified
requirements.
QUALITY ASSITRAI.ICE
Applicator Qualifi cations :
l. Company specializing in bituminous waterproofing systems with 5 years minimum
expenenoe.
2. List of completed projects comparable to this project is required.
PRODUCT HANDLING
Deliver products in manufacturer's sealed containers, with seals and labels intact.
Store materials in an enclosed space protected from weather and out of direct rays of
the sun. Maintain a temperatfre range of 40 degrees F. minimum, 90 degrees F.
maximum.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Dampproofing shall be applied when the temperature is 40 degrees F. or above.
Application at temperatures below 40 degrees F. shall be permitted only after written
affroval from the dampproofing manufacturer and only after adequate precautions have
bbbn taken to assure dry and frost-free concrete surfaces.
Do not apply during inclement weather.
1.02
A.
B.
c.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
B.
1.05
A.
B.
c.
I
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 07160-l
I.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent work from damage due to qme ofwork included in this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANI.JFACTURER
A. Sonneborn Building Products.
B. Approvedsubstitutions.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Hydrocide 600 non-fibrated, asphalt emulsion dampproofing.
2.O3 ACCESSORIES
A. Spray Equipment:
l. Airless spray with a 45:l Graco King pump at 3000 psi with a 50 ft. 3/8 inch I.D.
hose.
2. Gun; Hydra-Mastic 207-945 with a 619 revers-a-clean spray tip.
B. Protection Board: l/8 inch thick asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard, compatible,
water resistant.
PART 3 -E)GCUTION
3.01 EXAIVIINATION
A. Verifr surfaces are solid, free of frozen matter, loose particles, cracks, pits, rough
projections, and foreigrr matter d*rimental to adhesion and application of
damPProofing.
B. Do not apply darrpproofing to frozen, dirty, or dusty surfaces unacceptable to
applicator.
C. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed.
D. Beginning of installation means acc€ptance of subsrate.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, and honeycomb in substrate.
3.03 APPLICATION OF DAMPPROOFING
A. Apply dampproofing in two coats by brush or spny, allowing first coat to dry tacky
before applying second coat.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
T
I
I
t
I
Ir-7554.0r 07160-2
t
t
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l. Fill in all crevices and grooves making sure coating is continuous and free from
breaks and pinholes.
2. Carry coating over exposed top and outside edge offooting.
3. Spread around all joints, grooves, and slots, and into all chases, comers, reveals,
and soffits.
4. Bring the coating to finished grade.
B. Bacldll shall not be placed agahst dampproofing for at least 24 to 48 hours after
application.
l. Place bacldll within 7 days.
2. Take care that bacldll is placed in a manner that will not rupture or-damage.the
protection board and film-or cause the coating or membranes to be displaced on
thewall.
C. Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface watertight with mastic.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished dampproofing from damage during bacldll operations by adhering
protection board with mastic over treated surfaces.
B. Protection board not required at foundation insulation locations.
C. Neatly fit boards around pipes and projections.
D. Bacldll against protection board to Prevent injury to membrane.
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 07160-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN 07210
BUILDING INSI]LATION
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI ST]MMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Batt insulation.
2. Rigid insulation.
3. Safing inzulation.
4. Firestoppinginsulation.
5. Perimeterinsulation.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 07210 - Firestopping.
2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board; acoustical insulation.
3. Division 15 - Pipe and Duct Insulation.
I.O2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit sarnples of each material or product to be used.
B. Submit samples clearly identified with manufacturer's name, brand name, R value, and
composition.
C. Submit insulation manufacturer'srecommendationsfor:
L Adhesive for use on metal deck or concrete wall installation.
2. Procedures for use ofadhesive.
1.03 DELI'IfERY, STORAGE AI{D HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original packaging.
B. Clearly identify manufacturer, contents, brand name, applicable standard, and R value.
C. Store materials offground.
D. Protect against weather, condensatioq and damage.
E. Immediately remove damaged material from site.
l-7554.O1 o72t0-l
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTT]RERS
A. Owens-ComingFiberglass. @att Insulation).
B. Thermal Engineered Systems @att Insulation).
C. Schullerlnternational.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Batt, Insulation General:
l. 25 flame spread and 50 smoke dwelopment per ASTM E 84.
2. Rated noncombustible per ASTM E 136.
3. Batts shall have minimum R-Value of 3.0 per inch of insulation thickness.
B. Foil Faced Batt Insulation:
l. Flame resistant FSK-25, resilient glass fibers bonded with thermosetting resin to
foil facing.
2. Fire classification: 25150 or less rating per ASTM E 84.
3. Perm Rating: 0.5 grains/br.sq.Mn. ofHg.
4. R-ValueVSize: For walls; R-13, 3-ll2' thick, 16" wide.
C. Perimeterlnsulation:
l. 1" thick "Styrofoam SM" as manufactured by Dow Chemical Co. To be installed
in two l" layers.
2. Mastic shall be Contech PL300.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.OI PREPARATION
A. Do not install insulation until the construction has progressed to the point that inclement
weather will not damage or wet tlte insulation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Batt Insulation:
l. Install insulation between framing members with inzulation fitting snugly between
framing members.
Z. Set reflective, foil-faced units with not less than 0.75-inch air space in front of foil.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I07210-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Cut and fit insulating batts around pipes, conduits, outlet ,boxes and ductwork
penetrations as necesiary to maintain-tlie integrity of the insulation.
4. Where pipes are located in the cavities being insulated, install insulation between
the extrJribr face and the pipe and compress insulation, if necessary'
5. Securely fasten flanges of the batts to framing members using only the fastening
system
-r-ecommend& by the manufacturer of the insulation matgyal for type.of
daming members in wali or ceiling being insulated and observing all recommended
spacing offasteners to avoid sagging, voids or gaps.
6. End match insulation neatly, with snug fit or overlapped.
7. Fully insulate small areas between closely spaced framing members.
B. Perimeterlnzulation:
l. Install rigid insulation by adhering to substrate with adhesive.
2. All joints shall be square and tightly butted. Install in layers -with
joints staggered
beffueen layers. Piovide full corirer laps on adjacgnt surfaces at intemal and
external corners, At extemal comers, overlap-units at edges and secure at
previously installed units with 4" long wood skewers, in addition to cementing.
3. Install perimeter insulation against foundation walls as indicatec.
4. Use care so as not to damage insulation.
5. Replace any inzulation damaged due to construction operations.
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01
ffiW'itorx o? r^n DY 07210-3
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
T
t
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN 07270
X'IRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Wall penetrations.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Non fire-rated batts.
2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Fire-rated partitions and sound insulation.
3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. Applicable Publications. The publications listed belorv form a.part of this.specification
to ihe extent referenced. Ttie publications are referred to in the text by the basic
designation only.
l. American Society For Testing And ldaterials (ASTM) Fublications:
a. C 665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housingb. E 84 - Surface Buming Characteristics of Building Materials
c. E l19 - Fire Tests ofEuildine Construction and Ivlaterials
d. E 814 - Fire Tests of Ttrougl-Penetration Fire Stops (JL Standard 1479.)
2. National Fire Protection Association (I'{FPA) Publicafion:
^. No. 70 - National Electrical Code
I.O3 SYSTEMDESCRJPTION
A. Firestopping shall consist of providing a materid or a combination of materials to form
an etreiiivJbarrier against tlie spreail of flame, smoke, and gases, and to maintain the
integrity of the time-rated construction.
B. Firestopping shall be provided in the following locations:
l. Duct, conduit, and pipe penetrations through time-rated partitions and fire walls.
2. Other locations where shown.
l-7554.01 07270-l
I,O4 SI.JBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in conformance with Section 01300.
L Manufacturer's catalog data.
2. Installation detail for each type of application.
3. Test data for time-rated construction.
l.os QUALITYASSURAT{CE
A. Material shall have bee,n tested by UL; or, other approved laboratory to meet required
fire resistance ratings ofareas receiving firestopping materials.
B. Installation and materials slnll conform to requirements of ASTM E I 19 and E 814.
C. Fire-test data strdl include certification by a nationally recognized testing authority or by
other supporting evidence satisfactory to the Architect.
D. Materials used to seal penetrations in time-rated assernblies shall be capable of
prwenting the passage of flame and hot gases zufficient to igrrite cotton waste when
sudected to ASTM E ll9 time4emperature fire conditions for I hour; the time
determined by the assembly rating.
I.06 STORAGE, DELIVERY A}.ID IHNDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered in the original unopened packages or containers showing
name of the manufacturer and the brand name.
B. Materials shall be stored off the ground and shall be protected from damage and
exposure to tlre elements.
C. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the site.
I.O7 EI.TVIRONMENTALREQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and
zurrounding air is below 40 degrees F.
B. The 40 degrees F minimum ternperature must be held 24 hours before, during, and 48
hours aft er installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANI.JFACTURERS
A. The manufacturers and products listed are approved for use.
l. Dow Corning: 2000 Series Sealant, Foam and Intumescent Wrap.
2. STI: Pensil 100 Sealant, 200 Foam.
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I07270-2 1-7554.01
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
Barrier:CP25 Sealants, Putty MPP and MPS, FSl95 Wrap StnpJ.
4.
).
3M Fire
USG.
Equivalent products ofother manufacturers are approved subject to requirements
ofSection 01600.
2.02 FIRESTOPPINGMATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Commercially manufactured products complying with the following minimum
requrements.
l. Flame Spread: 25 Maximum in accordance with ASTM E 84'
2. Smoke Density: 50 Ma:<imum in accordance with ASTM E 84'
3. Nontoxicity: Nontoxic to human beings at all stages of application and during fire
conditions.
B. Manufacturer's recommended damming materials as back-up for applied firestopping
compounds.
PART3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dirt, grease, oil, loose material, frost, or other matter which would
affect bond of firestopping.
B. tvlasking - If required to produce neatly finished work, mask edges ofjoints to prevent
misphcEment ofthe prim6r or compouid onto adjacent exposed surfaces.
C. Clean concrete surfaces to receive firestopping materials of incompatible form releasing
agents.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install firestopping at locations shown or specified in accordance with manufacturer's'
instruction and fire test report.
B. Cutting and patching of construction and providing sleeves, where required, are shown
in Drawings or specifed in other sections.
3.03 FILLING OF VOIDS
A. Firestopping materid shall completely fill _void spaces regardless of geometric
configu:r'itidn" subject to tolerances established by the manufacturer.
B. Firestopping for filling voids in floors in which the smallest dimension of the void is 4
inches bi m6re shall r[ppott the same load as the floor is designed to- support or shall be
protected by a perman6rit barrier to prevent loading or traffic in the firestopped area.
l-7554.01 07270-3
-Ll
U
INSULATED PIPES AND DUCTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Insulated pipes and ducts penetrating fire-rated floors and walls shall be inzulated with
materials which provide the same performance as the firestopping material.
This material shall exend a minimum of 6 inches on each side of the opening.
Vapor barrier of such insulation shall have a perm rating of0.03 maximum.
FIREDAIVTPERS
Fire dampers in ducts and penetrations of time-rated construction shall be furnished and
installed in accordance witlr the requirements in DIVISION 15.
3.06 ELECTRICAL CABLES OR CONDUITS
A. Firestopping at penetrations of electrical cables or conduits shall also comply with the
requirements of NFPA No. 70.
3,07 INSTALLATION OF SEALA}IT
A. Sealant Apptcation - Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's -instructions,
using hand lrrns or pressuie-equipm€nt with pr.oper-nozzlg size. Force sealant into and
agaiilst sidei ofjoini. Avoid pulltng of the sialairt from the sides. Fill joint completely
with sealant.
B. Tooling - Tooling is required to ensure firm full contact with the interfaces of the joint.
Tool jdints to foin sm6oth uniform beads with slightly concave surfaces. Joints shall
be stiaight, uniforrq smooth and neatly finished. Tooling agents shall only be used if
recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
3.08 CLEAT.IING
A. Strip-off protective masking tape immediately after compound has been applied. Strip
toward tlie joint. Do not reuse masking materid. Discard tape carefully to prevent
defacing adj acent zurfaces.
B. Clean off excess compound or smears with cleaning material recommended by the
manufacturer of the compound.
3.04
A.
B.
C.
3.05
A.
END OF SECTION
07270-4 l-7554.01
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
sEcrroN 07410
PREFORMED METAL SIDING
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Preformed metal siding system for walls with related flashings and accessory
components.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Metal flashings.
2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall Construction: Wall sheathing.
I.O2 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION
A. Perficrmance:
l. Thermal Properties: U - value of 0.134 BTU/sq. ft. /percent F. when corrected to
a 15 mph wind condition.
Air Infiltration: No air leakage greater than 0.002 cfm/sq. ft. at 1.56 psf air
pressure differential.
Water Infiltration: No uncontrolled water leakage at 4 psf air pressure
differential.
4. Wind Design Load: 35 psf.
I.O3 REFERENCES
A. AI.ISVASTM A 153 - Zinc coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
B. AI.ISVASTM A 446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc coated (galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Procesq
Structural @hysical) qualrty.
I.O4 STJBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Indicate dimensions, panel layout, construction details, methods of anchorage, method
and sequence of installation.
C. Submit manufacturer's color samples for selection under provisions of Section 01300.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
2.
3.
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
l-7554.01 07410-l
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANTIFACTTJRERS
A. AEP/SPAN.
B. INRYCO,INC.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Stock: G90 Galvanized Steel Sheet.
B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard t)?e to suit application; galvanized to A}{SVASTM
A 153 coating; finish to match metal siding when exposed.
C. Sealants and Gaskets: Manufacture/s standard type suitable for use with installation of
metal siding; ultra-violet and ozone resistant for exterior applications; color as selected.
D. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Galvanized in accordance with AI{SVASTM A 153; caps
of same color as exterior siding.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Siding Panels: Minimum 2O gage thick sheet stock of lW-l0A profilg 12 inches wide;
interlocking edges; filled with factory applied sealant.
B. Internal and External Corners: Same materials, thicknesg and finish as siding; of profile
to match system; brake formed to required angles. Sheet stocl to maintain continuity
ofprofile.
C. Trim, Closure pieces, Caps, Facias, Inflls. Same material, thickness, and where
exposed finish as sheet stoc[ brake formed to required profiles.
D. Anchorage and Support Members: Hat channels and sub-girts as detailed.
E. Fabrication of component profiles on site not permitted.
2.04 FIMSH
A. Exposed Surfaces of Siding System: Smooth type finish of Kynar 500 Custom color, as
selected by the Architect.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
A. Install metal siding and related components in accordance with manufacturefs
instructions.
B. Protect siding surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with
bituminous paint. Allow to dry prior to installation.
C. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
074t0-2 1-7554.01
D. Permanently fasten siding system to structure; align,.level,. and plum, within specified
tolerances. " Provide expa-nsibn control joints where indicated.
E. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance.
3.02 TOLERA}.ICES
A. Ma,ximum Offset from True Alignment between Adjacent Members Butting or in line:
l/16 inch.
B. Maximum Variation form Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: l/8 inch.
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 07410-3
I
T
I
I
t
t
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
SECTION 07510
BIJILT.UP BITT'MINOUS ROOFING
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Glass fiber felt built-up roofing system.
2. Base flashing and accessories.
3. Aggregate zurfacing.
B. This Section also includes the following roofing related work:
l. Roofinzulation.
2. Vapor retarder.
3. Temporary roof membrane.
C. Related Sections:
L section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Carpentry related to built-up roof system
installation.
2. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: flashing, gravel stops, gutters and
downspouts.
3. Section 0?51I - Built-Up Bituminous Roofing/Cutting And Patching.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 4l - Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.
B. ASTM D 312 - Asphalt Used in Roofing.
C. ASTM D 2178 - Asphalt Impregrrated Glass Mat Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
D. FS IIH-I-1972/2 - Insulation Board, Thermd, Faced, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate.
I.O3 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION
A. Manufacturer'sRecommendations:
l. All products comprising the total roofing s-ystem, including the insulation, shall be
acc6ptable to the roofing membrane manufacturer.
l-7554.01 07510-l
2. The published and written gengral and specific recommendations of
the various materials manufacturers shall become a part of the project
specification to the extent referenced hereinafter.
3. The manufacture/s recommendations will govern the construction when not in
conflict with the specific provisions ofthe project specification.
4. In the event of conflict, the specific provisions of this specification will prwail
over such manufacturer's requirements or recornmendations.
I.O4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for membrane and base flashing materials.
B. Provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's 9pegr{catio-ns g{ application instructiorts
for all roof insiailati6ns used; one (l) copy each shall be fumished to the Owner and the
Architect and one (l) copy shall b6 ke.'in on the job site until the roof installation is
complete.
C. Submit certification of manufacturer's approval of this specific project regarding
warranty requirements. Certification shall6C submitted prior to roofing application.
D. Submit manufacture/s certification that materials meet or exceed specified
requirements.
l.os QUALITYASSURAI.ICE
A. Qualifications:
L Applicator: Company specializing in built-up.bituminous roof application with
5 yinrs experience, approved by roofing materials manufacturer.
2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain primary products, including each tlpe of
roofing sheet (felt), bitumen, composition flashings, and any vapor retarder,
from a single manufaaurer. Provide secondary products as recornmended by
manufacturer of primary products to use with roofing systern specified'
B. RegulatoryRequirements:
l. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (JL): Class A Fire Hazard Classification.
C. PreinstallationConf,erence:
l. Convene a preconstruction conference under provisions of Section 01200 one
week prior tb commencing work of this sertion.
2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section'
3. Rwiew installation procedures and coordination required with related work
including the following :
a. Review the specifications and details with the Owner, Contractor, Architect
and roofing aPPlicator.
t
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I075t0-2 1-7s54.01
b.
c.
d.
9:f
h.
i.
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
D. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials that are identical to
materials whose fire performance characteristics, per requirements listed in Part 2 of this
Section, have been determined from tests by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acc€ptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I.06 DELIVERY, STORAGEA}IDHANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels
intact.
C. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
D. Stand roll materials on end.
I.O7 ENVIRONI\4ENTALREQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when air temperature may
fall below 40 degrees F.
B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface.
C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than
can be weatherproofed during same day.
I.O8 WARRA}ITY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit two executed copies of standard 2-year Roofing
Wananty on the form included at the end of this Section, covering work of this
Section, including roofing membrane, composition flashing, roof insulation, any vapor
Confirm that the applicator and manufacturer- accept the roofing
soecifications and deiails as a proper and functional system' If the
aipplicator and manufacturer have- any apprehension or concern they shall
did,:uss and resolve them at this time.
Establish where the roofing project will start and how the installation will
proceed.
betermine what type of equipment will be used for the roofing application
Resolve where and how tlie inaterials are to be stored on the project.
Determine the weather conditions under which the roofing applicator will
install the roofing systern. The Architect, Owner and Contractor must
acknowledge thaiif the weather conditions do require the roofing applicator
to stop th6 installation of the roofing system ihat pressure will not be
brouglit to bear on the roofing appliaator to ignore the pre-determined
conditions and continue the installation.
Establish a program with the mechanical subcontractor as to exactly how
and where ihe-mechanical equipmurt will be transported across the-roof
area. If two men cannot carry the equipment to the base it shall be placed
directly on the base by crane. Under nb conditions cal any equipment or
materiils be transport-ed across roofing without the prior approval of the
roofing applicator.
AII peietiitions and walls must be in place prior to the roofing operation.
fstibtish a program for controlling all traffic across finished roofing.
l-7554.01
Afl\ *w/07510-3
o
countersigned
I
I
I
I
retarders, and roofing accessories, signed and by Installer @oofer) and
Contractor.
B. Warranty in writing the root, flas,hing, and sheet metal.work against leakage. an{ othel
defects,due to failure in materials and/or workmanship for 2 yearl from the date- of
substantial completion of the building . The Contractor shall repair all damages due
to failures covered above at no cost to the Oumer'
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01. MANUFACTL]RERS
A. Schuller International, 4GIG..
B. Owens-CorningFiberglass, 4l-IG.
2.02 ROOFING SYSTEMS
A. Built-Up Roofing System: Four-ply, asphalt applied glass.fiber reinforced felts, with
insulation and gravel aggregate.
B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's recommendations for component roofing
systein materials, including insulation materid as required for manufacturer's warranty.
2.03 SHEET MAIERIALS
A. GlassFiberFelt: ASTMD2lTS,TypeIV.
l. Schuller International GlasPly Premier.
2. OCF Perma PIY-R.
B. Base Sheet: (where applicable to manufacture/s requirement) ASTIVI D 2626, No. 45;
plain.
l. Base Sheet at Vapor Barrier: Asphalt-coated, heavyweight, glass-fiber base sheet
with granular surfacing and embossed venting channels on bottom surface.
2.04 BITIIMINOUSMATERIALS
A. AsphaltBitumen: ASTMD 3l2,Typel andTlpeltr.
B. Asphalt Flashing Cement: FS SS-C-I53, Type I or ASTM D 2822.
2.05 BTIILT.IJP ROOF MEMBRAI{E SYSTEM
A. Non-Nailable-Dech Asphalt, Glass-Fiber, Aggregate Roofing: Provide built-up,
aggregate-surfaced roofsystem with asphalt bitumen and glass-fiber ply felts for laying
up as indicated:
l. Base Ply: Single ply of asphalt, glass-fiber felt, complying with ASTM D 2178,
Type IV.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I075t041-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
II
o
complying2. Ply Felts: Three plies of asphalt, glass-fiber felts,
Type IV.
with ASTMD 2178,
3. Interply Bitumen: Roofing asphalt, complying with ASTM D 312, Type II'
2.06 Comply with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Specification Plate No.32--
NAGA Diagram A.
2.07 VAPORRETARDER
A. Bituminous Vapor Retarder: Two plies of asphalt, glass-fiber felt, complying with
ASTM D 2178, Type IV, set in and glaze-coated with ASTM D 312, Type III asphalt.
l. Provide rigid perlite or glass-fiber board roofinsulation substrate over metal deck
surfaces, thickness as required to span flutes without deflection, but not less than
I inch. Mechanically fasten to deck.
2.08 INSI.]LATION
A. All insulation shall be compatible with the manufacturer's warranty provisions and bear
U.L.label.
B. Total insulation tldckness shall be a minimum of 3 inches with the Thermal Resistance
(Rvalue): R=30.
C. Polyisocyanurate Foam Board: Rigid boards of minimum 2.0 pcf density
polyisocyanurate-based foam core, permanently bonded to roofing felt facer sheets.
Provide in thickness indicated with minimum aged r value of 5.88, when conditioned per
RIC/TIMA Bulletin No. 281-l.
D. Perlite Board: Rigid, noncombustible, perlite,/fiber boards of thicknesses indicated, with
r value of 2.78 at 75 degF , integrally skinned surfaces, complying with ASTM C 728.
Provide in manufacturer's standard sizes.
2.09 AGGREGATESTJRFACING
A. Aggregate: ASTM D 1863; Sound, hard washed river gravel, 400 lb/sq'
l. Embed aggregate in flood coat of asphalt.
2. Apply second flood coat and gravel application' Remove loose gravel'
2.r0 cAlITs
A. Fiber Cant and Tapered Edge Strips: Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard, performed
to 45 degree angle.
B. Wood Cant may be used provided they are preservative treated and conform to roofing
system manufacturer's recommendations.
t-7554.O1 07510-5
2.rr AccEssoRrEs
A. Roofing Nails: Galvanized or non-ferrous t1pe, size as required to zuit application.
PART 3. E)GCUTION
3.OI EXA]\4INATION
A. Veri$ deck is clean and smooth" free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly
sloped to drains.
B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts,- or vents tlrough r-oof_are solidly set,
wood nailing-strips, and reglas are in place. Veri$ deck is supported and secured.
C. Verify deck zurfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. Confirm dry deck by moisture
metei with 12 pencent moisture matdmum.
D. Beginning installation means acceptance of substrate.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect buildfuE zurfaces against damage from roofing work.
B. Where work must continue over finished roof membrane, protection surfaces.
3.03 VAPORRETARDERINSTALLATION
A. Vapor Retarder on Steel Decks: Mechanically fasten one course of perlite board roof
insulation in thickness required to span deck flutes, but not less than I inch thick. Use
FM-approved fasteners specifically desigrred for securing inzulation boards to steel roof
declg driven through metal or plastic discs. Space fasteners according to FM
requirements for Windstorm Resistance Classification I-90. Place end joints of
insulation over deck flutes.
B. Over insulation board, apply two plics of No. 15 asphalt-impregnated roofing felt,
lapping each felt 19 inches over the precedfurg one. Solid mop 20 lb per square (plus or
minus 25 percent) of Type Itr asphalt between felts and to inzulation board. Glaze-coat
completed surface with Tpe Itr asphalt at rate of 20 lb per square (plus or minus 25
percent).
l. Comply with NRCA "Built-up Roofing lvlanualn Specification ll-VR and
Diagram VR-C.
C. Apply two-course stripping of glass-fiber fabric and roofing cement at obstructions and
penetrations through vapor retarder.
3.04 INSULATIONAPPLICATION
A. Install roofing, flashing and inzulation in strict accordance with manufacture/s
instruclions.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I07510-6 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
applyB. Apply roofing and insulation in dry weather and do not
temperature is below 40 degrees F.
roofing when ambient
Lav insulation boards to moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut insulation to fit
neitly to perimeter blocking and around protrusions through roof
Set insulation in hot solid mopping of Type trI asphalt, applied within temperature range
of EVT plus or minus 25 deg F and at rate of 25 lb per 100 sq. ft. (plus or minus 25
percent on total-job average basis). Run longjoints ofinsulation in continuous straight
line, perpendicular to roof slope, with end joints staggered between rows.
Install no more inzulation at one time than will be protected from wetting or other
damage by the elements by installation of roofing menibrane on the same day or prior to
rain or dew.
Solid mop with hot bitumen between layers of insulation with Type Itr asphalt.
Run long joints for insulation in continuorrq straight lines, perpendicular to roof.slope
with enijoints staggered betw€en rows.built-up?-ply membrane (bur) application
Bitumen Temperature:
l. Maximum Bitumen temperature in kettle: Type I, 425 degrees F, Type lll,475
degrees F. Discard bitumen heated above specified morimum.
2. Mnimum bitumen temperature at time and point of application: Type I, 300
degrees F, Tlpe m, 300 degrees F. Do not reheat bitumen.
Minimum Rate of Application of Bitumen:
l. Between layers of insulation, 23 to 25 lbs. per 100 sq. ft.
2. Between insulation and felt, 25 to 30lbs. per 100 sq. ft.
3. Between layers of felt - 23 to 25 lbs. per 100 sq. ft.
4. Top coat - 60lbs. per 100 sq. ft.
5. Aggregate - 400lbs. per 100 sq. ft.
Extend felts up cant stripe to vertical surfaces. Mop ir-r one ply of granular surface felt
as base flashin!. Secursto nailing strips at 4 inches and reglets.
Solid mop with Type I asphalt heated bitumen between felts and provide complete
uniform coating. Felt shall not touch felt.
Lay felts parallel to long dimension of roof.
Broom or press felts into heated bitumen providing tight, smooth laminations without
wrinkles, buckles, kinks or fishmouths; br6oming shafi follow immediately behind felt
layrng
N. Complete application of roofing system without pockets or blisters.
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
J.
L.
M.
l-7554.01 075t0-7
o
including ag$egate,
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
t
O. Complete installation of BUR roofing systern"
termihation of day's work.
up to line of
P. Install temporary water cut-offs at completion of each day's work and remove upon
resumption of work.
a Mop and seal two additiond plies of felt around roof protrusions.
3.05 FLASHINGS
A. Coordinate installation of roof hoppers, drains, sumps, and related flashings.
B. Mop in and seal flashings and flanges of items protruding through membrane.
3.06 AGGREGATESURFACING
A. Apply uniform flood coat -of as-phalt at rate of 60 lbs./square and while hot, embed
robfiirg ag$egate at rate of 400lbs./square.
B. Evenly distribute aggreg;ate and enzure bond with flood coat. Extend aggregate to
bottom edge ofcant striPs.
3,07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection and testing will be performed at the Owner's option by firm appointed under
provisions of Section 01400.
B. Correct defects and inegularities.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other source of soiling
caused by work ofthis Sectio4 consult manuf[cturer ofsurfaces for cleaning advise and
conform to their instructions.
END OF SECTION
t
I07510-8 l-7554.01
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07s11
BUILT.I]P BITUMINOUS ROOFING/CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SLIMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Cutting and patching ofexisting built-up roofing system as required to install new
constructlon.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work relating to roof curbs
installation.
2. Section 07510 - Built-Up Bituminous Roofing.
3. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Patch' repair.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 312 - Asphalt Used in Roofing.
B. FS SS-CC-153 - Cement, Bituminous, Plastic.
I.O3 SYSTEMDESCRJPTION
A. Roof patching shall be provided where roof penetrations hlve to be added or removed
on the portiois of existihg roof membrane that are indicated to remain.
B. Roof system, including membrane, insulation and deck shall be.patched with material to
match'efsting, adjaient material in gage, appearance, thickness and structural
performance w:iiich is equal to or greater than the odsting.
I.O4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Submit product data for membrane and base flashing materials.
1.05 QUALITYASSURAhICE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in built-up roqryg systgm application.wi$ 5. years^
experience, trained and approved by roofing materials manutacturer to apply trus type oI
roofing.
B. Roofing components shall be provided_ from .a single manufacturer source to assure
compatibility and conformance to manufacturer's warranty condltlons.
C. RegulatoryRequirements:I
I l-75s4.01 07511-l
o
Hazard Classification.
I
I
I
l. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (JL): Class A Fire
I.06 DELIVERY. STORAGE A}.IDHANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels
intact.
Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
Stand roll materials on end.
Storage of roofing rolls should be at least above 40 degrees F for a period before
application.
F. Breather type coverings zuch as canvas strould be used to protect materials.
r.07 ENVIRONMENTALREQIIIREMENTS
A. Do not apply roofing during inclement weather or when air temperature tnay fall below
40 degrees F. (5 degrees C).
Do not apply roofing to darnp or frozen substrate.
Do not expose materials wlnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than
can be weitherproofed during same day.
PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE
Convene a pre-construction conference one week prior to commencing work of this
Section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly atrecting work of this Section.
C. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work including
the following:
l. Review the specification and details with the Contractor, Architect and roofing
applicator.
2. Confirm that the applicator and manufac-turer accept the roofing specifications and
details as a propei and functional system: If the applicator and manufacturer has
any apprehehsi6ns or coneern they shall discuss and resolve them at this time. All
chinfe-s to the system and documents sh4l be put in writing, approved by the
Architect and distributed to all parties involved.
3. Establish where the roofing projecl will start and how the installation will
proceed.
4. Determine what type of equipment will be used for the roofing application.
5. Resolve where and how the materials are to be stored on the project.
C.
D.
E.
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
B.
c.
1.08
A.
I
I0751t-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
t
6. Determine the weather conditions under which the roofing applicator will install
the roofing. The Architect, Owner and Contractor must acknowledge that if the
weather conditions do require the roofing applicator to stop the installation ofthe
roofing system that pressure will not be 6rou-ght to bear on the roofing applicator
to ignore the predetermined conditions and continue the installation.
7. All penetrations and walls must be in place prior to the roofing operation.
I.O9 WARRA}ITY
A. Submit manufacturer's certification that proposed procedures and materials will not void
waranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTI]RERS
A. Match existing system.
PART3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verify roofopenings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roofare solidly set,
wood nailing strips, and reglets are in place. Verify deck is supported and secured.
B. Beginning installation means acceptance of substrate.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
B. Where work must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces.
3.03 INSTILATIONAPPLICATION
A. Membrane Repair:
1. Cut membrane in straight lines with square comers around openings.
2. Strip aggregate back from cut opening a minimum of 2'-0u in each direction.
3. Apply new mernbrane over entire opening, including stripped area. Membrane
shall include base sheet cut to fit membrane opening, plus same number of plies as
existing roof.
4. Apply aggregate in flood coat of bitumen.
B. Install roofing, flashing, and insulation in strict accordance with manufacturer's
rnsuucuons.
3.04 FLASHINGS
A. Apply base flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements.
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 075Il-3
^-t
B. Install prefabricated curbs and roofing accessories in
instructions.
o
accordance
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
with manufacturer's
C. Coordinate installation of roof top units, odraust vents and related flashings.
D. Mop in and seal flashings and flanges of items protruding through mernbrane.
3.05 CLEA}IING
A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. In areas where finished surfaces
are soiled by asphalt or any other source of soiling caused by work of this Section,
consult manufacturer of zurfrces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions.
ENDOF SECTION
075t14 l-7554.01
l
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN 07600
FLASHING AI\D SHEET METAL
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI SLIMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Facias.
2. Flashings,
3. Counterflashings.
4. Downspouts.
5. Gutters.
6. Soffits.
7. Related clips, anchors, and fasteners.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 07510 - Built-up Bituminous Roofing.
2. Section 0751 I - Built-Up Bituminous Roofing/Cutting and Patching.
3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. CodeVStandards:
l. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials).
2. SMACNA (Architectural Sheet Metd Manual, 1987, Fourth Edition).
3. FS (Federal Specifications).
I.O3 SLIBMITTALS
A. Submit samples of both Flashing and Counterflashing materials in conformance with
Section 01300.
B. Samples: Minimum of 12 inches by 12 inches in size.
1.04 QUALITYASSIJRAI.ICE
A. Work shatl be installed by experienced, fully competent craftsmen and made watertight.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I t-7554.01 07600-l
I.O5 WARRA}ITY
A. Sheet metal work shall be warranted for a period of 2 years from date of acceptance.
Warranty shall include replacement at Contractor's expense any defects which occur
during the warranty period which, in the opinion of the Architect are due to defective
materials, workmanship, or for failure to allow for expansion/contraction.
PART 2. MATERIALS
2.OI MANTIFACTI.JRERS
A. Manufacfirrers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
l. Gravel Stops:
t. W. P. Hickman Co.b. Approvedsubstitution.
2. Metal Soffits:
a. Alcoa Aluminum.b. Alside Division of Associated Materials. Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Iron: Use at facias, gravel stops, downspouts and gutters.
l. Conform to ASTM Specification A 525.
2. Sheet goods shall be 24 gtge except where indicated otherwise; cleats and clips
shall be 20 gage, unless otherwise noted.
3. Galvanized coating comply with G90.
B. Aluminum: Use at sofrts.
L Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of
use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability ofalloy
and temper designated below:
2. Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTMB209, 3105, with a minimum
thickness of 0.019 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Solder: Conform to ASTM Spec. B 32, 50-50.
Flux:
1. Shall be resin" muriatic acid killed with zinc or approved brand soldering paste.
2. Wash offthoroughly after soldering is completed.
Nails: Use galvanized nails in contact with galvanized iron; use aluminum nails in
contact with aluminum.
I
I
I
c.
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
E.
07600-2 1-7554.01
I
I F. Screws:
I l. Use cadmium plated in contact with gatvanized iron.
l| 2. Use aluminum in contact with aluminum.r 3. Washers shall be neoprene.
I
I G. Nonhardening Mastic:
I Use elastic caulking meeting FS TT-C-598 Type I.I
I ii. Seaianr Tape:
I l. Use self-adhering, non-oily, resilient, Shore A hardness of 20-30.
I 2,03 FABRICATION
I A. Sheet metal shall be formed to shapes and installed as indicated. Make flashings atr angles continuous by soldering. Allow for expansion/contraction.
I B. Fabricate counterflashings as detailed on the Drawings. Provide in at least l0'-0"I lengths, lap endjoints 3 inches and interlock. Bottom drip edge ofcounterflashing shall
press tight against base flashing.
I C. Fabricate facias to match profile of existing facias.
r D. Fabricate caps at roof penetrations as per Fig. A of Plate 58 or as per Fig. C of Plate 66
t of SMACNA.
E. FabricateguttersperPlate 15 of SMACNA.
I F. Fabricate dorvnspouts as per Fig. B, I of Plate 3l of SMACNA with hangers as per Fig.
G of Plate 35 of SMACNA gage as noted on Plate 35. Ilangers spaced not to exceedr 6'-0" o.c.
Ir G. Gravel Stops: Provide Hickman "Drain-Thru Gravel Stop" at gutter locations and
Hickman *Safegrrard Gravel Stop System Type F' at other edges in prefinished colors.
J l. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
t H. Metal Soffits: Provide soffit material complying with AAMA 1402 fabicated from
I aluminum sheet in alloy recomended by soffit manufacturer, Alcoa "Value-Gard" Model
No. SVGl6Nl0 with lanced openings for ventilation, prefinished in color as selected by
) Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
I z.o4 MIscELLA].rEous FLASHING
I A. Form flashing to shapes indicated in lengths as long as possible. Lock seam or solderI joints as indicated or required for a watertight instdlation.
t B. Use concealed cleats for securing flashing to adjacert construction, wherever possible.
I
I
I l-7ss4.0r 07600-3
2.05 FIMSIIES
A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) "Designation System for
Aluminum Finishes" and NAAIVIM Metal Finishes Manual, Sections Amp 501 and 505
for steel finish designations and application recommendations.
B. Galvanized Steel Gravel Stop High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: Apply the
following system by coil-coating proc€ss on galvanized steel sheet as recommended by
coating manufacturers and applicator.
l. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat,
thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2.
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by fuchitect from manufacturer's full range of
choices for color and gloss.
C. Aluminum Soffit Finish: Complying with AAMA 1402, manufacturer's standard two-
coat PVC finish.
D. Shop Finish, Rain Drainage: Provide manufacturer's standard baked-on, white-acrylic
shop finish on sheet metal rain-drainage units (gutters, downspouts, and similar exposed
units); 1.O-mil dry film thickness.
PART 3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI WORKMANSHIP
A. Execute all work in best, substantial, waterproof workmanlike manner.
See Drawings for items and daails.
Flash all projections through roof
Shape and install sheet metal cap and counterflashings as directed.
Furnish tlose items to be installed by others to the proper trade for installation.
Make waterproof corner joints by soldering solidly; joints shall be fully lapped.
Form to allow for expansion and contraction as required.
Install sheet metal counterflashing over roofbase flashing, as required and as detailed.
Separate dissimilar metals with mastic or sealant tape.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Width of laps shall be 3-in. minimum or shall be designed after Alternate Section A-A of
Plate 82 of SMACNA.
B.
c.
D.
E.
F.
G,
H.
I.
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I07600-4 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
B.
c.
D.
Securely seal all joints and laps with sealant tape or nonhardening mastic, full width of
lap.
Fastening of all metal, maximum 2 ft o.c., whether fastening of cleats, clips or through
face of metal.
When fastening through face metal, use screw and slotted hole where fastening is. not
exposed and sc-rew wit=h washer where fastening is expo,sed. In exposed fastenings, hole
through metal shall be twice the diameter of screw shank.
Calk all reglets (see Section 07900 - Joint Sealers)
END OF SECTION
l
E.
l-7554.01 07600-5
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
SECTION O79OO
JOINT SEALERS
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI ST]MMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Joints as detailed, indicated orrequired.
2. Joints in cast-in-place concrete.
3. Roofflashingandcounterflashing.
4. Penetrations of floors, walls and roofs.
5. Expansion joints.
6. Door, window and louver frames.
7. Joints betneen dissimilar materials.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 03300 - Cast-In Place Concrete.
2. Section O727O - Firestopping.
3. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.
4. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware.
5. Section 08800 - Glazing.
6. Section 09250 - Gypzum Board.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. FederalSpecifcations:
l. TT-S-0023OC(2) - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Sfurgle Component
(For Calking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures).
2. TT-S-001543A - Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (For Calking,
Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures).
3. TT-S-00227E(3) - Seating Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multiple component
@or Calking, SdAing andGlazing in Buildings and Other Structures).
t-7554.01 07900-l
I.O3 SUBMTTALS
Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 01300.
Submit samples of sealant colors.
Submit manufacture/s surface preparation and installation instructions under provisions
ofSection 01300.
r.o4 QUALITYASSITRAI.ICE
A. ApplicatorQualifications:
1. Application shall be do.ne by 1 Joint Sealant Subcontractor with five years
experience. Documentation required.
2. Use only qualified workmen thoroughly skilled and specially trained in the
techniques ofcalking who can demonstrate to the satisfaction ofthe Architect,
their ability to fill joints solidly and neatly.
B. ManufacturerTechnicalAssistance:
l. Materials shall be supplied by manufactwer who will provide qualified tecbnical
assistance at the project site.
2. Mxing and application of sealing compound shall be in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's printed directions. Initial mixing and application shall be under the
direct zupervision of the manufactureds representative.
I.O5 DELIVERY, STORAGEANIDHAI{DIING
A. Deliver calking ard ssaling compounds to the job in unbrokerl sealed containers bearing
tle manufacture/s mixing directions. Store materials in sealed containers in a dry
protected area above the ground or floor.
B. Protect materials before, during and after installation. Protect the installed work of
other trades during installation.
C. Do not use materials that have been stored for a period of time exceeding the ma:rimum
recommended shelf life of the materials.
1.06 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Thejoint configuratioq thejoint surfaces and backing forming the sealant rabbet shall
be as detailed in the drawings and in accordance with the contract specification.
B. Do not proceed with the installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions when
joint to be sealed is damp, wet or frozerlor when temperatures qxe below or above the
manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation. Consult the manufacturer for
specific instnrctions before proceeding.
A(IX)f$/i /
mlx or exlDrl
A.
B.
c.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I07900-2 l-7554.01
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 MANTJFACTURERS
A. TremcoManufacturing.
B. Dow Corning.
C. Pecora Corporation.
D. Mamecolnternational.
E. Sonnebom Building Products.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Sealants:
l. Acrylic t]rye, one component (non-sag), conform to FS TT-S-00230-, Type II,
non-sag, Class d 15 percent joint movement, color: Neutral.
2. Silicone O?g one component (low modulus), conform to FS TT-S-015434 Class
d 50 percent joint movement.
3. Polyurethane T1pe, two component (non-sag), conform to FS TT-S-002278,50
percent joint movement.
4. Polyurethane Type, single component (self leveling) FS TT-S-00230c, Type l,
Class A.
5. Dow Coming No. 890 Silicone, compatible with asphalt impregrrated expansion
joint filler.
B. Calking: Oil base type, conform to FS TT-C-598C(I), Type II, Color neutral.
C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturers' standard color chart unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Sealant Primer:
l. Suitable to substrate zurfaces as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
2. Knowledge of whether the primer is staining or non-staining shall be obtained
prior to application.
E. Joint Backing:
l. Performed compressible, resilient, non-waxing, non-extruding, non-stailing 511ipg
(polyethylene fo-arq i foam, butyl) as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
2. Backing shall be of sizes and shapes to suit the various conditions and shall be
compatible with s€alant, primers, and substrates.
t-7554.01 07900-3
F. Bond Breaker:
G. Cleaning Agent:
PART 3 - HGCUTION
by the sealant
As recommended bv the sealant manufacturer.
3.OI EXAI\{INATION
A. Surface Condition:
l. Joint surfaces to receive a sealant shall be sound, smooth, clean, dry and free ofall
visible contaminants.
2. Applications on non-visible coatings or contaminants to surface of rabbet area
prior to application of sealant shall be controlled by the Contractor in conzultation
with the sealant marufacturer.
B. Joint Size: Joint size shall be as daailed or as detemrined by the Architect based on
building movement, sealant capabilities and substrate requirements.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Primer:
o
manufacturer
L Thoroughly clean joints and apply primer, if recommended by sealant
manufacturer, to dry zurfaces.
2. Apply primo prior to application ofjoint backing, bond breaker or sealants.
Joint Backing:
l. In joints where the depth ofthe joint exceeds the required depth of the sealant,
installjoint backing to provide backing and uniform depth ofsealant.
2. Joint backing shall be instdled with approximately 30 percent compression. Do
not stretch, twist, puncture or tear jofut backing. Butt joint backing at
intersections.
Bond Breaker Tape:
l. Install bond breaker tape smoothly at back of joint where joint backing is not
required or cannot be instaled.
2. Sealant shall adhere only to the sides and not to the back of the joint to eliminate
three-sided adhesion.
INSTALLATION
Sealant Application:
1. Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's application manual and
in-strnictions, using hand guns or pressure equipmeng with proper nozde size, on
clean" dry, properly prepared zubstrates.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o
As recommended
B.
c.
3.03
A.
/a\s,
ml'l or 1ILEZ079004 l-7554.01
t
l
I
T
I
I
2. Force sealant into joint and against sides ofjoint to make uniform. Avoid pulling
of the sealant fromthe sides. Till sealant space completely with sealant.
3. Where an irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists, the applicator shall
apply maskingiape at the edge ofthejoint to ensurejoint neatn€ss and protection.
Remove tape after sealant is applied.
I B. rooling:
l. Tooling is required to ensure firm full contact with the interfaces ofthe joint.
2. Tool joints to form smooth, uniform beads with slightly concave surfaces. Finish
jointsshall be straight, unifornr, smooth and neatly finished.
3. Remove any excess sealant from adjacent surfaces ofjoint, leaving the work in a
neat, clean condition.
4. Tooling agents should only be used if recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
3.04 CLEAI.{ING
I A. Clean off excess compound and smears with cleaning materia! recommended !y ther manufacturer of the cohpound. Leave work in a condition satisfactory to the Architect.
I 3.05 sEALAT{r scHEDULE
A. Joints in vertical planes:
I l. Building exterior and interior face ofthrough expansion or controljoints.
., 2. Provide non-sag type polyuretlrane or silicone sealant.
I B. Joints in horizontal planes:
I l. Building interior and exterior.
2. Provide self-leveling type polyurethane or silicone sealant.
I C. Joints on interior of building: Except as indicated in item A above, provide acrylic type
sedant.
I D. Perimeter of plumbing fixtures and vanities: Provide mildew-resistant silicone typet sealant.
I E. Sa all thresholds in full bed of oil base calking.
F. Ceramic Tile: Provide silicone sealant at wall and base joints.
I G. See Drawings for typical locations.
I
I
07900-5
I
l-7ss4.01
END OF SECTION
t
t
I PARrI-.ENERAL
I r.ol SLIMMARY
A. Section Includes:
sEcTroN 08100
METAL DOORS & FRAMES
L General work of this section consists of fumishing and installing all metal doors
and frames as shown and as specified herein.
I B. Related Sections:
I
I
I
t
l. Section 08710 - Finish llardware.
2. Section 08800 - Glazing.
I 3. Section 09900 - Painting.
r l.o2 SLTBMITTALS
I A. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings for doors, frames, andI accessories in accordancewith Section 01300.
l. Submit shop drawings covering each type of door and frame, frame conditions,
and complete anchorage details, supplemented by suitable schedules covering
doors urd frames.
2. Show undercut opening sizes and locations in doors.
3. Indicate size, gage, and location of reinforcement for hardware on shop drawings.
r I.O3 DELIVERY, STORAGE A}.ID HANDLING
I A. Deliver, store, and handle hollow metal work in a manner to prevent damage and
I deterioration.
r B. Store doors and frames upright, in a protected dry areq at least I inch or more offthe
I ground or floor and at least l/4 nchbetween individual pieces.
C. Protect exposed finish surfaces of prefinished items with masking tape.
I PART2-PRODUCTS
t 2.0r MANUFACTURERS
I A. Hollow metal work shall be manufactured by one ofthe following:
L Gateway Metal Products
2. Fenestra.
l-7554.01
I
I
t
/tr\)')
"-W 08100-l
3. Steelcraft.
4. Amweld Building Products Div.
2.02 DOORS
A. Sizes and styles are indicated on the Drawings.
B. Face sheets shall be flat, smootb galvanized l8 gage steel fa$ricated from galvanized
steel sheets, zinc-coated carbon-steel sheets of commercial quallty, complying with
ASTM A 526 and ASTM A 525 udth A 60 or G 60 coating designatioq mill
phosphatized.
C. For exterior door and interior wet locations, fabricate doors from 2 outer, galvanized,
stretcherJerreled steel sheets not less than 0.0635 inch thick. Construct doors with
smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces or stile edges,
o<cept around glazed panel inserts. Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of doors to
permit escape of antrapped moisture. Close bottom edge with minimum 0.0635-inch-
thick galvanized steel closing channel and top edge with minimum 0.0635-inch- thick
galvanized steel filler channel so webs of channels are flush with bottom and top edges.
Seal joints in top edges ofdoors against water penetration.
D. Door shall have continuously welded edgeg dressed and ground srnooth and with no
visible seams on door faces or vertical edges.
E. Internal Stiffeners:
l. Surface sheets shall be zupported by galvaniz:d st@l uZ", channel, or continuous
truss members not less than 16 SaSe (28 gage for continuous truss), spaced not
more than 6 inches on cetrter and internally spot welded to both surface sheets at
modmum of 4 inches o.c.
Z. Top and bottom edges of dl doors shall be closed flush with continuous
gatlanized steel 16 gale channel mernbers ortending full width of door.
3. Edges of doors shall !e spppg4ed by gslvanized steel 16 gage interior edge
channels octending firll height ofdoor'
F. Sound Deadening: Interior zurface slnll be treated with a sound-deadening material to
eliminate metallic ring.
G. Sound Retardant: Install rock wool sound retardant material in doors with a density of
3.5 lbs. and a thickness of 50 perc€nt great€r than the door thickness before
compression.
l. At wet areas, provide sound retardant material resistant to water absorption.
H. Clearances: (Tolerance: minus l/16 inch for fire rated doors)
l. Between doors and frames at head and junb l/8 inch.
2. At sill 3/8 inch at bottom of single doors, l/4 inch at bottom of pairs of doors.
I
I
I
II
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I08100-2 r-7554.O1
I
t
I
o
threshold
o
threshold.
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
is used l/8 inch between door and
3. Between meeting edge of doors in pairs li8 inch.
4. Bevel edges of single acting doors l/8 inch in 2 inches.
5. Coordinate door height with floor covering thickness.
I. Glazing Stops:
l. Frames to be glazed shall be provided with 18 gage stops to secure glass. Stops
shall have all comers fully mitered and welded.
2. Install glass in glazing compound in conformance with Section 08800.
3. Glazing stop shall be integral with frame on the exterior side of the frame.
Interioi Slr^ng stop shall 5'e held in place with countersunk oval head security
screws.
2.03 FRAI{ES
A. Sheet steel for frames shall be hot rolled prime quality carbon steel except exterior. frames and interior frames of wet areas which shall be galvanized steel sheets, zinc-
coated carbon-steel sheets of commercial quallty, complying with ASTM A 526 and
ASTM A 525 with A 60 or G 60 coating designation" mill phosphatized.
B. Size and styles are indicated on the Drawings.
C. Frames shall be combination buck frame and trim on exterior, separate frame and trim
on interior as detailed.
D. Minimum Gages: Frames for interior door, _door and window, and window openings
shall be not less than 0.060 inch(16 gage) minimum.
l. Exterior Frarnes: Not less than 0.0785 inch (14 gage) thick
E. Brake-form steel sheets:
l. Provide profiles and shapes free ofwarp, buckles, fractures or other defects.
2. Form 5/8 inch door stops integral with frames.
F. Corners and connections shall be mitered and welded with orposed welds ground flush
and smooth.
G. Anchors:
l. Provide an anchor at each jamb for each 2'-6" of door or window height or
fraction thereof.
2. Vary anchor tlryes to provide positive fastening to adjacent construction, provide
special anchors as detailed.
I
I
I
I
I
t t-7554.01 08100-3
3. Secure a metal clip angle at bottom of each jamb
with a minimum of 2 fasteners.
o
member for anchoring to floor,
4. Metal Stud Anchor: Provide 16 gageZ-shaped anchors.
H. Provide 3 holes for each strike jamb and 2 holes for header of double frames for
application of door silencers.
I. Provide two 16 gage steel spreaders for double rabbeted frames tack welded to the
bottom ofbothjambs.
2.04 PREPARATIONFORFIMSHED HARDWARE
A. Doors and frames shall be factory reinforced, drilled, and tapped for mortise template
hardware in accordance with approved hardware schedule. Obtain current hardware
templates from hardware supplier.
B. Provide welded-in reinforcing plates for surface applied hardware.
C. Frame Reinforcement: Thickness and sizes for frame reinforcement shall be as follows:
L Butt Hinges: 3/16 plate 12 inches long by full width of rabbet.
2. Closer: l0 ga. channel section 12 inches long and full width of frame trim.
3. Reinforcement for strikes, flustr bolts, and all other surface mounted hardware:
12 gage.
D. Door Reinforcement: Thickness and sizes for door hardware reinforcement shall be as
follows:
l. Butt Hinges: 3/16 inch plate 9 inches long welded to 16 gage. interior edge
channels.
2. Surface Applied Closers: 12 gage box section minimum 4 inches deep and 12
inches long weld to top and edge channels.
3. Locksets, Deadbolts, Panic Dwices: 12 EaBe steel spot welded to interior edge
channels.
4. Reinforcement for Pull Plates, Flush Bolts, and All Other Surface Mounted
Hardware: 12 gz'$e steel spot welded to internal stiffeners.
2.O5 FIMSH
A. Doors and frames shall be lweled and ground smooth.
B. Apply mineral filler to eliminate weld scars and other blemishes.
C. Provide factory coat of rust inhibitive metal primer includhg galvanized surfaces.
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
It
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I08100-4 r-7554.0r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 . E)GCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION OF FRAMES
A. Exercise care in setting of frames to maintain scheduled dimensions, hold head level and
maintain jarnbs plumb and square.
Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.
Remove factory applied spreader bar before setting frame and appl.y exact length wood
spreader bars ait biitom and center of door to maintain correct spacing between jambs.
INSTALLATION OF DOORS
Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's-templates and instruction.
Hiidware and specialties shall be as specified in Section 08710, Hardware.
Adjust operable parts for correct function.
Remove hardware, with orception of prime-coated iterns, tag, box, and reinstall after
finish painting is completed.
B.
c.
3.02
A.
B.
c.
I
I
I
I
I
t
D. Clearances shall be as specified in 2.02 above.
3.03 PRIME COAT TOUCH-I]P
A. Immediately after erectioq areas where prime coat has been damaged shall be sanded
smooth and touched up with same prirner as applied at shop.
B. Remove rust before above specified touch-up is applied.
C. Touch-up shall not be obvious.
3.04 DOOR SCITEDIJLE
A. Dimensions and other requirements for each hollow metal door and frame are noted on
Door Schedule of the Drawings.
B. Each door is identified by a door mark as shown on Drawings.
END OF SECTIONI
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 08100-5
I
I
I PARr l -.ENERAL
I l.ol SUMMARY
SECTION 0830s
ACCESS DOORS
A. Section Includes:
I l. Non-rated access doors and frames.
B. Related Sections:
I l. Section og25o -Crypsum Board: openings in partitions.
2. Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish.
3. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
I r.o2 SUBMTTTALS
A. Submit product dataunder provisions ofSection 01300.
I B. Include sizes, types, finishes, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work
I C. Submit manufactureds installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
r PART2-PRoDUcrs
I 2.or MANT.TFACTURERS!
A. Babcock - Davis.
I B. Bilco.
I C. Karp Associates, Inc.
r D. Mlcor.
I z.oz ACcESs rrMTSt
A. Access Panels - Gypzum Board Walls and Ceilings: Flush style DW 16 gage frame, 14
I gage panel, galvanized steel drywall bead, concealed spring hinges. Size and location
t shown on Drawings. Cam operated locking dwices.
I 2.03 FINISH
r A. Factory prime for site painting.
I
I
t
l-7ss4.01 08305-l
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verify rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located.
B. Begrnning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Instdl frame plumb and lwel in wall and ceiling openings.
B. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access.
C. Install in accordance with manufacture/s recommendations and requirements
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., for fire-rated access panels.
D. Rehang or replace panels that do not operate properly.
E. Refinish or replace darnged or ddective panels or frames.
ENDOF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
t08305-2 l-7554.01
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
sEcrroN 083s0
OVERMAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
I.OI SI'MMARY
A. This Section includes overhead coiling metd doors.
B. Types of overhead coiling doors include the following:
l. Insulated overhead coiling doors, electrically operated.
2. Overhead coiling fire doors, manually operated.
C. Extent of overhead coiling doors is shown on Drawings.
D. Provide complete operating door assemblies includ_ing door curtains, guides,
counterbalanc6 mechariisrq hlrdware, operators and installation accessories.
E. Related Sections:
l. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications:
t. Steel frame for door opening.b. Brace framing for door tracks.
2. Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors.
3. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting.
4. Division 16 - Electrical: Etectrical service to disconnect located near door
operator. Empty conduit from control station to door operator.
I.O2 STJBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, manufacturer's installation instructions and product data under
provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, roughing-in diagrams, and
installation instructions for each type and size of overhead coiling door. Include
operating instructions and maintenance information.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations which
are not fully dimensioned or detailed on manufacturer's data sheets.
l. Indicate opening dimensions and tolerances, component construction, connections
and details, locations, installation details.
r-7554.01 08330-r
o
Maintenance
I
I
T
I
I
II
I
I
I
T
I
II
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
1.03
A.
B.
D. Operation and
1. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions ofSection 01700.
2. Include data for motor and transmissioq shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency,
control adjustments, and spare part sources.
UL label certification for oversized fire-rated doors and frames that each assenrbly has
been constructd with materials and methods equivalent to requirements for labeled
construction.
QUALTTY ASSURAITCE
Furnish each overhead coiling door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer,
including hardwarg a@essories, mounting and installation components.
Unless oth€nilise acceptable to Architect, furnish overhead coiling door units by one
manufacturer for entire project.
l. Insert and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set
in concrete or built into masonry for installation of units. Provide setting
drawings, tunplates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage
devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
2. See concrete and masonry sections of these Specifications for installation of
inserts and anchorage devices.
3. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce overhead coiling doors to withstand a 20lb.
per sq. ft. wind loading pres$re unless othenrise indicated.
Operation of overhead coiling doors include the following:
l. Electric motor operation for non-fire-rated door.
2. Chain operation for fire-rated door.
Oversized Fire Doors: Where fire door assemblies orceed size for which testing and
labeling service is offered, furnish UL "Certificate of Inspection" for oversized doors in
lieu of label, certi$ing that desig4 materialg and construction are equal to doors tested
and labeled by uL.
Automatic Closing: Provide automatic closing device and governor, operating when
activated by temperature rise and melting of 160 deg F fusible link. Construct govemor
unit to be inoperative during normal door operations. Design release mechanism to
reset easily.
Provide manufactureds standard Ul-labeled smoke detectors and electromechanical
door-holder-release devices where indicated.
c.
D.
F.
08330-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
t
1.04 EXTRAMATERIALS
A. Provide 6 extra fusible links to Owner for initial testing and annual testing requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANI"JFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
l. TheCooksonCompany.
2. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.
3. Kinnear Div., Harsco Corp.
4. Mahon Rolling Door Div., RCM Corp.
5. Overhead Door Corp.
6. Pacific Rolling Doors.
7. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co.
8. J. G. Wilson Corp.
9. Windsor Door Co., Div. Ceco Corp.
2.O2 DOORCURTAINMATERIALS A}ID CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats desigrred to
withstand required wind loading, of continuous length for width of door without spli.ces.
Unless otherwise indicated, p-iovide slats of material gage recommended by door
manufacturer for size and type of door required, and as follows.
l. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Structural quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets
complying with AI{SVASTM A 466, Grade A with G90 zinc coating, complying
wittrASTU A525, and phosphate treated before fabrication.
2. Furnish manufacturer's standard "flat-face" slats, polyurethan-foam insulated for
non-rated door.
3. Endlocks: lvlalleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured-to curtain
slats with galvanized rivets. Pr6vi-de locks on altemate curtain slats for curtain
alignment and resistance against lateral movement.
4. Bottom Bar: Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than l-l/2 inches py l-ll2
inches by l/8 inch thi-ck, eithei galvanized or stainless steel or aluminum
extrusions to suit type of curtain slats.
B. Provide a replaceable gasket of flexible vinyl or neoprene between angles as a weather
seal and cushion bumper for non-rated door.
l-7554.01 08330-3
c.
D.
B.
c.
Curtain Jamb Guides: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles, or channels and
angles with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain loading. Build-up units with
minimum 3/6 inch thick steel sections, galvanized after fabrication. Slot bolt holes for
track adjustment. Provide weather seal at jambs.
Secure continuous wall angle to wall framing by 3/8 inch minimum bolts at not more
than 30 inches o.c., unless close spacing recommended by door manufacturer.
1. Extend wall angles above door opening head to support coil brackets, unless
otherwise shown.
2. Place anchor bolts on exterior wall guides so they are concealed when door is in
closed position.
3. Provide rernovable stops on guides to prevent over-travel of curtain, and
continuous bar for holding windlocks, if any.
COUNTERBALAI.ICING MECHAMSM
Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable steel helical torsion ,pring, mounted
around a steel shaft and mounted in a spring barrel and connected to door curtain with
required barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings
for rotating members.
Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel ofhot-formed stnrctural quality carbon
steel, welded or seamless pipe, of srffcient diameter and wall thickness to support roll-
up of curtain without distortion of slats and limit banel deflection to not more tlan 0.03
inch per sq. ft. of span under full load.
Prwide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion
spnngs.
L Size springs to counter balance weiSht of curtai4 with uniform adjustment
accessible from outside barrel.
2. Provide cast steel barrel plugs to sec'ure ends ofsprings to barrel and shaft.
Fabricate torsion rod for count€rbalance shaft ofcase-hardened steel or required size to
hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.
Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard desigr, either cast iron
or cold-rolled steel plate with bell mouth guide groove for curtain.
Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening
head, and act as weather seal.
l. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached.
2. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiftress.
3. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods, and any portion of between-jamb
mounting projecting beyond wall face.
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
2.03
A.
,/:-\/Klihlt+d/
torlr or v^|LDrl
D.
E.
F.
08330-4 l-7554.01
I
T
I
I
t
I
t
T
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
o
intermediate4. Provide support brackets as required to prevent sag.
G. Fabricate steel hoods for doors ofnot less than24 gage hot-dip galvanized steel sheet
with G 90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 525. Phosphate treat before
fabrication.
H. Furnish automatic drop bafle to guard against passage of smoke or flame on fue rated
doors.
2.04 PAINTING
A. Shop clean and prime ferrous metal and galvanized surf_ace9, exqo.s9p. and unexposed,
excipt lubricated- zurfaces, with door manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer.
2.05 MANUALDOOROPERATORS
A. Provide manual operators except where electric door operators are indicated. When not
showq provide chain hoist operatorunit.
B. Chain Hoist Operator: Provide manual chain hoist operator consisting of endless steel
hand chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, and geared reduction unit with a maximum
35-lb pull for door operation. Furnish alloy steel hand chain with chain holder secured
to operator guide.
2.06 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Fumish electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended
and provided by door manufacturer; complete with electric motor and factory-prewired
motor controls, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, remote control stations,
control devices, conduit and wiring from controls to motor and central stations, and
accessories required for proper operation.
B. Provide hand-operated disconnect or a mechanism for automatically engaging a
sprocket-and-chain operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation.
Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include
interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency
operator is engaged.
C. Design operator so that motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch
adjustment and without atrecting emergency auxiliary operator.
D. Door Operator Type: Provide wall- or bracket-mounted door operator units consisting
of electric motor, worm gear drive from motor to reduction gear box, chain or worm
gear drive from reduction box to gear wheel mounted on counterbalance shaft, and a
disconnect-release for manual operation. Provide motor and drive assembly of
horsepower and desigr as determined by door manufacturer for size of door required.
r-7554.0r 08330-5
E. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, rwersible, Class A insulated electric
motors with overload protection. Size motor to move door in either direction" from any
position, at not less tt$n2/3 foot per second nor more than I foot per second.
l. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of motors with
building electrical system.
2. Furnish totally enclosed, nonventilated tpe motors, fitted with plugged drain, for
interior wet applications in wash areas.
F. Remote Control Station: Provide momentary-oontact, tlree-button control station with
push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
l. Provide exterior type units, full-guarded t1pe, standard-duty, surface-mounted,
weatherproof,, NEMA Type 4 for interior wet applications.
G. Automatic Rwersing Control: Furnish each door with an automatic safety switctg
extending the full width of door bottonr, and located within neoprene or rubber astragal
mounted to bottom door rail. Contact with switch before fully closing will immediately
stop downward travel and reverse direction to fully opened position.
l. Connect to control circuit through retracting safety cord and reel, or self-coiling
cable.
2. Provide electrically actltated automatic bottom bar.
PART3 -DGCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb
and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to
final shop drawings, manufactureds instructions, and as specified.
l. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.
B. After complaing installatioq including work by other tradeg lubricate, test, and adjust
doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion.
l. Test door closing when activated by smoke-detector fire-release system. Reset
door-closing mechanism after successful test.
C. Train Owne/s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to door
operation, servicing prwentive maintenance, and procedures for resetting closing
devices after activation.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
08330-6
ENDOF SECTION
l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
t
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN 08360
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sectional overhead metal doors.
B. Types of overhead coiling doors include the following:
l. Newinsulated panel overhead doors.
2. Salvaging and reinstallation of existing sectional overhead door panels, tracks,
operator( controls and lift mechanismi. Dispose of existing, unusable overhead
door panels, tracks and operators.
a. Provide the services of a technical product representative who can
determined the feasibility of components io be salvaged and coordinate with
Owner's representative.
C. Operation of overhead coiling doors include the following:
l. Electric motor operation.
D. Provide complete operating door assemblies including door curtains, guides,
counterbalance mechanism, hardware, operators, and installation accessories.
E. Related Sections:
l. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications:
a. Steel frame for door opening.b. Brace framing for door tracks.
2. Section 08700 - Hardware.
3. Section 08330 - Overhead Coiling Doors.
4. Section 08366 - Vertical Lift Telescoping Doors.
5. Section 08800 - Glazing.
6. Section 09900 - Painting; field painting.
7. Division 16 - Electrical; electrical service to disconnect located near door
operator. Empty conduit from control station to door operator.
1-7554.01 08360-l
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. AltlSI 4216.l - Section Overhead Type Door (NAGDM 102).
B. AIiISVASTM A 526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated Galvanized by the Hot Dip Process,
Commercial Qudtty.
I.O3 SI]BMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Indicate opening dimensions and tolerances, component constructiorq connections and
details, locations, installation details.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data:
l. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions ofSection 01700.
2. Include data for motor and transmission" shaft and gearing, lubrication frequenry,
control adjustments, and spare part sources.
I.O4 QUALITYASSI.]RA}ICE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in overhead door construction with three (3) years
minimum experience.
B. Applicator: Manufacturer-approved company specializing in installation of overhead
doors with three (3) years documented experience.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for motor and motor control
requirements.
D. Provide each sectional overhead door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer,
including frames, sections, brackets, grides tracks, counterbalance mechanism,
hardwari, and installation accessories, to accommodate openings and head room
indicated. .
E. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in
concrete or built into masonry for installation of units. Provide setting drawings,
templates, and directions for instdlation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with
other work to avoid delaY.
F. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce sectional overhead doors to withstand a 20 lb. per
sq. ft. wind loading pressure.
I.O5 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty for all materials including door sealing performance quality.
B. Provide manufacturer's five year delaminzation warranty for insulated doors.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I08360-2 l-7554.01
I
t
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Insulated Doors;
l. Overhead Door CorPoration.
2. Raynor Garage Door Co.
3. Wayne/Dalton Corp.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: AIISVASTM L526;galvanized to 1.25 oz./sq' ft' flat'
B. Insulation: Rigid minimum U value : .069 same thickness as core framing members
bonded to facing.
Glazing Material: Preformed neoprene.
Insulating Glazing Units: Manufacturer's standard double glazed acrylic, or glass
units.
E. Weatherstripping: Resilient rubber strip.
F. Metal Primer Paint: Zinc ch,romate type.
2.O3 COMPONENTS
A. Panels for Insulated Doors: Face and back sheets, minimum 20 gage corrosion
resistant steel with insulating core.
B. Track: 13 gage thick by 3 inch wide rolled steel track, continuous, vertical and
incline mounleil galvaniz6d steel mounting brackets, l/4 inch thick'
L Provide highlift tracks where indicated on the Drawings.
C. Glazed Vision Panels: Aluminum panel section set in place wilth- l/9 inch thick glass
and resilient glazing channel. Number of lights per panel is indicated on the
Drawings.
D. Hinge and Roller Assemblies: Heavy- _dq1y hinges and adustable roller holders of
galvinized steel; floating hardened steil batt bearing rollers, located at top and bottom
of each panel at meeting joint.
E. Door Panel Weatherstripping: At bottom of door panel, full width; double contract
resilient.
F. Lift Mechanism: Heavy duty (25,000 cycle) Torsion spring on cross head shaft, with
braided steel lift cables.
t
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
T
c.
D.
l-7554.01 08360-3
G. Electrical Operator: UL approved motor; mounted on cross head shaft; adjustable
safety friction clutch; brake system actuated by independent voltage solenoid
controlled by motor starter; enclosed gear driven limit switc\ enclosed magnetic
cross line reversing starter, mounting brackets and hardware. Provide extra set ofdry
contacts on limit switch in closed position.
l. Coordinate wiring requirements and curent characteristics of motors with
building electrical system.
2. Furnish open dripprooftype motor in non-wet af,eas.
3. Furnish totally enclosed, nonventilated type motors, fitted with plugged draiq
for interior wet applications in wash areas.
H. Remote Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, thnee-button control station
with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
l. Non-Wet Areas: Provide interior units, full-grarded, surface-mounted, heavy-
duty, with general-purpose NEMA Type I enclosure.
2. Wet Areas: Provide q<terior tlpe units, full-guarded typg standard-duty,
surface-mounted, weatherproof, NEMA Type 4 for interior wet applications.
I. Safety Edge: At bottom of door panel, full widtfu pnegr,natic type, wired t9 stop door
upon striking object; hollow neoprene covered to provide weatherstrip seal.
2.O4 FIMSHES
A. Exterior Steel: Painted with primer. Prepared for paint finish.
B. Interior Steel: Painted with primer. Prepared for paint finish.
PART 3 - DGCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall opurings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and
tolerances are within limits.
B. Beginning of installation means aoceptance of existing surfaces.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacture/s instructions.
B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building
framing without distortion or stress.
C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural
members onlv.
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
t08360-4
/ftf)'')sti
mrx or vrlEy l-7554.01
I D. :il"*f"ll* door assembly including hardware, level and plumb, to provide smooth
- E. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit
I components.
F. Install perimeter trim and weatherstripping.It G. Install glass and glazing watertight.
I 3.03 TOLERAI'{CES
r A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
I B. Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch maximum.
C. Variation from Level: l/16 inch ma:rimum.
t D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus l/8 inch from l0 ft. straight edge.
- 3.04 ADruSTING AI.ID CLEAIIING
r A. Adjust door assembly.
I B. Clean doors, frames, and glass.
C. Remove labels and visible markings'
I END oF sEcrIoN
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I l-7ss4.01 08360-5
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION OE36E
FOURFOLDDOORS
PART I -GENERAL
1.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Hydraulically operated side folding doors.
2. Steel insulated type panels.
3. Operating hardware and supports.
4. Pass doors.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications:
a. Steel frame for door opening.b. Brace framing for door tracks.
2. Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors; salvaging ofexisting overhead doors.
3. Section 08710 - Hardware.
4. Section 09900 - Painting; field painting.
5. Division 16 - Electricd; electrical service to disconnect located near door
operator. Empty conduit from control station to door operator.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. AIISVASTM A 526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated Galvanized by the Hot Dip Process,
Commercial Quality.
I.O3 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION
A. Design Criteria:
l. Doors shall be designed such that they will deflect not more than L/120 of their
span under a minimum load of 20 pounds per square foot.
2. Door components shall be designed in accordance with the following
specifications of latest adoption:
a. Shapes, Plates, and Bars: AISC Specification for the design, fabrication and
erection of structural steel for buildings.
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
T
I
t
l-7554.01 08368-l
b. Sheet or Strip Metd: AISI Specification for the design of cold-formed steel
structural members.
I.O4 SUBMTTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Indicate opening dimensions and tolerances, component-construction, connections and
details, locationi, electrical diagrams and installation details.
C. Submit manufacture/s installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data:
l. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700.
2. Include data for shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, control adjustments, and
spare Part souroes.
l.o5 QUALITYASSURAI.ICE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in four fold door construction with three (3) years
minimum experience.
B. Installer: Manufacturer-approved company specializing in installation of four fold doors
with three (3) years documented orperience.
C. Provide each door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including fr,am€s,
sections, brackets, guides tracks, counterbalance mechanisnl hardware, and installation
accessories, to acco-mmodate openings and head room indicated.
D. Inserts and Anchorages: Fumish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in
concrete or built inio masonry for installation of units. Provide setting drawings,
templates, and direclions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with
other work to avoid delay.
E. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce sectional overhead doors to withstand a 20 lb. per
sq. ft. wind loading pressure.
I.06 WARRA}ITY
A. Provide one year warranty for all materials including door sealing performance qualrty.
B. Provide manufacturer's five year delaminzation warranty for insulated doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTTJRERS
A. Electric Power Door Co.
l. Model 46, electrically operated four fold door.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
08368-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
2.O2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Electric Welded Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
B. Steel Electric Welded Tubing: ASTM A 513.
C. Structural Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36.
D. Castings: Cast iron, ASTM A 48.
E. Weatherstripping: Dualdurometer.
F. Face Sheets: Steel sheet metal, flat, hot rolled, ASTM A 569, 14 gage minimum.
2.O3 COMPONENTS
A. Door Panel frames:
l. Construction: Standard structural steel, steel tubing sections of ample size and
strength for loads and stresses imposed under the specified conditions.
2. Frame Welding: Joints shall develop the full strength of the framing members.
3. Doors: Faced on both sides with 14 gage flat hot rolled steel, welded to door
panel frame. Welds to be 9" o.c.
4. Interior door panel frame members shall be spaced no more than 2'-0" on center
and shall run horizontally.
5. Frame members shall be true to dimension and square in all directions. Door
frame shall not be bowed, warped or out of line by more than l/8" in 20 feet.
6. Exposed welds and welds which interfere with the installation of various items
shall be ground smooth.
7. Leaf sections shall be factory assembled.
8. Calk exposed edges ofdoor panels.
B. Door Guides:
l. Door guide assemblies: "S" Series of structural shapes and arranged as shown on
the Drawings, minimum 34 x7.7.
2. Guide assemblies shall be capable of being mounted within 15" of headroom.
C. Guide Roller Assemblies:
l. Minimum ofrwo anti-friction guide roller assemblies.
2. Guide roller assemblies shall be the trolley type of sufficient size to transmit the
windload fiom the door panels to the steel door guides.
l-7554.01 08368-3
3. Provide two 3" diameter minimum size rollers in each assembly with bearings to
take vertical load and four l" minimum size steel rollers which take the horizontal
load.
D. Insulation:
l. Door sections shall be insulated with fibrous glass batt type insulation, providing a
U-value of 0.12 or less.
2. The insulating material shall be fitted to cover the entire interior surPace of the
door panel.
E. Pass Doors: Provide pass doors for emergency exiting in bottom four fold section
where indicated, complete with glazing, operating hardwarg and weatherstripptng.
Construct pass doors of same materials and design as overhead door unit.
l. Where door unit is power-operated, provide safety interlock switch to disengage
power supply when pass door is open.
2. Construct sill member no more than ll2 inch high.
3. Lock cylinder and closer is specified in another Division 8 Section "Finish
Ilardware."
2.04 HARDWARE
A. Provide hardware necessary for a complete installation. Hardware shall be heavy duty
type, including all bolts and fittings for the hardware.
B. Hinges:
l. Provide shop applied strap t)?e jamb hinges and folding hinges on each door
section.
Support each hinge on Timken roller bearings.
Provide grease zerk fittings on hinges for greasing hinge pintles.
Pintles:
z. Jamb Hinges: Continuous 7/8 inch diameter steel pintles full height of the
operung.b. fbld tilnges: Minimum 5/8 inch diameter steel pintles the height of the
hinge assemblY.
C. WeatherstripPing:
l. Special wind lock seals to be dual durometer with floribility to 40 degrees F.
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
J.
4.
08368-4 l-7554.01
a.
b.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
2. Snap-on type dual durometer with built-in wear strip at japb and heads and cloth
inse'rted rirbber sweep at sill, combination reversing edge and rubber seal at
meeting edges, and spbnge rubber and metal astragal between door sections.
3. Air leakage not to exceed 0.42 CFl[l per linear foot of seal with a 25 MPH wind.
2.05 OPERATION
A. Hydraulically operated using jamb mounted rylinder actuators.
l. Cylinder rods shall be retracted when door is in closed position.
2. Furnish comDlete with integral pump and tank assembly attached to the motor,
mounting Urbctcets, controT pairel, 'adjustable limits,_ jamb mounte$ hydraulic
cylinder{ pushbuttons, and all'necessary brackets and fittings to provide a smooth
and satisfactory operation.
3. Factory assemble power pack and cylinder-actYatgr-.rfeuilng only field
conne&ing of hydrarilic tubin'g or hose lin6s and electrical field wiring.
4. Operator shall open and close the dooq starting the_ door in motion smoothly, then
aicelerating to ririd-swing and bring it to an adjustable slow smooth stop.
5. Provide operator mechanism with instant reverse and capable of functioning
without chatter and vibration.
6. Mount actuator adjacent to thejamb panel hinges and not extend out from door
more than 18 inches when the door is closed.
7. Opening mechanism shall require less than 20 inches side roorn" measured from
th'e jam6 hinge pintle center li;e when the door is opened 105 degrees.
8. Provide not more than 5 pivot points in the mechanism with no sliding or rolling
contact points.
9. Provide an emergency override system so door can be operated in case ofpower
failure.
Door panels shall be free to operate manually after emergency override
svstem is activated.
System shall automatically reset itself after returning to normal operation
without readjusting any limit switches.
10. Electric Motors: Totally enclosed, minimum 2 HP suitable for operation on 460
volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz power.
a. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of motors with
building electrical system.
b. Provide electrical junction box with terminals for wiring to the electric
solenoid valves.
c. Provide UL rated NEMA 12 control panel housing the motor starter, relays,
timers. transformer, etc.
l-7554.01 08368-5
B.
c.
ll. Pump Unit: Rated to provide maximum 1,100 psi oil pressure at 3 gallons per
minute pumping rate. Provide oil pressure gage.
12. Reservoir Tank: 5 gallon capacity, equipped with oil level gage and filler cap with
vent plug.
13. Electric Solenoid Valves: Incorporate solenoid valves, flow control valves and
safety pressure relief valves into a single machined manifold block fixed to the
integral motor-pump-reservoir unit to control starting, stopping, acceleration,
deceleration, speed, and direction.
14. Hydraulic Hose: SAE Type l00Rl, minimum 3/8 inch inside diameter consisting
of an inner synthetic rubber tube with one braid of high tensile strength steel wire
reinforcement and an aouter synthetic rubber cover which is resistant to oil,
weather, and abrasion.
a. Temperature Range: Minus 40 degrees F. to plus 250 degrees F.
b. Minimum Burst Pressure: 9,000 psi.
15. Hydraulic Tubing: SAE Type J525, minimum l/2 inch outside diameter with
0.065 inch wall thickness, annealed, low carbon steel tubing, 47,500 psi minimum
burst pressure.
16. Disconnect Flow Control Valves: Needle type to allow for manual operatioon of
the doors without having to disconnect the cylinder actuators from the door
panels.
17. Hydraulic Fluid: Emery Synthetic Oil No. 2943D.
Remote Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control station with
push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
l. Non-Wet Areas: Provide interior units, full-guarded, surfacemounted, heavy-
duty, with general-purpose NEMA Type I enclosure.
SafeW Edee: At leading edge of door center section panels, full width; pneumatic type,
*i.ed to -stop door Jpon striking object; hollow neoprene covered to provide
weatherstrip seal.
FIMSIIES
Exterior Steel: Painted with primer. Prepared for paint finish.
Interior Steel: Painted with primer. Prepared for paint finish.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
t
t
t
t
I
2.06
A.
B.
08368-6 l-7554.01
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
t
I
I
T
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.01 EXAN4INATION
A. Veri$ that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and
tolerances are within limits.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building
framing without distortion or stress.
C. Fit and align door assembly inctuding hardware, level and plumb, to provide smooth
operatlon.
D. Install perimeter trim and weatherstripping.
3.03 TOLERAI{CES
A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B. Variation from Plumb: l/8 inch ma:<imum.
C. Variation from Level: l/8 inch maximum.
D. Longitudinal or Diagonal warp: Plus or minus l/8 inch from l0 ft. straight edge.
3.04 ADruSTTNGANDCLEA}{ING
A. Adjust door assembly.
B. Clean doors, frames, and glass.
C. Remove labels and visible markings.
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 08368-7
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
SECTION 0E611
wooD WINDOWS
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following wood window types:
l. Awning windows.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
L Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior and exterior wood trim that is
not included as part of the wood window units'
2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements for wood windows,
including factory-glazed window units.
I.O2 DEFINITIONS
A. Performance-grade numbeq included as part of the window desigrration system, is the
actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural
test pressure and water test pressure.
l. Structural tcst pressure, wind load test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design
pressure.
2. Water-leakage-resistance test pressure is equivalent to l0 percent of the desigrr
pressure with 2.86 lb/sq. ft. as a minimum.
I.O3 PERFORMANCEREQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide wood windows engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand
normal thermal movernent, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as
demonstrated by testing manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing types,
grades, and sizes required for this Project according to test methods indicated.
B. Standards: Performance requirements for operating force, air infiltratiorq water
penetration, structural performancg and forced-entry resistance for wood windows are
those specified in NWWDA I.S. 2, "Industry Standard for Wood Window Units."
C. Test Criteria: Testing shalt be performed by a qualified independent testing agency
based on the following criteria:
l. Design wind velocity at Project site is 90 mi./h.
l-7554.01 08611- l
D.
2. Test Procedures: Test window units according to ASTME283 for air
infiltration" ASTM E 547 for water penetratioq and ASTM E 330 for structural
performance.
Performance Requirernents: Testing shall demonstrate compliance with requirements
indicated in NWWDAI.S.2 for operating force, air infiltratio4 water penetratiorg
structural performancg and forced-entry resistance for the qpe and performance grade
of window units required. Where required design pressure exceeds the minimum for the
specified window grade, comply with requirements of NWWDAI.S.2, Article 6,
"Optional Performance Classifications," for higher than minimum performance grades.
l. Air-Infiltration Rate for Operating Units: Not more than 0.10 cfm/ft. of operable
sash joint for an inward test preszure of I .57 lbflsq. ft..
2. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an
inward test pressure of l0 percent ofthe stnrctural test pressure.
3. Structural Performance: No failure or permanent deflection in excess of 0.4
percent of any membefs span after removing the imposed load, for a positive
(inward) and negative (ourward) test pressure of 60lbflsq. ft.
4. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Level 20 requirements whan
tested according to ASTM F 588.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and DMsion I Specification Sections.
Product Data for each type ofwood window required, including the following:
L Constnrction details and fabrication mahods.
2. Profiles and dimensions of individud components.
3. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes.
Shop Drawings for each tpe of window required, including information not fully
detailed in manufacturer's standard Product Data and the following:
l. Layout and instdlation details, including anchors.
2. Elevations at l/4 inch = I foot scale and typical window unit elevations at 3/4 inch: I foot scale.
3. Full-size section daails of typical composite members, including reinforcement
and stiffeners.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
1.04
A.
B,
c.
08611 - 2
/K\\).,/w/mrx ot v^r.Drl l-7554.01
D.
B,
c.
D.
F.
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.05
A.
4. Hardware, including operators.
5. Glazing details.
6. Accessories.
Test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating that each type,
grade, and size of window unit complies with performance requirements indicated based
on comprehensive testing of current window units within the last 5 years. Test results
based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted.
QUALITY ASSURAI'.ICE
Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose windows have been certified under the
NWWDA "Hallmark Program" for wood window units are listed in the current
NWWDA "Mernbership and Product Directory" and conply with requirements
indicated.
l. Provide only wood window units bearing an NWWDA "Hallmark Program" label
certifying compliance with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 2.
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain wood window units from one source and by a
single manufacturer.
Safety Glass Standard: Provide products complying with testing requirements of
16 CF& Part l20l for Category tr materials.
Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of the Flat Glass Marketing
Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "sealant Manual" except where more
stringent requirements are indicated.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating-glass units pemumently
marked on spacers or at least on one component pane of units with the appropriate
certification label of one of the inspecting agenry indicated below:
l. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI).
3. National Certification Testing Laboratories (NCTL)
Product Options: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, dimensional requirements, and
aesthetic effects of wood windows and are based on the specific window types and
models indicated. Other wood window manufacturers whose products have equal
performance characteristics may be considered provided deviations in size, profile, and
dimensions are minor and do not alter the aesthetic effect. Refer to DMsion I Section
"Substitutions. "
t-7554.01 08611 - 3
I.06 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check window openings by field measurements before fabrication
and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule
with construction progress to avoid delayrng the Work.
l. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood windows without field
measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actud opening
dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
I.O7 WARRAhITY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the Contractor under requiremmts oftle Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty ocecuted by wood window manufacturer
agreeing to repair or replace window components that fail in materials or workmanship
within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
l. Structural failures including orcessive deflectiorU water leakage, air infiltration, or
condensation.
2. Faulty operation of sash and hardware.
3. Deterioration of finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.
C. Wananty Period for Insulating Glass: l0 years after date of Substantial Completion.
D. Wananty Period for Wood Windows: 2 years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTI,JRERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide window units by one
ofthe following:
l. Unfinished Wood Window Units:
a. Eagle Window and Door, Inc. (specified to establish level of quality).
b. Caradco Window Corp.
c. Hurd Millwork Co.
d. Malta Wood Windows & Doors @Msion of Tompkins Industries, Inc.).
e. Marvin Windows.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I08611-4
f Pella Corporation.
l-7554.01
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
e. Pozzi Wood Windows.
h. Weather Shield lvlfg., Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements ofNWWDA I.S. 2.
B. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or other zuitable fine-grain lumber, kiln dried to a
moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication and free of visible finger
joints, blue stairL knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than l/32 vide by 2
inches long.
l. Lumber shall be water-repellent preservative treated after machining per
l.IwwDAI.S.4.
C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of
aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel or iron complying
with requirements of ASTM B 633 for SC 3 (swere) service condition; provide
sufficient strength to withstand desigrr pressure indicated.
D. Fasteners: Compty with NWWDA I.S. 2 for fabrication and with manufacturer's
recommendations and standard industry practices for type and size of installation
fasteners.
l. Use zinc-coated or nonferrous nails and screws for window fabrication and
installation.
2. Use brass screws for hardware and accessory installation.
E. Compression-Type Weatherstripping: Provide compressible weatherstripping designed
for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely
concealed when sash is closed.
l. Weatherstripping Material: Molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTMD 2287
or molded, expanded, EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509,
Grade 4.
F. Glass-Fiber-Mesh Insect Screen: l8-by-14 or l8-by-16 mesh of plastic-coated glass-
fiber tkeads, woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage,
stretch impact damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with requirements of
ASTM D 3656
G. Glass and Glazing Materials: Provide manufacturefs standard clear, sealed, insulating
gldngmaterial that complies with Division 8 Section "Glazing."
H. Glazing Seal: Provide manufactureds standard extruded, vinyl, or butyl glazing gasket
providing weathertight seal.
t-7554.01 08611- 5
2.03 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware, necessary to operate, tightly close,
and securely lock windows. Do not use aluminum in frictional contac't with other
metals.
l. Provide solid white metal hardware with a special coating finish and plated steel
or brass/bronze op€rating bars and rods.
B. Four-BarFrictionHinges: Complywith fu{IvrA904.l.
l. Friction Shoes: Nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, noncorrosive, durable
material.
C. Gear-Tlpe Rotary Operators: Comply with AAN,IA9OI.I for rotary operators.
Comply with ASTM E 405, Method A when subjected to operating moments and
closing torques indicated in AAI\,IA l0l.
l. Operator shall operate all ventilators simultaneously, securely closing them at both
jambs without using additional manually controlled locking devices.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Insect Screens: Provide insect screens for each operable exterior sash or ventilator.
Locate screetxi on inside or outside of window sash or ventilator, dependhg upon
window t1pe. Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting,
removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches.
l. Screen Frames: Fabricate frames of tubular-shaped, extruded- or formed-
aluminum members of 0.O4Ginch-minimum wall thickness, with mitered or coped
joints and concealed mechanical fasteners. Provide removable PVC spline,/anchor
concealing edge of screen frame. Comply
",ith
requirements of SMA 1004.
2.05 AWNING WINDOWS
A. Window Grade: Comply with requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade DP60.
B. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware:
l. Operating Dwice: Gear-type rotary operator located on jamb at sill.
2. Ifinges: Concealed 4-bar friction hinges (2 per ventilator) located on each jamb
near top rail.
3. Cam latch or other latching hardware with lever handle or pull.
/((\\)f$/ /
rwx or vNLDrl
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I08611 - 6 t-75s4.01
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
2.06 FDGDWINDOWS
A. Window Grade: Comply with requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade DP60.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate wood window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a
complete system for assembly of components and anchorage ofwindow units.
l. Comply with requirements of NWWDALS.2 for moisture content of lumber at
time of fabrication.
2. Provide frame extensions to permit window unit to fit wall conditions as shown
on the Drawings.
B. Fabricate windows to produce units that are reglazable without dismantling sash
framing. Provide openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware
and other items.
l. Provide weatherstripping at perimeter of each operating sash.
2. Provide removable insect screen for each operating sash, with location determined
by manufacturer.
3. Provide dlazintg stopg nailed or snap-on type, coordinated with gfass selection
and glazing system indicated.
4. Factory-Glazed Window Units: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united
inches, glaze window units in the shop before delivery, unless factory glazing is
not available from manufacturer. Comply with requirements of DMsion 8 Section
"Glazing" of these Specifications and NWWDA I.S. 2.
5. Groove Glazing: Factory-glazed units without removable stops or other provision
permitting convenient field disassembly to facilitate replacement of broken glass
will not be accepted.
C. Complete fabricatiorU assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before
shipment to the Project site, to the maximum extent possible. Disassemble components
only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site,
provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming and fitting.
2.8 FIMSHES
A. Wood Finish: Provide the following finish on exposed wood in units:
l. Shop-Primed Units: Provide manufacturer's standard shop-prime coat on exterior
wood surfaces onlv.
t-7554.01 08611 - 7
3.02
A.
B.
c.
3.03
A.
PART 3 - E)GCI.]"TION
3.01
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine openings before installation. Verify that opening is correct and sill plate is
level. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
l. Wood frame walls shall be dry, clear1 sound, well-nailed, free of voids, and
without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in
opening and within 3 inches'of comer.
2. Coordinate window installation with wall flashings and other built-in components.
INSTALLATION
Comply with manufacture/s instmctions and recommendations for installing window
units, hardwarg op€rators, accessories, and other componelrts ofthe Work.
Set window units plumb, lwel, true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash.
Provide prope,r support and anchor securely in place.
Set sill members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets, as indicated, to
provide weathertight constnro'tion.
ADruSTING
Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tiSht fit at contact points and
weatherstripping for smootl operation and a weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware
and moving parts.
CLEANING
Clean interior and exterior surfaces immediately after installation. Exercise care to
avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove orcess glazing and sealants,
dirt, and other substances.
Clean glass of factory-glazed units immediately after instaling windows. Wash and
polish glass on both faces before Substantial Completion. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels
from glass surfaces.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during the construction period.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
3.04
A.
B.
I
I
T
I
I
c.
08611 - 8 l-7554.01
o
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect window units from damage or deterioration until the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 08611 - 9
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. The extent of hardware is shown on the drawings and in schedules'
2. Provide hardware for all doors including all items known commercially as
,,builders hardware" or ',finish hardware" inCluding bifold door hardware.
3. Include lock cylinders for locks furnished in other sections where so specified.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry; installation of hardware.
2. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames.
3. Section 08210 - Wood Doors.
I.O2 QUALITYASSURA}ICE
A. Acceptability of substitute items, refer to Section 01600.
B. Standards:
l. I{ardware Brands: All locks and latch sets must be one brand, all overhead
closures one brand, all floor checks one brand, all hinges one brand, all panic
devices one brand.
2. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance
with NFPA Stan0ird No. 80. This requirement takes precedence over other
requirements for such hardware. Provide- only hardw.are which has been tested
ani listed by UL for the t)?es and sizes of doors required, and complies with the
requirements of the door and door frame labels.
3. Where panic exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide UL label on
exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".
C. Fasteners:
l. Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for
machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for
self+apping sheet metal screws, excipt as specifically indicated.
2. Furnish screws for hardware installation, with each hardware item. Provide
Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated.
l-7554.01 08710-l
3. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match the hardware
finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of other such
work as'closefy as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive
painted finish.
D. Suppliers:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
l.
I.O3 SI.JBMITTALS
A. Hardware Schedule:
,)
Builders hardware supplier shall be o<perienced in furnishing and servicing
hardware ofthis type and grade for a minimum period of 2 years.
The supplier shall be, or have in his employ, an experienced AHC Certified
Consultant who is available for consultation during the course of the work.
1.Submit copies of the hardware schedule complying with the actual construction
Drosress schedule requirements to each draft. Hardware schedules are intended
ior-the coordination bf the work. Review and acceptance by the Architect or
Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his exclusive responsibility to fulfill the
requirements as shown and specified.
Fumish a full set of cuts of the products to be used at the time of the initial
hardware submittal.
Final Hardware Schedule: Based on the hardware requirements indicated,
organize the final hardware schedule into "hardware sets", indicating complete
designation of wery item required for each door or opening.
Furnish initial draft of schedule at the earliest possible date, in order to facilitate
the fabrication of other work (such as hollow metal frames) which may be critical
in the project construction schedule.
Furnish final draft of schedule after samples, manufacturer's data sheets,
coordination with shop drawings for other worl delivery schedules and similar
information has been completed and accepted.
Wherever needed, furnish templates to fabricators of other work which is to
receive finish hardware.
B. Key Schedules:
l. Prepare keying schedules for approval, and factory key locks in accordance with
approved schedule.
2. Furnish in triplicate, complete schedule of key marking and master key system to
Architect prior to final acceptance.
C. Requirements for Maintenance:
l. Warranty: Furnish 2 copies of the following written warranties:
J.
4.
).
6.
08710-2
a. Mechanical failure of door closures for 5 years.
l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
b,F parts ofall hardware except door
o
closures for 1 year.
I.O4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND I{ANDLING
A. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project,. but not yet insfled.
Control the handline ind installation of hardware itenis *hich are not immediately
replaceable, so that ihe completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses,
both before and after installation.
B. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware
sch-edule, and incluie baslc indtallation instruction in the package.
C. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the hardware supplier and the
hardwar6 installer until each is satisfief that the count is correct.
I.O5 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Coordinate hardware with other work.
B. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors-and frames of thicknesses,
profile, swing, security and si^milar reiquirements indicated, as necessary for proper
installation and function.
C. Deliver indMdually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations
(shop or project site) for installation.
D. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be
factory prepared for 'the installation of hardware. Upon request, check -the shop
drawingi oi such other worlq to confirm that adequate provisions are made for the
proper installation of hardware.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.OI HARDWARE LIST
A. Fumish hardware in accordance with the hardware schedule included at the end of this
SectiorL and as indicated in the Drawing Door Schedule. Those schedules are intended
as a gride to indicate hardware firnctions.
B. Provide all items needed for door function including fire-rating and requirements for
fire-rated doors.
C. Mount closers, to all extent possible, out of corridors.
D. Furnish all items in US26D, Dull Chrome finish, except where otherwise noted and as
follows:
L Trim plates may be supplied in US32D, Brushed Stainless Steel finish.
2. Closers: Painted aluminum.
3. Weatherstrip: Natural aluminum finish.
o
ailure of
l-7554.01 08710-3
E. All butts on
o
exterior doors to be non-ferrous with non-removable pins.
F. All other butts to have non-rising pins.
2.02 KEYING
A. Supplier shall submit final Keying Schedule with Owner for approval and obtain final
instructions in writing.
B. System:
l. Except as otherwise indicated, key to o<isting Great Grand Masterkey system for
the project.
2. All lock cylinders shall be "Removable Core" type.
C. Keys:
l. Furnish 3 change keys for each lock and 5 master keys.
2. The keys shall be made of nickel silver.
2.03 HARDWAREFORBIFOLDDOORS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware for interior bifold doors when not
fumished as part of complete door package.
B. Operating Hardware: Provide manufacture/s complete sets consisting of overhead
extruded aluminum track; captive nylon shoe or roller guides; rubber bumpers in track;
and adjustable pivots, hinges, and door aligners all designed to accommodate the
number, size, thickness, and weight of door leaves indicated.
l. Provide heavy-duty sets designed for leaves weighing up to 75 lb.
C. Trim Hardware: Provide the following items as needed for operating bifold doors:
l. Pulls: Aluminumwiretpepulls,4incheswide.
PART 3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for
Builder's Hardware" bv DHI for standard steel frames of custom steel frames as
applicable, exc.epJ as btherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with
goveming regulations.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or
into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item
completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application.
o
stainless steel
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I08710-4 t-7554.01
c.
D.
F.
G.
B.
c.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Clean and re-lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish
ofhardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation
of heating and ventilation equipment.
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S ABBREVIATIONS OF LISTED HARDWARE
APPROVED STIBSTITUTES
McKinney, Stanley, Bommer
No Substitution
LCN
Quatity, Glynn-Johnson
Reese, Zero, Hager
Approved equal
Stanley, Hager
3.02
A.
After completion of the finishes, re-install each item. Do not install surface-mounted
items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
l. Installer may leave hardware items in place during finishing work providin_g such
items are firlly masked and protected. Remove finish materials which may
penetrate masking, without damage to hardware or its finish or replace as
required.
Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as nec€ssary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
Screw thresholds to substrate with No. l0 or larger screws, of the proper type for
permanent anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel which will not corrode in contact
with the tlueshold metal
At exterior doors, and elsewhere as indicated, set each edge ofthreshold in a seal strip
of butyl rubber sealant or polyisobutlylene mastic sealant to completely fill concealed
voids and exclude moisture. Do not plug drainage or weep holes. Remove excess
sealant.
ADruST AIID CLEAI\I
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper
operation or function ol wery unit. Lubricate moving parts with t]?e lubrication
recommended by manufachrrer (graphite-type if no other recommended).
Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as
intended for the application made.
Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior
to acceptance or occupancy ofa space or area, returnto the work during the week prior
to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware
items in such space and area.
LEGEND
(rrA)
(sc)
(No)
(TR)
(PE)
(JB)
(LB)
MANUFACTIJRER
Hager
Schlage Lock Co.
Norton
Trimco
Pemko
Jaybee
Lawrence Bros.
l-7554.01
ffiW'imrx or v^rlDrl 08710-5
3.04 HARDWARESCHEDI.'LE
A. Hardware Groups:
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
l.The following Hardware
Drawings.
Groups (IIW) apply to doors as scheduled on tle
HWI
Janitor Room
EACH DOOR TO TIAVE:
3 EA. BUTTS
I EA. LOCKSET
I EA. WALL STOP
3 EA. SILENCER
IIW2
Mechanical Room (Fire Rated)
EACH DOOR TO HATIE:
3EA. BUTTS
I EA. LOCKSETlEA. CLOSER
I EA. WALLORFLOOR
STOP
I SET SMOKE SEAL
HW3
Office Doors
EACHDOORTOHAVE:
3 EA, BUTTS
I EA. PASSAGESET
I EA. WALL STOP
3 EA. SILENCERS
IIW4
Restroom Doors
EACHDOORTOHAVE:
3 EA, BUTTS
I EA. PUSHPLATEEA. PULLPLATEEA. CLOSEREA. KICKPLATEEA. WALL STOP
1279 4.5 x4.5
AL53PD SAT x 10-025
wl276CCS
12294
BBl279 4.5 x4.5
AL53PD SAT x 10-025
83OI REG
WI276CCS orWl2llES
s88D
1279 4.5 x 4.5
ALI0S SAT x 10-025
wl276CCS
t2294
BBl2l9 4.5 x 4.5
l00l 4" x 16"
l0l3 4" x 16"
E3OI REG
8" x2" LDW x 0.050"
wl276CCS
626 HA626 SC626 TR
TR
626 HA626 SCEN NO
626 TR
PE
626 HA626 SC626 TR
TR
626 HA626 TR626 TREN NO630 TR626 TR
08710-6 1-7554.01
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
t
I
I
I
t
I
o
SILENCERS TR
I SET
2EA.
I{W6
3 EA.
HW5
BI-FOLDDOOR SET
EACHDOOR TO TIAVE:
12294
HD-640 Series
647
BBl279 4.5 x4.5
10001 4" x 16"
tr95-2
83OI REG
8" x 2" LDW x 0.050"
wl276CCS
S88D Head and Jambs
BBI l9l 4.5 x 4.5 NRP
8460P x 12-076
l73l x 3" LDW
8" x2" LDW x 0.050"
wl276CCS
t72A
S88D at head
305CR atjambs
3l5CN
END OF SECTION
Vestibule Doors
EACH DOOR TO HA\TE:
BI-FOLD }IDWE.
PT]LLS
BUTTS
PUSHPLATE
PULL
CLOSER
KICKPLATE
WALL STOP
DOOR SEAL
BUTTS
DEADLOCK
PUSPPULL BARS
KICKPLATE
WALL STOP
THRESHOLD
WEATIIERSTRIP
WEATI{ERSTIRP
DOORBOTTOM
LB626 JB
3 EA.
I EA.
I EA.
I EA.
I EA.
I EA.
I SET
IIWT
3 EA.
I EA.
I SET.
I EA.
I EA.
I EA.
I EA.
2EA.
IEA
Exterior Entry Doors
EACH DOOR TO HA\TE:
626 HA626 TR626 TREN NO630 TR626 TR
PE
626 HA626 SC626 TR630 TR626 TRAL PE
PEAL PEAL PE
l-7554.01 08710-7
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION O8tOO
GLAZING
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI ST'MMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Float glass.
2. Safety glass.
3. Insulating glass units.
4. Custom mirrors.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames.
2. Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors.
3. Section 08611 - Wood Windows.
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. AI.ISI 297.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety
Glazing Material Used in Buildings.
B. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
C. SIGMANo. 64-7-2- Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
D. FGMA - Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual.
I.O3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 01300'
B. Submit two samples 12 by 12 inches in size, illustrating glass, unit, and coloration
except clear glass.
1.04 QUALTTY ASSllRAl.lCE
A. Installer shall have minimum 5 years o<perience in project of similar size and
complexity.
B. Conform to Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual: Glazing
installation methods.
l-7554.01 08800-l
C. Mirror Manufacturers' Document: Comply with recommendations of National
Association of Mrror Manufacturers (NAMM) in its publication "MIRRORS, Handle
with Extreme Care, Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mrrors."
D. All exterior glass shall withstand 30 psf wind load, both positive and negative. Provide
written certification as to compliance with this requirement.
E. Safety Glass: Comply with Colorado State Statutes, UBC Section 5406, UBC Standard
54-2 and Al.lSI 297.1 with certifying label on each piece.
F. Insulating Glass: Seal Standard ASTM E6-P3, Test Methods Pl and P2. Provide units
manufactured by SIGMA member and bearing IGCC, ALI or NCTL certification
numbers.
G. Manufacturers: Provide each type of glass and primary sealant/gasket from a single
manufacturer with not less than 5 years of successful ocperience in the production of
materials similar to those required
I.O5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AI{D HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Store and protect productsunder provisions ofSection 01600.
C. Insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial dtitude changes with project site at
approximately 8,300 ft. above sea level. Comply with insulating glass fabricator's
recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
I.06 WARRA}ITY
A. Provide insulating glass manufacture/s written warranty, agreeing to within specified
warranty period:
l. Furnish FOB project site, replacements for insulating glass units which have
defective hermetic seals (excluding that due to glass breakage).
2. Defined to include intrusion of moisture or dirt.
3. Internal condensation at temperatures above -20 degrees F.
4. Deterioration of internal glass coatings.
5. Other visual evidence of seal failure or performance failure.
6. Provided manufacture/s instruction for handling, installation, protection and
maintenance have been adhered to during warranty period.
B. Wananty period is l0 years after seal date permanently imprinted on unit, but not less
than 9 years after date ofsubstantial completion.
I
t
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I08800-2 l-7554.01
I
t PARr2-PRoDUcrs
2.0r PRrME (NON-PROCESSED) GLASS
I A. Manufacturers:
l. Cardinal IG.
I 2. Ford GlassDiv.
r 3. Libby-Owens-Ford Co.
t 4. Guardian Industries.
I 5. PPGlndustries,Inc.
B. Float Glass: Clear: ll4 inch thick except as otherwise indicated.
t 2,oz PRocEssED GLASS
I
A. Tempered Glass:
a L Prime glass ofcolor and type indicated, which has been heat-treated to strengthen
glass in bending to not less than 4.5 times annealed strength.
t 2'
l#ii.t"i,:1T$:TL'J:'j"r:n*"
saretv glass is indicated or where required bv
I B. customMirrors:
l. Clear float tempered glass l/4 inch thick except as otherwise indicated.
t z. *irftg";;:s' copper protective coating and 2 mil thick paint coating, comply
t 3. Mirror Edge Treatment: Provide forms of edge treatment indicated below, with
edges sealed after treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of
I
glass coating:
a. Beveled polished edge.
I b.
fff;.T":Ut.
treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to
t 4. Mirror Hardware: Continuous extruded aluminum mirror retaining hardware top
and bottom edges, of size and profile recommended by mirror manufacturer, in
I
manufacturer's standard finish, complying with description below:
a. Clear anodized finish.
I 5.
#:T;.."td
Inserts: Provide devices as required for installation of mirror
I
I t-7554.0r 08800-3
2.03 FABRICATED GLASS UMTS
A. Manufacturers:
l. Cardinal IG.
2. LOF.
3. PPG.
4. General Glass Co.
5. Thermo-Systems.
B. Insulating Glass:
l. Factory assembled and sealed units with minimum ll2inch air space.
2. Manufacturer's printed warranty against defects in materials and workmanship and
specifically including perimeter edge seals.
3. Assemble from above specified types 8s indicated or scheduled.
314 inch for wood windows, I inch elsewhere or as indicated on the
Drawings.
Provide units manufaclured under provisions of SIGMA and bearing IGCC,
ALI or NCTL certification number.
Fabricate with double seals, polyisobutylene primary and silicone secondary
preferred.
Exterior Pane: Clear float except units for wood windows to be low-
emissivity pyrolytic coated on second surface.
Interior Pane: Clear, float.
Doors, sidelights, and glass, openings within 18 inches of the floor; both
panes must be tempered.
2.04 GLAZING SEALA}ITS/COMPOI.JNDS
A. General:
l. Provide grey exposed glazing materials, unless another color is indicated, or
unless anoth-er color is selected by fuchitect from manufactureds standard colors.
2. Provide hardness of materials as recommended by the manufacturer for the
required application and condition ofinstallation in each case'
3. Provide only compounds which are known (proven) to be fully compatible with
surfaces contacted.
B. l-Part Acrylic Glazing Sealant:
l. Solvent-based, acrylic terpolymer, thermoplastic sealant; 95 percent of solids
acrylic; compounded specifically for glazing; complying with FS TT-S-230, Class
B, iype II. Tremco Mono or approved substitution.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I08800-4 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
t
C. Sealant Type: Tremco No. 440 or approved substitution.
2.05 MISCELLA}IEOUS GLAZINGMATERIALS
A. Setting Blocks: Neopreng 70-90 Durometer hardness, with proven comPatibility with
sealants used.
B. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 Durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants
used.
C. Compressible filler Rod: Closed-cell or waterproof-jacketed r-od_ st99k of.synthetic
rubbir or plastic foam, proven to be compatible ri,ith gealants used, flexible and resilient,
with 5-lo psi compression strength for 25 percent deflection.
D. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer'
PART 3.DGCUTION
3.OI EXAJ\4INATION
A. Check that ddngchannels are free of burrs, irregularities, and debris.
B. Check that glass is free of edge damage or face imperfections.
C. Do not proceed with installation until conditions are satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements:
l. Measure size of frame to receive glass.
2. Compute actual glass size, allowing for edge clearances.
B. Preparation of Surfaces:
l. Remove protective coatings from surfaces to be glazed.
2. Clean glass and glazing surfaces, to remove dust, oil and contaminants, and wipe
dry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Cut glass with smooth straight edge to fill size required by opening.
B. Vertical edges: ground smooth. Sharp corners eased slightly.
C. Maintain l/4 inch clear at top sides and edges of glass greater than 3-0" in width or
height.
Set all glass with waves parallel to sill.
Set all glass on setting blocks as recommended by manufacturers.
D.
E.
l-7554.01 08800-5
F. Apply glazing compound, glazing sealant, glazing tape and gaskets uniformly with
adcuiat-ty formed Corners and by levels. Remove excess compound from glass and
sash. Use only recommended thinners, cleaners and solvents.
G. Remove all dirt and stains.
H. Install mirrors in accordance with manufacture/s recommendations.
l. Install permanent means ofsupport at bottom and top edges with bottom support
designed to withstand mirror weight and top support to prevent mirror from
coming away from wall along top edges.
2. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting zurfaces with mechanical fasteners
installed with anchors or inserts as applicable.
3. For continuous bottom supports, provide l/8 x 4-inch setting blocks at quarter
points. For channels or other continuous supports in which water could be
trapped, provide two l/4-inch diameter weeps drilled between setting blocks.
4. Provide continuous clip along top of mirror.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Glazing compound back and face beds.shall be straight and smooth without finger
marks.- Remove excess dauing compound.
B. Clean, polish glass and restore to original condition all adjacent areas soiled during
glazing operation.
3.05 GLAZINGTYPELOCATIONS
A. AII exterior glass is insulated.
B. Provide insulated, safety glass in all glazed exterior doors and entry sidelites adjacent to
exterior doors.
C. Provide single glazing safety glass at vestibule doors and their ortry sidelites.
D. Provide safety glass at interior glazed doors, sidelites, and within 18 inches of floor.
END OF SECTION
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I08800-6 l-7554.01
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
t
t
t
SECTION 09250
GYPSTM BOARD
PART I -GENERAL
1.OI STIMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Gypsum drywall construction.
2. Taped and sanded joint treatment.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry; Wood framing system and blocking'
2. Section 07210 - Building Insulation; Thermal insulation.
3. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames; Hollow metal frames.
4. Section 08305 - Access Doors; Metal access panels'
5. Section 09900 - Painting:
I.O2 REFERENCES
A. Recommended Specifications for Application and Finishing of Gypsum board, Gypsum
Association GA-216.
Recommendations for Installation of Steel Door Frames in steel Stud-Gypsum Board
fire-rated partitions, Gypsum Association GA-21 9.
ASTM C 36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
ASTM C 630 - WaterResistant Gypsum Backing Board.
ASTM C 7 54 - Installation of steel framing members to receive screw-attached Gypsum
Wallboard, Backing Board or Water Resistant Backing Board.
F. FS SS-L-30: Lath and Board Products, Gypsum.
I.O3 STJBMITTALS
A. Submit catalog data indicating compliance Section 01300.
I.O4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Industry Standard: comply with applicable requirements of GA-216, "Applicatio.n and
finishin! of Gypzum Boaid' by the'Gypsum sAsiociatign, except where more detailed or
*ote itringeit requirementi are iidicated, including the recommendation of the
manufacturer.
B.
c.
D.
E.
l-7554.01 09250-l
B. Allowable Tolerances: l/16 inch offset between planes of board faces and l/4 inch in
8'-0" for plumb, level, warP, and bow.
I.O5 DELIVERY, STORAGEA}.IDHANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in their original unopened containers, fully identified with the
manufacturer's name, brand , type, and grade'
B. Store in a dry, well ventilated, enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and
exposure to the elements.
C. Damaged or deteriorated materials shalt be removed from the premises.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.OI MANTJFACTURERS
A. Subiect to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering producis which may be
incdrporated inthe work include the following:
1. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. United States GyPsum Co.b. Domtar GlPsum.c. Georcia-Pacific CorP'd. GoldBond BuildingProductsDiv., National Gypzum Co.
B. All catalog numbers and trade names used in this Section are those of United States
C4psum, -unless otherwise noted, and are to establish continuity and a standard of
quality.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Board:
l. 5/8 inch regular, tapered edge gypsum board, 48 inches wide and in lenglhs as
long as prictical td minimizl t-he number of joints. Board shall comply with
ASTM C 36.
2. 5/8 inch WR Type X tapered edge gypsum board, 48 inch wide, lengths as long
as practical to minimize the number ofjoints. Board shall comply with ASTM C
630.
B. Fire-Rated Shaft Wall Area Separation Wall Enclosures:
l. Fire-tested and rated assembly of nC", nH", or "I" studs.
2. Provide assembly having 2-hour fire rating as required.
C. Channels:
l. 7/8 inch metal funing hat channels.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
t
I
I
09250-2 l-7554.01
D.
I
I
I
2. l-l/2 inches cold-rolled channels.
3. l-l/2 inches 25 gage, z-funing channels.
Hanger Wire:
1. No. 8 cold drawn ASTM A 641, soft, class l, galvanized steel wire.
Tiewire: 16 gage or clips.
Metal Trim: Dur-A-Bead corner reinforcement: No. 200 series metal trim, and Perf-A-
Bead.
G. Control Joint: No. 093.
H. Joint Treatment: Perf-A-Tape Joint system; joint compound all-purpose or ready-mixed
joint compound all-purpose; Durabond 90 or equal.
I. Fasteners: Type A and Type S-12, length as required, and 3/8 inch pan head.
PART 3 . DGCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine the substrates and the spaces to receive gypsum board and the conditions
under which it is to be installed for proper and timely completion of the work.
B. po not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
3.O2 INSTALLATION-GENERAL
A. Isolate gypsum board from walls, columns, beams and ceiling by use of No. 200 series
metal trim or control joint.
B. Provide sealant at edge of gypsum board at abutting walls, floors, beams, columns, and
ceilings. Seal all cutouts at all sound retardant walls, air shafts and plenums.
C. In long partition runs, provide control joints no more than 30'-0" o.c. Provide control
joints in partitions at ldcations of conitruction change. VeriS control joint locations
with Architea.
D. Ends and edges of all gypsum wallboard shall occur over framing mernbers.
E. End joints shall be staggered at least l'-0".
F. Do not attach rypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including
joists and headers. Instead, float gtrrysum panels over these members using resilient
channels or provide controljoints to counteract wood shrinkage.
G. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer,
install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction.
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
t
E.
F.
I
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 09250-3
J.
K.
L.
M.
Screws shall be staggered on adjoining edges where ends occur on same framing
members,
Drive screws home with the heads slightly below surface in a dimple formed by the
crowned face of the driving tool.
Care shall be taken to avoid breaking the paper surface.
Provide Dur-A-Bead at all external 90 degree corners and Perf-A-Tape at all intemal
corners and joints. Provide Perf-A-Bead at external corners of 120 degree or greater.
Apply fasteners as recornmended by manufacturer.
Provide No. 200-A series metal trim where all edges adjoin dissimilar material and
elsewhere as indicated.
Finish all exposed joints and screw heads with all purpose compound on interior
applications.
The building shall be heated well in advance of, during and following the applications of
wallboard, 1o maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 50 degrees F. and
ventilation provided to eliminate excessive moisture.
Install specified closures at openings of all fire rated walls or walls enclosing return air
plenums.
Reinforce each interior hollow metat window frame mullion from floor to window frame
head at locations where window length exceeds l0'-0"; and where the window fiame
does not extend to the floor.
GYPSIJM WALLBOARD INSTALLATION
Install gypsum board in accordance with USG Bulletin SA 92i, ASTI\4 C 754, and --G4-216 asipplicable: Have a copy of bulletins on the job. Anchoring of floor and ceiling
runners,-iecuring of studs to runners and spacing of screws shall be as required by
indicated bulletins and ASTM C 754. Framing of studs at openings shall be in
accordance with GA-2 19.
All partitions shall be constructed in accordance with the drawing legend and shall
conform to the fire-rating as indicated.
One-hour stud walls and non-rated walls shall be constructed with single layer 5/8 inch
Type X or 5/8 inch WR Type X Gypsum Bgqd each side of 3-518 inches metal studs
sddced at 16 inches o.c. conforming to GA-WP-1200. Board shall be screw attached
a-ndjoints and screw head finished.
Interior ceilings shall be constructed with single layer 5/8 inch gypsum board secured to
7/8 inch metal funing channels unless otherwise noted. Metal funing channels spaced
at 24 inches o.c., seCured to l-ll2 inches cold-rolled channels with 16 gage tie wire or
clips. l-l/2 inches cold-rolled channels spaced at 4'-0u o.c. and supported at maximum
4'-b" o.c. with No. 8 gage wire.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
N.
o.
P.
a
3.03
A.
B.
c.
D.
09250-4 l-7554.01
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
E. Chase walls at plumbing or similar chases shall be constructed with single layer 5/8 inch
Type X or S/S-inch WR Type X gypsum board one side of studs spaced at 16 inches
o.c.
3.04 FIMSHING
A. General:
l. Apply treatment at .gypsum board joints (both directions), {anges of trim
accessories, penetrati6-ni, fastener h6ads, surface defects, and elsewhere as
required to prepare work for finishes.
2. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, using type of compound
recommended by manufacturer.
a. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards,- except where trim
acc-eJsory is indicated. Tape in comer beads and termination metal (except
exposed type).b. Afply joinf compound in three (3) coats (not including prefill of openings in
base), and sand between last two (2) coats and after last coat.
c. Review and coordinate with finish schedules and sections to assure proper
conditions to receive finishes as required and specified.d. All exposed gypsum wall board to be taped and sanded whether or not
scheduled to receive finish.
B. Partial Finishing:
l. Omit third coat and sanding on concealed work which is indicated for wallboard
finishing, including sound, fire, air, and smoke-rated work.
3.05 PROTECTION OF WORK
A. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures of protection of the gypsum
wallboard work from damage and deterioration during the remainder of the construction
period.
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 09250-5
I
I
I PARr l -.ENERAL
I l.ol STJMMARY
sEcrroN 09310
CERAMIC TILE
A. Section Includes:
I l.
ffinm"T*
and wall tile installed using thin set, bond coat method for interior
I B. Related Sections:
l. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
I 2. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board.
I t.oz QUALITY ASSLJRAI.ICE
I A. Conform to A].ISI - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of
Ceramic tile.
I B. Conform to AI.ISI - Recommended Standard Specifications for Cerarnic Tile - TCA
137.1.
t l.o3 REFERENcEs
A. ANSI A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.
I B. AI.ISI A118.l - Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.
l C. AI{SI Al18.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
I I.O4 SI.JBMITTALS
I A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Submit product data specifications and instructions for using adhesives and grouts.
I C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300 for color selection.
I D. Certificates.
r l. Master Grade Certificate:
I
I
I
a. Conformto AIISI Al37.l.b. State grade, kind of tile, identification marks for tile packages, and name
and location of project.c. Issued and signil 5y manufacturer when tile is shipped.
I t-7ss4.0r 09310-l
2. Manufacturers of mortarq adhesives, and grouts to certify that materials are
suitable for intended use and meet or exceed standards of American National
Standards Institute or other specified standards.
I,O5 PRODUCTDELI\1ERY, STORAGE ANDHAI{DLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original sealed containers.
L Labels legible and intact identifying brand name and contents.
2. Tile cartons grade-sealed by manufacturer in accordance with AIISI A137.1.
3. Grade-sealsunbroken.
4. Manufactured mortars and grouts shall contain hallmarks certiSing compliance
with reference standards and be qpes recommended by tile manufacturer for
application.
5. Adhesives in containers labeled with hallmarks certirying compliance with
referenced standards.
B. Deliver mastic grout ready for use.
C. Delivery dry set mortar in sealed, moisture-proof containers. .r1,.
D. Store materials under cover in manner to prwent damage or contamination.
I.06 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Environmental:
l. Set and grout tile in Portland cement mortar when ambient temperature is at least
50 degrees F. and rising.
2. Comply with minimum temperature recommendations of manufacturers for
bonding and grouting materials in other than Portland cement mortar.
B. Protection: Protect adjoining work surfaces before tile work begins.
I.O7 EXTRAMATERIAL
A. Provide 2 full cartons each of every size and color of ceramic tile type used on this
project.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.OI TILEMANUFACTURERS
A. American Olean.
B. Florida Tile.
C. Substitutions under provisions of Section 01600.
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
09310-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
2.02 TILE MATERIALS
A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat tile complying with
the following requirements:
l. Composition: Porcelain.
2. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches.
3. Face: Plain with cushion edges.
B. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements:
l. Module Siz-e: 4-ll4by 4-ll4 inches.
2. Thickness: 5/16 inch.
3. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges.
4. Mounting: Factory back-mounted.
C. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to
comply with following requirements:
l. Size: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile.
2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacture/s standard shapes:
a. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Coved.
3. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except use coved base and cap
angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.
4. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of
tile floor and adjoining floor finishes ofdifferent thickness, tapered to provide a
redustion in thickness from 1/2 inch to l/4 inch across nominal 4 inch dimension.
D. Colors and Patterns:
l. Provide colors of tile as indicated u/ith patterns as selected by fuchitect.
2. Architect final selection of exact shades or textures of tile will be within limits of
selected manufacturer's t'?e group.
2.O3 SETTINGMATERIALS
A. Dry-set mortar: conforming to Al.lsl Al18.l.
B. Latex-Portland cernent mortar: Conforming to AI'ISI Al 18.4'
t
I l-7554.01 093r0-3
2.04 GROUTINGMATERIALS
A. Latex Portland cement grout:
l. Color: White.
2.05 MORTARMXA}.IDGROUT
A. Mx and proportion pre-mix setting bed and grout materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive tile before tile installation begins for:
l. Defects or conditions adversely affecting quallty and execution of tile installation.
2. Deviations beyond allowable tolerances of surfaces to receive tile.
3. Latex Portlarid cement or dry-set methods: Morimum variation in vertical
surfaces of l/4 inch in 8 feet.
B. Starting with installation work indicates acceptance of surface conditions and installer
will be-responsible for satisfactory results on fihished surfaces.
3.O2 PREPARATION
A. Condition of zurfaces to receive tile:
l. Surfaces shall be firrry dry, cleaq and free of oily or waxy films.
2. Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical work in or
behind tile shall be installed prior to proceeding with tile work.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Ceramic Tile: Prepare surface, fit, set, or bond, grout, and clean in accordance with
applicable requirements of AI.ISI standards for setting method specified, except as
otherwise noted.
l. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: A108.5.
B. Setting of Tile:
1. Floor tile by one of the following methods:
a. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: TCA Method Fl13.
2. Wall tile by one of the following methods:
a. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: TCA Method W243.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
09310-4 l-7554.01
I
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Edge Strips:
1. Provide at openings where ceramic tile floors are adjacent to other flooring
material at the same level.
D. Cut and fit tile tight to protrusions and interruptions. Form corners neatly'
E. Form bullnose intemal and extemal angles.
F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
G. Keep expansior/contraction, control joints free of mortar or gout'
H. Allow tile to set for minimum of 48 hours prior to Srouting.
3.O4 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
1-75s4.01 09310-5
I
I
I
t
T
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 096s0
RESTT.[]'NT TILE ILOORING
PART I. GENERAL
1.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Preparationofsubstratesurfaces.
2. Application of resilient tile.
3. Cleaning of resilient floor surfaces-
B. Related Sections:
,.
l. Section 03300 - Concrete Wor( finish trowelling of floor slab.
2. Section 03560 - Cementitious Floor Patching; repair of existing concrete slabs.
3. Section 09678 - Resilient Wall Base amd Accessories.
1.02 QUALTTYASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualification. Mnimum 3 years experience installing resilient floor covering
material.
I.O3 REFERENCES
A. CodeVStandards:
l. Conform to the following fire test data:
a. Flame spread - ASTM E 84 - 75 or less.b. NBS Smoke - ASTM E662 - 450 or less.c. Critical Radiant Flux - ASTM E 648 - 0.45 wattVcm2 or more.
B. FederalSpecifications:
L FS SS-T-312 - Tilg Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl-Asbestos.
2. FS L-F-450 - Flooring, Vinyl Plastic.
I.O4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals in conformance with Section 01300.
IT
T
t-7554.01 09650-l
B. Samples:
L Submit minimum of 3 samples of each type and color or pattern of resilient
flooring.
2. Mark samples with name of Contractor, project identification, and area where
materials are to be used.
Maintenance Data and Instructions: Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the
work, furnish copies of a list of recommended maintenance products and recommended
maintenance methods and procedures.
Maintenance Materials:
L Furnish additional flooring covering materials for replacement and maintenance.
2. Furnish materials of each size, color, pattern" and type of material included in the
work.
3. Furnish materials at the rate oftwo cartons for each color and pattem offlooring.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE A}ID HANDLING
Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with
labels indicating brand names, colors and pattenn, and quality designations legible and
mtact.
Do not open containers or remove markings until materials are inspected and accepted.
Store and protect accepted materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions and
recommendations.
Unless otherwise directed, store materials h original containers at not less than 70
degrees F for not less than 24 hours immediately before installation.
I
I
I
I
t
c.
D.
B.
c.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
1.05
A.
D.
I.06 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Spaces to receive resilient floor covering shall be maintained at 70 degrees F minimum
at floor level for at least 48 hours prior to, during, and for 48 hours after completion of
tile installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANI.'FACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may
be incorporated in the work includg but are not limited to, the following:
l. Vinyl Composition Tile:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.b. Arzrock Floor Product Div., Arzrock Industries.c. GAF Corp., Floor Products Div.d. Kentile Floor, Inc.
/':\Ni
mrx ot vArLPl09650-2 l-7554.01
I
I
T
I
T
t
I
t
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
II
t
o
2. Approved substitutions under the provisions of
TILEMATERIAL
1600.
2.02
A.12 inch by 12 inch by li8 inch vinyl composition tile FS SS-T-312 B (l) Type IV'
Comp. I
B. Pattern: Armstrong Imperial Torture Premium Excelon Series, Stontex Pattern or
approved substitution.
2.03 APPLICATIONMATERIALS
A General:
l. Provide Wpe and brands of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of
covering ririterial for the conditions ofthe installation.
2. Provide below-grade adhesive for below-grade applications.
3. Primer: Type and brand recommended by floor covering manufacturer'
B. Crack Filler: Type and brand recommended by floor covering manufacturer.
C. Cleaner, or other Finishing Material: As recommended by floor covering manufacturer
for the particular tlpe of flooring material.
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.OI EXA]\4INATION
A. Examine all work over which tile is to be placed and report to the Contractor, any and
all conditions which will affect the satisdctory execution of the work or endanger its
pennanency.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove grealie, dirt, and other substances from subfloors.
B. Lay flooring only after slabs are sufrciently free from moisture to ensure complete
adhesion.
C. Inspect subfloor for holes, cracks, and smoothness.
D. Do not proceed with laying until surfaces are smooth, level, and all holes and cracks are
filled.
E. Starting of floor laying shall indicate acceptance of subfloor,.and installer of resilient
floorin[ shall be resioi'sible for smoothness and levelness of finished floor'
F. Stack tiles in rooms for 24 hours before laying.
o
Section 0
r-7554.01
/(t(I}')fS/i /
llrxorvnDr/09650-3
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Apply adhesive and lay flooring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide joints and seams as invisible as possible.
C. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce minimum number
of seams and symmetrical tile pattems.
D. Install symmetrically about center lines of rooms or areas.
l. Mnimum tile width ll2inchfull size at room or area perimeter.
2. Square gdd pattern with all joints aligted.
3. Pattern grain parallel for all units and parallel to long dimension unless otherwise
directed.
E. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is
dissimilar.
F. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinas, floor outlets and other appurtenances to
produce tigtrt joints.
G. Immediately after floor covering is placed in a room or enclosed area, it shall be
thoroughly rolled with a heavy floor roller designed for the purpose.
H. Replace all broken or damaged items immediately prior to completion of the building.
I. Tile installed in any individual room or area shall be from same color run.
3.04 CLEA}{ING
A. Clean tile as recommended by manufacturer of tile used.
B. Upon completion, leave floors and base clear\ smooth and free from buckles, cracks,
and projecting edges.
3.05 RESILIENT TILE COLOR SCIIEDI.JLE
A. Location: Supervisor's Office.
l. Color: No. 52143 - Sandstone Tan.
B. Location: Break Room:
l. Color: No. 52133 -NaturalVerdigris.
C. Location: Break Room:
l. Color: No. 52126- GravelBlue.
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I096504l-7554.01
o
D.Location: Entry.
L Color: No.52136- CobbleGranule.
More than one color, or border, or accents may be used within spaces.
END OF SECTION
1-7554.01 09650-5
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
sEcTroN 09678
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART I- GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
l. Resilient wall base.
2. Resilient flooring accessories.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
l. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile."
2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring."
I.O2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
I Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type ofproduct specified.
C. Samples of manufacture/s standard sample sets in form of pieces cut from each type of
product specified showing full range of colors and patterns available.
l.o3 QUALTTYASSLIRAIICE
A. Single-source Responsibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product
specified from a single source with resources to provide products ofconsistent qualtty
in appearance and physicat properties without delayng progress of the Work.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire performance
characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test met}od indicated
below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
l. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq cm or more per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662.
l-7554.01 09678 - I
c.
r.05
A,
I.O4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANDHANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and
containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and
shipping and handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures
maintained between 50 deg F and 90 deg F.
Move products into spaces where installed a minimum of 48 hours before installation.
PROJECT COI{DITIONS
Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F in spaces to receive products specified in
this Section for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less
than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less
than 55 deg F.
Do not install products until they are at the same temperature of the space where they
are to be instailed.
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
B.
C. Close spaces to traffic during installation of products specified in this Section.
1.06 SEQLIENCINGAI',ID SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installing products specified in this Section with other construction to
minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period.
I.O7 EXTRAMATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as
described below, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with
labels clearly describing contents.
B. Furnish not less than l0 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof of each
different type and color of resilient wall base installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTIJRERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering floor
accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limted to, the
following:
l. Armstrong.
rffir.)S/il
ror,x or %n"V09678 - 2 l-7554.01
I
T
I
2. Mercer.
3. Approvedsubstitution.
2.02 RESILIENT WALL BASE
I A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I.
I l. Style: Cove with top-set toe.
I B. MinimumNominal Thickness: 1i8 inch.
I c. Height: Z-rl2nches.
- D. Lenglhs: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer but not less than 100 feet
I'- E. Exterior Corners: Premolded.
I F. Interior Corners: Premolded or formed on job.
G. Color and Pattern:
r L Coved Base: ArmstrongNo. 74 Shoreline.
I z.o3 RESTLTENT AccEssoRrES
A. ProductDescription:
I l. Carpet edge for glue down applications, Mercer 705.
| 2. Reducer strip for resilient flooring, Mercer 633.
B. Material: Solid vinyl.
I C. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors produced for
rubber accessories complying with requirements indicated.
I z.o4 rNsrALLATIoNAccEssoRIEs
I: A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.r B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-
I
cement-based recommended by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant tJpe recornmended by manufacturer to zuit resilient flooring
I
product and substrate conditions indicated.
l-7554.01
I
I
/':-\
A\11h..4
t$z.r /
mrx or 9r[.DY 09678 - 3
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur, with
Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation
and comply with manufacture/s requirements and those specffied in this Section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacture/s installation specifications for preparing substrates
indicated to receive products indicated.
B. Use trowelable lweling and patching compounds per manufacturers directions to fill
cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, warq oil, or silicong by
using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped
with a heavy-duty wire brush.
D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing products
specified in this Section. Following cleaning, examine zubstrates for moisture, alkaline
salts, carbonatioq or dust.
E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to app$ng
adhesive. Apply according to manufacture/s directions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according to
manufacturer's installation directions.
B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent
fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long
as practicable. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length ofeach piece,
with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
L On irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
2. Install exterior corners before installing straight pieces.
3. Form inside corners on job from straight pieces of marimum lengths possible by
cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is
formed. Shave back ofbase where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate.
T
t
t
l
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I09678 - 4 l-7554.01
I C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials oftype indicated and
bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that
I otherwise would be exposed.
3.M CLEA}{INGA}.IDPROTECTION
I A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation:
I L Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended
I by manufacturers ofresilient product involved.
|1 2. Sweeporvacuumfloorthoroughly.
I 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
I 4. Damp-mop resilient accessories to remove black marks and soil.
I B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
I operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by manufacturer of resilient
t Productinvolved.
C. Clean products specffied in this Section not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled
I for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of
I Project. Clean products using method recommended by manufacturer.
I
ENDoFSECTIoN
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l-7ss4.01 09678 - 5
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN 09900
PAINTING
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Complete painting of all surfaces throughout interior and.exterior of building,
excelt as otherwile specified or indicated-in the Finish Schedule.
2. Field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts,. hangers, exposed
steel dnd irot work"'and primed metal surfac6s-of equipment installed under the
mechanical and eleciricd ivork. Coordinate with Division 15 and 16 Installers for
color coding.
3. Mechanical grilles, registers, louvers (except aluminum or prefinished items),
panel covers and frames for electrical work.
4. Paint equipment mounted on roof and orterior wall including aluminum and
factory finished items.
5. Scafrolding required for e,(ecution of work under this Section.
B. Work Not Included:
l. Shop priming of ferrous metal items and fabricated components included under
their respective sections.
2. Pre-finished items.
3. Metal toilet partitions.
4. Acoustic materials
5. Anodized aluminum.
6. Stainless steel.
7. Bronze and brass.
8. Light fixnrres, switches and convenience outlets.
9. Do not paint any moving parts of operating units, or-over any.equipment
identificaiioq perf,brmance-rdting, name-or nomenclature plates or code-required
labels including:
Valve and damper operators.
Linkages.
Sensing devices.
Motor and fan shafts.
a.
b.
c.
d.
l-7554.01 09900-l
o
paint areas behind
o
caseworh
I
I
t
I
I
c.
10. Do not
fixtures.
permanently mounted plywood panels, or
Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following
generally inaccessible areas:
l. Foundation spaces.
2. Furred areas.
3. Utility tunnels.
4. Pipe spaces.
5. Duct shafts.
Related Sections:
L Section 05120 - Structural Steel; Shop-prime painting.
2. Section 05200 - Metal Joists; Shop-prime painting.
3. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications; Shopprime painting.
4. Section 05510 - Metd Stairs; Shop-prime painting.
5. Section 05521 - Pipe and Tube Railings; Shop-prime painting.
6. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry; Finishing of millwork and exterior wood
siding.
7. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames; Shop-prime painting.
8. DMsion 15 - Mechanical; Pipe identification taping and stenciled painting.
9. Division 16 - Elec'trical; Raceway identification taping and stenciled painting.
REFERENCES
"Painting Specifications" by Painting and Decorating Contractors of America, "Type l,
Recommended Jobs".
DEFIMTIONS
The term "paint" includes emulsions, enamels, oil paints, sealers, stains, varnishes, and
similar coatings.
SUBMITTALS
Product data for each paint system specified, including primers.
l. Provide the manufacture/s technical information including label analysis and
instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for
use.
D.
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
T
I
T
I
T
t.o2
A.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
09900-2 l-7554.01
I
t
I
I
I
I
2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system,
application. Identify each material by the manufacture/s catalog number
and
and
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
general classifi cation.
B. Submit color samples for each kind and color ofpaint required.
C. Prepare samples on hardboard in duplicate (approximately 8 inches by l0 inches) for
approval.
1. Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8 inch samples of natural wood finish on actual
wood surfaces.
D. After approval, one sample of each kind and color of approved sample will be returned.
E. Do no painting until samples are approved.
l.os QUALTTYASSURANCE
A. Apptcator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator whq las completed
pihting systim applications siriili in madrial and ext-eht to those indicated for the
itro;ect-thit have reiulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the
same manufacturer as tlte finish coats.
C. Include on label of containers:
l. Manufacturer'sname.
2. Type of paint.
3. Manufactureds stock number.
4. Color.
5. Instructions for reducing, where applicable.
D. Field Quality Control:
L Review offirst finished roor\ space, or item ofeach color scheme is required by
Architect for color, texture, and workmanship.
2. Use first acceptable room, space or item as project standard for each color
scheme.
3. For spray applicatiorL paint surface not smaller than 100 sq' ft' as project
standard.
I.06 PRODUCT DELII/ERY, STORAGE A}.ID HANDLING
A. Deliver paint materials in original unopened.containers ryith. labels and tags.intact,
ready-miked except for minor t-inting anti thinning done on the job. Provide the highest
quality, and purpose for which manufactured.
l-7554.01 09900-3
o
for the
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
B. Secondary products not specified,by name and required
be "best grade" or "first line" products.
job such as shellac shall
C. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperatures of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). Maintain containers
used in storage in a clean condition" free of foreign materials and residue.
l. Protect fiom freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and
waste dailv. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are
protected'from fire and tieatttr trazaras resulting from handling mixing, and
application.
I.O7 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature-of surfaces^to be-p-ainted and
sulri'ounding air temprratures are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F
(32 degrees C).
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temp€rature of zurfaces to be painted and
niri'ounding air temperiture are between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F
(35 degrees C).
C. Do not apply pant in snow, rairr, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85
percenq oi at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point; or
to damp or wet zurfaces.
L Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be
paintei are'enclosed and hdated within temperanre limits specified by the
hanufacturer during application and drying periods.
I.O8 EXTRAMATERIAL
A. Furnish Owner clean, new, one{uart cans of paints used in the worh well marked,
indicating location of each color and type material used. One can if less than 1,000 sq.
ft., 2 cans if over 1,000 sq. ft. covered.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Except as otherwise specificd, materials shall be the products of the following
manufacturers:
l. Carboline Company (Carboln).
2. Devoe and Raynolds Co. @woe).
3. The Glidden Company (Glidden).
4. Kwal.Howells, Inc (KrlI).
5. Benjamin Moore & Company (Moore).
6. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-!V).
09900-4 l-7554.01
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
o
Company
B. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be the product of a
single manufacturer.
2,02 MATERIALS
A. Quality: Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly
manufactured by acceptable paint materids manufacturers. Paint material containers not
displaying manufacturbr's product identification will not be acceptable.
B. No claim as to the unzuitability or unavailability of any material specified, or
unwillingness to use specified products, or inability to produce first-class work with
specified products, will be entertained.
C. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that
are compatibl6 with o-ne another ind the substrates indicated under conditions of service
and apflication, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field
7. Tnernec , Inc. (Tnemec).
exp€nence.
D. Material Qudity: Provide the manufacture/s best-quality trade sales paint material of
the various coating tlpes specified. Paint material containers not displaying
manufacturet's product identification will not be acceptable.
E. Colors: Match colors
designations. : :'
PART3 -DGCUTION
3.OI EXAT{INATION
indicated by reference to the manufacturer's standard color
A. Examine substrates and corditions under which painting will be performed for
compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be
thoroughly dry before paint is applied.
l. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicato/s acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information
on characteristics offinish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
l. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
3,02 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,
lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide
surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting, Remove these
items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following
completion of painting operations in each space or are4 have items reinstalled by
l-7554.01
Af{}-,)Wi/
torx or v^[Dtl 09900-5
O
workers skilled in the trades involved.
I
t
t
I
t
l
T
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
B.
c.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of
substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease
prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from
ihe cleaning pro@ss will not fall on wet, newly painted zurfaces.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according,to tle
manufacturey's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
l. Provide banier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify
Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat
material with substrates primed by others.
2. Wood: Clean zurfaces of dirt, oil and other foreigrr substances with scrapers,
mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view
smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean sma[ dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat ofwhite
shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After
priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish zurhces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.b. Prime, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges,
ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets,
counters, cases and paneling.
c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar vamish.d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where wet wall construction
occurs on backside.
3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfsces that have not been
shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreigt
substances. Use solvent or merhanical cleaning mahods that comply with
recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).
a. Blast steel zurfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer
and according to requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP6,
Commercial Blast Cleaning.b. Treat bare and sandblasted or picHed clean metal with a metal treatment
wash coat before priming.
c. Touch-up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wir+bruslr" clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer,
and touch-up with the same primer as the shop coat.
4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetoleum-based
solvents so tlnt the zurface is free of soil and surface contaminants. Remove
pretreatment from galvanized sheet maal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical
methods.
Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materids according to
manufacture/s directions.
l. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean conditioq free of
foreigrr materials and residue.
D.
09900-6 l-7554.01
E.
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
3.03
A.
B.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as
required during applicaiion. Do nol stir surface film into material. Remove film
and, if necessary, strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within
recommended limits.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a fighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat
where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the
color of thd finish coat, but provide zufficient differences in shade of undercoats to
distinguish each separate coat.
APPLICATION
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and
techniques best zuited for substrate and type of material being applied.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
l. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of tle
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the prwious coat has
cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between apptcations where
sanding is required to'produce a smooth even surface according to the
manufacture/s directions.
4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through
final coat of paint until paint film is ofuniform finish, color, and appearance. Give
special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds,
and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat
surfaces.
5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in
fixtures, conveotor covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar
components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain
the system integrity and provide desired protection.
6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and fumiture the same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before the final installation ofequipment, paint surfaces behind
permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a
flat, nonspecular black paint.
8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
9. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces.
t-7554.01 09900-7
o
lightly between
o
varnish
T
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
T
T
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
10. Sand each zucceeding enamel or
11. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise-prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
L Allow sufficient time baween successive coats to permit proper drytng. Do not
recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint
does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other
applicators accordhg to the manufacturer's directions.
l. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wood as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texhre required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended
by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness ofthe entire system
as recommended by the manufacturer.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to
items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
2. Heat exchangers.
3. Tanks.
4. Duct'work.
5. Insulation.
6. Supports.
7. Motors and mechanical equipment.
8. Accessory items.
Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Conduit and fittings.
2. Switchgear.
D.
F.
G.
09900-8 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I. Prime Coats: Before applyrng finish coats, apply a prime coat of material,- as
recommended by the manufaiture, to material that is required to be painted or finished
and that has notbeen prime-coated by others. Recoat piimed and sealed surPaces where
evidence ofsuction sfots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat
with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
J. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no
evid'ence of rolling such as laps, irregularitj, in texture, skid marks, or other surface
imperfections.
K. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smootlr, oPagqe surface
ofuniform finish,color, appearanse, and coverage. Cloudiness, spolting, holidays, laps,
brush marks, runs, sags, rbpiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
L. Transparent (Ctear) Finish: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film
of ev6n lustei. Pr6vide a finish free oT laps, cloudiness, color irregulariry runs, brush
marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other zurface imperfections.
L Provide satin finish for final coats.
M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.
3.04 CLEA}IING
A. At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbisll and other discarded
paint materials from the site.
B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remgve spattered
paint by wistrinf dna scrifing. D6 not scraich or ilamage adjacent finished surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whetler being painted or not, against damage by painting.
Correct damaged by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to
Architect.
B. Provide 'Wet Paint" sigrs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary
protec.tive wrappings provided by others to protect their work after complettng painting
operauons.
l. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.06 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. The following areas slnll receive paint finish designed for high performance and will
withstand high humidity:
l. Shower rooms.
2. Bus vehicle wash areas.
Kfi\)[$z,i /
rfrN o| r^tleYl-7554.01 09900-9
B. The following schedule for finishing is not intended to mention every particular item
which will receive painter's finish. The kinds of paint and number of coats required on
the various surfaces slnll be as scheduled.
3.07 EXTERIORPAINTSYSTEMS
A. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items.
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Paint System PS I - Semi-Gloss: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer: Syntheic rust-inhibiting prim€r.l) Devoe:2\ Glidden:3) KoH4) Moore:5) S-W:
l3l0l Rust Penetrating Primer.
5205 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer.
9210 Rust Inhibiting Metal Primer
konClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
Kern Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50WI.
b. First and Second Coats: Semi-Gloss Acrvlic Latsrl) Dwoe: 16)O( Wonder-Sfrield Exterior Acrylic Latex Satin
House & Trim Paint.
5 200 Glid-Crusrd Lifemaster.
3200 Acrylic Iatex Serni-Gloss
096 MoorGlo Lato< House & Paint Trim.
A-100 Lator House and Trim Paint.
c. Color: As selected by Architect.
B. Galvanized Maal:
1. Paint System PS 2 - Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer.l) Devoe: 13201 Mnolac Galvanized Metal Primer.2) Glidden: 5229 Glid-Guard All-Purpose Metal Primer.3) KoH 5E00 lOOPlo Acrylic Primer.4) Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155.5) S-W: No primer required.
b. First and Second Coats: Serni-Gloss Acrylic Enamel.l) Devoe: 16)0( Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Satin
House & Trim Paint.
2) Glidden:3) KoH4) Moore:s) S-w:
2) Glidden:3) KoH4) Moore:s) S-w:
5 200 Glid-Guard Lifemaster.
3200 Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss.
096 MoorGlo Lato< House & Paint Trim.
A-100 Lator House and Trim Paint.
c. Color: As selected by Architect.
2. Paint Systern PS 3; Heat-Resistant, Blaclg Enamel Coating: For surfac.e
temperatures up to 400 degrees F (204 degrees C). Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer Coat: lvlarnrfacturer's recommeirded metal primer.1) Dwoe: 710-5-9930 IIT-10 Modifed Silicone lfigh Heat
Coating.2) Glidden: 5546 Glid-Grard Silicone Alkyd Primer, Tan.
/ffi\)
"rW09900-10 l-7554.01
t
I
t
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
b. First and Second Coats: Heat-resistant Enamel'l) Devoe: 7018 Minolac Aluminum.i) Glidden: 5547Glid-GrardSiliconeAllcy-dEnamel,Grey-3) KoH ValsparHi-Heat Silicone Coaligs 37-J-l' Black'
4) Moore: Heat-Resistant Finish Black 073.
5) S-W: Heat-Resistant Black @688.{2).6) Tnemec: Series 39-661 Silicone Aluminum.
C. Paint System PS-4; Stained Wood:
l. Flat Staiq No Finish: One coat.
a. First Coat: Exterior, semi-transparent oil stain'
l) Dwoe:9000 All Weather Semi-Transparent Alkyd Stain
and Wood Preservative.
2\ Glidden: gT2lLineEnduranceOilSemi-TransparentStain.
3) KrH 8609 Rustic Wood Stain.
4) Moore: Moorwood Semi-Transparent Stain and Wood
Preservative 081.
5) S-W: Exterior Serni-Transparent Stain A-14 Series.
b. Color: Match sdsting.
3.08 INTERIORPAINTSYSTEMS
A. Ferrous Metal (non-wet areas):
No primer required.
No primer required.
No primer required.
No primer required.
l. Paint System PS 6 - Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total
dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer.- _ .l) Devbe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red.
2i Glidden: 5210 Glid-Grard Universal Fast-Dry Metal Primer.
3) KoH 9210 MetalPrimer.4\ Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163'
5) S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer 850N2/B50WI'
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.l) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.2) Glidden: 4200 Spred Illtra Semi-Gloss Enamel.
3) KeH 4200 Alkyd Undercoat.4> Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
5) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoat B49W200.
c. Finish Coat: Interior, Semi-Gloss, Odorless, Alkyd Latex.l) Devoe: 26)0( Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.2) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel.
3) KoH 4600 Accutone Semigloss Enamel.
o
KoH
Moore:
S.W:
Tnemec:
3)
4)
5)
6)
t-7554.01
ffi\)t$/i /
tttrx o? YxLDr/09900-l I
4)
5)
o
Moore
S-W:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
Classic 99 Semi-Gloss Enamel A40 Series.
d. Location: Metal doors and frames.l) Color: Benjamin MooreNo. HC 157.
B. Ferrous Metal (wet areas):
l. {ain1.Syry9ry PS 7 - Semi-Gloss Epory_Finish: Two coats over primer with total
dry film thickness not less than 8.0 to 12.0 mils.
a. Primer: Metal fabricator furnished, touch-up with primer of type applied by
fabricator.
b. First Coat: Polyamide Epoxy.l) Carboln: Caftoline 890 .2) Tnemec: Series 69.
c. Second Coat: Polyamide Epoxy.l) Carboln: Carboline 890 .2) Tnemec: Series 69.
d. Location: Wash areas structural steel, metal joists, metal fabrications, metal
overhead and swinging doors and frames.l) Colors:
a) Doors andFrames: MatchBenjaminMooreNo. HC 157.b) Structural and Mscellaneous Metals: As selected by Architect.
C. Galvanized Metal (non-wet areas):
l. Paint System PS 8 - Semi-Gloss Finish: Two finish coats over primer, with total
dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer.l) Devoe: 13201 lvfirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer.2) Glidden: 5229 Glid-Grard Al!-Purpose Metal Primer.3) KoH 5860 All-Purpose Primer.4) Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155.5) S-W: Galvite B50W3.
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.l) Dwoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.2) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel.3) KoH 4200Undercoater.4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.5) S-W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoat B49W200.
c. Finish Coat: Interioq semi-gloss, odorless, alkyd enamell) Devoe: 26)O( Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.2) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel.3) KoH 4600 Accutone Semigloss Enamel.4) Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.5) S-W: Classic 99 Semi-Gloss Enamel A40 Series.
09900-12 l-7554.01
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
d. Location: Metal doors and frames.l) Color:
*Benjamin
Moore No. HC 157.
Galvanized Metal (wet areas):
l. Paint System PS 9 - Semi-Gloss Epory Finish: Two finish coats over primeq
with tofal dry film thickness not less than 8.0 to 12.0 mils.
a. Primer: Metd fabricator furnished, touch-up with primer of type applied by
fabricator.
b. First Coat: Polyamide Epoxy.l) Carboln: Carboline 890 .2) Tnemec: Series 69.
c. SecondCoat: PolyamideEpoxy.l) Carboln: Carboline 890 .2') Tnemec: Series 69.
d. Location: Wash areas metal roof decking.a) Color: As selected by Architwt.
Concrete Masonry Units (CMI):
l. Paint System PS l0 - Semi-Gloss, Acrylic Lator Finish: Two coats over filled
surface with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat.
a. Block Filler: Hich-performance latex block filler.l) Dwoe: 52901 Bloffl Acrylic Latex Block Filler'
2\ Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler.3) KoH 5890 Acrylic Block Filler.4) Moore: Moorcraft Interior and Exterior Block Filler #173.
5) S-W: ProMar InterioriExterior Block Filler B25W25.
b. Primer: Interior Latex Primer:l) Devoe: 51701 Wonder-Prime Latex Primer.2) Glidden: 5200 Glid-Guard Lifemaster.3) KoH 2300 Accu-Tone Interior Latex Serni-Gloss Enamel.4') Moore: Moore's Latex Quick Dry Prime Seal 201.
5) S-W: ProMar 200 Lator Semi-Gloss 831W200.
c. Finish Coat: Interior, Semi-Gloss, Low-Odor, Acrylic Latex:l) Devoe: 38)O( Wonder-Tones Semi-Gloss.2\ Glidden: 5200 Glid-Guard Lifemaster.3) KoH 2300 Accu-Tone Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel.4) Moore: Regal AquaGlo 333.5) S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Semi-Gloss 831W200.
2. Paint System PS ll; Two-Component, Epoxy Emulsion Coating with Gloss
Finish: Provide two finish coats of gloss, epoxy emulsion over concrete masonry
block filler.
a. Filler Coat: Concrete masorw btock filler.
l-7554.01
l) Carboln Sanitile ILT Squeegee
09900-13
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil int/Ext Acrylic Latex Block Filler.Glidden: 5317 Ultra-Hide Block Filler.
K.H 5890 Acrylic Block Filler.
S-W: Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46.Tnemec: 130-6601Environfill.
I
t
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
t
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. First and Second Coats: Gloss, Epory Emulsion.l) Carboln Carboline E90.2) Devoe: D;9)o{. Tru-Glaze-WB Waterbome Epory Gloss
Coating.3) Glidden: 5585 Glid-Guard Water Borne Polyamide Epory.4) KrH 3l l0 Waterborne Catalyzed Epory.
5) S-W: Water Based Catalyzed Epory, B70 Series/860V15.
6) Tnemec: Series ll3 H.B. TnemeTufcoat.
F. Gypsum Board Systems:
l. Paint Systern PS 13 - Acrylic Latex Fgg-S,hell Enamel: Two finish coats over
primer ilith total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils.
a. Primer:l) Devoe: 50E01 Wonder-Tones Latex Primer.2) Glidden: 5125 Ultra-Hde Lator Egg-Shell Enamel.3) KrH 0800 Hi-Hide PDQ Sealer4) Moore: 273 Moorcraft Vtnyl Lator Primer Sealer.5) S-W: ProMar 200 Lato< Wall Primer B28W200.
b. First and Second Coats:l) Devoe: 34)O( Wonder-Tones Egg-Shell.2) Glidden: 5125 ultra-Hide Latsr Egg-Shell Enamel.3) KoH 1903 Accu-Tone Lator Satin4) Moore: 274 Moorcraft Latot Egg-Shell Enamel.5) S-W: Proldar 200 Lato< Eg-shell B20w200.
c. Location: General Office Areas.l) Color: BenjaminMoore Cameo White.
d. Location: Ends of Main Conidor.l) Color: Benjamin Moore No. 706 accent color.
e. Location: Core Senrice Wall and Inside Lunch Room at Cabinetry.l) Color: Benjamin Moore Hamilton Blue.
2. Paint System PS 15; High-Performance, Polyamide-Epory Coating System:
Provide two coats with total dry fifn thickness not less than 4 mils.
a. Base Coat: Manufacturet's recommended undercoat.l) Dwoe:
2\ Glidden:3) KoH4) Moore:
50801 Wonder-Tones Interior Vinyl Lato< Primer
- Sealer.
300 Spred Wood Undercoat.
0800 Hi-I[de PDQ Sealer.
Tile-Like Catalyzed tuchitectural Coatings-High
Gloss Enamel #371.5) S-W: ProMar 200 Lator Wall Primer.6) Tnemec: 5l-792 PVA Sealer.
ffi)tNIY ILq'/mrx or v^[U09900-14 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
b.First and Second Coats: High-perficrmancg polyamide-epoxy coating.l) Devoe: l24E(.Tru-Glaze4 Epory Gloss.2) Glidden: 5240 Chemical-Resistant Epory.3) KoH 9100 Epoxy Enamel.4i Moore: Ironclai ftremicd and Water Resistant Epory
Enamel182.5) S-W: Tile-Clad II Epoxy Enamel B62 Series/B60V70.6) Tnemec: Series 66.
Location: Toilet rooms.l) Color: As selected by Architect.
c.
G. Woodwork and Hardboard:
l. Paint System PS 16; Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: Three coats.
b.
Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat.l) Dwoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.2) Glidden: 310 Glidden Wood Undercoater.3) KoH 4200 Alkyd Undercoat4> Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.5) S-W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200.
First and Second Coats: Interior, Semi-Gloss, Odorless, Alkyd Enamel.
l) Devoe:2) Glidden:3) KoH4) Moore:s) s-w:
26)0( Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel.
4600 Accutone Semigloss Enamel.
Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
Classic 99 Semi-Gloss Enamel A40 Series.
c. Location: Closet shelving and wood windows.1) Color: BenjaminMooreCameoWhite.
H. Natural-FinishWoodwork:
l. Paint System PS 19; Rubbed Vamish Finish: Two finish coats over shellac plus
filler on open-grain wood.
First Coat: Cut shellac.l) Dwoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick-Dry Sealer.2) Glidden: 5035llltra-Hide Sanding Sealer.3) KoH Parks Sanding Sealer.4) Moore: 413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry
Sanding Sealer.
ProMar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3.
b. Filler Coat: Paste wood filler.l) Devoe: 4800 Wonder Woodstain Interior Paste Wood Filler.2) Glidden: GliddenPaste Wood Filler.3) KoH Old Master's Paste Wood Filler.4\ Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238.5) S-W: Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler.
5) S-W:
Afl\)t+#/
mrx ot vrl.Ur-7554.01 09900-15
Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish.l) Devoe: 4600 Wonder Wood Stain Atkyd Satin Varnish.2') Glidden: 82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane Varnish.3) KoH Carver Tripps Soft Sheen Vamish.4') Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404.5) S-W: Oil Base Varnisb Gloss A66V9l.
Iocation: Wood trim.
ENDOF SECTION
09900-r6 t-7554.O1
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
sEcTroN 10100
TACKBOARDS
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI SIJMMARY
A. Section Includes: l
l. Tackboards.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board System: Drywall back-up.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Clearly indicate board sizes and layout, method of attachment, accessories, trim profiles
daails and finish.
C. Submit manufacture/s installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
E. Provide sample tackboard minimum size 12 by 12 inch in specified colors and finish.
1.03 DELM& STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver materials to site until areas in which thev are to be installed are readv to
receive them.
B. Deliver materials to site in protective covering in a manner to protect their finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTURERS
A. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
B. Greensteel, Inc.
C. Nelson-Adams.
2.02 MATERJALS
A. Cork, Vinyl Fabric, Fastener, and Related Components: Standard with the
manufacturer.
l-7554.01 10100-l
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Tackboards: l/4 inch thick; cork and synthetic binder; laminated to l/4 inch thick
hardboard; backing board.
B. Edge Trim: Tackboards shall have 90 degree squaf,e corner. Trim with black tee-edge
high impact plastic molding with lipped overlap and barbed tongue glued into perimeter
slot. Install on all edges.
PART3 -HGCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
A. Securely mount tackboards with anchors in accordance with manufacture/s instructions.
B. Coordinate job-assembled units with grounds, trim and accessories. Ioint all parts with
neat, precision fit.
3.02 CLEA}IING
A. At completion of worh clean surfaces and trfur\ leaving ready for use.
END OF SECTION
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I10100-2 l-7554.01
I
I sBcrroN 10500
METAL LOCKERS
I PARrI-cENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
t A. Section Includes:
I
I
I
l. Locker units with hinged doors.
2. Top and filler panels.
3. Hooks, latches and hardware.
4. Attachmenthardware.
5. Wood locker benches.
I B. Related Sections:
t l. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking, grounds and nailing strips.
I r.oz REFERENcES
A. ASTM A 446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,
I Structural Physical) Oualit_v
I l.o3 sYsrEMDEScRrPTroN
I A. Lockers: Surface mounted, single, tier wardrobe lockers with sloped tops.
I.O4 STIBMITTALS
I A. Submit shop drawings, samples and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
t B. Include locker types, sizes, configurations, layout ofgroups oflockers, accessories, and
I numbering plan.
I C. Provide two samples 3 by 6 inches of each color selected on actual base metal material.
T I.O5 PROTECTION
t A. Store and protect lockers under provisions ofSection 01600.
B. Protect locker finishes and adjacent surfaces from damage during installation.
t PARr2-PRoDUcrs
2.01 MANUFACTIJRERS
I A. American Locker Company, Inc.
I
I r-7ss4.01 10500-1
B. DeBourghManufacturingCompany.
C. List Industries, Inc.
D. Medart, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446; structural quality, prime grade stretcher-leveled, galvanized,
mild, cold-rolled, leveled steel; of the following minimum thicknesses:
l. Body and Shelf: 24 gage.
2. Doors: 2O gage.
3. Door Frames: 16 gage.
4. Ifnges: 14gage.
5. Top, Trim: 22 gage.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Locks: Combination lock with master key access.
B. Coat Hooks: Standard side and double pronged ceiling hook.
C. Shelf Standard hat shelf with rolled front.
D. Number Plates: Polished aluminurrr' numbered consecutively starting with number one.
E. Rubber bumper, silent doors.
2.O4 FABRICATION
A. Locker Units:
l. Singletier: 12 incheswide, l8 inches deep, 84 inches high.
B. Latching: The latch shall be I one-piece, self-conlained spring steel latch so designated
as to be easily removable from the lockbar for replacement.
C. Bodies: Formed and flanged with stiffener ribs; electrically spot welded, or assembled
with zinc or cadmium plated fastener.
D. DoorFrame: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flus[ welded to body.
E. Doors: Welded inner and outer faces; l-3116 inch thickness; channel reinforced top and
bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs. Finish edges smooth.
F. Hinges: Three for doors 42 inches and higher. Weld securely to unit body and rivet to
unit door.
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I10500-2 l-7554.01
loo
I G. Provide recessed locking handle designed to accommodate a padlock unit.
I H. Provide filler panels, and sloped metal tops to close offall openings.
I I. Provide stamped louvered vents in door face for ventilation openings at top and bottom
t with not less than 6 louver openings.
I J. Finish edges smooth without burrs.
! 2.os BENcIIES
I A. Material:t l. Wood: Selected northern hard maple ma,ximum 6 percent to 8 percent moisture
at time of fabrication.
I 2. Pedestal: List No. 4820 movable bench support or equivalent by listed
manufacturers.
-' 3. Bench Length: As indicated on the Drawings.
I B. Fabrication;I
l. Construct bench tops of minimum l-l/4 inches thick laminated maple, with 2
I
coats offinish ontop and edges and one coat onunderside.
2. Construct tops of 9-ll2 inches net width with all corners eased.
I 3. Construct bench supports of anodized aluminum channels.!
4. Provide non-skid rubberbacking onbottom ofeach legbase.
I 206 FINIS'E'
I A. Clean" degrease, and neutralize metal, prirne and finish with two coats of baked enamel.
B. Paint locker doors and bodies in colors as specified. Locker door and body ofone color
I throu_chout
I C. Color: Match List "superior" locker color no. 223, Forest Green.
I PART 3 -E)GcIJrIoN
3.OI EXAMINATION
I A. Check areas to receive lockers and benches for correct fit and anchorage of installed
- items.
I B. Start of work constitutes acceptance ofjob conditions.I
3.02 INSTALLATION
I A. Assemble lockers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I
t r-7ss4.0r 10500-3
o
all lockers
o
with proper type of anchors.B.
c.
3.03
A.
B.
Securely anchor and benches to wall or floor
Install numbers in accordance with approved shop drawings.
ADruST AND CLEAIT\I
Adjust doors, latching devices and hardware for proper operation.
Upon completion of installation, clean all exposed srfaces. Polish hardware and touch
up minor scratches.
EI{D OF SECTION
ffiw/mrx or vrLU105004 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN r0s22
FIRE D(TINGIIISMRS/CABII\TETS
t PARr l -cENERAL
1.OI SUMMARY
I A. Section Includes:
l. Fire extinguishers.
2. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
3. Fire extinguisher mounting brackets.
I.O2 STIBMITTALS
I A. Submit manufacture/s product data, specifications and installation instructions for allIt dwices and accessories required.
I PARr2-PRoDUcrs
2.OI MANTJFACTI.'RERS
f A. Manufacturers offering products to comply with the requirements for devices including
the following:
t
I
I 4. General Fire Extinguisher Corp.
I B. Materials listed are based on Larsen's ldanrfacturer's Company.
I 2.02 FrREExrrNGrrrsIIERs
A. Fire extinguishers shall be l0 lbs., multi-purpose, dry chemical, No. MPIO, 4A-60BC
type; UL listed. Color: Red.
2.03 FIREEXTINGUISI{ERCABINET
I A. Mounting Type: Surface and serni-recessed as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Stvle: Cameo Series.
I c. ooo, ryp", Clear acrylic bubble, no letters.
I D. Door Hardware: Pull handle with roller catch. Continuous, stainless steel hinge.
l. Larsert'sManufacturingCompany.
2. J.L. Industries.
3. Potter-Roemer.
I r-7s54.0r 10522-r
s standard white epoxy orbaked coating.
MOUNTINGBRACKETS
Provide manufacture/s standard mounting brackets for specific tlpe of fire
o
enamel
extinguishers. Color: Red.
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which fire ortinguisher cabinets and brackets
are to be installed.
Notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion ofthe work.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
Install in locations and at mounting height required by applicable codes.
Securely fasten to strucfire, square and plumb in accordance with manufacture/s
instructions.
Unless otherwise require4 mount top of fire ortinguisher at 5'{" A.F.F.
After completion of installatio4 clean all fire ortinguisher cabinas and brackets.
A[ ortinguishers to be fully charged.
EI{D OF SECTION
I
I
t
I
I
I
o
Manufacturer'E.
2.04
A.
B.
c.
3.02
A.
B.
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
c.
D.
E.
r-7554.0r to522-2
I
t
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
T
I
t
I
I
I
SECTION 1OEOO
TOILET AI\[D BATH ACCESSORIES
PART I - GENERAL
I.OI SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
l. Toilet, shower and utility room accessories.
2. Ilandicapped toilet room accessories.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry; Back-up framing.
2. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry; Vanity countertops.
I.O2 SI]BMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer catalog data in conformance with requirements of Section 01300.
B. Product Data for each toilet acoessory item specified, including daails of construction
relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting specified options, and
finishes.
C. Schedule: Indicatirg types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each
toilet accessory itern to be provided for project.
D. Setting fhawings: Where qrtouts are required in other worlq provide templates, substrate
preparation instnrctions, and directions for preparing cutouts and for installation of
anchor4ge devices.
E. lvlaintenance instnrctions including re,placeable parts and senice recommendations.
1.03 QUALITYASSURAI.ICE
A. Singl+Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each tlpe of
accessory unit and for units elposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to
Architect.
I.O4 PROJECTCONDMONS
A Coordination: Coordinate acoessory locations, installatio4 and sequocing with other work
to avoid interference and to aszure proper insallatio4 operatio4 adjustment, cleaning and
senicing of toilet accessory iterns.
L Coordinate with Sections 06100 - Rough Carpentry and 09250 - Gypzum Board for
locations ofblocking and openings required for the toilet accessories.
r-7554.0r 10800-l
1.05 WARRAIT{TY
A Special Project Warranties:
l. Mirrors: Provide manufrctreds written l5-year warranty against sfuer spoilage of
minors, agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visble defects within wananty
puiod.
2. Shower Units: Provide manufrcturer's written 3-year warranty against ddective
workmanship and material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANUFACTIJRERS
A. AccessorySpecialties.
B. Bobrick.
C. Bradley.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: Type 3(X, No. 4 finish.
B. Brass: Cast or forged quality alloy conform to FS WW-P-541D/GEN.
C. Aluminum: Ca.* quality conformto FS WW-P-541D/GEN.
D. Mounting Devices: With bonderized finish.
2.03 TOTT FT ACCESSORIES
A. Model numbers included for toilet room accessories and miscellaneous are items
manufactured by Bobrich and are listed as a standard of qudity.
B. Accessories shall be products of a single manufacturer.
C. Install feminine napkin receptacles at each water closet in each rilomen's toilet room.
D. Locate soap dispensers, centered overlavatories.
2.O4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate recessed units with seamless one-piece flange on exposed face.
B. Locked Dispensing Units: Key alike for all accessories.
C. Weld corners, leaving no open miters.
D. All equipment except grab bars minimum 22 gage.
E. Grab bars, minimum 18 gage and l-l/2 inches o.d.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
t
I
I
I
I
I
10800-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
Description Mtc Mode Mtg. Ht Model #
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e. Soap dispenser
f Soap dispenser
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
s.
h.
i.
j.
k.
t.
m.
Glass mirror (2836)
Grab bars (24" at baclg 36'at sides)
Folding shower seat
Mop Holder
Locker @efer to Section 10500)
Shower grab bar (90 deg angle, r or l)
CoatlRobe hook (mount 6" o.c.)
Corner Guards (Refer to Section 10260)
Mop Holder
Wood bench @efer to Section 10500)
Shower curtain rod
Mop sink (See DMsion 15)
Shower stall (See Division l5)
END OF SECTION
surface
(above lav.)
countertop
(above lav.)
surface
34nlbot.
68"/bot.
36"/bot.
48"/bot.
34"/bot.
18"/top
68"/bot.
8-6165
B.671
68"/bot.
74"lbot.
B-lll
B-822
B-165
8-6106
B-5191
B-223
B-223
B-6107
l-7554.01 10800-3
oo
o".,i',,"" tiffi:* tfi$gfilLt t",$;l
I
I
I
II
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
l. Towel pins
m. Mop Holder
n. Mop sink (See Division 15)
END OF SECTION
68"/bot. 9-677
68"/bot. 8-224x36
o.
p.
Locker @efer to Section 10500)
Locker room wood bench @efer to Section 10500)
* Shower stall includes hand-held shower head chrome plated hose, mix valve, slide wall
bar, trvo grab bars, stainless steel recessed soap dish, curtain rod, naugahyde folding
seat and slip-resistant receptor.
10800-4 l-7554.01
I
t
I
t
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
sEcrIoN 11501
PAINT SPRAY BOCYIHS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLI'DED
A. Equipment items as listed below by Equipment Identifier:
1. PB BOOTH, PAINT, CROSS-DRAFT, MODIFIED (Ref. Part 2.01)
B. Modifications to utilities, ducting, roof penetratiols, roughing-in, installation of
equipment, and final connection of utilities, with labor services, and incidentals
necessary for complete and operational equipment installation as a result of
expansion/relocation of booth.
:
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Representative: Provide a qualifred manufachrrer's representative
at sit€ to supervise work related to equipment installation, check out, and start
up.
1.03 SUBMITTAIJ
A. Product Data: Submit hoduct Data in accordance with Section 01300 of these
specifications
B. Operations and Maintenance Manual:
1. Provide complete parts, operating, and maintenance manual covering
. equipment at time of insallation.
2. Assemble and provide copies of nanual in8-ll2 by 11 inch format. Fold
out diagams and illustrations are acceptable. Manual to be reproducible by
dry copy method. Assemble and provide copies per provisions of Section
01300.
3. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300'
1.04 PRODUCT SI]BSTTTUTIONS
-i '-
A. No zubstitutions will be allowed for this product as it is the modification of an
existing paint booth manufachrred by Air Filtration Company.
T
I 1-7554.01 11501-1
1.05 WARMNTY
A. Warrant work specified herein for one year from substantial completion against
defects in malerials, functions, and workmanship specified herein.
B. Warranty shall include mat€rials aod labor necessary to correct defects.
C. Submit warranties in accordancp with Division 1 - General Requiremens of
these spocifications.
D. All parts shell be readily available locally in the United Sarcs.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND IIANDLING
A. Deliver equipncnt in manufacurer's containers, appropriately packaged and/or
crated for protection during domestic shipmnt and storage in humid and or
dusty conditions.
B. Indelibly label all containers, iEhding those contained in others, on outside
with ircm description(s) per title and Equipment Identifier of this specification.
1.07 LABELING
A. Manufacn[er shall sccurely attach in a promincnt location, on each major item
of equipment, a nolrcotTosive nameplate shOwing mamrfacturcr's nane, address,
model number, serial number, aod pertinent utility or operating daa'
B. All electrical eqripnent aod materids sball be new and shall be listed by
Underwritcr's hboratories, Inc. (UL) in categories for which standards have
been set by that agency aDd labeled as such in the manrfacnrer's plant.
peni z -PRoDUcrs
2.01 BOOTII, PAINT, CROSS DMFT, MODIFIED
Equipmenr Identifier: PB
A. Manrfacturers Reference:
1. prime manrfrcbrer: Specifications are based on equipment identified
herein by manufacturer's name and model to establish minim4l acr€Ptable
standards of quality, features, performance, and construction'
a. Air.Filtration Company, Oroville, CA' (916) 533-89f/
b. Model: Modifications to model TRA4024
Z. Alternate mangfacf,rrers: This specification requires the modifrcation of an
existing paint booth and thereforc cannot include the consideration of other
manufachrrcrs. ,.-._.,/t$)
1501-2 "-$,,/ v7s54.or
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
B. Features/Performance/Construction:
1. Modifications to the existing paint booth shall include an expansion in booth
lenglh ftom 44 feet to 54 feet, the inclusion of new entrance/exit double
doors at the north end of booth, the replacement of existing wall panel filters
sysrcm with a door mounted system, supplementary lighting fixhfes to
accommodate new booth size, and other required ancillary components and
equipment for a complete and operable code compliant extended paint boottt.
tipanaea booth snan be located as shown on Drawings. Work related to
modification of utilities, ducting, and roof penefations as a rezult of the
expansion/relocation shall be included.
2. Structure:
z, Existing paint booth shall be expanded from a length of 44 feet to 54
teet wit6 the inclusion of five each expansion panels at width of 2 feet
each.
b. Expansion panels' design and fabrication materials shall be the same as
found in 169 sxisting booth.
c. The north end of paint booth shall have double hung entrance/exit doors
sized similarly to existing doors at south end of booth'
3. Paint booth lighting shall be supplemented with six each 4 hrbe fluorescent
lightfixturestoaccommodateadditionatl0feetofboothlenglh.
4. Air filters currently mounted on the north wall of the paint booth shall be
functionally replaced with door mounted filters designed to fit new double
doors specified for north end ofbooth.
C. Controls: Controls shall be modified as necessary to accommodate additional
light fixnres required in booth.
D. Utility Requirements:
1. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 phase, 5.5 HP (Utility requirements for er'haust fan
remain the same after booth modification)
. 2. Lighting: 120 vAC, 3600 W (Lighting load will increase by 720 waus)
PART 3 - HGCUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Coordinarc location of rough-in work and utility snrb-outs to zrssure match with
eqrripment to be installed.
B. Inspect delivered equipment for damage ftom shipping and exposure to weather.
comparc delivered equipment with packing lists and specifications to assure
receipt of all equipment ilems and specified accessories'
C. Report in writing to the Architect any demaged, missing or incomplete scheduled
eEripment and improper rough-inA or utility stub-outs'
it(M
l-2554.01 *W 11501-3
I
I
t
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer shall be responsible for complete operational equipment
installation.
B. perform work under direct zupervision of Foreman of Constnrction
Superintendent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled equipment
with Architect or designated representative.
C. Install equipment in accordance with plans, shop drawings, and manufacturer's
instructions.
1. Positioning: Place equipment in accordance with any noted special
positionini requirements generally level (or sligbt slope as required by
instructions), plumb and at right angles to adjacent work'
2. Fitting: wbcre field cutting or bimming is necessary, perforrt in a neat,
accurate, professional manner without danaging equipment or adjacent
work.
3. Anchorage: Attach equipment as directed by Architect or designated
represenutive. lnstallation fasteners shrll be installed to avoid scratching or
danaging adjacent zurfaces.
4. Upon completion of work, finish zurfaces shall be free of tool marks'
scratches, blemishes, and sains'
3.03 TESTING
A. After final connectiors are made and prior to authorizing payment, specified
equipment sball be tested for compliance with specification.in the presence of the
Architect or designated representative using acceptance procedures provided by
the manufacouer.
3.O4.CLEANT'P
A. Touch-up damage to painted finishes'
B. Wlpe and clean equipment of any oil, grease and solvents, and make ready for
use.
C. Clean area around equipment installation and remove pactring or installation
debris from job site.
D. Notify Architect or designarcd representative for acceptance inspection'
END OF SECTION
I
I
l
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
/:\A\\\}'Sz;/
ron Fin
S.H#iif,-11501-4 1-7554.01
B.
c.
B.
.c.
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
t
I
sEcTroN 11s50
VEHICLE WASH EQIIIPMEM
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 WORKINCLI'DED
Equipment items as listed below by Equipmentldentifier:
1.- \I'sI Vy'asher, Vehicle, Gantry Type (Ref. Part 2'01)
2. WRS Water Reclamation System (Ref. Part 2'02)
Roughing-in, installation of equipment, and final connection of utilities, with
taUoi seiices, and incidentals necessary for complete and operational equipment
installation.
Piping, wiring, and swirching between equipment and utilities'
1.02 QUALITY ASSLIRANCE
Experieme: Equipment sball be produced by a manufacturer of established
[jrt"ti"" with a minimum of hve years experience supplying specified
eEripment.
Manufactruer' s RePresentative :
1. Installation: Provide a qualified manufach[er's representative at site to
zupervise work related to equipment installation, check out, and start up.
2. Training: Provide technicai r€pres€ntative to provide trairyIrg- to Owner's
maintenance personnel in opera-tion and maintenance of specified equipment.
Performance:
1. Manufacturer or supplier of the vehicle washer and water Reclamation
system, Eq'ipment identifiers vw ard srRS shall be responsible for the
rlesign of a washer and reclaim that satisfactorily washes the owner's vehicle
fleet.
a. Washer shall remove all visible, heavy dirt accrunulation end most of
the road filn ftom all surfaces including the rear of the Owners's
vehicles.
b.Amountofcleaningagentreqrriredtoperformthecleanngasspecified,
shall not exceed 0.2 gallons per vehicle'
c. Washer shall be capable of washing up to 12 vehicles per hour'
/ftl\)w'/mtx or v ILDrr' 't:7554.01 11550-1
2. Mangfacnrer or Supplier of the Vehicle Washers shall be solely responsible
for the performance of the washer, as specified, and shall modiry, add to or
alter the equipment, as nsesssary, without any additional cost to owner, to
provide a satisfactory performance. If the system cannot be altered,
modified, or adjusted to provide satisfactory performarce according to the
Owner's judgment, the Mamrfactrrer or Supplier shall remove the washer
eEripment at no additional oost to the Owner and shall refiud all purchase
moneys received from the owner, either directly or indirectly through the
Contractor.
D. Warcr Reclamation Systcm, Equip'ment Identifier tr/RS shall be guaranteed by
the Manufacnrrer or Supplier to connol odors for a period of three years after
final acceptance and sball, as neoessary, take whatever action is necessary,
without cost to the owner, to oorr€ct any odor causes during the guarantee
period without the use of chemicals.
1.03 ST]BMITTAIJ
A. product Data: Submit Product Daa in accordance with Section 01300 of these
specifications.
B. Operations and Maintenance Manual:
1. provide complete parts, operating, and maintenance manual covering
equipnent at time of insallation.
2. Description of system and conponents.
3. Schematic diagrams of electrical, plumbing, and compressed air sysrcms.
4. Manufacurer's printed opcrating instnrctions.
5. printed listing of periodic prcventive mainteoance itcms and recommended
frequency requ[e-d to validate warranties. Failure to provide maintenance
information will indicate that preventive maintenance is not a condition for
validation of warrantics.
6. List of original manufac0rer's ltarts, including zuppliers' part numbers and
cuts, recommended sparc parts stock quantity and local parts and service
souroe.
7. Assemble and provide copies of manual ia 8-ll2 by 11 inch format. Fold
out diagrams and illusrations are acceptable. Manual to be reproducible by
dry copy method. Provide copjqper provisions of Section 01300'
NM115sG2 *w :,-J7ss4-Or
Briii,fi*,a
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Shop Drawiqgs: Submit Shop Drawings in accordancc with Section 01300.
1.04 PRODUCT SI'BSTITUTIONS
Follow requirements specified in Division I - General Requirements'
Additional costs rezulting ftom substinrtion of products other than those
specified, by model number, including drawing changes and construction, will
be at the expense of tle Contactor.
Substinrtion Approval: Mangfacnlers listed for each equipment items may bid
without submittal for that item. Manufacturers not listed shall submit for
approval in accordance with 'Instructions to Bidders'. Prior to installation'
so6-ittatt for each equipment item by Equipment ldentifier shall be provided in
accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements
1.05 WARRANTY
S/ananty work againbt defects in materids, 'functions and, workmanship
specified herein shell be good for five years from substantial completion or
2OO,0O0 vehicle washes, whichever comes first.
Warranty shall include materials and labor necessary to correct defects.
Defects sball include, but not be limited to noisy, rough or substandard
operation; loose, damaged, and missing parts; and abnormal deterioration of
frnish. Defects sball not include damage due to neglect, misluie' or siflrations
rezulting ftom non-perfortrHrce of a manufacturer's recommended preventive
maintenancg Schedule.
Submit waranties in accordance with Division 1 - General @uirements of
these specifications.
All parts shall be readily available locally in the United States.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver equipment in manufacOrrer's containers,.appropriately packaged and/or
crated foi piotection during domestic shipment and storage in humid and/or
dusty conditions.
Indelibly label all containers, including those contained in others, on outside
with item descriptionG) per title and Equipment Idbntifier of this specification'
A.
B.
c.
B.
c.
D.
B.
1-7554.01 i 1550-3
C. Provide equipment and materials specified complete in one shipment for each
equipment item. Split or partial shipmens are not permissible'
I.O7 LABELING
A. Manufachrer sball securely attach in a prominent location, on each major ircm
of equipment, a non-conclsive nameplate showing manufacturer's Dame, address,
model number, scrial mtmber, and pertinent utility or operati4g data'
B. I3bel all piping in vehicle wash and water reclaim systenr as to its funstion and
flow directions'
C. All electrical equipment and marcrials sball be new and shall be listed by
Underwrircr's laboratories, Inc. (ttl) in categorieS for which standards have
. been set by that agency and labeld as such in the manufacturer's plant.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.OT WASHER, VEHICLE, GANTRY TYPE
Equipment ldentifier: VW
A. Manufacurers Refenence:
l. prime mangfacnler: Spccifications are based on equipment identified
herein by manrfacurer's name and model to establish minimal acceptable
standards of quality, features, performance, and gonstnrction'
a. LWS Inc., AnnArbor, ML (313) 99l5-29ffi
b. Model: Rollic - Three Bnsh Rollover
2. Alternate mantrfachr€rs &ntingent tlpon conpliance with these
specificaions and documenation requirements set forth in SUBMITTALS,
equipment produced by otber manrfacorrcrs, includiog tbe following, may
be considered as equal.
a. Peacock Srash Systcms, Dallas, TX' (800) 5364181
b. RYKO, Grimes,IA, (51t 9EG3700
B. Capacities/Dimensioirs:
1. Washer unit length: 8 feet, 4 inches
2. Washer unit width: 15 feet, 2 inches
3. washer unit hei!'ht: 16 feet, 6 inches
4. Total inside frame with clearance: 11 feet, 6 inches
5. Wid0r (thickness) of one side section: 21 inches
' 6. Track gauge: L2 fer;t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I11550-4 1-7554.01
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
C. Features/Performance/Constnrction:
1. The gantry roll-over vehicle washer shall automatically wash and rinse
frOnt, rOOf, rear and bOth sides of fansit buses, SchoOl buses, tmcks, vans'
and cars via a traveling gantry on zurface mounted tracls over stationary
vehicles based on select programs.
2. Operating description:
a. Movement of the gantrY:
1) Gantry sheU $s driven by nro drive motors at 33 FPM along rail
road type tracls
2) Gantry traveling shall be automatically controlled. Gantry to travel
onlythelengthofthevehiclercversingtraveldirection
automatically at the end of the vehicle. systems traveling further' than the length of the vehicle to reverse will not be accepted'
3) Gantry shall be.caplslg of being sopped or overridden manually to
either direction at any time during the waslr/rinse cycles for any
additiond scnrbbing action'
4)Theoperationandmovementsofthegantryshallbequietand
smoothandtherushpressureshallbeequivalentandprecisely
controlled througbout the wash and rinse cycles, The gantry shall
not make any umscessary stops during the cycles'
b. Top brush oPeration:
1) Top brush operation shall be by a current senilng devise (current
relay or serirx -of 'current relays). . The amperage draw (and
increments of it) of the lop brush rotation motor when the top brush
isfollowingthecontourofthevehicleshallbemeasured
electronically (by sensing relays) to enable the precise and smooth
top brush wash preszure against the contour of the vehicle'
2) Horizontat brush pressure shall be precisely controlled to not be
excessive or light during front and rear wash and rinse cycles.
Bnrshes shall never penetrate more tban 30% of the bristle length
. into the surface when washing.
3) Top brush lift mechanism shall be chain driven. This mechanism
shallbeabletopreciselyadjusttopbrushpressurcagainsttlrc' vehicle. The top brush must have a stainless steel 50 chain with
counterweight that is attached to the top brush lift mechanism for
both upward and downward movements.
4) Ttre gantry system shall have the potential shall be operated as a2-
brush washer (side brushes only operation) by completely
eliminating toP brush functions.
5) Top brush up/down travel speed shall be 26 FPM'
6)Shouldthetopbrushbepreventedfreeupwardtravelduetoany
protnrsion, zuch as an air conditisning unit, the systeNlr shall have a
back-track system which measures excessive pressures preventing
1-7554.01 11550-5
I
I
I
I
1
t
I
I
T
l
I
t
T
I
3.
4.
ftee travel. The system shall be able to reverse the gantry
movement till the top brush has free tavel.
7) The system shall bave an automatic inrcnsified rear wash'pro$am
enabling the machine to keep the washing pressue constant while
top bnrsh is washing the rear of the vehicle, i.e. if the pressure
becomes too light, tbe gantry must automatically reverse its travel
direction until the pressure is corrected.
8) The brush rotation shall be automaticdly reversed during the rinse
cycle.
c. Side brush operation:
1) Side brushes pressure shall be controlled by pneumatic cylinders
(sec poeumatic system description)
2) The sysrcm adjust auomaticdly to side brush pressures when
washing small vehicles by activating the second stroke of the air
cylinders with lighter Pressure.
3) Side bnrsbes sball have tbe porcmial sball be manually stopped and
rctract€d during anY cYcle.
Stnrctural frame constnrction:
a. All of tbe strucfires tbat are utt stainless steel shall be hot dip
galvanized and 100% corrosion proof. No painted surfaces'will be
acceptcd in lieu of hot dip galvenizing.
b. Theiystem sball bave a steel gaffiy that is nade of welded tube 4 by 6,
4 by 4 and 1.5 by 1.5 inch all 1/8 im;h thick. All frame nrbe
oonstnrction sball have reinforced Stress poinlc tbat are double welded.
c. Washer framing shatl be ercloscd with 04O baked aluminum sheets.
d. Side bnrsh support fta'mes (gate$ shall be made of 2 by 4 by 1/8 inch
sreel and shall be ho$cd completely within tbe skin (splash shields) of
the frame during all cYcles.
Electrical system:
a. All motor s.tarters shall be hcavydrty iDdustrial type with 600 VAC
ratings.
b. All motors shall be totally crclosed 3 phase squirrel type continuous
duty rated. The gaotry shall have two drive motors 1/2 HP, 1,800
RPM each, two side bnrsh roation motors 1.5 HP, 1,800 RPM each'
one top bnrsh rotation motor 2 HP 1,E00 RPM and one top brush
elevator motot ltz HP 1800 rpm. Tbe elevator motor shall be
equippd with an internal brake.
c. Each motor shall be individually protectcd by adjustable circuit breaker
with thermal and iDstantarcous magnetic trip that can be manually reset'
All circuit breaken sball bc t€mpefanre compensated within 68 to 104
degrees Fahrenheit.
d. The control volage shall be 110 vAc, and supplied through a control
transformer in tbe machine.
e. All electrical push buttons and switches shall be oil tight.
I
I
I
I
I1155G.6 t:7554.O1
5.
6.
I
I
I
l
T
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
5
I
I
I
I
t
I
f. All motor cables, motor startsrs, PC and circuit breakers shall be UL
approved.
g. Electrical panel enclosure shall be made ofstainless steel.
h. The elecnical system shall have programmable controller, no timers
and/or control relays will be allowed. The system shall be capable of
being programmed to perform any combination of wash, rinse, or idle
movement functions desired by the customer'
Mechanical system:
a. All bnrshes shall be made of polyethylene filaments which are tied into
an aluminum base. Top brush diameter shall be 40 inches. All brushes
shall be in segments no longer than 25 inches that can be separately
replaced. All brushes shall be frame and bearing supPorted at both
ends.
b. Utilig zupply system shall provide amply sized elecrical wiring,'air
and water hoses supported by a Facked, traveling carriage festoon
system. Festoon system shall have not fewer than three loops and two
carriages and the syst€m shall be.designed to prevent any contact of
utility lines with objects on the floor or any other structure. sleel cable
type festooning system ql hnnging ftee loops are not acc€ptable.
c. The sysrcm shall have only direct wonn gear reducer brush drives. Top
bnrsh lift and gantry movernent drives shall be through wonn gear
reducers at ratio 60:1, and brush roation drives shall be through worm
gear reducers at ratio 20:1 for side brushes and 15:1 for top brush'
d. All gear redrrcers shall be heavyduty industrial type with lifetime
lubrication and seals.
e. Tracks shall be solid steel rail road track type design to reduce wear and
to prcvent machine from jumping off the track. Tracls shall be anchor
bolted to the concrete slab. No cold rolled or formed steel straps tracls
will be accepted in lieu of solid hacks.
f. All wheels shall be zupported by nno bearings. Systems where wheels
are zupported directly by only the gear reducer only is not acceptable.
The wheels shall be hardened st€el for extended life'
g. Tire guides shall be fabricated f1s6 minimum 3 inch diameter hot dip
galvanized nrbular steel pipe sections. These sections shall not
*ppott"d at intervals greater than seven feet. Guide spacing shall
acconmodate vehicles up to and including 102 inches in width'
Brackets supporting pipe sections shall be welded to concrete imbedded
cleats or anchor bolted to the conirete. Height to the top of the tire
luides shelt bc 9 inches. End of rails shall be capped and all sections
shall be smoothly finished to prevent tire damage.
Pneumatic system:
a. The pneumatic system shall have the function of providing a constant,
adjusable pressure for side brushes.through air cylinders.
r-7554.0r 11550-7
b. Side brush air cylinders shall be two-stroke type' The second stroke
shall only be activated by smaller vehicles, bring the side brushes closer
to the center point lvith lighter air pressure.
c. Air cylinders sball be used to retract side brushes to the side position at
the end ofthe rinsc cYcle
d. Pneumatic system shall have a built-in filtation ard lubrications system.
7. Spray water system:
^. All water pipes shall be galvanized steel and shall
removable for cleaning PuPoses.b. The system shall bave an adjustable soap met€ring
rutomatically dispenses soap during wash cycle.
be separately
system which
c. The soap contairer shall be located inside the gaotry or drawn directly
from a drum utilizing a detergent feeder pump'
8. Execution:
a. The delivered syste|n shall be completely prc-plumbed and pre-wired.
b. Tbe system installation and operaor taining shall be performed by
: seller's engineering crew.
D. Controls:
1. push buton or selector switch controls for the systsm shall include a stop
, push button, start wash cycle push button, a small vehicle push button, and
a 2-brush/3-bnrsh wash selector switch to eliminatc top brush functions.
2. A single joy-stick shall control top brush up, top brush down, ganty
movemenifotward, ganfry moven€nt bachrard' end a retract and stop side
brush rotation functions.
E. Utility Requireinens:
1. Plumbing:
a. Water: 1-1/4 inch, 50 PSI, 50 GPM
b. Drain: 6 inch from teDch drain sury to first of two reclaim surps
, 2. Electrical: 460 VAC,3 phase,6.5 HP
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.02 WATER RECLAMATION SYSTEM
Equipment ldentifier: WRS
- A. Manufacnuers Reference:
1. prime mangfacnrer: Specificatioilt at€ based on equipment identified
herein by manlfacfirer's nane and model to establish minimal acceptable
standards of quality, feautres, performance, and construction'
a. LWS lrc., Ann Arbor, MI' (313) 995-296' b. Model: Warcr Reclaim System for Rollic Wash
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
l
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
Irissor1-7554.01
B.
c.
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
2. Alternarc manufacnrrers: Contingent upon compliance with these
specifications and documentation requirements set forth in SUBMITTALS,
equipment produced by other manufacturers, including the following, may
be considered as equal.
a. Peacock V/ash Systems, Dallas, TX, (800) 536-8181
b. Ryko, Grimes, IA, (515) 98G3700
Capacities/Dimensions :
1. Cyclone pump:
a. Size: 5 HP
b. Capacity: 30 GPM
2. Centrifugal cyclone filter unit:
a. Rating: 30 GPM, 15 PSI pressure drop
b. Filtration: 50 micron
Features/Performance/Construction :
1. Water reclamation syst€m shall be capable sf r€claiming water from the
Rollic washer and process it by means of settling pits, screens, aDd a
centrifugal filter system. The water shall then be reused by the bus wash
system.
2. Cyclone filtration system shall empty
comparftlent of the sumP Pit.
dirty water into the secondary
3. Water reclamation system shall be designed to
fresh watcr oeded for the washer by 70 percent.
reduce the total amount of
4. Water reclamation system shall have no filters, baskets or other maintenance
points that require periodic cleaning'
5. Drain sumps shall be pre-cast concrete.
6. All above ground piping, linking wash system with reclaim and individual
reclaim unit, shall be designed and provided by manufacturer'
.D. Utility Requirements:
1. Plunbing:a. Watcr: l-L12fuh,50 PSI, 30 GPM
b. Drain: 6 inch overflow to oiVwater separator.
2. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 Phase, 5 HP
PART 3 - HGCUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
Coordinate location of rougb-in work and utility stub-outs to assure match with
equipment to be installed.
Inspect delivered equipment for damage from shipping and expozure to weather.
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
A.
B.
1-7554.01 115sG.9
Compare delivered equipment with packiag lists and specifications to assure
receipt of all equipment items and spocified accessories.
C. Report in writing to the Architect, any damaged, missing or incomplete
scheduled equipment, and improper rough-in work or utility stttb-outs.
3.O2 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacnupr shall be reqponsible for complete operational equipment
installation.
B. Perform work under direct zupervision of Foremen of Construction
Superinrcndent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled equipment
with Architect or designated re?nesentative.
C. Install equipment in accordance with plans, shop drawings, and menufactur€r's
instnrctions:
1. Positioning: Place equipment in accordaoce with any noted special
positioning requir€ments generally level (or slight slope as required by
instnrctions), plumb, and at right angles to adjacent work'
2. Fitting: Where freld cuting or Eimmi4g is necessary, perform in a neat,
acisurate, professional matper without danaging equipnent or adjacent
work.
3. Anchorage: Auach equipnent as directed by Architect or designated
re,presentative. InsAllation frsrcners shell be installed to avoid scratching or
damaging adjacent surfaces.
4. Upon completion of work, finish surfaoes shall be free of tool marks,
scratches, blemishes, and sains.
3.03 TESTING
A. After final conncctions are made and prior to authorizing p,ayment, specified
equipnent shall be tcstcd for co'mpliance with specification in the presence of the
Archit€ct or designated representative using acceptance procedures provided by
the manufactrrEr.
B. Each wasber shall be performance tested by coosecutively washing, without
human assistanoe and without Manufacurer or Supplier pcrsoml involvement,
five vehicles of owners choosing within 15 minrtes.
C. Equipment sball not damage vehicles, including minors, windshield wipers and
windows, or equiPment itself.
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
l
I11550-10 1-7554.01
I
T
I
l
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
. D. Malfunctions during testing shall be corrected within five days and re-tested'
Malfunctions Ouring secoDd testing shall be corrected within five days and re-
' tested.
E. Inadequate Performance: If equipment fails third test, owner may elect to have
all specified Vehicle Wash Equipment and any associated water reclaim system
removed ftom site at no cost or obligation !o Owner'
3.04 CLEANIJP
A. Touch-up damage to painted finishes.
B. wlpe and clean eqrripment of any oil, grease.and solvents, and make ready for
use.
c. clean area around equipment installation and remove packing or installation
debris from job site.
. D. Notis Architect or designated rqnesentative for acceptance inspection.
3.05 TRAINING
A. Direct the technical representative to provide specified hours of training to
designated owrer's -.itrt"**e personnel in operation and maintenance of the
following eEripnent. coordinarc, with owner, training schedule and list of
personnel to b€ trained.
i. Gantry vehicle washer and water reclaim system (Equipment Identifier VW
and WRS) : 12 hours'
B. Obtain, from technical represenAtive, a list of Owner's personnel trained in
. equipment operations and maintenancp.
END OFSEC1IION
/ft\)J*w
!!.#lf,il3ir
1-7554.01 11550-11
I
I
l
I
T
I
t
I,
SECTION 126E0
FOOT GRILLES
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI SIIMMARY
A. Section Includes:
L Vinyl tread on recessed aluminum grid.
B. Related Sections:
l. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
I.O2 PERFORTiIANCEREQIJIREMENTS
A. Load Design: Foot grilles and frames shall be desigred to support a uniform distributed
load ofat least 200 pounds per square foot.
I,O3 SI.JBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product data for each tlDe of foot grilles and frames specified, including manufacturer's
specifications and installation instnlctions, details o_f construction relative to materials,
dimensions of indMdual components, profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of foot grilles and frames, full-scale sections of
typical installations, details ofpatterns or designs, anchors, and accessones.
l. Coordinate shop drawing submittal with concrete work shop drawings showing
oversized recess for deferred installation of frames.
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's co-lo--r charts consisting
of aitual sections of foot lriltl and frame materials, shgyrng full range-of colors,
textures, finishes, and pattJms available for each type of foot grille and frame units
indicated.
E. Samples for verification purposes in form of l2-inch-square assembled section of foot
g;ilG and frame members aird tread rails with selected tread zurface of each type.of
inetat nnistr and color of exposed grille treads, tread rails, frames, and accessories
required.
L Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets
showing full range of variations expected.
F. Ivlaintenance data in form of manufacturer's printed instructions for cleaning and
maintaining foot grilles.
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t l-7554.01 12680-1
o
PROJECT CONDITIONS1.04
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Field Measurements: Check actual blocked-out openings in floors by accurate field
measurements before fabrication of frames and grilles; show recorded measurements on
final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delay of Work.
B. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
opening dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field measurements.
Cbordinate floor constnrction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to
guaranteed dimensions.
l.o5 QUALITYASSURAI.ICE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain foot grilles and frames from one source from a
single manufacturer.
1.06 SEQUENCINGA]\ID SCTIEDULING
A. Where required by Contractor, provide oversized recesses in concrete work to receive
grille frames. Defer frame installations until building enclosure is completed and related
interior finish work is in progress.
B. Install foot grille frames integrally with principal placing of concrete floor system.
Locate, alig4 and level frame members accurately. Recess infill concrete where
required for placanent ofconcrete topping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI MANL]FACTURERS
A. Construction Specialties, Inc.
l. ArdenArchitechralSpecialties,Inc.
2. Balco, Inc.
3. Constnrction Specialtieq Inc.
4. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Grid: Construction Specialties, Inc. Series 1200 W Vinyl Pedigrid with flexible vinyl
tread insert or equivalent by listed manufacturers.
B. Vinyl Treads: Secured to structural aluminum tread. Conve:< tread surface with
continuous selrations.
C. Tread Color: Terra- Cotta.
D. Aluminum Rails: 6063 - T5 Alloy, structurally joined to key lock bars, Alloy 6061-T6,
spaced at l0 inches o.c., standard mill finish.
t
I
I
t
I
I
I12680-2 s t-7554.01
I
t
T
T
I
2,O3 FRAJ\{ING
A. Base Tlpe: Series LB, level base with heavy gage vinyl support cushions mounted to
each treadrail 24 inches o.c.
B. Base Frame: 6063-T5 AJuminum Alloy, coped corners assembled with No. 14 stainless
steel screw, surfaces in contact with concrete shall receive zinc chromate primer.
C. Grid and Framing Members shall be designed to support 200lbs psf., uniform loading.
2.M FABRICATION
A Shop frbricateunits offoot gilles to greatest ortent possible in sizes as indicated.
l. Where not othenrise indicated, provide single unit for each gnlle installatiorq but do
not er<ceed marufrctureds morimum size recommendation for units intended for
rernoval" mairtenance, and cleaning.
2. Where joints in grilles are necessaxy, space symrnetically and away from normal traffic
lanes.
B. Fabricate frame menrbers in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed mardmum
available lengths, provide mininum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally
spaced and pieces spliced together by means ofstraight connecting pins.
PART 3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
A Install recessed frames and foot grilles to comply with manufrcturer's instnrctions at
locations indicated and with top of &ames and grilles in relationship to one another and to
adjoining finislrcd flooting as recommended by manufactur€r.
l. Set grille tops at height for most etrectirre cleaning action and coordinate top of grille
surfaces with doors that swing across grilles to provide clearance under door.
B. For frames eufiedded in grout provide nocessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for secure
attachment offrames at elevation and locations indicated.
3.02 PROTECTION
A Protection: Upon completion of frame installations and concrete worlg provide ternporary
filler of plywood or fiberboard in gille rsc€sses and cover frames with plywood protective
flooftng.
L l{ainain protection until constnrction trafic has ended and projwt is near time of
Substantial Completion.
B. Defer insall*ion offoot grilles until near time of Substantial Completion for project.
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I l-7554.01
END OF SECTION
12680-3
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t,
!
I
I
sEcrIoN 14300
CRANFS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 WORKINCLI'DED
A. Equipment items as listed below by Equipment ldentifier:
1. BC CRANE, BRIDGE, 5 TON (Ref. Part 2.01)
B. Roughing-in, installation of equipment, and final connection of utilities, with
. labor servic€s, and incidenals necessary for complete and operational equipment
installation.
C. Piping, wiring, and swirching between eguipment and utilities.
I.O2 QUALITY ASSIJRANCE
A. Experience: Equipment shall be produced by a manufacturer of established
re.putation with a minimum of five years experience supplying specified
equipment.
B. Manufacurrer's Representative:. 1. Insallation: Provide a qualified manufacturer's rqlresentative at site to
supervise work related to equipment installation, check out, and start up'
2. tiaining: Provide technical representative to provide 6eining to Owner's
maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of specified equipment.
1.03 SIJBMITTAI-S
. A. Product Daa: Submit Product Data in accordance with &ction 01300 of these
specifications.
B. Operations and Mainrcnance Manual:
1- Frovide complete parts, operating, and maintenanc€ marual covering
equipment at ti.me of installation.
2. Assemble and provide copies of manual lm8-ll2 by 11 inch format. Fold
out diagrams and illustrations are accqrtable. Manual to be reproducible by
dry copy method. Provide copies per provisiors of Section 01300'
C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with of Section 01300.
ffiw/mr[ E trJ,.eY
I
I
t t:7554.01 14300-1
1.04 PRODUCT ST'BSTITUTIONS
A. Follow requirements specified in Division 1 - Crcneral Requirements.
B. Additiond costs rezulting from zubstinrtion of products other than those
specified, by model number, including drawing changes and constnrction, will
be at the expense of the Connactor.
C. Substitution Approval: Manrfacturers listed for each equipment items may bid
without submittat for that item. Manufacturers not listed shall submit for
approval in accordance with 'Instructions to Bidders". Prior to installation,
submittals for each equipment itein by Equipment Identifier shall be provided in
accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.05 WARRAI.ITY
A. Wananty work specified bcrein for one year ftom subsantid completion against
defects in materials, functions end , workmanship.
B. Warranty shall include materials and labor neoessary to conect defects.
C. Defects shall include, but not be limitcd to noisy, rougb or zubstandard
operation; loose, damaged, and missrng parts; and abnormal deterioration of
finish. Defec'ts shall not include damage duc to neglect, misiuse, or sinrations
rczulting from norperformance of a manufacnrrcr's rccommended preventive
mainrcnance schedule.
D. Submit warranties in accordarce with Division 1 - Geoeral ReErirements of
these spocificatioos.
.8. All parts shall be readily available locally in the United Sarcs.
1.06 PRODUCT DELTVERY, STORAGE, AI{D HAI{DLING
A. Deliver equipmcnt in manufacOrcr's @ntaine$, approprirately packaged end/or
crated for protoction during dorcstic shipment and storage in humid and/or
dusty conditions.
B. Indelibly labet all containers, imluding those contained in others, on outside
with item description(s) per title and Equipmcnt ldentifier of this specification.
I
I
I
!
I
l
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
:l
t
I
I
I143ffi-2 t-7554.01
A.
B.
c.
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.07 LABELING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CRANE, BRIDGE,5 TON
Equipment Identifier: BC
Manufacturer shall securely attach in a prominent location, on each major item
of equipment, a non-corTosive nameplate showing manufacftrer's name, address,
model number, serial number and pertinent utility or operating data'
Crane capacity shall be painted with letters and numbers 8 inches high minimum
on both sides of the bridge/boom.
All etectrical equipment and materials shall be new and shall be listed by
Underwriter's I:boratories, IDc. (UL) in categories for which standards have
been set by that agency and labeled as such in the manufacnrer's plant.
A. Manufacturers Reference:
1. Prime manufacurer: Specifications are based on equipment identified
herein by maoufacnuer's Dame and model to establish minimal accqrtable
standards of quality, features, performance, and construction'
a. Wazee Crane, Denver, CO (303) 623'L736
b. Model: 5 ton, 40 foot sPan
2. Alternarc manufacfl[ers: Contingen uPon compliance with these
specifications and documentation requirements set forth in SUBMTTALS'
equipment produced by other manufacturers, including the following' may
be considered as equal.
a. Abell Howe, Forest Park, IL' (708) 3664800
b. Mannesman Demag, l-ouisville, KY, (800) 321-6560
B. Capacities/Dimensions:
1. Lifting capacitY: 10,000 Pounds
2. CMAA service class: C
3. Lift dimensions:
a. SPan: 40 feet
b. RunwaY lenglh: 35 feet
c.Lift:Providenra:rimumliftasallowedbybuildingclearance'
of a low headroom hoist is mandatory.
4. Speeds:'
a. Hoist: 15 feet per min$e (single speed)
b. Trolley: 65 feet per minute (single speed)
The use
,ffi\)w/m'r| or rxlt /1-7554.01 14300-3
c. Bridge: 50 feet Per minute
control module)
C. Features/Performance/Constnrction:
(single speed with electronic acceleration
1. Bridge crane sball be a single girder top running overhead traveli4g type
with bridge conduction.
2. Structural steel of all bridge beams shall be A-36 steel, standard *I" beam
or wide flange sections.
3. Hoist rope sball be of the best quality, flexible, plow steel, with either hemp
c€nter or wire center as determined by the hoist manufacturer. All hoist
ropes shall carry a minimum safety factor of 5'
4. Moton shall all be special purpose crane and hoist duty designed to operate
on 460 VAc, 3 phase and shall m€t curr€Dt NEMA standards for the
intended use.
5. Hoist:
a. Hoist sball be a Lift-Tech 700 Series low headroom type or approved
epal.
b. Hoist dnrm shall be machid steel with right and left band grooves for
true vertical lift.
c. Hoist gearing shall be designed to AGMA standards and shall be
combination Helical and SPur.
d. Hoist bralces shall consist of a rectified DC disc tlTe molor brake and a
Weston type mechanical load brake. Worm gearing and dynamic
braking will not be an acceptable zubstitute for a mecbanical load brake.
e. Hoist sball include a paddle type upper limit swirch.
6. End tnrcks:
a. End tnrcts shall be welded ftom strucnfal shapes. wheelbase shall be
3 minimum of 1/7 of the crane sPao.
b. Wheel asscmblies shall be fixed axle type.
c. End tnrcls shall be auached to tbe bridge with A-325 bolB, drilled and
, reamed to assure proper aligDment. Welding of the girder to the end
tnrcks will not be Pcrnitted.7. Mamrfachrrer shnll provide crane rail to march end trucls wheel assembly
profile. All other standard compoDents will be provide by others.
8. -nriage drives shall consist of dual drives with a helical gear reducer, single
speed electric motor and electric brake mounted at each end tnrck in
accordance with CMAA 44 drive arrdngements.
9. Bridge electrification system sbdl consist of a flat cable conductor system
suspended from a 14 gauge galvaniz:d steel "C" track as mantfactured by
Duct-O-Wire or equal.
10. Rgn. way electrification system shall consist of a fignre '8" safety enclosed
galvanized steel condrrctor bar with a PVC cover as marufacu[ed by Duct-
O-Bar or equal.
11. Crane finish shall include one shop coat of rust ilhibiting primer and one
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
T
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
finish coat of a safety blue alkyt enamel.
/t{M1430M *w 1-7554.01
t
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Conrols:
1. Hoist, trolley, and bridge shall be furnished with single speed controls. The
bridge sball include an electronic acceleration control for smooth starting.
Control enclosures will be NEMA type 1.
2, Pendant push button station shall consist of an eight button station suspended
from a galvanized 'C" track, and festooned flat cable syst€m. The track
shall be the full length of the sPan.
E. Utility Requirements: .
1. Electrical: 460 VAC, 3 ph, 5.5 HP
PART3-DGCUTION ._i
'ir'r'
3.OI INSPECTION
A. Coordinate location of rough-in work and utility snrb-outs to assue match with
equipment to be installed
B. Inspect delivered equipment for demage from shipping and exposure to weather.
Comparc delivered eqnipment with packing lists and specifications to assure
receipt of all equipment items and specified accessories.
c. Report in writing, to the Architrect, any damaged, missing, or incomplete
scheduled equipment, and improper rough-in work or utility stub-outs'
e.
3.O2 TNSTAL.I.ATION
A. Perform work under direct zupervision of Foreman of Construction
Superintendent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled equipment
with Architect or designated representative.
B. Reference stnrctural drawings and coordinate length of nrn and exact span
dimensions with shop drawings and construction documents'
C. Crane shall meet all OSHA desrgn and clearance guidelines.
D. Install equipment in accordance with plans, shop drawings and manufacturer's
instn"rctions:
1. pqsitisning: Place eEripment in accordance with any noted special
positioning reErirements generally level (or slight slope as required by
instnrctions), plumb and at right angles to adjacent work'
2. Fitting: where field cutting or trimming is necessary, perform in a neat,
accurate, professional mtnner without demnging equipment or adjacent
work.
r-7554.O1 1430G,5
3. Anchorage: Attach equipment as directed by Architect or designated
representative. Installation fasteners sball be installed to avoid scratching or
damaging adjacent zurfaccs.
4. Upon completion of work, finish surfaces shall be ftee of tool marks,
scrarches, blemishes, and stains.
3.03 TESTING
A. Specification Compliance: After final connections are made and prior to
autnoriring payment, specified equipment shall be tested for compliance with
specifications in the presence of the Architect or designated representative using
acceptance procedures provided by the manufacturer.
3.04 CLEANUP
A. Touch-up damage to painted finishes.
.
B. Wlpe and clean equipment of any oil, grease and solvents, and make ready for
use.
C. Clean area around eEripment installation and remove packing or installation
debris ftom job site.
D. Notify Architect or designated representative for acceptance inspection.
3.05 TRAINING
A. Direct the tecbnical rqrresentative to provide qpecified hours of gainiqg !o
designated Owner's mrinteDanc€ personnel in operation and maintenance of the
folowing equipment. Coordinate, with Owner, training schedule and list of
. persotrnel to be trained.
1. 5 ton bridge crane @quipment Identifier BC) : 4 hours
B. Obtain, from tecbnical representative, a list of Ownqr's penonnel trained in
equipment operations and mainrcnance.
END OF SECTION .
I
T
I
I
I
I
T
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I1430061-7554.01
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
sEcrroN 144s0
\TEHICI,E LIFTS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 WORKINCLIJDED
A. Equipment items as lisrcd below by Equipment Idgtifiel-
r.- il, LIFT, PLAIrORM, FLUSH MOITNT (Ref' Part 2'01)
B. Roughing-in, installation of eEripment, and final connection of utilities, with
laboi services, and incidentals necessary for complete and operational eEripment
instalation.
C.Piping,wfuing,andswitchingbetweeneEripmentandutilities.
1.O2 QUALITY ASSI'RANCE
A. Experience: Equipment shall be produced by a manufachrrer of established
r"p,rt"tioo with a Einirum of five years experience snrpplyiog specified
B. Manufac0uer' Representative:
1. Installation: Provide a qualified manufach[er's rqnesentative at site to
supervise work related to equipment installation, check out, and start up.
2. Training: Provide teclnicat r€,presentative to provide training to owner's
m4intenance persoonel in operation and maintenence of specified eEripment'
1.03 ST'BMITTALS
A. Product Data: submit Product Dbta in accordancc with section 01300 0f these
sryccifrcations
B. Operations and Mainrcnance Marual:
l.Providecomplelepafts'operating,andmainteMncemarualcovering' eqtripment at time of insallation'
2, Asscmble and provide copies of manual 1E8-lt2 by 11 inch format' Fold
out diagrams ana ruustrations are acceptable. Manlal to be reproducible by
drycopymethod.ProvidecopiesperprovisionsofSection01300.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with of Section 01300.
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I 1-7554.01 1,1450-1
1.04 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Follow reErirements specified in Division 1 - General Requirements.
B. Additional costs rcsulting ftom substitution of products other than those
specified, by model nrmber, including drawing changes and constnrction, will
be at the expeose ofthe Contractor'
c. substitutionApproval: Manrfacturers lisrcd for each eEripmcnt itcms nay bid
without subEitial for tbat item. Manufacn[crs not listed shall submit for
approval in accordancp with "Instnrctions to Bidden"' Prior to installation'
nrbmittals ror eacu equipmeat it€m by Equipment Identificr rhall $s provided in
accordance with Division I - Crencral nequirements'
1.05 wARRAI\rry
A. Slarranty work specified hcrcin for one year from subsuntial completion against
defecs in matcrials, fimctions and, wortmanship'
B.WarrantysballiDctudemsterialsandlabornecessarytocoEectdefects.
D. Submit warranties in accordance with Division 1 - Gcocral RcquircmenB of
these sPecifications'
..E.AllPartssballbereadilyavailablelocallyintheUnitedstaEs.
1.06 PRODUCT DELI\TERY, STORAGE, AI'ID HAIIDIJNG
A.Delivereqrripmentinmanrfacnrrer'scontainers,appropriarclypackagedand/or
crated for p**tioo rhuing domestic shipmcnt atrd storage in hunid and/or
dusty conditions.
B.Indeliblylabelall@Dtainers,iDcludingthosscontain-edT.otb"'''onoutside
with item descriptioo(s) per title and Equipment Ideotifier of this gpeciflqltiqa'
s
Defecb shall itrchde,-'but'mt-be-limitexf to ''nOisy,'rOugh Or 'snrbstandard:;:::-- -----'-.
operation; loose, damaged, and missing p-arts; and i6oo*r dercrioration of I
ilirh. 6"f."6'*UU oot include daoage due to neglcct, misuse, or sit'atioos
tiliu*-*t-lorperformanceofamanrfactrer'srccomncndedprcvcotive I
EaintenaDce schcdulc.
I
!
I
t
I
I
T
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
tt45U21-7554.01
B.
c.
I
t
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
!' -j
1.07 I.ABELING
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.OI LIFT, PI.ATFORM, 5O,OOO POUND, 32 FOOT
Equipment ldentifier: PL
Manufacturer shall securcly attach in a prominent location, on each major item
of eqgipment, a non-cotrosive nameplate showing manufacturer's name, address,
model number, serial number, and pertinent utility or operating data'
Manufacturer shall s€cursly attach the ALI label of the Automotive Lift Institute.
All electrical equiPment and materials shall be new and shall be listed by
Undercrircr's laboratories, Inc. (ttL) in categories for which standards have
been set by that agency aDd labeled as such in the manufacturer's plant.
A. Manufactur€rs Rcfercnce:
1. Prime marufacuser: Specifications are based on eEripment identified
herein by manufactrrcr's traEe and model to establish minimal acceptable
standards of Erality, features, performance, and constnrction'
a. AdvantageUiSytt"tt,Inc.;SanDiego, CA,-(619)45J-)$!'l'-::-''-'":"='-'-' : --
b. Model50/32 Flush mount with accessories
2. Alternate manufacturers: coningent tlpon compliance with these
specifications and documentation requirenents set forth in SIJBMITTAIJ,
equipnent produced by other nanufacturen, including the following, nay
be considered as egal.
a. Omer Lifts, Morton Grove, IL, (708) 967-lt7l
b. Challenger Lifts, Iouisville, KY, (502) 585-5303
B. Capacities/Dimensions:
1. Lifting capacity: 50,000 Pounds2. Lift dimensions:
a. Pladorm length: 32 feet
b. Pladorm width: 30 inches
c. Spacrqg between plaforms: 45 inchcs
. d. O".talt *iOn: 105 inches
3. Minimum lifting height from finished floor level to bottom of tircs: 63
inches, nininum. Lifting unit shall pernit lifting of vehicle to any leight
up to its full amount with a minimum of l0.locking positions distibuted
tbroughout the lift's travel.
t:7554.O1 L4p.50-3
C. Features/Performancc/Construction:. 1. Complete lift assembly shall consist of an electro-hydraulic lift unit, control
console, and specified accessories.
Z. Control console sball be connected by required lengths of stainless steel
hydraulic prpe or steel reinforccd hydraulic hose, nylon compresed air line,
and electical cable permining locuion 10 feet (ninimum) ftom the
connections on the lift unit including standad JIC fittings tbroughout. All
hydraulic hoses on lifting stnrcUue shall be of steel reinforced constnrction
and have sta,ndad JIC fitings throughout.
3. SuPPort leg assemblY:
a.
- -support
leg joins shall be provi(led with hanlened bushings at cylinder
to leg conncction and tbe leg to platrorn connection'
b. Base-of each ufting mcmbcr shatt bc predrilled to accept anchoring
bolts adequately sizpd for tbc loads imposcd during lift operation.
c. Each hydraulic cylinder shall be mounrcd on the undcrside of the liftiog
plaform and have a flow check inrcgrally mountcd to Prevent collapse
in tbe event of a major fhdd lcak.
4. Pladorm:' a. Each pladorm shall bc constnrcted of 0.375 inch &ick plate steel
srpported by 0.250 inch thick steel 'I" beans.
b. Each plaform shall have two automatic swing wbccl choclcs mounted to
the front and rear of tbe lift to prcveat a vehicle from rolliqg off &e
pladorm wben raised EoE rhnn 12 inchcs. Chocks sball not reduce the
iffective lcngth of lifting pladorms by morc thnn 6 irrhes'
c. There shall be no fi,red obstnrctions betwecn lifting pladorms'
5. Hydraulic gear pump, driving lift, shall be capable of sttpplying the
appropriate PSI and GPM to oPeBte, ald be capable of being lowered ftom
;t niscd position by operation of mamrd pumP and valviag systcm'
6. SafetY feanrcs:
.. a. S"fr,y locls witb a safety facor of Dot lq$ than 3:1 sball be mounted
oDe set to each lifting cylinder, engaging as tbe lift ascends, and shall
allow the lift to be locked at I mininum of 10 different levels ennring
minimal.g2vst &rc to a hydnulic fluid leak.
. b. safety locks sball be auomatically disengaged when the lift "Lower"
control is opcrated, and automatically re-engaged when the 1ift
"r owei" control is released'
c. Uft sball have full lenglh continuous safety tapeslvirch mounted to the
. lower surface of the main liftin! pladorm and corpled to the control
. systcm. Saftty apeswirch will be located on the inside and the outside
of both pladorms. The lift wiu ftop and lock out the oPerator with a
horizontal or vertical displac€ment of the tapeswitch'
. d. Connol systcm sball ensurc that the individud lifting platrorms differ in
height by no more than two inchcs.
/-\/t(M' tP{'/mw q-i,'u:=V
!,_: I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
l
I
t
t
l
I
I
I
ItM504'1-7554.01
D.
F.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
Controls:
1. Confol console shall house an oil reservoir, zuction strainer, low pressure
return filter, hydraulic gear pump' manual puop, and NEMA 12 rated
(minimgn) elecEical enclosure for system disconnect, "Raise/Lower" and
ipras to lnck Lifr" controls aod "Power-On" aod "Operator Irck-Out"
pilot lamPs.
2. 'Contnot ty*. shall be openfed by a Programmable Ingic connol (PLC)
and lock-out of all operations of lift controls if insufficient air pressure to
operatetbesafetylocks,diqplacedsafetytapeswitchofuneven.plat'orm
neigbt exists. This lockout shau not be able to be reset ualgss tbg nncds
condition bas been correcrcd.
3. conuol system sball be able to be programmed to stop a lift at a specific
height in order to load or unload any accessory jack'
Accessories:
1. Center jack, 25,000 pound capacity, RI-25 one each
2. Pladorm lightiqg sylte-, consisting of eight individud fluorescent lamps
Ouilt in) "'iO *iiira water proof constnrction and clear shatter proof
u$es.
3. Retractable wheel set for loatling or unloading of accessory center jack
Utility Requirements:
1. Phrmbing:
a. Comprcssed afu,ll2 inch, 120 PSI, 2 CFM
b. Drain, 4 inch
2. Electricd: 460 VAC, 3 Phase' 15 HP
PART3.EXGCUTION
3.01 INSPECTTON
coordinate location of roug[-in work and utility stubous to assur€ natch with
eEripment to be installed.
Impect delivcred equipmenr for damage from shipping and exposure to weather'
comparc delivered equipment with packing use and specifications to assure
receipt of all cquipment items and specified accessories'
Report h Y/riting to the Architect, an/ damagecl' missing or incomplele
t"n"aot.A equipment and improper rougb-in orutility snrhuts'
t-7554.O1 14450-5
3.O2 INSTALI..ATION
A. Perform work under direct srpervision of Foreman of ' Construction
Superinrcndent with authority to coordinate installation of scheduled eEdpment
with Architect or designated rq)rcsentative.
B. Install eEripment in accordam€ with plans, shop drawings, and nanufachrer's
instnrctions:' 1. Positioning: Place eEripmcnt in accordance with any noted special
positioning rqlrir€ments generalty levcl (or sligbt slope as required by
instnrctions), plumb, aod at right angles to adjaccnt work'
2. Fitting: Wbete field ortting or timming is nccessary, perform in a neat,
accurate, professional maDDcr without danaginS cquipment or adjacent
work
3. Anchoragc: Attach equipment as dirccted by Archircct or designated
r€presentative. Installation fastcncrs shall be installed to avoid scratc,hing or
danaging adjacent srfaces.
4. Upon completion of work, finish surfaccs shall bc ftee of tool marb,
scrarcbcs. blc,mishcs, and stains'
3.03 TESTING
A. After final conncctiols are oade and prior to authorizing palment, spocified
equipment shall be rcstea for compliaoce with specificitions in the presence of
the Arcbitect or designacd represcnlative using acceptance proccdures provided
by the manrfacurer.
3.04 CLEAI{I'P
A. Touch-up damage to pained finisbcs'
B. mpe and clean eqgipmcnt of any oil, grcase and solvcnts, and Eake ready for
use.
C. Clean area around eEripment installation and remove packing or installation
debris ftom job site.
D. Notify Archircct or designated rcprqrentative for acceptance inspection.
3.05 TRAINING
A. Dir€ct the technical rcpr€sentative to provide specified hours of glining to
designated Ownet's maintenance pcrsonnel in operation and maintenance of the
following eqgipmeot. Coordinate, with Owner, training scbedule asd list of
v-j I
I
I
I
t
I
I
,l
I
,l
t
I
I
t
:l
I
' 1-7554.01
t
I
I
personneltohtraiDed. ffi*w144;50-6 s.#ia-
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
1. Flush mount pladorm lift (Equipment Identifier PL) : 4 hours
B. Demonstrate lift operation utilizing each of tbe vehicle types operated by owner'
c. obtain, from technical representative, a list of owner's personnel trained in
eEripment operations and maintenance.
END OF SECTION
lal
1-7554.01 t4,/.50-7
I
SECTION 1s0r0
I
BASIC MECHAMCAL REQTJIREMENTS
I PARTI-GENERAL']
I.OI SI.JMMARY
I A. Section Includes: Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 15
Sections, in addition to Division I - General Requirements.
t B. Related Sections
r- 1. Although all Divisions and Sections of these Specifications form a part of the
t Contact, particular attention is directed to the following Sections:
r f,: 3trf;Sfi3l3l3:iffi"3ll1fli5;I i 3#:l3l?33:il#ffirEquipment
r e. Section 01720 - Ihoject Record Documents.
I f. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Datag. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
I r.o2 DEFIMTToNstA. Concealed: Not nomrally exposed to view by building occupants. For example, above
I suspended ceilings and within walls, partitions, shafts, service spaces and
t roonNi.
a B. Exposed: Exposed to view or contact by building occupants in zuch spac€s as offices,
I toilet nroms, laboratories, or as specified or shown on the Drawings.
C. Finished Area: Areas other than equipment or utility rooms, rooms without architectural
I teatrnent of floors, walls or ceiling-s, 6r as otherwise qpecified or shown on the Drawings.I I.O3 SYSTEMDESCRIMON
I A. Fumish and install equipment to perform under the following conditions:
- Temperature, outdoor Summer, maximumI #g*?fffi'l',*
-20 defees F
t Seismic Zone Zone l, (UBC)
- Altitude 8250 feet MSL
I
Wind Load 80 mpb, Exposure C, UBC
t
I
t l-7554.01 15010-l
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following information in accordance with Segtion 013fi), Submittals:
l. Complete specifications, descriptive, drawings, catalog cuts, -and_descriptiveliterature wfich slrall include make, model, dimensions, weight of equipment, and
electrical schematics.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
c.
D.
2. Complete performance data that will indicate full compliance with the
Specifications.
3. Detailed infomration on sbructural, mechanical, electrical, or other changes or
modifications necessary to adap products to the arrangement or details shown on
the Drawings.
4. List ofrecomnended spar€ parts for equipment specified.
Refer to the individual sections of Division 15 for additional specific zubmittal
requirements.
Submit Shop lhawings and Product Data grolped tg include complete zubmittals of
related systems, Foducts, and accessories in a single st$mittal.
Pr€earc drawings slrowing proposed rearrangement of Work to mest Project conditions,
incl-uding changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain pemdssion of Architect
before proceeding.
Mark dimensions and values in ttnits to match those specified.
The use of a manufactur€ds name and model or catalog number is only for the purpose of
establishing the standard of quality and general configuration dsired. hoducts of other
manufagturen will be considered in accordance with Section 01600, Ntaerial and
Equipment.
Model numberq wlrere given, arp the latest available to the Architect. However, product
update may render some model numbers obsolete. In such cases, select ptodttcts based
oir new, succeeding model ntrmber, or the equivalent to model numbers of other listed
manufacturers. Specifications and installation considemtions shall ultimately govem.
Product Data: Submit Itoduct Data for the following:
l. Electric Moton Five Horsepower and Larger: Submit the following information:
a. Manufachrcds name.b. Rated volts and full-load amPercs.
c. Rated fequency in HerE and number of phases.
d. Rsted full-load spe€d in RPM.
e. NEMA insulation teinperature ratings.f. Rated hors€,pow€r.g. NEMA code letter indicating locked-rotor KVA per horsepower.h. Secondary volr and full-load amperes if a wound rotor induction motor.i. AFBMA number for each bearing for integral horsepower category.j. Service factor.k. Frame numberand enclosure.
E.
F.
G.
15010-2 l-7554.01
t
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
I
1.05
A.
l. Use of motors rated in excess of 1000 watts with a rated power factor less
Operation And Maintenance Data:
rii
l. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01730'
2. Content shall include the following, as appropriate to the equipment:
?; Generaldescriptiveinfomration.br Description of contols, and accessories.c. Senricedepotlocationandtelephonenumber.
d.,Start'upinstnrctions.e. Spare parts lisc.f.l "Replacement part nrunbers and availability.g;" Operation maintenance, and inspection da,ta-h. Trouble-shootingguide.i. lnstuctions for lub,rication.j. Instuctions for filter replacement.k. Insructions for motor and drive replacementl. Wiring diagrams.
!
QUALITY ASSURAITCE
Standards nor ptaterials and Worhnanship: hovide new materials free of defects,
installed in accordance with manufapturer's current published recommendations, using
best skill and attentionrecognized as good practice.
l. Equipment Identification: Provide major component of equipment with
manufactue/s rurme, model and serial numberpemranently attached.
2. Machinery Stabilization: Statically and dynanrically balance rotating machinery at
the factory and rebalanced in the field if machinery is vibrating excessively in the
Architect's opinion.
3. Layout: Install equipment and run pipes parallel with or at right angles to the lines
of the building wrless shown othenvise on Drawings.
Mechanical Drawings: Are diagrammatic in nature and are not intended to be scaled for
dimensions.
l' Dimensions: Determine dimensions from Architechual and Structural Drawings,
certified equipment drawings and from the sfucture itself before fabricating work.
2. Space Requirements: Provide equipment furnished to fit in allocated space with
due provision for manufacturer's recommended access and maintenance
requirements. VeriS and coordinate space requirements with affected tades and
equipment wtrich comprise the Work.
3. Equipment Variations: Drawings show equipment that is typical in configuration
and size for equipment specified. Variations may exist among similar pieces of
equipment depending on the particular manufacturer. hovide additional piping,
ductwork and other materials which may be required to properly install the
equipment fimished if it differs from that shown on the Drawings. Coordinate
changes to the structural, architectural and elechical design necessitated by
t-7554.01 15010-3
differences. Provide the above services, materials and equipment at no change to
the Contact Amount.
4. Piping Diagrans: Piping and other flow diagrams which appear on the Drawings
are provided with the inte,rtion of showing equipmenL pipe, valves, specialties and
other appurte,nances in their proper interrelation. Provide and connect additional
equipmenf pipe, valves, specialties and appurtenmces required by the
manufacnrer of the equipment fumished for proper operation of his product
whether or not showq or as requircd elservher€ in the Specifications, e.g. drain
valves, air vents, and similar items. In the eve,nt of discrepancies between the
Piping Diagrams and plans, elevations or details shown on the fhawings, the
Piping Diagrams slrall govem.
5. Motor Sizes: In many cases, motor sizes specified or shown on the Drawings are
derived from manufacturers' dau rcpresenting the most efficient, i.e. lowest
horsepower, seletion which will attain the scheduled performance clraracteristics.
Although it may sometimes be possible to select a maller, i.e., less expensive,
piece of that performs as scheduled but with a la'rger motor, the
scheduled motor size, for purposes ofequiprnent selection, shall be considered the
mo<imum perrrissible.
C. RegulatoryRequircrnents:
l. Perform worlg finnistr and install narcrials and equiprneirt in accordance with the
latest applicable rules, rcgulations, rcquirrments, and specifications of the codes
and agencies identified. Ifcodes or shndrds are not specified for a particular
applicatio4 Contaclor shall follow standard industial practice, assuring that the
materials or methods used shall conform to local and State codes and strall rcsult in
a final installation tbat will perfonn rcliably for tbe purpose or use intended.
2. The following list summarizes the organizations whose codes and standards are
specifically requfu€d in these Specifications.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
a-
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
tr
l.
j.
k.
Town of Vail local laws and ordinances.
State of Colorado laws and regulations.
State and/or federal safety rcguldions.
ASTM - American Society for Testing lvlaterials.
ASME - American Society of Mecbanical fngineers.
AI{SI - American National Standads Institut€.
AWS - American Welding Society.
AWWA - American Water Works Association
CISPI - Cast-kon Soil Pipe InstihIe.
NSF - National Sanitatioi Foundation.
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contacton' National
Association.l. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.m. OSHA - Occupational Safety andHealthAct.n. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and
Air-Conditioning Engineers, lnc.o. NEC - National Elecuic Code.p. UL - Undemniten Laboratories. AI\iICA - Air Movement and Control
Associationq. UBC - Uniform Building Code.r. UFC - Uniform Fire Code.s. UMC - Uniform Mechanicd Code.
150104 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
1.06
A.
B.
G.
H.
1.07
A.
B.
c.
D.
t UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code.
3. Obtain required p€rmits and arrange inspections required by codes applicable to
this Division.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, A}ID HANDLING
Storage Of Materials: Refer to Section 01600, Material and Equipment, and as specified
in this Section.
To greatest extent possible, factory-assemble equipment specified in this DMsion.
Pac6rge and tag parts and assemblies shipped uri'as-sembl{-as rcquired to proAect the
equipment from-dhmage and facilitate final-assembly in the field. Prrotect machined and
uripdintea parts fronidamage by the elements witn an application of a snippable
protective coafing.
Deliver equipment and materials F.O.B. factory with freight allowed to the Project Site
and include full-value insurance ooverage while in tansit.
Inspect equipment and materials for damage upon delivery and immediately replace or
repair such damage to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Handle materials as recommended by the manufacturer, with approved equipment in a
manner that will prevent danage.
Store material indoors and in a secure area offthe ground in an orderly rnanner that will
allow easy inspection and inventory.
Store materials subject to temperanue or humidity damage in a contolled environment as
recommended by the manufactnrer.
Package, ship, and store dangerous and hig$y combustible materials in compliance with
Federal, OSHA, state, and local safety and fire codes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
Existing Utilities:
l. Drawings indicate the general locations, type and sizes of various utilities within
the Project site wtrere known. These utilities are indicated as accurately as
possiblC. If utilities are encormtered during construction which are not shown on
Drawings, immediarely notiff the Architect.
2. Active Services: When encountered in Worh brace and support existing active
sewers, gas, water, electic and other senrices where required for proper execution
of the Work taking care not to preve,nt or distrub the operation of active senrices
that are to r€main.
3. lnactive Senrices: Remove inactive senrices rmexpectedly encountered in the
Work as directed by approved Change Order.
F.
t-7554.01 15010-5
4.
J.
J.
l.
Intemrption Of Services: Wherc Work makes ternporary shutdown of services
unavoidable, slnrt dormr the servicps at night, or at such time as approved by
Architecl Shutdov,'n slrall cause the least interference with the utility company or
Owne/s established operating routine. Anange to work continuously, including
overtime if rcquircd, to assutE that services will be shut down only dnring time
actually required to make necessary connection to existing work.
Protection: Field locaie existing utilities and make arrangements with appropriate
utility owners prior to performing excavation. Repair damage to existing utilities
resulting fiom the Work Make r€pai$ to the satisfaction of the utility owners and
Alchitest.
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
T
T
I
C. Protection Of Work And Pr,operly:
l.
D. Layout and Coordination:
E. Electical Coordination: Referto Table 15010-l atthe endofthis Section.
Existing Facilities: hotect existing facilities whether or not such facilrty is to be
removed or relocated. Moving or removing facility shall be done so as not to cause
inrcmrption of the Work or the Oumeds operations. Obtain writt€n permission
from the Owner before disruption of o<isting facilities.
New Work Procct each piece of the Work as it is completed; cover and protect
fi.xtures and equipment against datnage. At finel completion, clean and deliver
Work in anrmblelnished condition
Damages: Contactor shall be responsible for damages caused by his work or
through the neglect of his workmen and shall patcb, repair or pay for damages.
a
J.
4.
).
6.
7.
Before starting Work, carefully examine the pmject site and architectural, structnral
and electrical Drawings to become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing
Work on this project. Contactor shdl be responsible for continual coordination of
the mechanical Workwith otherhades to avoidconflicts in installation
Determine exact location of oristing utility services.
Veriff indicated elevations, building measurcrrelrt, rough-in dimensions, and
equipment locations, before proceeding with the Work.
Install valves and equipment to provide access to prts requiring inspection and
servrce.
Notify the Architect of conflice or discrepancies in Ihawings and Specifications.
Do not proceed with questionable items of work rmtil clarification has been issued
by the Architect.
Do not cut or drill beans, girders, footings, or columns for mechanical iterns wrless
approved by the Architect
Install equipment and locate pipes parallel with or at right angles to the lines of the
building unless shown othenuise on Drawings.
15010-6 l-7554.01
I
I 1.08 SEQIJENCINGAI.ID SCIIEDULING
A. Equipment Manufactureds Responsibility and Services:
I l. A manufactureds.reprysentative for equipment rhqll F provided as necessary o-r as
ffi fs"f ,ffi'il"ti*?ffff Ht ##flf'sh#* n,?fff& HJ"'l
I accordance with the manufhcturer's directions as approved.
2. The manufactureds representative shall provide the initial start-up of equipment in
I the presence of the Architect and Ov*'ner.
t a- Provide a pr€stafi check ofpiping, valves, control devices, control panels,. md equipment.
t b. Calibrate and adjust equipment and controls for operation at the specified
desigrr conditions.
I c' ffiff.3,ffi,:"?t"ffi"ff:Hdi#utT*[Y and their resorution'
| 3 mTils*ffi"#"Ttffi%ffi';l#."ffi"msj,t$"H- ifr1,,,ffi..:"ffiTffi,.f,i.,ffH;#i'$tile*$3,iii::1!tW;offiL.routinea4. Upon complaion of the inspections, startup, testing, and checkout procedures, the
I equipment manufacfircr shall submit written notice to the Contractor, Owner, and
I the Architect that ttre units are ready for beneficial use by the Owner.
I l.o9 WARRANTY
t A. Referlo the General Conditions.
I PARr2-PRODUcrs
2.01 EQLIPMENTMANLJFACTT.JRE
t A. Ong.P.e1 Category: Provide equipment in tlre following categories of one manufacturer or
available through one manufacturer for each category to facilitate ease ofmaintenance by
the Owner.
I l. Airfilt€rs.
I 2. Dielectic unions.
-3. Plumbing fixtures and trim.
I 4. Temperature controls, except wtrere otherwise specified.
5. Valves:I i: ffi*"""%i,k.
I c. Plugvalves.
!
I l-7554.01 15010-7
I
d. Ball valves.
2.02 MACHINERY DRJVE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Sheaves: Belt drives shall have adjustable or fixed pitch driver sheaves with matche4
fixed companion driven sheaves. Multiple grcove sheaves shall be fixed pitch and have
matched companion driven sheaves. When fixed pitch sheaves are used, the Architect
reserves the right to dfu€ct that speed changes be made if in his opinioq these are
warranted after final balancing. Fixed pitch sheaves shall be cast iron, bushed type.
B. Belts: Belt drives shall be standard Fm, A B, C and D sections.
l. Smaller Honepower Application: FIIP belt drives may be used for motors less
than thrc€ horsepower.
a. Large Horsepower Application: Select belt types for drives for 3 horsepower
and over from the following chart:
Horsepower 1750 Motor Speed I | 50 Motor Speed
upto5 A B
2. Belt Selection: March belts and size for 150 percent of motor nameplate
horsepower.
3. Belts For A-B Sheaves: Use B Section belts.
C. Belt Guard: Provide belt drives with zuitable and adequate belt guards that comply with
applicable codes, e,nclosing both the driving and driven pulleys, securely fasten in place
and provide with rernovable covers at each shaft center.
D. Direct Drive: Wherc couplings are specified for direct drive, use steel flexible type.
2.03 DGA}TSIONANDTOGGLEBOLTS
A. New Concrete Work Where necessary to make attachment of material, fixture or
equipment which may be bolted to masonry or concrete walls or floon, embed bolts in
masonry or concrete during or prior to pouring for such attachment.
B. Existing Masonry Or Concrete: Use drilled-in ogansion anchors such as Hilti, or equal.
C. Wood Plugs - Plastic Or Fib€r Shields: Do not use wood plugs and plastic or fiber
expansion shields.
2.O4 ACCESS DOORS
A. Responsibility: Locate and provide sizes for access doors specified in Section 08305 for
concealed valves, automatic or manual air vents, fire dampers and other mechanical work
items that require accessibility for operation and maintenancc.
B. Provide acoustical ceiling panels with a button or some other means of identification and
location of concealed panels.
I
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t15010-8 t-7554.01
c.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
T
I
I
I
t
2.05
A.
Size: Access doors shall be 16 bv 16 inches minimum where valves and similar related
items are within easy reach of operator, and at least 24 by 24 inches when penonnel must
pass through opening in order to reach valve or other mechanical device.
ELECTRICAL DEVICES
Motors: Furnish electric motors associated with the various pieces of motor-driven
equipment as follows:
l. General: Size according to the loads of nomral operation of the equipment under
installed conditions.
a- Classification: Motors shall be classifid into three categories:
1) Integral (IHP): Greater 1daan3/4 horsepower.2) Fractional (FIIP): 1n0lo3/4 horsepower.3) Milli (MIIP): Less than V20 horsepower.
b. Service Factor: Open motors slnll be selected with a service factor of l.l5 or
greater and be suiable for operation at the design altitude and temperafiue
conditions without operating in excess of the nameplate rated honepower at
a 1.0 service factor.c. Voltage Fluctuations: Motors shall have sufficient torque to start the load
from rest; accelerate the load to full nrnning speed within 8 seconds; and
operate witlrout abrupt loss of speed during ma:cimum overload condition
when actual line voltage is plus or minus l0 p€rcent of voltage indicated on
the nameplarc.d. Single-Phase Motors: Gen€ral prxpose capacitancestart induction-run type
designed for minimum starting curent.
l) Special Service, Definite-Purpose Or Special-Purpose Motors:
Split-phase or capacitor start at the application required.2) High Slip Or Shaded-Pole Motors: Not acceptable in IHP or FIIP
ratings but may be used for MHP ratings.
e. Overload Protection: Provide integal ovedoad protection with manual resetf. Approved Manufacturcrs: Subject to compliance with these requirements,
Allis-Chalmers; Centrnry; Delco; Emerson; General Electic; Louis Allis;
Wagrrer; or Westinghouse ar€ acceptable.
2. IHP and FHP Motors: General purpose, horizontal squirrel cage induction type
withNEMA Class B insulatioru continuous 40 degree C. ambient.
a- IHP Motors shall have a l.l5 service factor at sea level.b. FHP Motors shall be selected according to NEMA service factor at sea level.
3. MHP Motors: Design in conformance with NEMA Standards and select for
application at altitude and ma:<imum temperature of installed condition.
4. Enclosures: Motor enclosures shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and as
specified below.
t-7554.01 15010-9
f.
a. Open Drip-Proof Motors: Motors shall meet NEMA Standards for
dripproof enclosure when mounted in a horizontal position and the
ventilating openings are so constnrcted that sr.rccessful operation is not
interfer€d with when drops of liquid or solid particles stike or enter the
enclosure at angle up to l5 degrees fiom the vertical.b. Totally Enclosed Motors: Motors stnll be c€rtified for a maximum
temp€rature rise of 55 degrees C. at a 40 deg€e C. ambieng @ll b" suitable
for operation at installed altitude and temperature conditions without
operating in excess of nameplate currcnt" and sltall be equipped with a
brcathing vent and drain fining at the bottom for removal of accumulated
condensed moistr.ue.
Seals: Pr,ovide motors with dustprcof and leakproof mechanical seals at both ends
ofboth bearing housings that will guarantee effective grease tightness for the above
specified bearing lif€. :
Motor Bearings: Shall be as follows:
a. Small Motors: Motors <rnaller than l/6 horsepower shall have slewe
bearings.b. Mdiun Size Motors: Motors l/6 honepower through ll2 horsepower shall
be petmanently lubricated ball bearings.c. Laige Motors: Motors larger than 12 honepower shall have serviceable ball
or roller bearings.
l) LubricationService: Zerklubnicationfittings.2\ Thrust Desip: Bearfurys shall have full pr,ovision for tbrust imposed
by the specific load.3) Life: Three phase bearings raed life based on AFBMA B-10 ratings.4) Lubricant hessure Relief: Provide for automatic relief of lubricant
prcssur€ and accomplish by either built-in relief devices, or ball-and--
spring (automatic) rclief fittings at bottom of bearing housing.5) Relief Locations: hessure reliefs sball be to the outside, and shall be
visible from maintenance locations.6) Lube Fitting Accessibility: Must be easily accessible from
operating lwel.7) E)Gnsion Tubes: Whoe n@essary, or spocifie4 provide well secured
ortension tubes to bring senrice fitting to an easily accessible location.
Motor Speeds: Shall not exceed 1800 RPM unless othenvise noted.
Motor Frames: Construct of cast fu,on, fomred steel or die-cast aluminum.
a- Sizes: Comply with NEMA Standard MGI ll.2l and MCI-ll.3l2 for
frame numbers 42 through 445T.b. End Shields: Construct ofcast irou die-cast aluminum or reinforced steel, as
required to provide sbenglh, rigidity, firm bearing support and alignment for
the required application.
Moton rilith Belt Drives: Install with approved belt tension adjusting facilities
including cast fuon or steel bases, slide rails and adju*ing scrcws.
Power Factor: Where an application requires an electric motor rated greater than
1,000 watts and the standard motor rated power factor is less than 85 percent under
rated load conditions, use a special designed energy-saving high-efficiency motor.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7.
8.
9.
15010-10
10.
l-7554.01
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
2.06
A.
B.
c.
a. Special Desigred Motors: Motor nameplate shall include indication of
nianufacturerrs recommended maximum iimlt of capacitor KVAR rating
which can be safely applied to motor.
Motor Control Equipment Where motor controls and wiring are specified to be provided
as part of a mechanical equipment package, they shall be as specified below.
l. Starters and Contactors: Shall be of proper NEMA size for voltage, load and
enclosure application.
a. Combination Switch, Magnetic Starters: Shall be enclosed type, frrsed or
nonfised. Switches shall have extemal operating handles with lock-open
padlocking provisions and shall indicate the ON and OFF posltions.
Enclosurei ahall be NEMA Type No. I or as scheduled on Drawings or
specified. Where types of motor contoller enclosures are not indicated, they
shall be NEMA types which are most suitable for the environmental
conditions where motor contnollen are blng installed. Doon shall
mechanically interlock to prevent opening unless the swirch is open.
2. Push Buttons, Selector Switches, Pilot Lights: Furnish in start€r cover, control
,', panel door or as specified. Provide engraved plastic legend plates to identi$ the- function of each item.
3. Contol Transformers: Where conductors of the confol circuit for a starter or
contactor extend beyond contoller enclosurr, a control power tansformer shall be
included with secondary of 120 volts or lower. Protect secondary side with a fuse
as required by NEC. Ground control circuits except ufiere equipment
manufacttuers rccommend that the contol circuits be isolated.
4. Auxiliary Contacts: hovide one extra convertible, normally open or normally
closed, auxiliary contact for each magnetic motor starter in addition to the holding
contact and required interlocking contacts.
5. Overload Assembly Heater ElemeNrts: Size based on the actual motor nameplate
full load current rating and the assembly manufacture/s recommended heater based
on starter and motor ambient temp€ratur€s and motor service factor. Quantity:
One for each pole. Type: Themral or induction type.
6. Switch and Fuse Units: Not acceptable for motor overload protection unless
specifi cally indicated.
7. Raceway, Wire and Cable: Raceway, wire, cable and accessories shall conform to
the requirements of DMsion 16, Electical, and NEC.
PAINTINGAND FIMSI{ES
General Painting: Shall be executed under the Work of Division 9, Finishes.
Pipe and Ducts: Piping and ductwork in the building exposed to view shall be painted as
scheduled in Division 9 of the Specifications and/or Drawings.
Pipe ldentification: Painting for prpe identification strall b€ as scheduled in Section titled,
Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
t:7554.01 l50lGlt
D.Equipment Heat exchangers, conv€,rtets, storage tanks, condensate pumps, condensarc
cobl6rs, condensate tanks and orpansion tanks slnll be painted same color as piping
system to which connected.
Nameplates: Cae shall be taken to prevent painting over equipment nameplates.
EQI.NPMENT IDENTIFICATION
Identification Marcrials: Equipment and conbols shall be identified by stamped brass
identification stips firmly attached to the equipment or adjacent vall at an obvious
location. Lettering shall be not less thm l2 inch high cbaraclers. Identifr each piece of
equipment with its equipment tag number and description, e.g. [D(-l IIEAT
EXCHANGER.
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
E.
2.07
A.
PART3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI EXAMINATION
3.02
A.
A. lnspect the Work area and identi& conflicts with the stuchrr€ and other tades' work
which may conflict with the installation of the mechanical syst€ms.
Inspect the Work to ensre the installation and workmanship are in accordance with
acceptaUle industry standards forthe work being done and with these Spocifications.
Materials, equipm€nq and workrranship shall be subject to inspection at any time by the
Architect or hii rep'resentative. Conect work, materials, or equipment not in accordance
with these Contrast Documents or found to be deficieirt or defective.
INSTALLATION A}.ID ARRA}IGEME}.ITS
Component Removal: Install Work to permit rcmoval without damage to other parts of
coils, heat exchanger bundles, boiler tubes, fan shaffs and wheels, filters, belt guards,
sheaves and drives, and other parts which might requfue periodic r€placelnent or
maintenanc€.
Acress: Arrange pipes, ducls, and equipment to permit ready access to valves,_ taps,
starters, moton, contnol components and similar it€ms and to clear the openings of doon
and access panels, whether zuch items a€ part of tbe Work of this or other Divisions of
these Specifications.
Offsets, Transitions and Chenges In Direction In Pipes and Drcts: Make as required to
maintain proper head room and pitch of sloprng lines whether or not indicated on
Ihawings-and provide traps, air vents, sanitary vents, and similar related items, as
required to effect such changes.
Miscellaneous Work It is intended thrt anything, whether labor or materials, which is
usually fumished as a part of equipment specified md which is necessary for complete,
operalile systems shall be provided as a part of the Contact at no change to the Contact
Amounl whether or not shown or described.
B.
D.
E. Concealed Piping: Piping in finished areas of the building sttall be concealed except
where otherwise noted on Drawings.
F. Eouioment Installation: Equipment shall be installed in accordancp with manufhctueds
inituctions, unless approvil is given in writing by Architect for deviation.
15010-12 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
T
I
I
I
G. Conflicts Of Work Where conflicts of work between trades occur and departure from
the indicated arangements are nec€ssary, consult with other tadres involved; come to
agr€ement as to chinged locations and J-evations, and similar.related situ,ations; obtain
afproval of Architect on proposed changes before proceeding with Work'
3.03 SAFETYCONSIDERATIONS
A. Piping that to be installed affoss aisles or other main access walkways shall be.covered
u'ittr i protective checkered plate steel ramp, pitched a maximum of l:12 to allow safe
wheelei or foot traffic. and-nainted with i p:rime coat and two finish coats of safety
yellow. Support ramp from the floor and do rfot rest directly on the pipe.
B. Mechanical equipment shall be installed with suitable access clearances for maintenance
or removal of-nftacealte parts and components, and withnecessary couplings or flanges
to perform the maintenance or removal frthout removing the connecting appudenances.
C. No water or steam piping shall be install€d immediately over or within a 3-foot (or more,
as per NEC requiiehents; plan view clearance of electical panel, motor statter, or
mechanical contnol panel.
D. Where equipment requiring periodic maintenance cannot be reached_by normal walkways
because of interfererice wltfi auchvorlq piping or other mechanical obstructions created
by conflicts or changes made during colnstnrction, or by substitution of equipment, the
Contactor shall provide an altemate-safe means of access. These mqy inglude construc-
tion of an overiead plat'orm with stairway or ladder ends and safety railings- or
handholds, of walk-through duct plenums with hingd access doors, or as required to
meet OSHA standards 6r safe haintenance procedr:res. Bring such cases to the
Architect's attention prior to proceeding.
3.04 EXCAVATIONA}.IDBACKFILL
A. General: Excavating and bacldlling required by the Work under Division 15 shall be
done in accordance viith tlre requireri'entscontained hercin. If requirements of Division 2
arc mone shingent than tlrose specified hereiq comply with Division 2 requirements.
B. Surveying: Finish and establish lines, grades and elevations. Stake out the work and
furnisL fie stakes, one by 2 by l0 incfiei, and hubs or hardwood Pegs' one by one by 6
inches, to stake out the lines and stuctures to line and grade.
C. Excavation, General: Provide shoring required to perform excavations and to protect the
Projec! employees, and public. When unsable material is encountered in excavation,
exclvadon ilyitt te made to depth as dfuected by the tuchit€ct and bacldlled with
compacted coarse sand or fine gravel or other suitable material. During. excavation,
matriial suitable fs1 facffilling sldt Ue piled in an orderly nunner a sufficient distance
from edge of tenches to avoidoverloadiirg, and to preveni slide or cave-ins. Care shall
be taken-not to excavate below the depths-indicatedbn the Drawings. Where excavation
work is required under existing food.'ngs, underpin as required to adequately support
existing concret€ structure in such a manner as to avoid raising or lowering or otherwise
danaging existing construction.
D. Excavation For Pipine: Comolv with the requircments of this Section and Section 15060.
Do not excavate'treilches uirtil the pipe tobe laid therein is on the Project site and is
scheduled to be placed wi \in seven
-days. Trench walls below top of pipe shdl be
venical and the width shall not exceed 6 inches to 8 inches on both sides ofpipe. Trench
l-7554.01 15010-13
F.
walls above pipe may be sloped. Pipe strall be laid on solid earth with bellholes provided
for hubs. After pipe is laid in tencb test and/or insulate if specified before bacldlling.
Surface Drainage and Ground Waler: Divert surface drainage away from open
excavation and trenching before commencement of S/ork. Pile excavated material on
one side ofexcavation in such a rnanner as to keep surface drainage ofadjoining areas
unobstructed. Remove surface water or grotrnd wat€r seepage which enters or
accumulates in excavation by pumping or subdraining, so that subgrade or pipe bed is
restored to original bearing value and conditions.
Flexible Pavemenl Sidewalls, Crnb and Gutter: Where constnrction requires cutting and
replacement of flexible pavemenl sidewalks, curb and gutt€r or similar related items,
cutting shall be accomplished so that r€maining exposed edge shall conform vertically
and horizonally to a shaight line. Restore to orieinal condition to satisfaction of Ov.,ner
and authorities baving juridiction.
Maintaining and Protecting Traffc: Mainain barricades, waming signals and lights to
protect pedestrian and vehiculr traffc in accordance with the requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction. Provide and maintain taffic daours at may be necessary to keep
zuch taffic moving during constnrction. Provide adequarc temporary crossover for
pedestian and vehicular taffic including guad rails, lamps and flags, as required by
agencies having juddiction. Remove barricades, rails, lamps and the like immediately
when necessity for such protection ceases.
Bacldll Quality: Backfill materials shall be ftee of rocks and debris. ln no case shall
frozen materials be used for bacld[ing, nor Rh'll backtrling be placed on or against
frozen earttr. Where Work is placed below footings and closer tbm 45 degree line fiom
bottom of footings, bacldll sltall be l:9 mi:rture of concrste.
Compaction: Moisten (no puddling), bacldll and i'mn in eight inch layers, rnddmum,
with mechanical tamper to consolidate to 90 percent of the maximum density obtainable
at optimum moisture content. Compact tbe upper 6 inch layer forming the subgrade for
pavement to at least 95 percent of the maximum d€osity obtainable at optimum moisture
content for rigid pav€rnents. Bacldll densrty sball be as delermined by requirements of
ASTM D 698, Standard Procter Mettpd" R€pair settld excavations and completely
restor€ propeny that is damaged &ning the warranty period.
Excess Materials: Excavated material not required or suitable for backfill shall be
removed from the Project site and disposed of in accordance with applicable laws and
regulations.
SLEEVES, CUTIING, PATCHING
Major Openings: Such openings in the stnrctue for the Work are shown on the
Drawings.
Cutting and Patching: hovide cutting and parching that may be neccssary for the
installation of the S/ork Cut necessary openings in pecast concrete panels with the
approval of the Architect. Cutting of structural work shall be done with the written
cbirsent of the Architect and such-work stnll be done in accordance with Architect's
directions. Cutting and parching work shall be done by mechanics skilled in the
appropriate building tade.
I
I
T
I
I
I
T
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
G.
3.05
A.
B.
J.
15010-14 l-7554.01
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
C. Sleeves ForNon-Fire Rated Walls and Floors:
l. General: Set necessary sleeves and boxes for prpe and ducts whether or not shown
on the Drawings, before erection of sructure.-Sleeves slnll be large enough to
allow for continuous insulation to pass through the sleeve.
2. Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 40 pipe or plastic hole form extending- one inch above
nriisnea noor, except for pendnationsbf fire rated assemblies (see below).
3. Duct Sleeves: 12 gavge or heavier sheet metal ext€nding one inch beyond both
sides ofwall or floor.
4. Sleeves Through Waterproof Membranes: To be provided under the Work of
Division 7.
5. Sleeve caulking: caulk pipes and ducts between sleeve and duct or_pipe for. {!l
thickness of wail, floor of r6of, except for fircwall penetrations. See Paragraph D.
below.
^ Bare Pipes and llucts: Caulk with lead wool.
b. tnsulati{ Pipes: Caulk with one or two part polyuethane caulking
compound.c. Slewes For Pipes Requiring Vibration Isolation: Refer to Section 15245, for
vibration sleeves on certain piping.
D. Pipe Penetrating Fire Rated Walls and Floors:_ Encase-in adjoining.sheet petal 1an1,
minimrmr 24 g{trye,and size for ma,ximum one inch spacing between pipe and can. Pack
spacing in either end with an approved firestop sealant'
l. Metallic Pipe: One-part nonslump silicone elastomer calk. Dow Coming Fire Stop
Sealant 2000.
2. Plastic Pipe, Insulated Pipe: Intumesc€nt wrap strip designed to expard into_ the
cavity led after the pipe oi insulation melts. Dow Coming Intumescent Wrap Stip
2002.
3. Ofirer Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, STI
Pensil and Hilti Constnrction Chemicals are acceptable.
E. Escutcheons: Exposed pUres in finished areas sball be finished with chrome-plated floor,
wall and ceiling escutcheons.
F. Finistring: Restore surfaces to original or satisfactory condition acceptable to Architect.
3.06 CLEA}.IING A}.ID PLACING IN OPERATION
A. Project Site: Keep the premises in a clean and orderly condi-tio3 during. consftrction.
Waite and unusable materiat shall be promptly removed fiom the Project site.
B. Equipment Before final acceptance, thorougbly clean or r€place stainers, lubricate
bearings and clean out drains.
C. Filters: Clean permanent filters; replace tluowaway type filrcn with new filters.
D. Nameplates: Keep nameplates of equipment clean for easy reading.
l-7554.01 15010-15
3.07
A.
G.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
B.
c.
D.
F.
Completion: Upon completion of Work, clean equipment, remove surplus material and
rubbish of ever| description incident to the Work, leaving the Work in neat and clean
order and in complete working conditions.
START.UP AND COMMSSIONING
Contactor shall be responsible for proper operation of systems, minor subsystems, and
services provided rurdei this Division. He shall coordinate startup procedures, calibra-
tiorl and-systern check-out with subcontactors and trades iwolved. System
problems ahall be diagnosed; correctional procedures sball be initiated with the various-subcontractors
as rcqulred to bring out the system into compliance with the design, and
the problem then sirall be rechecked to verifr that the system opqates normally.
Rem-aining difficulties strall be brougbt to the attention of the Architect.
Perform tests to the satisfaction of Archit€ct on piptng, ductworh fixtures, equipment
systern components, contols, and complete systems as required by this and other
divisions of the Specifications.
Equipment or systein place{ in t€rnpor8ry o_peration for testing or for the- convenience of
C6niactor duriig corstuction and before Owner takes over operation shall be properly
operated and maintained by C-ontactor.
Provide labor, materials, tools, instrum€,lrts, air, water, power and supplies of kind
rcquired for testing and adjusting of equipment and systems. Cost of gas, electricity and
water supplied through Own€ds met€rs shall be bome by Contrastor.
Provide a fiesh charge of lubricant in accordance with the manufrctrnreds instnrctions to
equipment requiring-lub,rication prior to start-try ad maintain lubrication as required rmtil
acc€ptance by Owner.
Provide for each piece of equipment special tools rcquired for the operatio-n or adjustnent
of the equipmenr Deliver such tools to Oumer prior to fnal acc€,pt8nce of the equipment.
Beforc stafiing up system, each piece of equipment comprising a part of the systern,
whether covercdby this or otherDivisions of the Specifications, slnll be checked for
proper lubricatioq'rlrive rotation, belt tension, continuity of contols, and othet condition
which may cause damage to equipment or endanger personnel. Where requircd in the
Specifications or by indusry pnactice, a competcnt scnice rep'resentative trained in
sdnicing the respective equiprrent for which he is responsible shall be prcsent tro
supervise the starnrp and rcst nrns of equipment and systems.
Test runs shall be made over the full desigrr load range wtrere possible, or simulated to
the satisfaction ofArchitect for other conditions.
l. Tests shall continue for as long as neoessary to demonstate that systems will
operate as designed.
2. During test runs nesessary adjusments slrall be made,,contro.ls checked for_pro-per
operatioru motors ctrecked for possible overloa4 and the entire system checked by
C-ontractor for abnormal condition.
Druing test nms and prior to acc€ptance of system, insbuct Owner's designated operating
personnel in the operation of the system.
1s010-16 l-7554.01
MD
MD
J.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
3.08
A.
c.
3.09
A.
Aft€r test runs have been concluded and systems have been demonstrated to be
satisfactory and ready for permanent operatiorl permanent prpe line stainers and filters
shall be cleaned, air filters cleaned or replaced, valve and pump packings properly
adjusted, belt tensions adjuste4 drive guards secured in place, lubrication checked and
replenished if required. Temporary piping, ducting, wiring, instrwnent connections, and
similar items, shall be rcmovd and openings restored in a permanent manner acceptable
to Architect.
Material or equipment damaged, shown to be defective, not in accordance with the
Specifications or not able to meet acceptance test requirements shall be repaired or
replaced to satisfaction of Architect.
EQUPMENT S{JPPORTS AND STA}.IDS
General: Where supports, formdations, and stands for mechanical equipment are
indicafed on the Drawings, or specified, or required for proper installation, install as
specified herein.
Elevated Equiprnent Where equipment is indicated on lhawings or specified to be floor
mounted on stands or legs, construct floor stands with structural steel members or steel
prpes and fittings as shown on the Drawings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to
floor.
Miscellaneous Support Hardware: Provide anchors, guides, sway bracing hangen, ties,
insertsi, and similar related items, r€qufu€d for equipment supports.
ELECTRICAL EQI.JIPMENT AI.ID WIRING FOR MECHAMCAL DTVISION
Unless othenuise specified, motors and contols shall be furnished, set in place and wired
in accordance with Table I 5050-1,
TABLE I5O5O-I
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A}.ID WIRING FOR MECIIAMCAL DIVISION
Item
Equipment motors.
Resistance heaters.
Motor controls wher€
specified as an
integal package.
Motor controllers.
Resistance heater
controllen.
Furnished
Under
IvlD(l)
MD
Set in
Place
or Mounted
Under
luD(l)
MD
Wiredand
Connected
Under
ED(2)
ED
MD ED
ED(3) ED
ED(3) ED
t-7554.01 15010-r7
Item
lvlagnetic contactors and
magnetic start€rs
with overload tip
assembly.
Integral contol
transformers.
Cover-mounted contol
devic.es.
Manual motor $art€rs
with overload tip
assembly.
Motor stafi€r switches.
Disconnect switches firsed
and unfused.
Thermal or thennal-magnetic
circuit b,reakers.
Fuses.
Smoke detecton and ftred-
temp€rahrre firestats
in ductwork.
Control power sorrce for
tflDeraturc and cquipment
control panels.
Electic temperature control
relays and miscellaneous
devices.
Electric tlrermostats.
Electic motorized
valves.
Electic danper
actuato$.
TABLE 15050-l (Continued)
Ft.rrnistred
Under
MD
MD
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
MD
MD(6)
I\fi(6)
lvD(O
MD
Set in
Place
orMounted
Under
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
ED(3)
LrD(4)
lvID(4)
tvtD(4)
lnD(4)
Wired and
Connected
Under
ED(5)
lvD(4)
MD(4)
MD(4)
MD(4)
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
ED
ED
ED
ED
ED
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ED
MD
ED
ED
ED
15010-18 l-7554.01
I
I
t
NOTES:
(l) MD: MechanicalDivision15.
@ ED: Electical Division 16.
(3) If firnished as part of factory-wired equipment under Division 15, wiring
and connestions only by Electical Division 16.
(4) If float switches, electic thermostats, or other contol devices carry the
Full I,oad Current to motor, they strall be furnislrcd under Divisiqn 15, but
shall be set in place and connected under Division 16.
(5) Fire alarm-related wiring provided under Division 16; Control-related
wfuing provided rmder Division 15.
(O Except where fumished as part of equipment package under Division 15.
END OF SECTION
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
t l-75s4.01
I
I
r501G19
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
sEcTroN 15060
PIPEAND PIPE TTTTINGS
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010 - Summary OfWork.
B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
PART 2.PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE Al.lD PIPEFITTINGS
A. Pipe Specification l:
l. Mo<imum DesignPressure: 175 psig.
2. Maximum Design Temperature: 200 degrees F.
3. Two Inches and Under (Copper Option):
a. Tubing: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B 88.
b. Joints: Solder type with 95-5 solder.
c. Fittings: Wrought copper solderjoint, AI'ISI 816 .22.
4. AII Sizes, Galvanized:
a. Prpe: Standard weight galvanized steel, ASTM A 120 or A 53 Type F,
Furnacsbutt or continuous welded.
b. Joints: Mechanically coupled grooved gpe or screwed or flanged.
c. Mechanicat Couplings: Malleable irorl ASTM A197, grooved type.
d. Fittings: Malleable iroq ASTM A 47 Gtade 32510, galvanized with
grooved ends or 150 pounds (S) - 300 pounds (WOG) galvanized malleable
iroq banded, ASTM A197, AI'ISI 816.3 or flanged 125 pounds (S) - 175
pounds (WOG) galvanized cast irorl ASTM A 126, AhISI 816.l.
e. Flanges: Grooved en( galvanized, flanged adapter nipples or Malleable
iroq ASTM A47 Grade325l0, adaptor flange, or 125 pounds (S) - 175
pounds (WOG), galvanized cast irorl screwed, AST\4 A 126 Class B,
A},ISI B16.l.
f. All bolting shall be galvanized or cadmium plated.
5. Special Requirements: Clean and touch up damaged galvanizing with Ameron
"EZ" dnc rich coating.
B. Pipe Specification 4:
l-7554.01 15060-l
Maximum Desigrr Pressure: 125 psig.
Morimum Design Temperature: 350 degrees F.
Two Inches and Under:
Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM A 53 Grade B, seamless.
Joints: Screwed.*
Fittings: 150 pounds (S) ' 300 pounds (WOG), black malleable iro4
banded. ASTM A197, A}ISIB16.3.
Unions: 250 pounds (S) - 500 pounds (WOG), black malleable iroq
ground joint with brass soat.
4. 2-ll2 Inches and Over:
a. Pipe Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM A 53 GradeB, seamless.
b. Joints: Butt welded or flanged.
c. Fittings: Standard weight seamless steel, butt-weld type ASTM A 234
Grade WPB, A).ISI 8 16.9.
d. Flanges: Class 150 forged steel, welding neck or slip-oq ASTM A l8l
Grade I, A},ISI816.5.
e. Note:* For belowground, all sizes shall have welded joints.
C. Pipe Specification 7:
l. Desigrr Pressure: Atmosphere.
2. MaximumDesigrTet perature, 180degreesF.
3. Four Inches and Under (Copper Option):
L. Pipe: Type DWV hard temper seamless copper drainage tube, ASTM
B-306
b. Joints: Solder type with 95-5 solder.
c. Fittings: Cast brass solder joint drainage g/pe ASTM B 584, AI'ISI816.4.
4. Up to l0Inches (Cast kon OPtion):
a. Pipe and Fittings: Sewice weiSht cast iron soil pipe, tar coated inside and
outsids ASTM A74.
b. Joints: No-Hub with stainless steel shield and rubber sleeve, CISPI30l.
c. Adapters: Transitions from cast iron soil pipe to another pipe material shall
be made with appropriate adapters.
l.
L.
J.
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
a.
b.
c.
d.
15060-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
t
D. Pipe Specification 8:
r l. Design Pressure: Atmosphere.
I 2. ldaximum Design Temperature: 180 degrees F.
5. 12 Inches and Up (Cast kon Option):
a. Pipe and Fittings: Service weight cast iron soil pipe, tar coated inside and
outside, ASTM A74.
b. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564
neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum.
I
I
I
I
3. Up to l0Inches:
a. Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 301, hubless service weight cast iron soil pipe.
b. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum.
4. 12Inches and Up:
a. Pipe and Fittings: Service weight cast iron soil pipe, tar coated inside and
outside, ASTM A74.
b. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564
nooprene gaskets or lead and oakum.
2.02 PIPE SUPPORTS
I A. Hangers:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l. Standards: All hangers shall comply with the Manufactureds Standardization
Sooiety (MSS) of the Valve and Fitting Industry, MSS Standard Practice for Pipe
llangers and Supports.
2. GeneralHanger Types (220 Degrees F. OrLess):
a. Adjustable Clevis: MSS Type l.
b. Adjustable Swivel - Split Ring Type: MSS Type 6.
c. Adjustable Swivel - Band Type: MSS Type 10.
d. Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8.
e. Clips: MSS Type26.
f. Welded Attachment: MSS Type 22.
3. Steam and Hot Fluid Hangers (Greater Than 220 Degrees F.):
a. Adjustable Roller Hanger: MSS Type 43.
b. Adjustable Roll Support: MSS Type 41.
c. Pipe Covering Protection Saddle: MSS Type 39A and 39B.
| 1-7s54.01 15060-3
4. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Hangers:
a. Adjustable Clwis: MSS Type l.
5. HangersForCopperPiping: Copperplated.
6. Size: Sufficient for pipe plus insrlation or insulation shields where specified.
7. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Elcen; Fee
and Mason; Grinnell or Mchigan are acceptable.
B. Trapeze Hangers: Formed channel sections used in the support of piping systems shall
be approximately l-5l8 inch by l-l/5 inch 12 gurge steel. All formed channels shall be
finished with a rust-resisting primer. Nuts to be carbon steel with attached spring and
supplied by the channel manufaclurer.
C. Insulation Shields: Pipe shields shall be longitudinally split, approximately 12 inches
long, 360 degrees, zinc plated steel around a l2-inch long 360 degree insulation insert
covered with fire resistant rapor banier jacket. Insulation insert shall be calcium silicate
and shall matoh inzulation thickness specified for piping system.
2.03 PIPEIDENTIFICATION
A Pipe Markers: Pressure scnsitive self-sticking type with titles having black upper case
letters and Arabic numerals. Comply with AI{SI A13.1.
1. Band and Letter Size, All Sizes In Inches:
t
t
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
Outside Diameter Of
Pipe Covering
WidthOf
ColorBand
Size Of
Legmd and
Numerals
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
3l4to l-Uz 8 ll2
l-l2to 3 8 314
PART3 -DGCLNION
3.OI PIPINGINSTALLATION. GENERAL
A. Storage: Plug or cap end of pipe in storage and store offground.
B. Cleaning Prior To Fabrication: Remove all loose filings, slag, sand, dirt, oil, grease or
other foreign srbstances fiom interior and exterior surfaces ofall pipe fabrication prior
to installation by brushing scraping blowing swabbing and so on in the shop or field.
C. Protection After Fabrication: Plug cap or otherwise seal all opan urds.
15060-4 l-7554.01
I
t D. Orientation:
I 1. Horizontal Piping: Accurately instalt piping parallel to building lines.
2. Vertical Piping: Insta[ piping plumb.
I E. Methodology: Use fult lengths of pipe where length between fittings is less than the
mill-random lengths of pipe. Avoid extra joints. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each
I other. Use only reduction fittings where changes in pipe sizes occur.r
F. Unions: Not always shown, however, install at each of the following locations:
I Equipment connections, control valveg downstream ofbranch connection valves and
I wherl dismantling of pipe is required to permit maintenance, repair or rdacement of
equipmurt. Use dielectric unions when connecting pipe of dissimilar materials.
t G. Adapters: Provide adapters as required to join different t'?es of piping systems.
I 3.02 THREADED PIPING SYSTEMS
I A. Desigrr: Fabricate branch connections using appropriate standard or reducing tees and
I laterats. At pipe size changes use threaded reducing fittings or swaged nipples. Use
t bushings only when reducing fittings are not manufactured in the sizes required. At
piping terminations use only threaded nipples and caps.
t B. Installation: Ream pipe to full bore after cutting and threading. Remove dirt, chips and
threading oil. Apply prpe joint compound only to cleaned male threads just prior to
I assembly. \{here piping fabrication and preparation operations are being performed at
I the Project site, provide adequate protection over all surfaces, allowing no chips, oil,
dirt, compounds and similar related items to drop on unprotected surfaces.
t l. Sealant:
I a. Stearq Condensate, Boiler Feedwater, Boiler Blowdown: Anti-seize
I comPound.
b. All Other Services: Teflon tape.
I 3.03 COPPERPIPING SYSTEMS
I A. Solder Joints: Use 95-5 tin-antimony solder ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA and non-acid
t flux. Clean and flux piping ends. Wipe excess solder, leaving a uniform fillet around cup
offitting.
t B. Brazed Joints:
I l. Use silver alloy brazing filler metal ASTM B 260, Type BAg-l or BAg-2. Apply
I non-corrosive flux of type recommended by filler alloy manufacturer. Heat joints
I
I l-7554.0r 15060-5
to brazing temperature using ory-acetylene torch with tip size as recommended by
fitting manufacturer.
C. Overheating Protection: Use heat sinks where necessary to protect existing joints or
equipment which will be damaged by heat. Rernove composition discs from valves
before heating and replace when work is cool.
3.04 CAST IRON PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Mechanical Joints: Joints shall be mechanical type conforming to A},ISI A21.10 and
AI.ISI A2l. I L Gaskets shall be neoprene. Use manufacture/s standard bolts and nuts.
Coat with rust-preventive lubricant. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Use torque wrench to tighten bolts to equal tension.
B. Compression Tyrye Push-On Joints: Joints shall be single gasket type conforming to
AI{SI A2l.l0 and A}{SI A2l.ll. Gaskas shall be neoprene. Use manufacturer's
recommended lubricant and apply to spigot end during installation. Lubricant shall be
non-toxic, shall impart no taste or odor to the conveyed liquid and shall have no
deleterious effect on the rubber gaska.
C. Lead-Oakum Curlked Joints: Joints shall be made up by use of oalarm and molten
virgn pig lead. Use 12 ounces of molten lead per inch diameter of pipe or a depth of
one inclq whichwer is greater. After lead has cooled, seal and smoothly face the joint.
Avoid straining the pipe or bell during curlking.
D. No-Hub Joints: Joints shall be ASA Group 022 conforming to CISPI Specification 301.
Clamps shall be stainless steel. Instdl in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Sanitary and Vent Piping: Use wye or sanitary tees for branch connections. Use long
sweep bends for changes in direction.
3.05 WELDED PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Quality Assurance: Comply with welding section of AI.ISUASME B3l.l, Code for
Power Piping for workmanship, testing and general requirements. Welders shall be
certified by the National Weld Test Bureau, Ilartford Steam Boiler and Inspection Co.
or other similar acceptable bureau or agency.
l. Architect resenes the right to require qudifnng demonstrations of any welder
assigned to the Project by the Contractor or have welds tested for code
compliance.
2. Submit sample welds for inspection upon request.
B. Preparation OfPiping For Welding: Bevel piping before welding. Bevel pipe with wall
thickness up to 3/4 inch the standard 37-lD degr* angle. Use a cutting torch with the
t
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
T
15060-6 l-7554.01
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
t
t
t
T
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
T
pipe in a pipe cutting and bweling machine. Use weld spacing on all butt welds as
follows:
Nominal Pipe Wall Thickness
l/4 inch or less
aver ll4 inch less than 3/4 inch
Spacrng
l/8 hch
3/16 inch
l. Remove all conosive products and other foreign material from surfaces to be
welded by scraping, brushing, chipping and swabbing as may be required before
any welding is performed. Such cleaning shall extend back from top of the bevel
on the outside and from face ofland on the inside ofjoint at least 1/4 inch.
C. Welding Process:
l. Pipe Four Inches and Smaller: Perform welding either by means of gas welding
ory-acerylene, process, or by metallic arc process with coated electrodes.
2. Pipe Over Four Inches: Perform welding by metallic arc process with coated
electrodes.
3. Electrodes For Welding: comply with ASTM A 233 and Aws A5.l and be one
of the following classes: E6010, E60l I, E6016, or E6020.
4. Gas Welding Rods: Comply with ASTM A 251, GA-60.
D. Desigrr: Use long radius type elbows at changes in direction of piping. Use welding
fittings exclusivety except as otherwise specified or shown. Use eccentric welding
reducing fittings at changes in pipe sizes when specifically indicated. Use standard tees
or laterals at branch connections. Make all reducing branch connections using outlet
fittings that provide the appropriate branch connections.
3.06 BIJRIED PIPING
A. Cast Iron Piping: Shape trench bottom to grve uniform circumferential support to the
lower full length of each section of pipe. Excavate bell holes so that after placement
only the pipe barrel receives bearing support from the trench. Do not use spalls, shims
or lumps to adjust pipe to grade. Lay pipe proceeding upgrade with bells pointing
upgrade. Lay each pipe to line and grade and in such a manner as to form a close
concentric joint with adjoining pipe.
3.07 PITCH A}ID DRAINAGE
A. Water Piping Systems: Grade and valve with 3/4 nch hose end globe valves to permit
complete drainage of system. Vent high points in equipment rooms as necessary with
automatic air vents piped to nearest drain fixture. Vent high points in system outside of
l-7554.01 15060-7
equipment rooms with manual air vents as required to reliwe air in the system. Refer to
Section l5 100 for valve and air vent specifcations.
B. Main Sanitary and Storm Lines Within Building: Insta[ with uniform fall of not less
than one inch in 8 feet. Install branches with uniform fall of not less than one inch in 4
feet. Anchor vertical lines at each floor.
C. Sanitary Vent Lines: Pitch horizontsl vent lines one inch in 40 feet back to fixtures.
3.08 PIPE IIANGERS
A. General: Provide complete systern of support for all piping.
l. Horizontal Lines: Provide as specified and/or shown on the Drawings.
2. Vertical Lines: Provide supports at each floor as specified and/or shown on the
Drawings.
3. Spacing: Provide pipe hangers to completely support systems without sagging
including hangers at each off-sct or change in direction, and at each branch.
Spacing of supports shall be as follows, unless otherwise specified or indicated on
the Drawings:
Steel Pipe:
t
I
T
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
II
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
PIPE SITE
(Inches)
v2
3l4to I
l-ll2to2
2-l/2to3
4to6
Eto12
Copper Pipe:
PIPE SIZE
Qnches)
ll2to l-ll2
MA)(. I{ANGER HANGER ROD
SPACING DIA]\,TETER
(Feet) (Inches)
6 3/8
8 3/8
10 318
l0 tn
l0 5/8
t2 718
MN(.I{ANGER HANGERRODSPACING DIAME'TER(Feet) (Inches)
6 3t8
15060-8 l-7554.01
318l0
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
t
2 and larger
Cast Iron Pipe:
PIPE SIZE
(Inches)
All Sizes,
and at Joints
MA)( HANGER HANGERROD
SPACING DIAMETER(Feet) (Inches)
4. Support cast iron soil pipe at everyjoint, except that spacing is not to exceed 5
feet. Provide supports at each branch connectioq on each water closet bend or
elbow and at each trap.
B. Trapeze Hangers: Support two or more parallel pipes on trapeze hangers where
possible. Select to support five times the weight or thrust applied without failure.
Non-insulated steel pipe shall have clips at each support. Non-insulated copper pipe
shall rest on neoprene sleeves with a clip at each support. Establish spacing for smallest
size of pipe to be zupported in accordance with table below Paragraphs 4., 5., 6., urd 7.
under Paragraph A. above.
C. Insulation Shields: Install insulation shields on all pipe where insulation is specified at
each hanger, clip or other pipe support and at wall, ceiling or floor penetrations, refer to
Section 15050, Basic Materids and Methods, in accordance with manufactureds
instructions.
3.09 FLUSHINGA}.ID STERILZING
A. General: Blow out all piping with air and then completely wash out cleaning
compounds before final connections ofpiping systerns.
B. Domestic Water Systems: Sterilize with approved chlorinating agent to provide a
dosage of not less than 50 ppm after flushing. After a minimum contact period of 24
hourg system shall be flushed with clean water until residual chlorine is no greater than
that of the water supply. All procedures shall comply with AWWA Specification
c-601.
C. Sewer Systems: Flush and clean sewer lines, remove water and debris before final
connection to o<isting sewer.
3.IO PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
l. General: Tests shall be witnessed and approved by authorities havingjurisdictiorq
where required. Repair all defects and repeat test procedure until a satisfactory
test is obtained.
1-7554.01 15060-9
I
I
T
B. Piping shall be thoroughly cleaned on inside before beginning tests.
l. Perform tests before any insulation is applied to piping and before piping is
concealed or buried.
a. Perform these tests on all piping, tubing, fittings and joints after fabrication
and installation in field.
b. Furnish all miscellaneous instruments and equipment that are required for
testing.
c. Prior to testing pipe systems, remove or otherwise protect with readily
recognizable blanks those components which are not designed to withstand
pressures used in testing PiPing.d. During testing, unless othenvise stated, piping, tubing fittings and joints
shall safely withstand test pressure without showing failure, leakage,
pressure loss or distortion for specified time period.
C. Drain and Waste Piping: Test with standing water test of l0 feet of head.
D. Instrument Air, Plant Air, Fuel Oil and Fuel Gas Piping: Pneumatic test at 1.25 times
desigrr working pressure.
E. Test Duration:
l. Hydrostatic Tests: Hold for a minimum of eight hours without loss of pressure.
2. Pneumatic Tests: Hold for a minimum oftwo hours without loss of pressure.
3.II PIPEIDENTIFICATION
A. Pipe Markers: Apply on new and existing above-ground straight pipe runs inside and
outside of Mechanical Rooms after insulation is applied at not over 20 feet spacing, and
adjacent to all valves, and at changes in directioq and where piping passes through
walls and floors, clearly visible from operating positions. Apply anows showing
direction of flow at all Pipe Markers.
B. Identification Tags: Where pipes are too small or not readily accessible for application
of pipe markers, fasten l-l/2 inch diameter brass tag with 1/2 inch depressed black
letters as specified for pipe markers.
C. Identification: Legends and colors shall be as designated for the services listed below:
Service
Domestic Cold Water
Domestic Hot Water
Natural Gas
Legend
(1)
(1)
(r)
Color
Green
Yellow
Yellow
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I15060-10 l-7554.01
I AboveGround CW I
I
Domestic Hot Water IIW I
t 3.rz PIPING ScHEDULE
Sen'ice
I Domestic Cold Water
I Natural Gas
Abbr. PiPeSPec'
NG4
s,v 7
s,v 8
ENDOF SECTION
I
I
I AboveGroundI ili:;:.
t
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I 1-7ss4.01
Notes: Legend same as Service name.
I HYdronicHeating IIWS,IMR 4
- Sanitary & Vent
15060-11
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 1s100
VALVES AIID SPECIALTIES
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010 - Summary Of Work.
B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
C. Section 15900 - Controls and InsrumentatioD, r€Nnp€ratue contol valves.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.OI BALLVALVES
A. Tlpe B: Cast bronze body, bronze ball, full por! 150 plig svP with blowout-proof
siiicon bronze stem and teflon seat for above 180 degrees F., or BunaN seat for 180 de-
grees F. and below, solderjoint ends.
l. Application: Copper pipe, all sizes.
2.02 PLUGVALVES
A. Type A: Bronze body, square head stop with check pln, flat way, standard pattern,
threaded.
l. Application: Natural gas,2" and smaller.
2.03 MISCELLAI{EOUSVALVES
A. PressureReliefValves:
L Type C: Cast iron or bronze, b,ronze internals, combination temperature-pr€-ssure
qrpe, spring-loaded automatic reseting, with test lever; constructed, tested and
;tatlie{ipeiSection IV ASME Boiler-and Prcssure Vessel ggde; AGA pr€ssure
steam rated and tested; certified per AIISI 221.22. Valves shall sta{ to open when
temperature exceeds 200 degreei F. and be fully open before 210 degrees F. Size,
location and Btu rating point as shown on the Drawings.
I
t
I
I
I
2.04
A.
B.
c.
a. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, A.W.
CaSh; Conbraco; or Watts Regulator are acceptable.
VACUUMBREAKERS
Type A: Btonze, 200 psig, 250 degrees F, 3/4 inch male, threaded, for hot water storage
tanks.
Type B: Bronze, anti-siphon type, full line size, with check valve and atnospheric vent,
for hose connections.
Approved Manufacturen: Subject to compliance with rcquirements, Clayton Valve
Company; Febco; or Watts Regulator are acceptable.
t-7554.01 15100-l
2.05 SHOCKABSORBERS
A. Construction: Stainless steel bellows type wift combination pressurized nitro-
gen-hydraulic fluid compression chamber.
B. Certification: Units shall be certified in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute
Standaxd WH-201.
C. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Josam; Jay R. Smith;
Wade; or Zum are acceptable.
2.06 AIRVENTS
A. Type A: Brass, manual type.
l. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requiremenr, Armstrong
Pump; Bell & Gossett; or Taco are acceptable.
B. Type B: Brass, autornatic float t1pe, 250 psig, 240 degrees F, with l/4 inch overllow
connecuon.
l. Approved Manufactuers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Armstong
Pump; Bell & Gossett; or Taco are acceptable.
PART3 -DGCUTION
3.OI VALVEINSTALLATION
A. Positioning: Insall valves with stems in vertical position full accessible unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer or shown.
B. Valves Isolating Floor-Mormted Equipment Locate no higher than 7'-0u above floor
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Isolation Valves For Ceiling Or Wall-Moumted Equipment Locste in the most accessible
location possible.
3.02 SPECIALTYINSTALLATION
A. General: Install specialty items in accordance with manufactur€ds instuctions.
B. Shock Absorbers: Install on all domestic hot and cold nater branch lines where shown
on Drawings in accordance with PDI WH-201 and manufrcturet's instrustions. Letter
symbol corresponds to PDI WH-201.
ENDOF SECTION
I
t
I
I
I
t
l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I15100-2 l-7554.0r
I
I sEcTroN 15250
MECEAMCAL INSIJII\TION
I PARTI.GENERAL
I 1.01 RELATED SECTTONS
A Section0l0l0 - SummaryOfWork.
I B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
I.O2 SUBMITTALS
I A Shop Drawings:.:isubmit shop drawings for each insulation system specified hereinafter
to include insuhti'orLjackets and coveis, adhesives, coatings, sealants and cements.
I l.o3 euALrrYAssrJRAl.rcE
I A Applicator:. Company specializirg in performing the work of this section with minimum five
I )'ea$ etryen€nce.
B. Installers: Insrlation stnll be applied only by mechanics skilled at such work.
I C. RegulatoryRequirements:
I
t
I
I PART2-PRODUCTSr2.OI FIBER GLASS PIPE INSULATION
I A. Insulation: Rigid molded fiber glass pipe covering having a density of 4 pounddcubic
- foot, in compliance with ASTM C 547, having a k-factor of approximately 0.23 at 75
degrees F., and suitable for temperatures from minus 40 degrees F. to 450 deglees F.II B. Jacket: Factory applied vapor banier all-service type with self-sealing lap and butt
strips.
I C. Valve, Fitting and Ftange Covers: Pre-molded PVC covers with fiber glass insert.
I 2.02 ELASTOMERIC PIPE INSTTLATTON
I A. Insulation: Cellular etastomeric flexible pipe covering having a density range of 5 to
l. Fire ard Smoke llazard Classification Rating On Composite Ins.rlatioq Jacket and
Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 225, ASTM E 84 andUl-723 as follows:
a. Ftame Spread Rating: Not to exceed 25.
b. Smoke Dweloped: Not to exceed 50.
6-112 poundVcubic foot, in compliance with ASTI\1 C 534, having a k-factor of
approximately 0.28 at 75 degreei F. and suitable for temperatures from minus 40
degrees F. to 220 degrees F.
l-7554.01
t
I 15250.1
B. Mucimum Flame Spread: 25.
C. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50 (3/4" thick and below). 100 (above 3/4" thic$.
D. Valve, Fitting and Flange Covers: Same as pipe insulatior\ cut to fit.
2.O3 FACED FIBER GLASS EQI.'IPMENT INSULATION
A. Insulation: Rigid molded fiber glass boards having a density of 3 poundVcubic foot, in
compliance wiah ASTM C 612, having a k-factor of approximately 0.22 at 75 degrees
F., and suitable for tanperatures up to 250 degrees F.
B. Jacket: Factory applied vapor barrier facing secured with UL listed pressur_e sensitive
tape and/or oufwaiii clinch orpanding staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed.
2.O4 MANT]FACTTJRER
A. Acccptable Manufacturers: Subject 1o _compliaJrce-w1th reqqirements,.-Armstrong;
Certainfecd; Insul-Tube; I&raut Schuller International; Owens-Corning Fiberglas; and
Rubatex are acceptable.
PART3.HGCUTION
3.OI INSTALLATION
A. Install inzulation in a smootb clear\ manner in accordance with the best accepted
practices of the trade. Joints sha[ be tight and finished smootl. Cracked, chipped, and
iorn sections shall not be used in the work.
B. Surfaces to be insulated shall be dry and fiee of loose scale, rus! dirt, oil or water when
inzulation is applied.
C. Fit insulation tightly against nrrface to which it is applied.
D. Inzulation applied to cold below 100 degrees F., piping; equipment and ductwork shall
be completdly vapor sealed and free of pinholes or other openings. Staples shall not be
used.
E. Do not apply sealant or c€ment until all prwious applications of adhesives and cement
have thorougNy dried.
F. Restore oristing inzulation and surface finishes disturbed or damaged during the course
of the work in a manner acceptable to Architect'
G. All required tests on piping equipment and ductwork shall be completed prior to
application of insulation.
H. Apply insulation so as to permit o<pansion or contraction of pipe lines without causing
drimage to insulation or zurfrce finish.
I Specified pipe inzulation jackas shall bc factory applied whcnever available.
J. Terminate preformed pipe covering at a sufficient distance from valve flanges to permit
removal ofbolts.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
l
I
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
It5250-2 l-7554.01
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
K. Insulation on flanges shall overlap adjacent pipe covering 2 inches. Valves shall be
insulated up to the gland.
L. Insulation shall be continuous through pipe covering protection saddleq, or shall butt
tightly against insulation protection sfield units installed as part of the piping work.
M. Pipe line strainers shall be insulated in such a manner as to permit removal of strainer
basket without disturbing insulation on the strainer body.
N. Pipe hsulation and vapor banier shall be continuous through sleeves or openings in
walls and floors.
O. Furnish premolded pipe insulation with extended leg when used on pipes traced with
either piping or cable.
P. Do not insulate unions.
a. Where insulation terminates for any reasorL taper to pipe and finish with insulating
cement.
R. Install all insulation and accessories per the manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 FIBER GLASS PIPEINST]LATION
A. Pipe: Stagger longitudinal joints. Tightly butt the sections and seal longitudinal seams
of vapor banier jacket with vapor barrier lap adhesive in addition to the self sealing
feature. Seal circumferential end joints with butt strips of vapor barrier material and
vapor barrier lap adhesive. Above a fluid operating temperature of 80 degrees F.,
outward clinch staples may be used in place of adhesive. Seal pipe ends, valves, and
fittings of cold piping with vapor barrier coating.
B. Valves, Fittings, and Flanges: Cover with pre-motded glass fiber covering having same
thickness as adjacent insulation. Finish with PVC cover. Seal cover joints on cold
piping with vapor barrier coating or vapor banier adhesive tape.
C. Surface Finish:
l. Indoor: No further finish required.
2. Outdoor: Cover with a factory or field applied 0.016 inch smooth 5005 alloy
aluminum jacket. Lap joints downward to shed water. Finish circumferential
joints with prefabricated aluminum or stainless steel straps and waterproof metal
lap sealant.
3.03 ELASTOMERICPIPEINSULATION
A. Pipe: Slip insulation over pipe or slit insulation sections and apply around pipe. Seal
longitudinal and circumferential joints with foamed plastic contact adhesive.
B. Valves, Fittings and Flanges: Fabricate sheet or tubing insulation into covers by butting
and mitering joints as required. Seal all joints with foamed plastic contact adhesive.
l-7554.01 15250-3
3.04 FACED FIBER GLASS DUCT INSIJLATION BLA].IKET
A. Ductwork shall be covered by adhering insulation with flexible blanket adhesive.
Adhesive shall be applied in 6 inch strips on a minimum of 12 inch centers. Tightly butt
the insulation and la:p vapor barrier jacket minimum 2 inches at all joints. Secur-e laps
with vapor barrier lip adhesive. Ducts with a width over 30 inches shall be further
secured-on the underdide with mechanical fasteners on 18 inch centers.
B. Terminate and seal insulation where thermometers, controls, damper linkageg flexible
connections, test connections, acgess doors, and similar items, occur in ductwork so as
not to interfere with their function and/or replacement.
C. Flexible connections shall not be insulated.
D. Seal all terminating edges of insulation by lapping vapor barrier jacket to duct securing
with vapor banier adhCsive. Further wrap full circumference with vapor barrier tape set
in vapor banier lap adhesive.
E. Surface Finish:
l. Indoor: No further finish required.
2. Outdoors: Apply a tack coat of weatherproof mastic coating and embed a layer
of glass fabriC lapping dl joints a minimum of 2 inches. Follow this application
with an additional layer of weatherproof coating l/8 inch thick.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Insulation Protection: Protection against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage
before, during and after installation.
B. Damage: Any zuch insulation or covering damaged prior to final acceptance of the
Work shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced.
C. Cleanup: Upon completion of the Worlg thorgughly clean all floors, wa-lls, ceilings,
equipment, and similar iterns of all adhesives, paints, cements, empty containers,. scraps
add
-other miscellaneous materials, leaving said surfaces in the same conditions of
cleanliness as they were found.
3.06 GLASS FIBERPIPINGINSI'LATION SCHEDIJLE
PIPE SIZE
(Inch)
Plumbing Systerns
Domestic Hot Water Supply
Domestic Cold Water
Plumbing Vents Within l0 Feet
of the Exterior
Heating Systems
U2
v2
U2
to2
all
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
l
I
I
T
t
l
I
t
t
T
I
It52504l-7554.01
t
t
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
!
I
I
Heating WaterRunouts
Heating Water Supply and Return
Hearing Water Supply and R*urn
to2
to2
over 2
U2
I
IU2
THICKNESS
(Inch)
TIIICKNESS
(Inch)
3,O7 ELASTOMERICFOAN{PIPINGINSTJLATION SCHEDULE
Elrposed llandicapped Iawtory
Draiq Hot and ColdWatoPiping all
3.08 FLE)CBLE GI,ASS FIBERDUCTWORK INST]LATION SCHEDI]LE
DUCTWORK
ExhurstDuctsWithin l0
ft ofExterior Opafngs
Outside Air lntake Ducts
Plenums
Supply Ductsr
Return Ductslz
rExcept when within the conditioned space.
tExcept in return air plenums.
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01 1525G5
I
I
t
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
t
I
T
I
I
t
t
I
T
sEcrIoN 15400
PLTJMBING
PART I -GENERAL
I.OI RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010 - Summary Of Work.
B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
C. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
D. Section 15100 - Valves and Specialties.
E. Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation.
F. Section 15440 - Plumbing Equipment.
r.02 scoPE
A, Saniry Drainage System Inside Building: Extent of system shall include the- building
drains,'branch p-ipi"g, soil waste and venistacks, fixturi traps an{ other related items as
hereinifter sp,iineii and connections to plumbing fixhues, floor drains and other
equiprnent iridicated on Drawings or specified as iequiring waste, drain and/or vent
fa'cititi"r. Building sanitary araiis stratiinterface with sanitary sewers approximately 5
feet outside building wall.
B. Cold Water Distribution: Extent of system shall include distribution pipes, necessary
connecting pipes, fittings, shut-off vaives and other supply_specialties as indicated on
the Drawilrls-and as specified herein, and connections to plumbing- fixtures gn4 oltt t
equipment indicated oir the Drawings and specified as requiring co!{ yqter, including
cdndections to equipment furnish& under other Sections and Divisions of these
Specifications.
C. Domestic Hot Water Distibution systems shall include hot water heatets, water
distribution lines, necessary connecting pipes, fittings, shut-offvalves, and_other parts
specffied herein and indicdted on Draudhgs and connections to plumbing fxtwes and
o-ther equipment requiring hot water, inCluding connections to equipment fumished
under otliei Sectionsand Divisions of these Specifications.
D. Gas Distibution systems strall include all piping, fittings, valves and other items
specified herein fr9m the downstrearn side of Che meter throughout the building, and
connecuons to e$upment requnng gas.
PART2. PRODUCTS
2.OI MATERIALS
A. Piping: Comply with Section 15060.
B. Valves: Comply with Section 15100.
C. Insulation: Comply with Section 15250.
t-7554.01 15400-l
2.02 CLEANOUTS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Josam; Jay R.
Smith; Wade; or Zurn are acceptable.
l. Model numbers for Jay R. Smith are given for reference.
B. Locations: Provide cleanouts where indicated on Drawings and, even if not indicated,
at points ofchange in direction greaGr than 45 degrees in horizontal drains, at 50 foot
intervals inside building in staight runs, at end of branch drains, and at or close to base
of soil and waste stacks.
C. Size: Cleanouts shall be full size of pipe on prpes up to 4 inches in diameter and 4
inches for larger pipes.
D. Plugs For Cleanouts: Brass or bronze with countersunk slot and lead seal.
E. Cleanouts In Concrete: frame with rormd, adjustable nickel b'ronze cover having
vandal-proof screw-secured cover with scoriated exposed surface and "CO" legend,
flashing flange and spigot outlet. Jay R. Smith 4020.
l. Carpeted Floors: hovide standard cover in lieu of vandal-proof, with carpet' marker.
2. Resilient Floors: Less cover and with 7 inch by 7 inch access frame and cover
recessed for tile, vandal-proof screws. Jay R. Smith 4160.
F. Cleanouts In Walls:
l. Tee Cleanouts: Enanel coated cast iron tee with hub and spigot connections and
plug. Jay R. Smith 4510.
2. Hub Cleanouts: Enamel coated cast iron cleanout femrle with spigot connection
and plug. Jay R. Smith,l400.
3. Wall Access Covers For Dry Wall Constuction: Nickel bronze, face-of-wall
type, square frame and plate with anchor lugs and vandal-proof screw-secured
plate. Jay R. Smith 4730.
G. Outdoor Cleanouts: Enameled cast iron access frame with anchor flanges and heavy
duty scoriated nickel bronze cover with "CO" legend and vandal-proof screws.
Enameled cast iron femrle with plug and spigot connection. Jay R. Smith 4520.
2.03 TRAPS
A. Separate Fixhre Traps: Provide taps for fixnues and other equipment requiring
connection to drainage systems, except where tap is an integral part of the unit design.
B. Floor Drain Traps: Traps for floor drains and the like shall be approved "P" pa.ttern.
Material, weight and joint type shall conform to pipe and fittings of drainage system in
which installed.
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I15400-2 l-7554.01
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
PART 3 - E)GCUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install as specified in individual Sections' : \
3.02 TRAPS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instuctions.
3.03 FLASHINGS
A. Vents: Flash through roof with sheet lead flashing or with cast iron sleeve.
l. Lead Sleeve Installation: Peen lead sleeve over top of vent one inch with
sufftcient clearance to allow for vent pipe expansion.
2. Cast Iron Sleeve Installation: Caulk to vent and fasten roof flashing to clamp
device to make a watertight and druable joint.
3.04 B1IILDING STORM AND SANITARY SEWER SERVICES PIPING
A. Location Of Sanitary Sewer Line: Where not clearly defined by dimensions on th-e
. Drawings, the sewei shdl be not closer than l0 feet horizontally Fo* water supply.. marns or servlce lines, except that if ilre top of the sewer line is 3 feet or more below
the bottom of the witer liie, the sewer iine may be placed no closer than 6 feet
horizontally.
B. Sewer Lines Crossing Water Lines: Where sanitary-or stonn sewer line crosses within
3 feet above or belo#a water line, construct sewer line of cast iron l0 feet each side of
water line with no joint in the sewer line witrin 3 feet horizontally of the water line .
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I l-7554.01 15400-3
I
I sEcrIoN 1s440
PLTJMBING EQTTPMENT
I PARr r -cENERAL
I.OI RELATED SECTIONS
I A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.
I B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
C. Section 15400 - Plumbing.
I 1.02 SUBMTTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Product Data for all products specified.
I PARr2-PRoDUcrs
I 2.0r APPRoVED MANUFACTLIRERS
r A. Model numbers of certain manufacturers are given herein for reference purposes.
'.
Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are:
t 1. Fixtures and Trim: American-Skndard, Crane, Eljer, Kohler.
t 2. Trim (Additional AcceptablQ: Chicago Faucet, Delta Spealsnan, Symmons.
3. Carriers, Drains: Josaut, Jay R. Smith, Wade, Zum'
I 4. Seats: Beneke, Churclu Olsonite.
5- Flush Valves: Delany, Sloan, Speakman, Watrous, Zum Aquaflush.II 6. Sinks: American-Standard, Crane, Elkay, Just.
I 7. MopServiceBasins: Fiat,StemWilliams.
8. Electic Water Coolers: Cordley, Elkay, Halsey-Taylor, Haws, Oasis, Sunroc.
I g. Floor Drains, Roof Drains: Jonespec, Josam, Wade, Zum.
2.02 LAVATORIES
I A. Wall-mounted handicapped type, white viteous chinq 20 inches by 27 inches lavatory,
installed on concealed arm carriers.
I B. Cbrome-plated all brass 17 gagel-l/4 inch P-tap with cleanout, l-ll4 inch offset type
tailpiece with integral grid shdner, flexible supplies with loose key stops, and chrome-
s plated brass washerless single-handle centerset faucet with aerator.
I
I
I r-7ss4.0r r5440-l
2.03 WATERCLOSETS
A. Tank type, floor mounted, elongated front, l8 inch high bowl, rear outlet, siphon jet,
white vitreous china closet bowl, with close-coupled tank and water-conserving trim,
china bolt caps; flexible supply with loose key stop; solid white plastic, closed front,
cover, stainless steel bolts.
2.04 URINALS
A. UR-l: White, vitreous china washout tlpe with integral extended shields, flushing rim,
trap and 3/4 inch top spud, flush valve with vacuum breaker on screwdriver 3/4 inch
angle stop, and canier with bottom bearing plate feet or block base as required.
l. Urinal: American-Standard650l.0l0.
2. Flush Valve: Sloan Roval 186-1.
2.05 SINKS
A. 18 gage T302, l8-8 stainless steel two compar0nent sink with extended back ledge and
sound dampening; overall dimensions 22 inches by 33 inches wide; chrome-plated all
brass mixing faucets with 9-ll2 inch swing spout vandalproof aerator, flexible supplies
with formed ends, union nuts and stops, vandalproof handles.
B. l-l/2 inch chromeplated all brass waste tubing and ptrap with cleanout, chrome-plated
brass open-grid stainer.
2.06 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
A. Surface-mounted handicapped type with recessed refrigeration system, stainless steel
body, stainless srcel top andtrim, flexible bubbler, with inte$al strainer, chrome-plated
all brass l-ll4 inch trap, automatic sbeam regulator and screwdriver stop, and
self-closing push-bar valve.
B. Fan-cooled refrigerated condensing rmit to cool 8 GPH from 80 degrees F to 50 degrees
F with 90 degree F room temperature.
C. Electrical: 115 volts, single phase.
2.07 JANITOR'S STNK
A. MSB-I: Precast molded stone,24 inches by 24 inches with l0 inch high sides and 3
inch integral cast drain, removable strainer plate, stainless steel tbreshold caps on all
exposed sides, and chrome-plated all brass faucet with rigid hose-end spout and pail
hook, integral stops, vacurun breaker and wall brace.
l. Basin: FiatMSB-2424.
2. Faucef Chicago 897.
2.08 GARBAGE DISPOSERS
A. Food waste disposer with stainless steel grrnding compartnlenL removable splash
guard, sound shield, fast-mount installation. lDHp ll5 volt 8000 rpm direct-wire
motor.
t
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
t
I
t
It5440-2 1-7554.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
2.09 WALLHYDRANTS
A. WH-l: Non-freeze, self-draining type with chrome plated bronze wall plate, lockable
recessed box, hose thread spou! cylinder lock" and integral vacuum breaker. Jay R.
Smith 5509.
2.IO WATERHEATERS
A. EWH-I: Electic, UL and NSF listed with heater element(s), controls, insulated
glassJined tank, enameled steeljacket, dual anode rods, drain valve and over-tempera-
ture prctector.
B. Three year tankdananty.
C. Performance as scheduled onthe Drawings.
l. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, National;
Ruud; A. O. Smith; and State are acceptable.
PART3 -E)GCUTION
3.OI FIXTUREINSTALLATION
A. Connections: Install all fixtures and/or rough-in according to the fixture connection
schedule on the Drawings.
B. Mounting: Secure fixtures to walls and floor or countertops in accordance with manu-
facturpr's roughing in and setting requirements and form a rigid installation.
C. Exposed Pipe: Brass cbrome finish and finished with chrome cover plates or escutch-
eons where they project from walls and floors near the fixture to which they are con-
nected.
D. Stop Valves: Fumish and install at all fixtures and rough-in locations.
E. Vacuum Breaken: hovide at all outlets with hose connections.
F. Venting: Vent each fixture in accordance with sound plumbing practice and applicable
codes, to a vent stack through the roof. Should the Drawings depict a conservative ap-
proach requiring extra venting or more material than the codes require as a minimum,
install the waste and vent piping as shown on the Drawings.
G. Miscellaneous Hose Bibbs: Provide a hose bibb in each mechanical equipment room
where th0re is a cold water line present.
H. Joints Between Fixtures and Walls: Fill with white plastic seam compound.
I. Drain Flashings: Install roofdrains and floor drains u,ith 36 inch square 4 pound sheet
lead or 40 mil chlorinated polyethylene flashing clarnped into the fixture.
J. Gas Vent Install in accordance with manufactuer's instructions and clearance re-
quirements.
l-7s54.0r t5440-3
3.02 FIXTURE HEIGHTS
A. Install fixtures to heichf above finished floor as indicated an4 for those fixtures des-
igiated as handicapped, in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act
(lDA). Install othti components iuch as pushbuttons in accordance with ADA.
B. Water Closet:
l. Standard: l5 inches to top of bowl rim.
2. Handicapped: l8 inches to top of seat, 44 inchcs to flush valve contol.
C. Urinal:
l. Standard: 24 inches to top of bowl rim.
2. Handicapped: l7 inches to top of bowl rinb44 inches to flush valve contol.
D. Lavatory:
l. Standard: 3l inches to top of basin rim.
2. Handicapped: 34 inches to top of basin rim.
E. Drinking Fountain, Electric Water Cooler:
L Standard: 40 inches to top of basin rim.
2. Handicapped: 36 inches to top of spottt
END OF SECTION
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
t
I
I154404l-7554.01
I
I s'crroN tssoo
I AIRDISTRIBUTION
PART I -GENERALt-
I I.OI RELATED SECTIONS
t A. Section 01010 - Summary Of Work.
B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
I c. Section 15250 - Mechanical Insulation.
I
D, Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Systems.
I,O2 SI.JBMITTALS
I A. submitthe following:
I l. Ductwork Submit Shop Drawings, drawnto scale, of compleG duct layout.
I 2, Indicate all ft€ and smoke damFers, control daml€rs; access doors, air terminals
I
andaccessories.
3. Note all potential interferences with piping, conduit" structual elements, equipment
I
andbuildingfeatures.
4. Equipment Submit Product Data on all products specified hererurder to include
I physical dimensions, configuration, materials of constnrctioq mechanical and
I electical performance and other information as required to demonshate
compliance with these Specifications.
t 1.03 QUALITYASSURAI.ICE
I A. Fire and Smoke llazard, Classification: All products which make up the various air
f disuibution systems and all parts of these systems installed in or above ceilings stnll
comply with and/or be rated in accordance with the applicable requirements of NFPA
I 9oA,NFPA225,ASTME 84and.W-723.
B. lvlanimum Permissible Ratings:
I t. Flame Spread: 25.
I
2. Smoke Developed: 50.
I
I l-7ss4.01 15800-l
F ITT2.PRODUCTS
2,OI MATERIALS
A. Insulation: Comply with Section 15250.
B. Duct Liner: Bonded fiberglass sheet with thermosetting acrylic polymer surface on
air side.
1. Thermal conductance of0.23 per inch at 75 degrees F.
2. Thickness: One inch.
3. Duct sizes shown on Drawings are inside clear.
4. Approved Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, Schuller
Intemational Linacoustic HP is acceptable.
2,02 DUCTWORK
A. Startup: Prior to operating an air handling system all foreign material shall be removed
from interior of ductwork, fans, dampers, coils and plenums. Air handling systems are
to be operated only when filters are in place and rcplaced as per manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Contol Elements: Install air flow switches, flow measuring elements, and
motor-operated dampers ready for final connection of motor operators where indicated
on Drawings, and as specified under Section 15900.
C. Equipment Connections: Connect to mechanical equipment as indicated on Drawings
and/or as specified in these Specifications. Make transition as required to connect to
equipment furnished.
D. Field Corrections and Modifications: Ductwork shall be coordinated with the work of
other tades as required. Installation shall be planned and coordinated in advance to
avoid interferences to the maximum extent possible. Where, in the course of
installation, interferences are found to exist, make the changes necessary to accomplish
the installation satisfactorily, at no change to the Contact Amount, with the prior
written approval of the Architect.
E. Ductwork and Accessories:
l. Rigid Low Pressure Ductwork: New, lock-foming quality sheet steel having a
galvanized coating of 1.25 ounces total for both sides of one square foot with
materials, construction details, gauges, weights and thicknesses for ducts,
hangen, darnper plenums, access doors and tuming vanes in accordance with the
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I15800-2 l-7554.01
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct Constuction Standards and as shown
and specified.
2. Flat Oval and Round Ductwork: Zinc-coated steel fabricated with lock type or
welded longitudinal seams. Fittings shall be all welded zinc-coated steel.
3. Turning Vanes: Double thickness, spaced, locate4 dimensioned and constucted
in accordance with SMACNA.
4. Duct Sealer:
a. Ductwork shall be sealed in accordance with SMACNA.
b. Sealing shall include ill;oints, seams, holes and other openings.
c. Sealing shall also include all connections to fans, air terminals, volume
contol boxes, sound attenuators and all other parts of the air distribution
system including air handling unit sections.
F. Flexible Ducts: UL l8l listed, fabric supported by helically wound spring steel wire or
flat steel bands; rated to 2 inches WG positive and 1.5 inches WG negative for low
pressure ducts, and 15 inches WG positive or negative for medium high pressure ducts.
l. Provide factory pre-shapedoval end forconnections to oval inlets.
2. Limit each connection to 6 feet and change ofdirection to 90 degrees.
3. Attach to equipment collars and matching duct or sheet metal fitting by minimum
of 4 inch slip type engagement.
4. Coat collars and duct with liquid duct sealant just prior to slip joining.
I 5. Secure to both the duct and the equipment collar with a ll2 inch wide stainlessI steel factory preformed locking type worm screw clamping band pulled up tight
',
to result in air tight connections.
J G. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible Duct unapped with flexible glass fiber insulation,
enclosed by seamless aluminum-pigmented plastic vapor banier jacket; maximurn 0.23
K value at 75 degrees F.
I 2.03 VOLUMECONTROLDAMPERS
I A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Consruction Standards, and as
indicated.
t B. Fabricate splitter damFenr of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either
I
I
I
I
I
I l-75s4.0r
direction, and two gages heavier for sizes ovet 24 inches.
1580G3
l. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum l/4 inch
diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action flanged bushing with set
scr€w.
C. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-ll2 x 30 inch.
D. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x
72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized
channel frame with suitable hardware.
E. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple
blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
F. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.
G, On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-offmounting brackets, bases, or
adapters.
2.04 SPIN-IN FITTINGS
A. Bellmouth type with locking quadrant damper, tapered body with bead, constructed of
26 gage galvanized steel.
2.05 BACKDRAFTDAMPERS.
A. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of 16 gage
galvanized steel, or extuded alumintun, with edge-pivoted blades of ma,ximum 6 inch
width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with
90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustnent device to
permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2.06 FLEXIBLEDUCTCONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance \ilith SMACNA HVAC Duct Consruction Standards, and as
indicated. Provide between all fans and air handling units and their connecting duct-
work, and wherever shown on the Drawings.
l. Connectors shall be securely fastened to the unit and adjacent ductwork in a
manner that provides a leaktight connection wtrile permitting easy adjustment or
removal.
2. Misalignment between equipment and its connecting ductwork shall not be taken
up in a flexible connection.
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
I15800-4 t-7554.01
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. LJL listed fire-retardant neopr€ne coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,
minimum density 25 ozper sq yd, approximately 6 inches, crimped into metal edging
strip.
2.07 DUCTACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA IMC Duct Construction Standards and as
indicated.
B. Review locations prior to fabrication.
C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and
quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch
thick insulation with sheet metal cover.
D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks.
E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges
and two compression larches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48
inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.
F. Access doors with sheet metal scr€w fasteners are not acceptable'
2.08 DUCTTESTHOLES
A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in dwts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoPrene
plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or nrrist-on metal caps.
B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw
cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
PART3 -HGCUTION
3.OI DUCTPRESSURECLASSES
A. Fabricate all ductwork to SMACNA 2 inch static pressure class'
3.02 DUCTWORKFABRICATIONA}.ID CONSTRUCTION
A. Duct and Plenum Constuction: All sheet metal duct, plenum and casing construction
shall conform to the pressure classifications shown on the Drawings and shall be in
accordance with the construction details and installation details in the current edition of
SMACNA IIVAC Duct Constuction Standards.
1. In case of conflicting or incomplete information as to the oorrect pressure class,
obtain direction from the Architect prior to fabrication.
r-7554.01 15800-5
2. Materials and equipment furnished and/or installed under the work of this
Section ofthe Specifications shall be stored, handled, installed, tested and put in
operation in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as
specified.
3. Except as specifically shown on Drawings or specified herein, piping, electrical
conduit" building elements, and similar items shall not come in contact with or
pass through ducts or casings.
a- No obstructions, unless detailed on the Drawings, shall be allowed inside
of ductwork, plenums or casings without written approval of the Architect.
b. Such obstructions, if approved by the Architecq shall be steamlined using
the same material and gauge as the duct and consfucrcd in accordance with
cr.urent edition of SMACNA LPDS or HPDS.
4. Duct elbows in rectangular ductwork shall be standard radius, space permitting,
or miter type with double thickness turning vanes. Install only radius or five
segment elbows in round or oval ductwork.
5. Provide adjustable air-turning devices at all low pressure supply duct branch
takeoffs, including short takeoffs at grilles, registers and diftrsers.
a. Furnish supplemental support rails where required for proper operation and
fasten sheet metal over any duct lining subject to damage when operating
the device.
b. Adjusting rods shall terrrinate with regulators installed in locations
permitting easiy access for adjustnent.
6. Branch takeoffs shall be made in accordance with SMACNA.
7. Provide access doors in accordance with Section 15050, Basic Materials and
Methods, at all locations other than in lift-out ceilings where there are balancing
damper or air-tuming device operators.
B. Ducts Penetrating Partitions, Ceilings and Floors:
l. Openings for ducts passing through floors, walls or ceilings shall be packed with
mineral fiber insulation unless shown otherwise on Drawing details.
2. Openings for ducts passing through fire-rated floors, walls or ceilings shall be
sleeved and complete with fue darpers or doors per SMACNA Fire Damper
Guide, NFPA 80 or 90A, or as shown on the Drawings.
3. Openings for ducts passing through building roof shall be curbed and flashed
watertight unless shown otherwise on the Drawings'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I15800-6 l-7s54.01
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
C. Hangers and Supports:
l. Supports for ductwork and ductwork-connected equipment plus other specialties
and accessories shall be installed in a manner that will not result in or produce
excessive stess, deflection, swaying, sagging or vibration in the ductwork or in
the building stnrcture either during erection, cleaning, testing or normal operation
of the system.
a. Ductwork shall not be so restained as to cause it to snake or buckle
between supports or anchors or to prevent movement due to expansion and
contraction.
2. Ductwork shall be installed at equipment such that equipment can be
disconnected and removed without further supporting the ductwork.
a- Ductwork shall not introduce any strains or distortion to the connected
equipment.
3. Coordinate the location of the ducrwork support system with that of all other
installations.
4. Hangers and supports shall be installed complete, including lock nuts, rods, bolts,
couplings, swivels, inserts and required accessory items, all in accordance with
SMACNA.
5. Ductwork shall be supported individually, and not in combination with piping'
conduig and similar items, wiless shown otherwise on Drawings.
6. Hangers and supports slnll be installed complete, including lock nuts, rods, bolts,
couplings, swivels, inserts and required accessory items'
7. Ductwork shall be supported individually, and not in combination with piping,
conduit and similar items.
8. All hangers, supports, clamps, and angles in contact with the ductwork shall be of
the same material as the duct.
g, All bolts, nuts, washers, screws, and other fasteners shall be cadmium plated,
stainless steel or otherwise corrosion resistant'
3.03 DUCT LINER
A. Velocities To 1,500 Feet Per Minute: Duct liner shall be applied to the flat sheet with a
minimnm of 50 percent coverage of approved adhesive. Duct liner shall be cut to
assure snug closing cornerjoints.
l. Black surface of the liner shall face the air steam.
l-7554.01 15800-7
2. On top or sides of duct having a width or height dimension over 20 inches, the
liner shall be additionally secured with welded pins and speed slips or Gripnails
on a maximum of 15 inch centers.
a. Pins shall be cut close to the speed clip.
b. Pins shall start within 2 inches of the leading edge of each section and
within 3 inches of the leading edge of cross joints within the duct section.
3. All exposed edges and the leading edge of all cross joints of the liner shall be
coated with approved sealer.
B. Velocities From 1,501 To 3,000 Feet Per Minute: Duct liner shall be applied to the flat
sheet with a 100 percent coverage ofapproved adhesive.
l. Duct liner shall be cut to assure snug comer closing joints.
2. Black surface of the liner shall face the air stream.
3. On horizontal runs, tops of ducts over 12 inches and width and sides over 16
inches in height shall be additionally secured with welded pins and speed clips or
Gripnails on a maximum of 15 inch centen.
a. On vertical runs, welded pins and speed clips or Gripnails shall be spaced
on a marcimum of l5 inch centers on all width dimensions of 12 inches.
b. Pins shall start within 2 inches of the leading edges of each section and
within 3 inches of the leading edge of all cross joins within the duct
section.
c. Pins shall be cut closeto the speed clip.
4. Exposed edges and the leading edge ofall crossjoints ofthe liner shall be coated
with approved sealer.
3.04 ROOF-MOUNTEDEQUIPMENT
A. Roof Curbs: Where prefabricated roof curbs are specified, furnish for installation
under the Work of Division 7.
l. Veriff that roof openings shown on Structural and Architectural Drawings agree
with curb fumished.
2. Expedite the coordination ofany required changes to avoid field changes or delay
of the Work.
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I1s800-8 l-7554.01
-.r B. Install roof-mounted equipment on roof cubs after roof flashing has been completed.
Install accessories and connect dttctwork.
I END oF sEcrIoN
t
I
I
I
T
t
t r-7ss4.01 1580G.9
I
I sEcrroN 15850
I NRDISTRIBUTIONEQIIIPMENT
- PARTI-GENERAL
I l.ol RELATED sEcrroNsI
A. Section 01010 - Summary OfWork.I
I B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
I r.02 srJBMrrrALs
A. Equipment: Submit Product Data on all products specified to include physical
I dimensions, configuratioq materials of construction, mechanical and electrical
I performance and other information as required to demonstrate compliance with these
Specifications.
r 1.03 SAFETYREQIIREMENTS
I A. Fire and Smoke llaz:rd Classification: All products which make up the various air
I distribution systems and all parts of these systems installed in or above ceilings shall
comply with and/or be rated in accordance with the applicable requirements of NFPA
I 90A NFPA 225, ASTM E 84 andl'J'.-723.I
B. Maximum Permissible Ratings:
I l. Flame Spread: 25.
t 2. Smoke Developed: 50.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I 2.or MAKEUP ATRTTANDLINGTTMTS
I A. Approved Manufrcturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Reznor; McQuay;
I Trane; or York are acceptable.
I B. Provide units having supply fan and gas burner.
t C. Unit shall be selGcontained, packaged, factory assenrbled and prewired, consisting of
I cabinet and frame, supply faq indirect gas-fired heat exchanger and burner, bumer
t controls, air filters, and control dampers.
I D. Provide wiring terminals for a single-point three-phase power connection.r
t
I l-7ss4.01 15850-l
Cabinet: Galvanized steel with enamel finislq access doors or removable access panels
with quick fasteners screwdriver operated flush cam qrye. Structural members shall be
minimum 18 gage, with access doors or removable panels of minimum 20 gage.
l. Insulation: ll2inchthick neoprene coated glass fiber.
Supply Fans: Fonrard curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive,
and rubber isolated hinge mounted motor
Heat Exchangers: Aluminized steel, of welded construction.
Gas Burner: Atmospheric t5pe burner, capacity as scheduled on Drawings, with
pressure regulator, gas valves, manual shut-ofl intermittent spark or glow coil ignition,
flame sensing device, and automatic 100 percent shut-offpilot.
Gas Burner Safety Controls : Energize ignition" limit time for establishment of flame,
prevent opening of gas valve until pilot flame is prover! stop gas flow on ignition
failure, energize blower motor, and after air flow proven and slight delay, allow gas
valve to open.
1. High Limit Control: Temperature sensor with fixed stop at maximum permissible
setting; de-energize burner on excessive bonnet temperature and energize burner
when temperature drops to lower safe value.
2. Supply Fan Control: Temperature sensor sensing bonnet temperatures and
independent of bumer controls, or adjustable time delay relays with switch for
continuous fan operation.
3. Dampers: Provide outside air and return dampers with damper operator. Outside
air damper shall fall to closed position. Provide tight fitting dampers with edge
gaskets, ma:<imum leakage 5 percent at 2 inches pressure differential.
Filter Section: Provide a filter section disposible filters and side-panel access doors.
Operating Controls: Provide low voltage, adjustable thermostat to control burner
operation and ecomnomy sycle to maintain temperature setting.
l. Heating-OnlyUnits:
a. Provide wall thermostat.
2. Locate thermostat in room as shown.
Sequence ofOperation:
operation.
See drawings for system flow diagram and sequence of
M. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to Drawings and Division 16.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
G.
H.
J.
K.
15850-2 l-7554.01
B.
I
t
I
I
I
t
1. Motor: Open dripproofunless otherwise indicated.
2. Wiring Terminations: Provide termind lugs to match branch circuit conductor
quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box
sized to NFPA 70.
DCIAUSTFA}{S
Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Acme; American
Coolair; Breidert; Carnes; Greenheck; Jenq Loren Cook; or Penn Ventilator are
acceptable.
Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven centrifugal as indicated, with weatherproof spun
aluminum housing; fan wheel to be statically and dynamically balanced; motor mounted
on resilient rubber isolators; aluminum birdscreen with 85 Percent free opening; square
base to zuit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets.
Roof Curb: 12 inch high of galvanized steel with continuously welded seams, built in
cant strips, 2 inch insulation and curb bottorq and factory installed nailer strip.
Electrical Characteristics and Components:
l. Motor: Open dripproofunless otherwise noted.
2. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor
quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box
sized to NFPA 70.
3. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, fusible, in housing for thermal overload
protected motor.
Backdraft Damper: Crravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade constructiorg felt edged
with nylon bearings.
Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable
and adjustable pitch motor sheave selection so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set
at mid-position; fan shaft with self aligning preJubricated ball bearings.
Performance: Scheduled on Drawings.
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
t
I
I
2.02
A.
c.
D.
F.
G.
I
t 1-7554.01 15850-3
2.03 AIRINLETS A}.ID OUTLETS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Acutherm;
fuiemostat; Carnes; Grillmaseq llart & Cooley (Tuttle & Bailey); I&J; Krueger; Metal-
Aire; Tempmaster; or Titus are acceptable.
l. Model numbers of certain manufrctur€rs are given herein for reference purposes.
B. Tag El and Sl: Square steel louvered hce zupply diftrser; bweled drop face border;
rEmovable core; opposed blade volume damper adjustable from face; baked enamel off-
white finish.
1. Titus TDC.
C. Tag Rl: Rectangular ptastic egg-crate grille, with ll2"xll2" grid. White finish.
l. Titus 50P.
PART3.HGCUIfON
3.01 MISCELLA}.IEOUS EQIJIPMENT
A. Install all air distribution products in accordance with marufacnrers'instructions.
ENDOF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I1585041-7554.01
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
sEcrIoN 1s990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AIID BALAI\CING OF SYSTEMS
PART I.GENERAL
I.OI RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01010 - Summary Of Work.
B. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.
I.O2 DESCRIPTION
A. lndependent Testing and Balancing Agency: At completion of installation" the
mechanical systems- shall be adjusted aid 6dancea by an independent testing and
balancing agency CIBA).
B. Definition Of Independent: lndependent shall mean TBA is not associated-Yth^any
engineering, contracting, or manufacnring fim5 and derives its income solely from
testing, adjusting and balancing mechanical systems.
C. Contactual Obligation: Contactor shall retain the services of TBA and shall bear all
costs for these serrdces.
l. TBA slnll be rcquircd by Contactor to perform all work specified.
a Should the Balancing Report demonsfiate to the Architect that various
mechanical systems to not perform in part or in whole .as specified,
Contractor strill perform neces3ary repairs, inodifications or adjusnnents and
systems slrall be-retested and balanced by TBA. Submit a new Balancing
Report.
b. This process shall be repeated until satisfactory system performance has been
demonshated to the Architect all at no change to the Contract Amotmt
I.O3 SUBMTTALS
A. Approval Of TBA: Within 10 days after Confact award, submit the following
information. Architest slrall have final approval authority.
1. Name, address, telephone and fa:< number of TBA.
2. Name and regishation of responsible Registered Professional Engineer.
3. Sample data forms to be used in the balancing work.
4. List and description of at least five projects of similar size and scope to this
Project.
5. Signed statement showing TBA meets the criteria defined as independent
hereabove.
B. Balancing Reporfi Submit bound, sigred and sealed Balancing Report in accordance
witlr Section 01300 and the required contents.
l-7554.01 15990-t
1.04
A.
B.
QUALTTY ASSURAIICT
Standard Of Work TBA shall perform work in accordance with the National
Environmental Balance Bureau.
Experience and Qualifi cations :
l. Work to be performed under th,e supervision of a NEBB Certifigd f"frgt
Balancing anii eajusting Supenrisor, and a Colorado Registered hofessional
Engineer.
2. TBA shall have zuccessfully completed at least five projects of similar size and
scope to this Project.
Total system balance shall be perfomred in accordance with NEBB Procedural Standards
for Tesftng, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
1.05 PROJECTCONDITIONS
A. Start Of Work Contractor shall place the systein in working operation before the
balancing work begins.
B. Operation Of Systeins During Work Mechanical systems and equipment shall be in full
operation and shall continue in operation during testing and balanchg.
C. Equipment To Facilitate Balancing: Provide items as thermometer wells,-pressure test
coiks, access doors, and similar related items, as requircd to allow tests and adjusunents
to be made as described in this Section.
D. Drive Changes: lvlake changes of fan bels and sheaves to obtain the required .$-"pd 4l
other correctons to the systems necessary for proper as rnay be within the
scope ofthe Confact or as requested by tlrc Architect.
E. Prior to commencing air test and balance Worh check system for duct leakage, install
clean filters, check 6r excessive vibration, check for proper fan and motor rotatiorU check
volume dampers for proper operation.
l. Make adjustnents and perform conective Work as necessary'
2. Leave volume danpers in wide open position in preparation for balance Work.
I.06 WARRANTY
A, Extended Warranty: TBA stnll include an extended wanant€d of 90 days, after
completion of test'and balance work drning which time the Architect, at his discretion,
mayrequest a recheck or resetting of any syst€n or system component
PART2. PRODUCTS
2.OI APPROVED AGENCIES
A. Air-Right Inc.
15990-2 t-7554.0r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
B. Griffith Engineering Service.
C. TAB Services.
2.02 EQT.nPMENT
A. Calibration: Instuments used shall be accurately calibrated within a six month period
prior to any balancing and maintained in good working order.
l. Calibrating Agency: Calibration shall be done by an independent testing
laboratory or the equipment's manufacturer.
2. Tests: Ifrequested, conduct tests in presence ofArchitect's representative.
3. Certificate: A certificate of calibration shall be made available upon request of
Architect.
B. Provide all required instruments, equipment, tools, scaffolding, ladders and similar
related items to perfomr the Work required under this Section.
PART3 -DGCUTION
3.OI SYSTEM BALANCING
A. Systems To Be Balanced: Test, adjust and balance all air and water systems.
B. Tabulation: Test, adjust and balance all systems to meet the specified desigrr
performance and record all operating pararreters.
C. Conditions For Balancing: All systems shall be verified as to proper performance
desigrr by simulating desigrr heating and cooling conditions to the maximum extent
possible.
D. Scope: Testing, adjusting and balancing shall include the following:
l. Air Systems:
a. Fan Adjustnent: Adjust all fan systems to deliver design air quantities
within atolerance of minus 5 percent to plus l0 perc€Nrt.
l) Test air handling unit fans under all operating modes (full retum air,
full outside air, modulated damper position).
2) Provide proper size drive sheaves as required.
b. Volume At Outlets: Measue air volumes at all grilles, registers and
diffirsers, and adjust and balance to meet specified design parameters.
2. Motor Overload Protection: Observe and record in the Balancing Report ratings
of all motor thermal ovedoad protection fumished under this or any other
Division of the Specifications.
a. Furnish and exchange thermal overload devices as required for proper
motor protection.
l-7554.01 15990-3
3. Identification Of Balanced Condition: All balancing devices such as dampers
and valves shall be clearly and permanently marked as to the final balanced
position.
4. Finish: Plug all test holes with plastic plugs, replace access doors and belt
guards, replace all ceiling tile, daily ifbuilding is occupied.
5. Measurement Demonstration: Upon request of the Architect, demonstrate the
fluid and air flow quantities shown in the Balancing Report by field replicating
recorded measurements as selected by the Architect.
3.02 BALA}ICING REPORT
A. Content: After all balancing has been completed, tabulate the following and include in
Balancing Report.
l. Motor Data: RPM, amperage and voltage input to all motors'
2. Motor Protection: Nameplate data and overload heater capacity installed for each
motor.
3. Air Pressures: Entrance and exit static pressure at each fan, filter and coil.
4. Air Quantities: CFM capacity and RPM of each fan system, and at each grille,
register, diffirsers, and outside air, return and exhaust dampers.
5. Air Temperatures: Outside air temperature; inlet an! discharge temp-eratul€s,
including wet bulb temperatures at cooling coils, of all heating and co-oling coils
under simulated desigr conditions; temperature in all spaces whether or not
equipped with themrostat or temp€rature transmitter.
6. Identiff all equipment by tag nunb€r, location and area.
7. Discrepancies: Make note of any discrepancy between recorded parameters and
specified parameters.
8. Balancing Equipment: List all balancing equipment used and show calibration
date.
9. Adjustnents: List all adjustments made to all systems.
B. Drawings: Incorporate in the Balancing Reporg reduced size copies of the Mechanical
Drawings.
l. Cross Reference: Where the point of measurement cannot be described
adequately, provide a cK)ss reference number in the Balancing Report and at the
point of riedsurcment on the reduced size drawings.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Irs9904
END OF SECTION
l-7554.01
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
o
DIVISIOII 16 EI.ECTRICAI, SPECIFICATIOXS
Copyrlght 1995 - Beaudln Ganze ConsultLng Engineers' Inc.
sEcIIox 16010--GEIERIL PROVISTOIfS :
PART 1.OO--GEI{ERAL
1.01 PROVTSTOilS
A. tfork perforned under thl.s divtsion of tbe speclflca-
tlone shall confom to the requLrenents of DlvlsLon I'
and the electrlcal drawLngs and all ltens herelnafter
speclf ted.
-,... I1. Drawtnga and sP€clflcatlons for the electrlcal
work aie intended to deecrlbe a conplete electrl-
cal systeni onl,sElon of nlnor ltens obvlously
nece8BatTt to acsotlPltsb the above Lntent sball
not relleve the Contractor fron furnishlng and
Lnstalll,ng sam€.
2. Prl.or to any work belng performed under thls
dlvlsLon exanlne archltectural, structural ,
nechanlcal, and equlpnent drawlngs and
epeclf,lcatlons and lf any discrePancles occur
between tben and tbe:electrical drawlngs and
speciflcatlone, report 6ane to the Archit€ct Lnwrltlng and obtal-a-wrLtteIr laetructl'ons for tbe
rork.
3. ElectrLcal drawlngs are dLagrannatlc but shall be
followed as closely as actual construction of tbe
bultdtng wlll pernlt. AII changes fron drawlngs
n€ceeerry to nake tbe electrlcal ltork conform to
tbe bullding as constructed sball be nade wltbout
cost to the Oraer
4. Coordlnate the electrlcal work wlth the General
Contractor and be responslble to bin for satisfac-tory progress of aame. Coordinate electrl'cal work
wtth all other trades on the proJect wlthout cost
to tbe Omor.
5. AII work and natertals cJvered f,y drawings and
epecLficatLoas sball be eubJect to revl'€w tt any
tlne by repreeentatlvee of the ArcbLtect and
Owner. If the Arcbltect or Owler's agent finds
any naterlal or lnstallatlon that does not conform
to these drawLngs and speciflcatlons' Contractorshall remove the naterlal fron the prenLseg and
VAII., I.IAIIfIENAXCE BARN PtrASE II REIIOVATIOII 16010 . 1
"FOR PRrCrle OrLr" DECEMBER, 1995
correct the Lnstallatlon to the eatlsfactlon ofthe agent.
6. In acceptanc€ or rcJectlon of tnstalled electrlcalBysteus, no allowance wlll be nade for lack ofeklll on thc part of tbs Lnstallers.
1.02 WORK ITCLUDED
A. Ihc clectrl,cal eysten requtred for thts rork ls tolnclude, but ls not DeccssarLly ll.nl,tad to:
1. Secondary elcctrlcal eervLce to a polnt of conncc-
tLon wLth ths servlng utlltty conpany and all
aec€s8aqf nctcrlng equipncnt.
2. Cooplcte f,ccder ayet€[ to branch clrcult panels.
3. Corplctc branch cl.rcul.t rl.rlag for llgbtlng,Dotors, receptaclss, Junctlon boxes, and slnllar
u933.
l. LlEhtlng fLrtures, uall srltcbcl, reccptaclss, andslnllar ltene.
5. fflring, and outlcts for telepbone eystcl.
l.03 Extlrlf,rtrox oF PREursEs
Vtett sitc prLor to bld and verLfy that condltLona ar€ aaLndlcatad. Contractor shall lncludg ln hle bl,d costs
regul.red to nakc bis work nect erlstlnE condltLons.
l.ol Exrulf,aaror or BIDDITo DocuNErrE
A. Eacb btddar sball crarln€ tbs biddtng docuncntscarefully, ud not latgr thaa scvcn days prlor to thedate of rccclpt of blda, shall lake rrlttcn requeet totbe Arcbltcct for Lntcrprctatl,on or corrsctloa of anydlscrcpancics, anbtgulty, lnconsLataney, or errorthergln wht'ch hc aay dt'acovcr. lny Lnterprctatloa orcorrectlon wlll be lsgucd aa an addcndun by tbeArcbltect. Only a wrLttsn lntcr2rctatlon or corrcction
by addendun shall be blndlng. f,o bl.dder shall rcly
upon lnterprstatlon3 or correctlons gLven by any othernethod. If dLscrepaactcs, anbtgulty, Lnconslstcncy, orerror are not covered by addcndun or wrltten dlractLve,
Contractor eball lacludc ln hls bld, Iabor, naterlals
and nethods of conEtructlon resultlng tn blgher cost.After award of contract, no allowance or sxtra
conpensatlon wlll be nade on bsbalf of tbe Contractor
VAIL I{AIlcTEf,If,CE BTRIT PEASE II REf,OVATIOII 16010 - 2
'FOR PRrCrfG ONLY' DECEUBER, 1995
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
due to hls fallure to nake the wrltten requestE as
deecrlbed above.
B. Ibe pereoa subnltttng tbe reguest wlll be reeponelblefor lts pronpt dellvery. FaLlure to ao requeatclarlflcatLon of any lnadequacy, onisslon, or confllct
wlII not rell.eve the Contractor of responsibtltty. Ihe
stgalag of the contract wlll be consldered astnpllcitly denotlng that the contractor has a thorough
conprebensl.on of the fuII Lntent and scope of the
worklng drawings aad speclfLcatione.
1.O5 CODES ATTD SIA,IIDIRDS
A. Conply wlth all appllcable codes, laws, Induetry
etandards and utlllty conpany regulatl.onE.
B. Conply wLth requlrenents of UndenrLters Laboratorles
for all Ltens lnstalled for which U.Ir. staudards bave
been establLshed.
1.06 PERMTIS, FEES & !|OIICES
A. Obtaln and pay for aII nacessaqf pernLts' Lnspectlons
and certlflcates that nay be nscessary for the full
conpletlon of the r,rork.
B. f,otlfy prop€r authorltleg when work ls ready for
inspectl-ons requlred by appltcable codes, rules and
rcgulatlons, allortlng sufflcLent tlne for inspectlonsto be nade wltbout blnderlng progress of the work.
Furnish to the otraer coples of lnspectlon certlflcatesof acceptarc€.
1.O7 IESTS
upo! conpletlon of all work and adJustnent of all cqulpnent,
provlde conplete operatlonal tests of all electrical equlp-
nent provlded under thls dlvlslon.
1.O8 rnRnArtr
Guarantee that all work governed by tbts dtvtslon shall be
free of defecte Ln worknanehlp, materlals and parts for a
perLod of one (1) year after wrltten acceptance. Pronptly
repal,r, revise, and replace defects as dLrected wl,th no
addltlonal to the Oerner (Lanps and fuees are exenpt. )
1.09 IDEIIIIFIC,AIIOf,
A. In addltlon to provldlng color codlng for all wlrLng
VAII, TiIAIf,TBf,ATTCE BARTT PEASE II REf,OVATIOX T6010 - 3
"FOR PRrCrlC OXLI' DECEIIEER, 1995
installad under this dl.vlslon, provLde the followLngelectrtcal equLpnent I'dsatlficatl-on:
1. Mount a typewrlttcn renovable dlrcctory lns1de the
door of cach panelboard to include the followLnglnforuatlon: panclboard destgnatlon, locatlon of
naln clrcult breaksr or dlsconnect, LndLvldual
clrcult breaker nunber, and cLrcult descrlptl'on.
-
2. l.tark all notor starters, contactors, and otber
eontrol devicce wlth engraved plastLc naneplatee
as to clrcult nunbcr and functlon of devl'ce.
3. Provlde angraved plastLc naneplates on
swltcbboards, panclboardr, dlsconncct swltcbegt
notor control centcrs, tranefomsrsr etc.
Lndicatlng equtpncnt deslgnatl'on (or deslgnatlon
of cqullnent genrcd) and voltage.
1.10 EXISTIf,G COltDIIIOtrS
A. Extstlng syatsns and condl'tl'oas sbora on drawl'age for
eristlng bulldtngs arG to be noted "for guLdance only".
The Eloctrl,cal Coatractor ehall f,tcld check all
exlstlng condLtlons prl,or to blddtng and ls to lncludeln bLs lta an allosaacc for srtenal'oa, rcooval and/or
relocatLon of srl.stlng condul.ter ulrcer devlcee,
flxtureg, or other equtprcnt ag lndlcatcd on the plans
or as requtrcd to eoordluatc aad adapt ngr and exletLng
elactrlcal Byst€n to all otber work.
B. tlbere the reuse of erlgtlng condulter wlres, devlces,
etc. Ls penteslble, aakc ccrtaln tbat the wLrt.ng for
sane ls contlauous fro outlct to outlct and that such
cLrcult or Bysters shall pass through no outlet or
Junctlon boxas rblch nay:be rendercd LnaccessLble by
tbe atructural changce to be nade to thc bulldlng.
ErLstlng coadults, wlre, devlces' stc. which are not
Lndicatcd for reuse shall bccous tbe property of thle
Contractor borever llghtlnE fLxturee, panel fused
swl-tch€a' cLrcult breakcrs, wt're etc. ahall beconc tbe
ProP€rty of tbe Oltner.
C. Eyaten outages shall be pctmltted only at tlnes
approved by Owoer--in wrLting. ffork whLch could result
ln an accldental outagc (bayond branch clrcuits) shall
be performed wtth the Ormer's naLntsnance Persosnel
advlsed of such work.
D. Servlce sbatl be nalntalncd to erlstlng areas durLaE
constructlon. Contractor sball provldc portable
VAIIJ MAIltTEf,AilCE BIRIT PEASE II REf,OVAIIOX 16010 - 4
"FOR PRICII{G Of,Ll' DECEI'IBBR, 1995
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
E.
F.
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
generators, cablesr outl€tE, €tc. as requlred to
naLntatn contlnul-ty of servl.ce. Placement of such
portable egutpnent shall be subJect to Owner approval .
cenerator Cysten sball be cornplet€ tnd operable and
shall Lnclude required accessoriea, fuel tanks, plplng,
nuffler, block heater, battery cbarger' etc.
Inmedtately after award of contract, verlfy available
pbyslcal space and anpactty of exlstl'ng panelboards'
Ewttchboards, dlstri.bution boards, motor control
centetrs, etc., and provlde wrltten documentatlon of
flndtngs to tbe Arcbltect/Englneer; Documentatlon
shall include a ninLnun 2l-hour recordlng anpere
reading on all eristlng swl.tchgear belng utlllzed for
thls project.
Provlde new updated panelboard dlrectories for exlstlng
and new cLrcults being utlllzed for conpletlon of
project.
EtfD oF SECIIOX
VAIL MAIf,jfBf,AItCE EARI PEASE.FOR PRICIT|C OI{LI"
II RBIIOVATIOI
DECEMBER, 1995
15010 - 5
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
II)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTIOIf 1610O-.BASIC MATERIALS AIID METHODS
PART 1. OO--GETfERAL
I.OI MATERIAL
A. All electrlcal naterial shall be new and of the qualtty
and type speclfled.
a. Manufacturer and catalog nunber shovsn ln these specLfl-
cations or on drawings are lntended as a guJ.de to
quality. Equlvalent-naterials and equlplent of otber
ianufactureis wlll be considered provtdlng such substL-
tutions are requeeted ln accordance wlth the provlslons
of paragraph 1.-O4 and shall Lnclude all lafornatlon
necesaary to support the clain of equlvalency.
C. f,o €rtanelon of complatlon date shall be allowed for
tLne lost l-n conelderatl'on, shtpplng, or installatlon
of approved substltutLons. Revlew of substltutlons
slgnlfles general equalLty of naterlals and equlpnent
only. lhtl revlew doee not rell'eve the Contractor of
responsLblllty for proper operatton of tbe systen,
conpUance wLth spectfl'cations and necessary cbanges
due to dlnensLonal dlfferences or spac€ requLrenents'
1.02 SHOP DRAWilCS
A. 6bop drawlngs requlred for tbls proJect are ae follows:
1. Ltghttng fl-xtures
2. Eervice egulpnent
3. Panelboarde
4. Swltchboards
5. Motor starters
6. Dlgconnects
7. lransforusrs
B. Pres€nt shop drawlng submlttal data at one tLne, bound
In tbree-rtng btndeie, lndexed ln a neat and orderly
nanner. Partlal subnlttals wIIl not be accepted.
Provlde four sets of subnl'ttal data, unless noted
otbemlse ln Dlvlsion I.
VAIL IIAITIEIfAIICE BAruT PHASE II REIfOVATION
'FOR pRrcllfc olfLY" DECEIIBER, 1995
16100 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
c.
D.
E.
A.
B.
ProvLde, with shop drawLng subnittal , ll4" scale
drawLnga of rooos wltb clsctrlcal sw!.tcbgear andtransfomers. Layouts ehall ebow locatLons of,shall be coordlnatad wlth nechanLcal egulpment,
equlpnant shall be drawn to gcale.
layout
and
and
Place orders for all equLpnent Ln tLne to prevent any
delay ln constructLon schedule or conpletlon ofproJect. If any naterlals or equipuent are not orderedin tlne, addltlonal charges nade by equlpnent manufac-turers to conplcte th€lr equlpnent Ln tt'ne to neet
constructlon echedule' together wlth any speclal
haadllag chargee, sball be borne by thc Contractor.
Shop drawings: Contractor agr€ss tbat shop drawing
subnlttala processed by tbe cnglneer arc not change
orderel that the purPosc of shop drawlng subnlttals by
the Contractor ls to dcnoastrate to the engineer thattbe Contractor uadergtands the dasign concept, that be
denoastrates hls uaderetandtng by lndlcating whLch
equLpncnt and naterial be lntcnds to furnlsb and Ln-stall and by dctalllng the fabrtcatlon and lnstallatlon
nethode be lntsuds to use. Contractor further agreeathat tf dovl,atl,ous, dlscrcpanclee, or conflictg between
shop drawLng subnlttalc and contract docuncntg ln tbeforn of desLgn drawl,ngs and slrclfications are dlscov-
ered eltber prLor to or after ahop drawLng eubnittals
are processed by thc cnglneer, tbe desLgn drawlngs and
speclflcatlons ehall control aad sball be followed.
l.o3 RECORD nRlrrrcs
A. Durlng the progrces of tbe rrork, nalntaln a! accurate
record of the lnstallatl,on of tbe elgctrl.cal syatcn.
upon corpletlon of tbs clectrlcal LnstallatLon, trane-fer all record data to blue-llne prlnts of tbe orlglaaldrawings. As a condltlon of acccptancc of the proJeet,
delLver to the Arcbltect one copy of the record
drawinEs.
1.O4 SUBSIIIUTTOIf8 AXD IPPROVILS
Sone naterlals are specl.fted by nanufacturer'B nao€.
MaterLals of eguivalent qualLty uay bs ueed Lf acceptcd
by the Engineer. Refer to paragraph E bqlow for
substitutlons.
BLdder's Cholce: MatcrLal or equlpnent llsted by
several nanufacturer's nanea ars Lntended to be
bLdder's choLce, and any of the ll,sted nanufactur€r'B
nay be used La the base bld.
VAIL MAIIITENAITCE BARX PEASE II RE}IOVAIIOII
'FOR PRrCr[G Of,Lr' DECEIIBER, 1995
16100 - 2
I
t
t
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
II
I
t
c. Perfornance Specl.ficatlons: t{ben any ltern Is specified
by reguLrernenls to neet a perfotmanggl Industry or
rigutittng body standard or ts speclfl'ed by.a generlc -sp-c, 1no-nanulacturer's name fisted) 9o prlor approval
U| tire Eoglneer ls needed unless speciflcally called
for tn tbese sPecLflcatlons.
D. Contractor to be responslble for any changes and costs
to accormlodate any e-qulpnent except the flrst naned in
the speclflcatlon.
E. Substltutions of uaterlal
otber I'tene of naterLal and egul-pnent not listed as
equLvalents may be offered (a€ the contractor's optlon)
as alteraatee lo specl.fled itens by submltting tt wtth
hl-E base bld on tb- Etdder's letterbead'
Suchalternateproposalsshallnotbelncludedundertbe base bld and nust be acconpanled by full
descrlpttve data on the propos-d equLp-nent, together
wtth J statenent of tbe Losl to be added or deducted
for eacb Lten. If any such alternate materlal
proposalsaretobeconelderedrtheContractorshallsubmitallstoftbeproposedalteraatesubstltutlon
Ltens wlthLn 14 daye of lward of contract. Tbs request
for proposed substitutlons shall not be accepted'by tbe
Engtneer due to schedullng or delLv€ry concerne'
1.O5 PRODUCT EANDI.II{C
A. Use all neanE !€ceBeary to protect electrlcal system
naterials before, durlng and after lnEtallatLon and to
protect the lnstalled work and natertals of all other
trades.
E, In the evant of danage, I'nrnedLately nake all repaLrs
and replacenents necessary to the apProval of the
Arcbitect at no addLtl'onal cost to tbe owner'
C. UPon conpletl.on of all tnstatlatlons, lanping and
t-estt-ngr-thoroughly tnspect all enposed portlons of tbe
electrlcal lnst;Ultlon-and conpletely renove all
exposed labels, so1l, narklngs, and forelgn naterlals'
VAIL I,IAItrSEIIAXCE BANN PEASE II NEf,OVATIO}T
"FOR PRrCrrC Of,r,r" DECEMBER' 1995
16100 - 3
PART 2.OO.-PRODUCTS
2.O1 RACETTAyS rrfD FrtErrCS
A. Conduit:
1. Condults Lnstallcd underground or ln grade slabsshall be schedule lO PVC wlth Eround wLre.
2. ConduLte subJcct to nechanlcal danage or whereothcnlec requlred by code ehall be galvanl.zedrtgtd beavy wall or lnternedlatc netal conduLtiall other condult nay be electrlc uetalllc tubl,ng.
3. Flc:lblc retalllc coaduit ehall bs used whsrcvlbratLoa or otbcr rcaaons do not allow golld
connectl.ons to rctora, equl.prclt, stc. Flcr layalso bq to fLsb Ln crl.sttng ralla or whersrcqulred to co!!€ctLoa t'n rl,llrork. fbe ugc offler shall be bcld to a llnl.nun. tfhere f,lcrLblenetallic condult Ls used ln arsag rubJect touolstura, PvC-coat.d flor (:cal-tlta) sball bc
used.
B. Flttl,ngs:
1. Ugc eolvcnt reldod flttlngs tor all PltC condutt.
Z. Uac Bct-acr€w or conprcsslon ftttlngs for all EtlIconduit.
3. Use threaded ftttings for all rlgld conduLt.
2.O2 WINE AfD qAAI.E
A. Voltage ranEs O to 2l: Elgh conductlvl.ty coppcr,
tbermo-plaetlc insulatloa, 3O0 volt retlng.
B. Voltage ralga 24 to 6O0: Elgb conductlvlty coppcr,noLsture-rssistant and bcat reglstant therno-plasticLnsulatlon, 6OO volt 75oC ratlng for Ecncral uae. Forbld ftrtures and wirlaE rltbln 3 lncbce of fluorescentballasts wl.re ehall be copper, nlalnun 9OoC rated.
SLzes lndlcated are for installatlon la a naxl,nun 30oCanblent. Conductor anpaclty ehall be derated for
bJ,gher anblent Lnstallatlons. 600 volt alunlnun wlre
and cable ln sizes 1/O and largcr nay be substttutedfor copper on so!'nl.cer and feedere If anpaclty lr oqualto or greater tban coplrcr, and voltagc drop is egual to
VAIL MATI|IEIIAIICE BERI| PEASE II NEf,OVAIIOf,.FOR PRICIf,G OXLY" DECEMBER, 1995
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
16100 - {
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
or leaa tban copper and shall be termi.nated at
switches, Iugsr-Ll.rcult breakers, etc., wlth Mac-1dapt
series 'llPt' nachlne conpreselon adapters or egual .
C. Conductors used specl.fLcally for equipnent or servtce
ground to be bare or nay have lnsulation to natcb
clrcult/feeder conductors.
2.03 tfrRA COf,rECrrOt{S
A. All electrl.cal connectlons shall be electrically and
'nechaalcally secure, usLng the followlng methods:
1. lfl.re size *8 and ernaller--pr€ssure type connectors
(scotcb-Iok) or equLvalent.
2. lflre size #6 and larger--nechanlcal or conpresslon
lugs, Burndy, I & B, Ilsco or equl'valent.
B. lflre temlnatLon provlelons for panelboards, clrcult
breakers, safety Gwltcbes, and all otber electrl'cal
apparatus sball-be ll.sted as sultable for 75"C.
2.O4 OUTLET BOXES
A. Outlet boxes shatl be: one plece steel, galvanLzed,
steel CLty ElectrLc, Appleton Electrlc' Raco or aP-
proved equLvalant.
2.'05 BRAIICE CIRCUIT PAXEI,S
A. CLrcult breaker type wl.tb htaged door, Lndoor cl-rcuLt
dtrectorl'. Ctrcult brealrers to neet the non-lnt€r-
changeablltty requlrenents of tbe tr.E.C. wbere appllca-
ble;-all breikars 2O tnPere elngle pole unlese other-
wlse noted; all nultipl- unlts comon trlp. Mal'ns wLtb
lugs or nain cLrcult breakers as shown on tbe panel-
boird scheduleE. AII panels to have neutral and ground
bus. Panel boards sball be Square D.
2.06 DEVTCES
A. SwitcheE, receptacles, and otber devlces sball be Pass
Seynour, Levtton, or Bubbel speclfl'catl'on gradgr lvorY
Ln-color; otber devices of equlvalent quallty by otber
nanufacturers nay be substttutedr provldl'ng a list of
alternate devlces l-s approved ln wrltlng by the
Archltect prlor to lnstallatlon.
VAIL I.IAIf,TEf,AfCE BINf, PEASE II REtcOVAIIOf,
'FOR PRICII|G OI{LI' DECEI.IBER' 1995
15100 - s
2.07 DTSCOf,f,ECTS
A. Safety swltcbeg shall bc heavy-duty, qulck-naker qulck-
break wlth cover Lnterlock' fuslble or non-fuelble' ln
enclosure to sult locatl,ons and requLrc[enta. Switcheeshall bc Equarc D.
2.08 FUSES
A. DuaI clcnent tLne delay, reJcctlon tyPc, btgb capacityor current llnltlng as ebwn on tbe drarlags. Bussoan
nanufacturing conpany' Llttslfuee and Oould Sbawuut.
B. Provlds one (1) eet of three (3) BPar. fuses for each
elze aad type provlded on thls proJcct. Install fusee
la a hLaged door, ehegt retal rtorage cablnet cqulppcd
wtth cllps or cublclce' cacb narkcd wltb the stze aad
type fuec storsd thcrcln. Provlde nencplate "sparefusss'. Ilstall la locatlonB as dlrcctcd by owner.
2.O9 STARTERS
A. All 3 pbase atartsrs to bavg ovGrcurrcnt Protcctlon onall three lcgs.
B. Startcra wbLcb ars funnishqd rlth control clrcultesball bavc-Lntcgral traasfoner and 12O volt coatrolclrcuLt. All starterg to havc tbcr:nal overload relays
elzed for approxl,nately llst of full load lotor cur-
rsnt.
2.1O EXTEnI|AI, PUI.LBOXES
A. Pullboxee, cablncts, ctc. nouatsd on thc crtgrLor at
grade lcvcl, sball bc rgatberproof typc ulth blngcd
lockable covars securcd rtth tanpcrproof scr.wa.
PART 3.OO--EXECUIIOn
3. 01 COIfDUIT If,S8AI.IAEIOf,
A. All wlrlng shall be lnetallod ln llstgd netalllc
raceways. Raceways ln glab-on-grade or below grade
shall be schedule 4O PVC. fransLtl.ons fron below to
above grade shall be wlth rigLd steel clbows wlthP.v.c. ilacket or approvcd equal protcctlon. EilEflttl.nge shall be nalleable lron or staal . Conn.ctorgsball be Ineulated throat tyPe.
VAIL MAIXTEf,Af,CE BIn}| PEASE II RETOVAAIOI|
'FOR pRrcrtfc ottl.l' DECEMBER, 1995
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
16100 - 6
I
I
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
B. trlake condult bends wlth etandard condult elbows or
conduLt bent to not lees than the sane radlus. All
bends shall be free from dents or flattening.
C. All flttLngs t.n wet places, locatLons €xPosed to weatb-€r, or burled ln rnasonry, concrete or fl.llr shall be
water-t1ght.
D. cap condult ends to prevent entrance of ioreLgn naterl-
als durlng constructlon.
E. Rurr cotrcealed condults ln a dlrect llne. Run exposed
condul-ts parallel to' or at rlgbt angles wLth, lineeof the bullding. fnstall all condults at least 6" away
from flues, stean and hot water plpes.
F. Run underground condults a nlnl.nu[ of 2' O" below
grade.
C. Seal all conduit penetratl.ons of fLre rated walls'
floor, or ceLlings wtth U.L. llsted "Dow Cornlag" *2000or *2OOl flre stop sealant or equivalent. 2
E. All enpty rac€nay systcns shall have a *12 pullwlre or
equal , and shall be Ldentlfted at all JunctLon' pull
and terul.natlon pol.nts, usl.ng Pernanent netalllc taEs.
fag sball LndLcate Lntcnded uee of conduLt,originatlon, and termtnatlon polnts of each l-ndlvldual
cond,ul,t.
I. Flexible netal conduLts shall have a code- sl'zed coPPer
grounding conductor. Increase conduit slze as
required.
it. Condults penetratLng through roof sball have roof
flashlng wltb caulk type counter flasblng eleeve.Installatlon shall be watertlght.
K. lfbere panels are lnstalled flush wlth walls, enpty
conduLts sball be ertended fron tbe panel to an
accessl.ble spac€ above or below. A nlnLnun of, one
314"e shall be Lnstalled for €v€ry tbree slngle pole
Epare cLrcuit breakers or sPacesr or fractl.on thereoft
but not less than two coadults.
3. 02 I{IRE IIfSIAI.I.ATIOIf
A. Brancb clrcuLt conductors sball be as follows:
1. For general applicatlons through Elze t8: IEt{lf
?5oC wlre aad full sLze ground, or type lBEf, 9O"C.
VAIL I,TAIf,IEt{ArtCE BARX PEASE II REI|OVATIOTf
"FOR PRICIIfC OtfL!" DECEMBER, 1995
16100 - 7
t
2. Brancb cLrcuit conductors through stze {l1o to be I
solld, *8 and larger stranded.
3. tlLntnun wire ueed for branch clrcul,ts shall be *12 I
SBlfX protected by 20 anP€re cLrcuLt breakere.
{. The drawtngs lndlcate the Ecneral dlrection of
routes of brancb clrcult hone runs. Continue all
such hone runa to panels as tbough the routes w€re
conpletely lndlcatcd.
5. Conductors eball bc contlnuoue fron outlet box tooutlct bor, or JunctLon box' wlth no splices
ercept in eucb bores.
6. Do lot Lnetall wlre ln condults unttl after plas-
terlag or dr1'-wall le conplctcd and aII noLsturc
bas been rcloved froa condul.ts.
3.03 OUTLEI ItrSTALI.f,TIOf,
Revl,cw arcbl.tsctural aad lechanl.cal drewlngs beforc
lnstallLng outlcts. Cbaagl.ag of outlcts to confor:n to
these drawLngs and aay other ellgbt change ln nountlng
bctght or Iocatloa of outlete rcqulrcd shall be consl,d-
ered as a part of tble coltract. Usa outlet boxes of
sufflcl.ent slzc and sbapc to bget sult the partlcular
locatLon and to contaL! tbe qncloscd wlre and conncc-
tlons wlthout crorldlng. Sizs all borcg Por f,.E.C.
Switcb and recclrtacle outlat bores sball bs standard
bores wlth cover Plat€s. lfhere [orc tha! one swl.tcb or
device ls located at one poLnt, usc gatrg boxes and gang
cover plates.
Flush nount ltghttng ewltcbgs {'O" cGtterltna above
fLnlshed floor unlees othenLse Ladl,catsd. Flugh aount
wall type receptacles and other nall rountcd wlrlng
devlces and outlets 18 Lacbea cgntsrllne above fl.nlehed
floor unlcee othcndse indLcated.
3.O4 BRAICE CIRCUIT PAITEI.S
Install panelboards 5' 0" centerllna above flnlshed
floor unless noted on the drawlngs.
3.05 MOIORS' IIOTOR S:IARIERS, SAFETI DISCOf,IIECIS' I'IECEAIICAL
EgUTPMENT COI{TROLS
Unless othenrlse lndlcated, all rotorB and controle
sball be furnl.shed, set ln place and wl'red Ln accord-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
A.
B.
c.
A.
A.
VAIL I,IAIf,jrENAI5CE BARIT PEASE II REI|OVAIIOX
"FOR PBrCrf,G OtrLr' DECEIIBER, 1995
16100 - 8
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
aDce wl.tb tbe followl.ng schedule. (uD ls Mechan!.cal
Dlvisl.on--ED ls Electrical Divtsion).
(1) If furnlshed as part of factory wlred
egulpnent, tben wlrlng and connectlons
only by ED.
(2, If lLne tbernostats, tlme swLtchee,
etc.r carry the full load current to aly
notor, they shall be furnlsbed by the
nechaalcal divLel.on, but shall be eet Ln
place and connected under tbe electrlcal
dLvlslonr except tbat wbere such ltens
are an lntegral part of the necbanlcal
equlpment, or directly attacbed to
ducts, plplng, etc. ' they shall be set
ln place under the nechanLcal dl.vl.sloa
and connected by the electrlcal
divLsLon. If they do not carry the full
load current to any motor, they shall
be furnlsbed, set J-n place and wired
under the nechanical dl.vl,sion.
VAIIJ MAIIIEIfAIfCE BARI| PBASE II RETfOVAIIOIf 16100 - 9
"roR PRrcrNc otfLt' DECEMBER, 1995
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ITEM FUR}fISEED
I'NDER
SET IN PI.ACE
OR MTD.
Uf,DER
IIIREI' Af,D
COIfIIECTED
UIfDER
1. Equlpnent notors,themal overloads and
resistance heaters (3)uD MD MI'
2. Magnettc starters and
overload relays (3)ED ED(1)ED
3. Dlsconnect switcbes,
fuEed or unfueed, b.p.rated swltches, tbermal
overlaod swltcbee andfuses, nanual operatlng
swLtches (3)ED(r)ED(r)ED
l. Ihermostats, conrolrelays, control trans-formers, controlpanels, notor valves,
danper Dotors, golenold
valves (3)lrD lrD(2 )lrD (2 )
5. Duct detectors MD MD ED
(3) fhe above lLet doeg not attenpt tolncludq all conpoDqnta. All ltene
neceaeary for a conplete ayat€n shall b€
lncluded Ln the basa contract.
3.06 ELECIRICAL SUPPORIIf,G DEVICES
Support all panels' Junctton borqs and otber electrlcal
devLcgs Ln a uanner as requlred by thc f.E.C. Use
extra bracl.ag, supportsr etc. as necssatry to provlde a
prop€r and substantLal base to whLcb all electrlcal
equl-pnrent le attached.
Bolt-frse etandlng equlpnent to {" hl.gh concrete
housekeeplng pade.
3.O7 DEl,lOLIlIOf,
Provlde elcctrLcal dcnolltlon ae rcquLrcd. Refer toarchltectural denolltlon drarLngs for locatl.on and
extcnt of donolltlon. Contractor sball vlsl.t eLto
prLor to btd to deter:ulna ertent of work Lnvolved.
Provlde labor and natgrlals as raqutrcd to naLntaln
and/or rcatorc contLnulty of servLcs to existLngclrculte.
Field vcrlfy exLstlng cqulpuent,or clrcults that are
renat'nl.ng to bs reconncctcd to acr or crletlng
ewitchboards/panelboards. ProvLdc swLtcbas and
receptaclgs and e*tend/nodify condult, wLre, €tc. aB
requl.red to restore contl.nulty of clrcult(s).
Provlde all aecassary denoll,tlon to rcnove e:l-stLng
unused condultr rlrer cable, J-borcs, receptaclest
switchse, llgbts, flrc slara dev:Lcas, etc. conplctewltb agcocLatod clrculttng to sourcG. lfbere Lt ls not
feaelble to renove the above' outlet rhall bc
abandoned, rlrc renovcdr and blank coycr platcs
provl.ded.
3.08 E9UrPrGrr FUiltrAlAD Bl O8BER6
Verlfy eract locatLon and requlrenents of equlpnent to
be furalshed by othcrs prl.or to rouEh-Ln.
See DivLslon 15 drawlnEs for locatlon of mecbanicalegulpnent. Provlde eervlce to, and connact equLpnant
as requlred.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
B.
A.
B.
c.
A.
B.
VAIL IIAINIIETAITCE BAnlT PEASE II NENOVAIIOTf
"FOR pRrcrtfc otrLr' DECEIIBER, 1995
t6loo - to
I
r 3.o9 E9urPMEIfr comEcrrotfs
I A. Flnal connsctlons to notorar transforners and other
t vlbratlng eguipnent shall be wlth seal tite flex and
approved flttings. Do not secure condul-tst
I dlsconnects, or devlceg to ductwork or nechalical
I equlpment.
B. Flnal connectlone to egulpnent shall be Ln accordance
I wlth nanufacturer's api'ro-ned wirlng diagrans, detal'ls,t and Instructlons. It shall be the Contractor's
responsLbtllty to provlde materLals and equlpnent
conpatlble wlth egulpnent actually supplled.
I ,n.
: c' tli::i:fi:,'::::::::i.::':l"l'il'i3.33'l:llilr starters
I as requLred by the tenperatur€ control Contractor.
Startars shall contaln 120v control transforner' pllotI tl'lkrif""H":lll3"i.3i""?*:tii"il'l3l.li.3:*l:::u'I swLtches, relays, atc.) requlrcd. Subnlt elenentary
control dlagrans. ,-
I D' lil3l;:3."';tlli":"::*ti:":'."ffi"i.';.1:";;'"ns as
Electrl.cal Contractor.
I!
EIID OF SECTIOII
I
I
I VAIL MAIIfTEf,Af,CE BARI| PEASE II REtfOVAlIOlf 16100 - 11
I 'FOR PRrCrf,C Of,Lr" DECEMBER, l99s
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
SECrIO}I I64OO..SERVICE AilD DISTRIBUTIOI
PART 1.OO--OET{ERAL
1.OT ELECTRICAI, SERVICE CNARACTERISTICS
A. The electrical servlce for thLs proJect shall be as
sbow! on drawtngs. fbe Contractor ls responslble for
all coordtnatton wLtb the utlllty coaPany for tbl's
proJect to eDsure tbe tnstallatlon of electrLcal serv-
tcei sball be conpatlble wlth the entlre proJect.
PARI 2.OO--PROpUCIS
2.01 EI.ECIRICAI. SERVICE EXTRANCE EQUIPMEXT
A. Electrlcal servLce entrance equlpnent sball be U'L'
Itsted for service entrance and shall have a s€rles
Lnterruptlng ratlng of clrcult breaker unLte equal to
or grealer fhan tautt currents whtcb ntght be Lnposed
on tben. It sball further llnLt the avallable fault
current to branch clrcult panels to 1O'OOO anPerea or
lese.
2.O2 Cr CAIS
A. Ct cans shall be code Eauge ata€l' Prlned and palnted,
sLze as requlred by uttltty. Enclosure to sult
Lnstallatl,oa. AE nanufactured by Queea' Eoffnan' or
approved equlvalent.
2.03 TRAXSFOnUERS
t. Dry type transforiners ehall be 8O"c rl'se wlth 22O"c
lnsulatlon. llount on rubber-Ln-shear lsolators.
Manufacturers shall be Sorgel (Square D).
PAR! 3.O0--EXECUTTOf,
3.Ol tlonrrllfc
A. Install dLetrLbutlon equlpnent Ln accordance wlth
nanufacturer's recomendatlon, aad as sbown on tbe
drawlngs. Install wall-nounted equipnent 5' O" c€Dt€r-
line above flnl-sbed floor unless otberrlse I'ndlcated.
3.02 COI{PAIIBILITT
A. the Contractor Ls responalble for all coordinatlon
wLth the utlllty conPany for thl's proJect, to Lneure
tbe Installatton of electrlcal services shall be com-
VAIL MAITfTEIfATTCE BAR|T PNASE II RErfOVAIIOTf 16400 . 1
'roR PRrcrtfc olflY" DECEMBER, 1995
patlble wlth the entlre proJcct' and to lnsure tbatelectrical servlce Ls tnetalled at a tine as to provlde
neceesarlr electrlcal power as requlred to the conplctcd
proJect. Slngle phaee cguL;nent on a three phase
distrlbutlon systen sball be connected to insure ae
near a balanced systcn load as possLble.
3.03 UTTDERCROUTD ELECARICBL SERVICE
fhe Contractor shall lngtall a coplete systen of
condults, conductorS, Dgtcr canEr ct cangr etc. r3-
quLred to provlds s€condary senrlce entrance.
Provlde all trench and backfLll required for lnstalla-
tLon of underground clcctrLcal servlce; see approprtate
sectLon, Dlvlsl,on 1, or f,ttLonal Elactrlc Code for
lnstallatlon of underground scrvlces.
3.O{ UETERIf,C
A. tl€ter can to bc provLdcd by servlng uttllty and Ln-
stalled by thls Contractor. l{etsrs to be lnetallcd by
senrlnE utlltty.
3.05 SERVICE GROUIIDIXC
rake necsssary pracautLo!3 to Lnsura penanent and
effectlve groundlng of thc aanrlcc ncutral ald to
:Lnsure contlnulty to Eround tbrough tbe condult eystcn
to all rac€waya, panele, palclboards, ll.ghttng fir-tures, swltchqs, notors and othsr clectrlcal enclo-
sures, by tba uec of ap;rrovcd nstbods ae defLncd ln thc
lfatLonal Electrlc Code. llakc all grouad connectlons
solderless. Securely bond tbe entlre groundlng aystcnto cold water nal.ae uslng rlgld clanp Jaw typefittlngs. If ground conncctlon ls nade to cold watcr
ptpe ltne oa bulldlng sldc of water neter, lnstall
Junpers by-passlng n€tcr.
ttbere non-lstalllc ptplng Ls used for butldLng scnrl,ce,tle referencc ground only to nctalltc ptptng lnaldc of
butldlng and provl,de a properly slzed ground rod systen
for tbe prlnary ground systcn. Ile reference grounds
for netalllc ptplng to the prlnary ground syst€n.
ETD OF SECIIOf,
VAII, MAIT{TEf,AICE BARN PEASE II REIfOVAIIOIf
'FOR PRTCTI|C Of,Lr" DECEMBER, 1995
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
B.
A.
B.
16400 - 2
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
sECrrOf, 16500--LIeBtilrG
PIRT 1.OO-.OETERAL
1.01 PROVTSTOf,S
A. ProvLde and lnstall all lnterl-or and exterior lighttngflxtures as sboern on tbe plans and hereinafter speci-fted. All Ltens shall be provided to make a complete
and operable llghting system, !-ncludlng lampsr bal-
Iaete, poles, hangers, paLntJ.ngr plaster franesr etc.
B. FLxtures sbatl be as shown ln the fLxture scbedule.
Catalog nunbers ehown are the latest avaLlable at the
tlne of dcsign. If, dLscrepancles occur between de-
, acrlptton and catalog nunber, descrlptlon wlll take
precedence.
C. Verify trln, fLnish and general descrLptt'on of all
Itgbttng fLxtures throuEh shop drawLng approval prlor
to placlng order for flxtures. Modlfy catalog numbers
accordLngly.
D. If tt Ls necassary for the Archltect/Englneer to
ros€ltct ttght flxtures whtch are stLll aval'lable fron
the nanufacturer (1.e. not "dLscontLnued') but cannot
be obtained tn tLne for Lnstallation as the result of
tb€ contractors faLlure to pronptly order suchfixtures, thc contractor shall be back charged at the
rate of $50 per hour for the Architects/Engl.neers
servlces.
Alternately, the Contractor nay be requlrad to pay to
alr frelght flxturcs to the constructlon slte at no
addltLonal charge to tbc oltner if thts wlll reeult ln
the specLfted fLrtures being available for I'nstallationin tlne to neet the proJect schedule.
PART 2.OO--PRODUCTS
2.01 ITfCAIfDESCEIfI FIXTURES
A. Incandescent flxtures to be conplete wlth lanps' andall necessary acc€ssor:les to provLde for theLr lnstal-
IatLon. Provlde necessary blocklng or other protectlon
to naLntain separatLon of receesed ft.xtures fron con-
bustlble naterial and buLldLng !.nsulatlon systen. All
recesscd flxtures to bave thernal protectLon devlce.
VAIL MAIIITEIIAIICE BARIT PBASE II REIfOVATIOII
"FOR PRrCrf,g Ol|t,I" DECEMBER, 1995
16500 - 1
2.02 FLUORESCEIIT FIXTURES
A. Fluorescent fl*tures to be conplete wlth lanps, andall neccsaary acc€ssorleg to provlda for thel.r conplatelnstallatlon. Ballasts to be electronlc EFp, CBl.t/ElL,
and U.L. ll,gted, claeg P. Surface fluorceccnt flxturcsto bg nounted on los dcnaity conbustlblo cel,llngs to
have a U.L. lLstlng for sucb nountlng. All lenses tobe acrllLc prlsnatic plastic types or aB shorrn Ln thcschedulc.
2.O3 EIGE TXTEf,6III DISCEANOE FTIIURES
A. ELgh lntensLty dlecharge firtures to ba couplete wLthlanps and all nscsssary acccssorles to provlde fortheLr coplete Lastallation. Ballasts to be constantwattaga auto-transfora!€r typ€s, €rccpt rbere aoted.All hld ballasts sball be nanufacturad to NfSI stand-ards and go labeled.
2.O4 El,lERGEtrCf OR f,IOlf LIGf,IIXO
A. Flrturcg lndlcated ae bcLng on €BsrgoDcy, or ntghtllgbt clrcultg sball bc provldod wlth gglf-contaLned
battarl' porered lnvsrtcr unlt for dl,rcct nountLng Lnfl:ture. Provlde unlt wltb fully autoatlc trc ratecbargcr, al,ckel cadnLun battcrl, AC 'on', pllot llght,
aad test gwLtcb. Deelgn and wlre unlt to autonatlcallytranefer to batter.y' rupply on loss of nomal AC power
aad to opcrate F4O fluorcccent lanp wtth nlnl,nun outputof 6OO lunqng for nlnLnun L-Llz boure.
2.O5 LAf.lPS
A. Lanpa sball bc as ebora ln tbc fLrturc scbsdule as
nanufacturcd by Osrar-Sylvania, G.8., Phllllps, or
approved cquLvalent.
PART 3.OO.-EIECUTIOX
3.01 INSIAIJ,AIIOf,
A. Install l!,gbtlag flnturcs stralght and true wlth refer-
ence to adJacent walls, and securely fastan to andsupport by structural ugnbcrs of thc buildlng. Referto archltectural or lntcrl.or reflectcd celllng plans
and elevatlons for eract locatlon of fl,xtures.
B. ProvLde photocontrols, tLne clocks, contactors, relays,etc. to control tnterLor and exterlor flxtures. AllLtens for ltgbtLng control that are to be nounted
VAIL I,TAII|TET|AITCE BTru PEASE II REI|OVAIIOII 16500 - 2
"FOR PRTCIf,G Of,Ly" DECEUBER, 1995
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
c.
D.
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
outdoors or Ln wet locatlons shall be lnstalled I'n
weatberproof housings.
Recessed llght fLxtures lnstalled ln gyP. board or
plaat€r cellLngs sball have plaster franes lnstalled
prLor to celllng naterl,al .
Flxtures recessed ln "t-bar" ceillng shall be supported
lndependently of celtlng syaten' wLth four #12 banger
wlres up to structure. Secure hanger wLrsg to cornera
of flrture. Cltp ft*ture to grid on two sldes wlth
factory-furatshed cll,ps. Flnal connectlon to f,Lxture
shalt Le nade wLth a lloxible U.L. apProved assenbly.
ETfD OF SECTIOIf
VAIIJ MAIIITEI|IITCE BAruI PNASE II REtrOVATIOII
"FOR PRTCTXG Otfly' DECEMBER, 1995
16500 - 3
I
' sEcarox l5zo0--coMl.tuxrcAtrof, svsrEus
I PART r.oo--cEf,ERArI
1.01 IELEPIOXE SlSIEl.l
I A' :ffi':ll":"*3f:: il"ii!*":::*liiiluii"*l*lLillt3'"of the tclepbone conPany.
t a. Provldc and install Levtton *43o4o lur cable to all
outlets. Each outlet to be a single run- Provlde
nodular devlce at each outlet.I c. Contractor to connect brancb cable to devlce.
I D' s:::il":::::"*ili":"ff'::i:;,:::':;;":;:'""
END OF SECTIOIII
ETID OF DIVISIOIf
I VArL MArlflEtfAfcE Bnnlf PEASE rr REtfovAlrof, 157OO - 1
I "FoR pRrcrtfc otflr" DECEMBER, 1995
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
t